The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutAPA3555Subtask 7.10 AQUAT I C STUD I ES PROCEDURES to'lANUAL PHASE I -Final Draft Appendi~es i-VIII ALASKA POWER AUTHORITY 7l~ \4~5 ~''!\ ",6~ SUSITNA HYRDROELECTRIC PROJECT YJ~i 55'£; .- - Subtask 7.10 AQUATIC STUDIES PROCEDURES MANUAL PHASE I -Final Draft,- -Appendices I -VIII ARLIS Alaska Resources -for,..Library &Information 5erVtces Acres Ameri can Incorporated Anchorage,Alaska liberty Bank Building,Main at Court Buffalo,New York 14202, ~, \ \ -by- Alaska Department of Fish and Game Susitna Hydro Aquatic Studies 2207 Spenard'Road Anchorage,Alaska 99503". C":l ~...... LO C"':l oc>o I.!') It) 1""'-C") d'~'~:'M -. TABLE OF CONTENTS DIGITAL 4041 USER'S GUIDE (Conductivity,pH,D.O.,and Temperature.............................................000 01 CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE OF VERTICAL-AXIS TYPE CURRENT METERS (U.S.Department of Interior publication extract)......000 28 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR MODEL "J"THERMOGRAPH...................000 45 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR MARSH-MCBIRNEY MODEL 201 PORTABLE WATER CURRENT METER...........................................000 58 INSTRUCTION MANUAL -YSI MODEL 57 DISSOLVED OXYGEN METER AND ACCESSORI ES.... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. ............ .. ....000 63 INSTRUCTIONS FOR YSI MODEL 33 S-C-T METER..........................000 80 INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIGI-SENSE pH METER...............................000 91 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL -DE-719B FATHOMETER...........................000 95 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS -RANGING 600,610,AND 620.................000 137B HP-32E ADVANCED SCIENTIFIC CALCULATOR..............................000 139 MINOLTA WEATHERMATIC -AN OWNER'S MANUAL ~000 149 TOSHIBA T1Vl II -UI~DER WATER ELECTRONIC FLASH UNIT..................000 159 OLYMPUS XAZ INSTRUCTIONS...........................................000 166 IHKON NIKONOS IV-A INSTRUCTION MANUAL..............................000 178 REMINGTON MODEL 870 PUMP ACTION SHOTGUN OWNER'S MANUAL.............000 196 OL YIVlPUS STEREO MICROSCOPES INSTRUCTION MANUAL......................000 204 HACH LABORATORY TURBIDU1ETER MODEL 2100A...........................000 214 FACTS AND SAFETY TIPS ON ELECTROFISHING............................000 237 MIDLAND 5-WATT 3-CHANNEL TRANSCEIVER,MODEL 75-764B OWNERS MANUAL........ .. ...... .. .. ...... .. .. .. ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .... .... .. ..000 244 DIGITAL THERMISTOR THERMOMETER,MODELS 8522-10 AND 8522-20.........000 252 PENTAX DIAL DATA ME/MX CAMERA AND LENSE INSTRUCTIOI~S MANUAL........000 262 1981 POLARIS GEMINI SNOWMACHINE OWNER'S MANUAL ....~................000 276 ARLIS Alaska Resources Library &Information Services Anchorage,Alaska Appendix I II III IV V VI ~ VII VIII ..... -- APPENDIX TABLE OF CONTENTS Title Total Pages Sonar Installation and Operation Manual......33pp Oscilloscope Operation.......................22pp Fishwheel Operation..........................5pp Fish Tagging.............8pp Electroshocking Instructions.................5pp Habitat Site Locations.......................l8pp RJ Sampling Techniques.......................20pp AH Instruction Manuals.......................316pp -- APPENDIX I A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Sonar Installation and Operation Manual ..- .... .,.~ ~~,,_._.. .- THE BENDIX CORPORATION Electrodynamics Division North Hollywood Ca 1i fornia . 1 O~ -_.=-.;.-.------ ,. ~ - -Section I Section II TABLE OF CONTENTS Function of Front Panel Controls Initial Setup and System Test ..' i - - - ." Section III Troubleshooting Section IV .Side Scan Artificial Substrate -- ;1 03" Appendix Figure lA 18 2 3 _(4) LIST OF APPENDIX FIGURES Title Page Off shore camp deta i 1.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 30 On sh0 re ca p.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 31 Array installed in river..........................1 32 Array disassembly.................................1 33 None (Content -Vertical and horizontal adjustment of the sonar beam).....................1 34 ~-" \ TEST PUSHBUTTON &DATA SWITCH FISH &SECTOR LIGHTS 6 6 - - .r--- (..- '---' AUTOw\TIC TEST 6J "TEST POINTS ON·PANEL 7,8 BEAMWIDTH SWITCH 8 OEBRfs ALERTING 9 TAPE RECORDER OPERATION 9 ,10 INITIAL SETUP &SYSTEM TEST 10,11 SOLAR PANEL 1.1 TROUBLE SHOOTING 11-14 - SIDE SCAN ARTIFICIAL SUBSTRATE 1~15 ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE FOR 60 FT.ARRAY 15,16 ARRAY INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 16,17 ARRAY REMOVAL PROCEDURE 18 - \' '..... - ARRAY DISASSEMBLY GENERAL CAUTION NOTES iii ~n ~:~:..'\..Iv --_..._-~---- 18 18.19 .; - r' i~--' \, ,-_. ---_._._--_. INTRODUCTION Before attempting to operate or install the Side Scanner,thoroughly-- read this·manual to become familiar with the system ooeration. Section I will familiarize you with all the controls and their purpose . .It is probably.the most important section of this manual. Section II will show you qow to initially set up the unit and test it to determine that it is operating properly.Read this section before applying BOwer to the unit. Section III will "aid you in p1tlpointing any source of problems and in making any necessary field repairs by replacing printed circuit cards. Section IV will show you how to install the artificial substrate in the river • ... 1 t\0·-'.Lv iv 111 -=-""""'--. (.""'..,....• .:'- '.- .-.." A.PRINTER The pt.U:'IX)se of this pushbutton is to initially set tre printout tim=an:1 auto test time at any p:lint.'!be "SAFEI'Y SW'"I'ICH"must be "QFFft to do this.3/ 3•Print 0:::xmaIxi -_..----~-_._---_.._-._----~--'- '!he printer may be o:m:rende:i to print its contents at any tiIre without affee-J.ng the timing.'n"e letter "C"is printed ¥fuen this pushbutton is depressed to pennit you to know that this is a c::r.trand ·print and not in the no:cma1., tine seguence."JIbe printout timing is not affected but· the counts are erased after printout.4/-'-. 4.Printer On-off Switch . B. 'lhis switch does not a£fect the timing or data .in any way ani is nerely used to shut off the printer.'!De .sounder will sound -to alert you·to put.the printer·CN-OFF switch back "on.It n::n:mally takes only a minute to c'himr papar so t:r:y to plan your pacer chanqeba~...n 'Orints.5 .-..... Il'Cdels using the tt~"printer,be sure to shut off ."printer switch ¥.'hen changing priri.ter pap::. .·5;Replaci n9 Printer Paper -See next page. Data Clear Tim: r:""\;,- ..... Data is cleared (erased frc:rn ne:~or:y)after each print out.Set for AT Print position on 1978 and 1979 models. c.Clear Pu.shb.Jtl-..cn , .'nJe red ~pushbutton lo:::ated on the left side of the panel will clear the data·in the nerories controllinq·the printer and -4 digi1 -1- ~. - .".,... ~.,~;'--. '~,' ,-. '. ,~i 5.-Reolacing Printer Pacer A blue line on the oaDer aierts you about 1 day in advance of daD'eti on.To c,hange paper,shut off the pri n'ter swi tcn ana Ul screw the 2 s~~11 silver knurled screws on the printer face.1 a new pad of paper in the rear tray with the blue lines toward tray bottom.Feed the paper over the silver roller in front az between the plasdc face and rubber ro11er.Start the paper b.,) revolving the rubber roller with your finger.When replacing 1 printer,push it in while making sure the paper is not pinched tween the printer and panel by manually pulling some paper out the slot.Make sure the printer seats completel~flush with tr. panel since an electrical connector must make contact.Retight the two knurled screws as tightly as possible with your fins~rs If the ink becomes dim after 2 to 4 years operation,loosen ~h2 two black screws on the printer face and pullout the ink pad. new pad may .then be screwed in.Spare pads have been suppl.ied Alaska and spare printers have been included.Any printers may interchanged between systems.,as they are identical. -1I Set to print out on the hour.During operation place a binder'I on the ena of the tape as'it comes out of the counter.Hanging clip over the edge of the counter stand will allow tape to move smoothly out of the counter.eliminating printer malfunction., 2/1978 model this may appear as a dot. 3/On the hour...- -4/Erasure of data'on 178 and 179 models can be avoided by setting DATA CLEAR TIME switch in NEVER position until printout is over 5/Or a complete printout could be missed without your knowledge. 6/Screws on printer.s must be tightened daily as vibrations can .cause them to loosen. ~.. ',-.-~.. /i .' ,-:'- \. D. E. F. Clear Pushbutton Contd. liquid crystal display.It does not affect the cumulative counter at right.To clear tile data~the "SAFETY"switch must be "OFF". The ,sounder alerts you when this switch is left off. 4-Digit Display and Manual Sector Selector The liquid crystal display shows you the number of counts accumu- lated in any of the 12 sectors that is selected by the black thumbwheel switch above it.It is always on since it uses only ,1 microarnp of current.Being liquid crystal.it is a reflective display and requires some ambient light to be seen.At night a flashlight or match may be necessary to see it. Meter t Meter Switch and Battery When in the "BATT"position t the meter reads the condition of the GEL-CELL battery.When in the "?OLAR CHARGE·'posi ti on.the meter reads the output of the solar panel.In full,unobscured sunlight the meter will read at the extreme right indicating the solar panel is'supplying lZ times the current that the Side Scanner is using with the excess going to charge the supplied GEL-CELL battery. When the meter is at the point where the red and green meet (such- as cloudy weather)the solar panel is supplying twice as much current as the Side Scanner is consuming with the excess going to charge the GEL-CELL battery.This would be enough to indefinitely carry it through the night hours.Although a 12V.16 arno hour rechargeable GEL-CELL battery is supplied with each system,any l2V battery of equal or oreater capacity may be used.The supplied battery,when fully charged,will operate the Side Scanner for apprOXimately 300 hours.or about Z weeks,day and night,with no solar charging.Internal protection is provided against battery overcharging in the event of constant full sun. Fish Velocity Control This'thumbwheel'switch controls the-transmit repetition rate of the system.It has been observed that salmon migrate upstream at about 1.75 feet per second (ground speed).Since the switch is labeJed in seconds per foot,the reciprocal of 1.75 feet per second is 0.571· seconds per foot so until new fish speed information is obtained, set the control to 0.571.(33t on Susitna west bank). /~ \,..._,,- -2- .~{';::j. V V -o ,f ,I'l.-~---....-.G. .. Sensitivity Control This controls the amount of power transmitted to the transducer and is essentially a system sensitivity control. To adjust it initially requires a fine bladed screwdriver or knife blade and an oscilloscope.It is adjusted as follows:- L·-.."A--''.--~I -..... I'I . I """oY . i I-'y (1) (2) Connect the oscilloscope input to the red test point on the panel marked XM2o:Set the ,vertical sensitivity of the scope to SV per division and the scope trigger to internal.Set the horizontal scope sweep speed to 50 ~sec per division. Make sure.the transducer is properly connected and in the water. Set the beamwidth switch to 20.Adjust the front panel sensitivity'control for an average peak to peak (top ·to bottom) si~nal of 30V.It will look something like the Waveform at left so adj.u·stfor an average .as shown • J .. - - .r. OL In:voe.-7 ~;z:ivers such.~the SUSi:tna 1 set torus level to 35V. H.Dead Range Control This controls the distance from the face of the transducer that the system is "blanked out."That iS I any echos received within this preset range will not be accepted for processing.The con- trol may be set from 0 to 10 feet.Tois control is necessary to bl ank out transducer fir;nging"whi ch Occurs for about 2~feat and would result in false counts.Sometimes a source of air bubbles -near shore exists which could cause false counts.'In this case •. increaSE!the DEAD RANGE control until the count stops in sector 1 (as 'evidenced by the #1 fish light blinking).The fish would then have to be weired out to beyond the dead range.See "we irs Jl unGer Misc. I.Counting Range Control This controls the total perpendicular distance to which fish counts will be accepted.This preset distance starts immediately after the DEAD RANGE ceases,thus the total range from the face of the transducer is the total of both the IlDEAD RANGE u and IICOUNTING RANGE"setti ng$..- Transducer Aiming The end of the artificial substrate contains a target,approximately 50 feet from the transducer face.This is necessary for proper -3-.. 1 iO • - -- ~--.. .-.- 0-,-- J. -,".! Transducer Aiming (Contd.) i~itial aiming of the transducer beam.l/Todo so.merely set the range controls for a total somewhat over 60 feet and manipulate the transducer until the sector 112 fish light consistently blinks. The 2°geam should be used for this although the 40 beam may be - used to initiaily locate the beam.When in position.tighten the transducer mounting knurled handles..- The beam should be as low as possible without actually reflecting back from irregularities on the pipe so the best way to set,the beam is to start high and lower the beam until it hits the target, then lower it further until echos begin returning from some point before the target,then raise it just enough to miss the early target. To faci 1i ta te transducer a imi ng,the knurl ed handl es shaul d be partially tightened and the 3 foot rod supplied with the system alternately'inserted in the vertical and horizontal holes in the transducer plate to move the transducer.Make sure that the final tightening does not upset the aiming. An oscilloscope should be used in lieu of the 112 FISH LIGHT for more precise ~im;ng.To do so,trigger the oscilloscope from the XM 20 panel test point,connect the SCODe Qround to the GND,test PQint and the scooe input to the RCVR test point.Set the scope vertical control to 1 V/CM and the horizontal control to 5 milli- seconds per CM.11The target will be observed on.the scope 24 milli- seconds from the start of the trace and the transducer may be mani- pulated for a maximum "spike"at that point.If the transducer is aimed too low,early echos coming from rough surfaces on the pipe will be seen.before 24 msec.lI '. --The new (1978)artificial substrates have an improved method of transducer adjustment and have transducers modified for the new substrates.(See Figure ~on the last sheet.)The transducer plate should be installed in the shroud on the shore end member. The 3 studs attached to the plate will be secured to the plate with· the 3/8-16 10cknuts.4/About l~inch away there will be a 1/2-20 nut followed by a flat washer.a spring and flat washer in that order•.The three studs should be pushed through the three cor~es· ponding holes in the shroud .with the last fiat washer against the inside of the shroud.A hand wheel should then be screwed onto the outside of the 'shroud on each of the protruding studs.5/The transducer cables should be fed over the top of the transducer and back to shore,securing them with tape to prevent chafing and to 11 Prior to submersion,transducer plate should be flushed on all sides with transducer housing.This can be accomplished by. "feel"or using a straight .edge. 2/See section.titled Oscilloscope Operation for-the Side Scanner.· -4- 3/See section titled Typical Side Scanner Osci110scope Waveforms· for various transducer aiming conditions.M ~~ir~i~~~ge~~o~~~5~g£~£~nw~fignc~~2¥~il~g;k~e1!;!~:.;--~-e <!,./ \. '- - I _ J. K. L. M. T~ansducer Aiming (Contd.) provide a little service loop to prevent their being torn off the- transducer.The three hand wheels should be tightened with an equal amount of stud protruding through the wheel.The transducer will now be approximately aimed at the target end 60 feet away. (The remaining three hand wheels should be used after final trans- ducer adjustment by running them up the stud and tightening them against the first wheel to loc~them in place.) The transducer should be accurately aimed at the target by the oscilloscope method discussed in the previous section with the following new exception.To raise the beam.screw the upper wheel clockwise (to the right)one turn for each 3/4 foot beam movement 60 feet away (or counterclockwise to lower it).To move the beam to the right.turn the lower right wheel clo.ckwise and the lower left wheel the same amount counterclockwise at the same time.To move the beam to the left,reverse the procedure.l/Each full turn of both wheels together will move the beam horizontally 1-1/2.feet.By turning them together.the vertical aiming remains unchanged and the upper wheel does not affect horizontal beam movement.The 2°beam is 2 feet wide at 60 feet-away.see attached section OIl Transducer aiming. Cumulative Counter This counter maintains a running total of all counts.It is an -8-digi t counter and bei n9 of the L.E.D.type.consumes a fa;r amount of power when 1i t.For this reason a t'READ"pushbutton is provided below it to read the total when desired.-To clear the - cumulative counter.shut OFF the SAFETY switch and depress the "CLEAR"-pushbutton located below the counter.The alarm will alert you that the uSAFETyn switch is OFF. Safety Switch- This switch is an interlock provided to prevent accidental clearing of the data or accidental resetting of PRINTER time or AUTOMATIC TEST time.Whenever it is left in the "OFF"position the_sounder will sound.alerting you of this fact. Sounder The sounder will alert you whenever any of the following three switches are left in the t1wrong'l position to prevent walking away from the un;t -in that cond;tion:(The sounder wi 11 "cli ck l'when- ever fi sn is counted."gf .- 1/Horizontal movements should inVOlve exactly the same amount of turning on each wheel to av~id "skewing"the beam out and up or down._ 2/Speaker may be covered when working to lessen obnoxious noise.- However,the speaker is not a gum repository •..~-. 12 .........--...M.Sounder (continued) a.Sounds when "DATA"switch is left "OFF". b.Sounds when IIPRINTER II switch is left nOFF". c.Sounds when "SAFETY"switch is left "OFF". N.Test Pushbutton and Data Switch -~ The purpose of this test is to verify proper functioning of almost the entire system (except the transmitter).This button,when depressed/electronically simulates fish in the first 11 sectors. When the system is operating properly,the first l'fish lights will blink,the sounder will sound,the cumulative counter and the 4-digit counter at left will record th~se counts.If only a oartial system test ;s desired,without interfering with data a1ready oresent in the memories or the cumulative counter,the IlDATA"switch should be left "OFF".This will prevent these "false counts"from bei ng recorded but wi 11 penni t the FISH 1i ghts to bl ;nk.When a full system test;s desired at the cost of los;09 the data already present,the "DATA"switch may be left "0N II • ......-;-......- _.........._..".-P.".."<a..<••.,........-Fish and Sector Lights P. o. --_._------The'two red SE:CTbR-t~'E:b-:'s'indica te-thaf ·-the .electron;cs log;c card ;s probably functioning properly.The sector 1ights must always blink.If·a light(s)does not blink,the cause may be merely a burned out light.This can be verified by dialing the large thumbwheel switch to the sector in question and simulating . fish by depressing the "TEST".pushbutton with the It DATA 11 switch- "ON II •If data is recorded in that sector,it merely means that either the light is bad or the L.E-D.card in the system is bad, whi ch wi 11 not affect proper operation. To check sector 12,merely increase the "RANGE"control setting a few feet to "count"the target at the end.of the substrate.The FISH lights will·blink whenever fish are detected in the correspond- ing sector and th~sounder will sound • Automatic Test ~(;",-. -\ C ..~ This feature permits automatic self testing of the entire system includinQ the transducer and its proper aiming.It function$ ~tically··each J:2 h:::lurs as follCMS: Note:1978 and 1979 models can be set at 6,.12,or 24 hours. Set at 24 hours. fi" I ~'-,~ .~-6- ,-....P.Aut.c:matic Test Cont'd. 'Ie start the 12 ro.Jr t:.imina seauence at any t::aint in tine, press the "SET TIMES"re::i Pushbutton.'!his "initiates l:::oth the printer and auto test tines.·Precisely 2 seo::>n::3.s a£te.,....the·- noz:mal printout 12 hours later,the system will go into an autaratic t-...st node.It will autanatica1ly elei::b:onically simulate b:t::r.;een 2 to 7 ·fish in each of the first II sec--...ors and it will autoItaHca11 y exten::i its range by 3 feet,thus counting ~artifica1 target 60 feet ~-ay and recording these counts in sector 12.It will then print out all these ccunts and the letter E in the second "column to indicate a self startJ/N:::me of these counts will enter the curnulative counter at right,and.will be erased right after the print. ." ~. ~-. - ~- Q.Test Points on Panel The test points have the following purposes: 1.~~.This test point is connected to the 40 section of the transducer which sho~s the transmitted voltage when the unit is transmitting at 4 • 2.The XM2 0 test point is directly connected to the transducer sector that is selected by the beamwidth switch and permits Oscilloscope reading of the transmitted voltage,thus check- ing the transmitter card in the system.The 40 transmit will always be considerably higher than the 2°transmitted voltage except when the beamwidth switch is set to 2°.When the ItBEAM WIDTH"switch is in the ItALr'position,the transmitted voltage can be seen to alternately go high and low as the 2° and 40 sectors are automatically selected • . 3.RCVR Test Point.This test point is the receiver output and gives a true "analog picture"on an oscilloscope of what"is happening in the water.Any echos received are amplified and presented at this test point.Any time the echo exceeds 3 volts at this point for the proper pre-programmed number of "hits"it will result in a count.To use this feature,the scope input is connected to the'ItRCVR"test point,the scope ground connected to the uGNO ti test point and the scooe may be 11 1978 and 1979 models will have letter I in the second column. -7- I ! -. Q. '.. ..;:~ -~---- Test Points on Panel eontd. .- - '. """',.- •J. ... triggered fromeitner the "XM"test point which permits observation of the entire 60 feet or from anyone of the "SCOPE -TRIG"test points which starts the scooe trace at the be inning of any of the 12 sector "listening times." The scope tr1gger must be se~~o -.y 01ng tn1s ana properly expanding the scope sweep speed,anyone or"more of the 12 sectors may be individually observed:-- R.Beamwidth Switch This switch electronically controls the transducer beamwidth by -connecting only the center section of the transducer far a 4 0 beamwidth or paralleling both the center and outer transducer sectjons for a 2°beamwidth.Any of the three modes may be selected,but for optimum coverage,the "ALT"oosition should be used since this tends to make the lateral coverage more uniform._ When in the "ALT"position,the system alternately transmits on~' the 20 sector then on the 40 sector and back to the 20 sector, etc.After transmitting on the 40 sector,only those echos re- ceived during the first half of the active range are accepted (sectors 1 thru 6).When transmitting on the 20 sector,only those-echos received during the la~t half of the-active rahge are accepted (sectors 7 thru 12).The system electronically gives more weight to sectors closer to the transducer face since the fish will be in the beam a shorter period of time because of the fact that the closer to the transducer,the narrower thebeamwidtl A number of samples of each fish are taken,permitting different" "aspects"of the fish to be sampled as it crosses the beam".A varying number of valid "hits"are required before the"system "decidesUthe target is a fish and enters it into permanent memor~ The number of valid hits required for detection is a function of which of the 12 sectors the fish was detected.For example t " although a fish travelling at 1.75 feet/sec is sampled 9 times,i' it is detected in sector 9 t only 5 valid "hits"are required to count,so if 5,6~7.Bor 9 hits are.made during the passage of the fish,only 1 count will result. This feature essentially eliminates downstream passing debris whi typically is travelling at the river velocity which is usually much faster than 1.75 ft/sec and which would not "be in the "beam u long enough to count.To prevent single debris counts occurring over a period of time from adding up to the number required for a valid fish count,the temporary fish decision memories are auto- matically cleared 4 transmissions after receipt of any single ech -.~-- 5.Deb ii sAl erti ng Any time 24 counts aie made in anyone of the 12 sectors in a 35 " second ~eriod (starting from the first count).the system assumes._ that thiS :a~n~t be fi~h and is probably a piece of debiis hung up on the art:f1clal subs~rate.When.the next printout Occurs,the corresponding sector column will contain the ~l ~+h in the 3rd co1umn next to the sector identification number1!After printout the debr!s ~etec~or is cleared and starts out IIfresh"again.1f t the debriS is still present,the system will acrain accept up to 24 counts in 35 seconds and indicate "+"again~if the debris has washed away.it will resume normal operation. NOTE:.S::i1e of the front panel switches are of the "PULL TO CHANGE" t~P7s.This is ~o prevent inadvertent changing of the switch po- sitions ..The sWitch handle must be pulled away from the panel and" then changed.Make sure that the switch is firmly seated in the desired position. T.Tape Recorder Operation ..:' b. ~. -. - .... -c.....· ---'- .. The salmon counter i.s designed with the prOVis,on to tape the fonowing two outputs on a JVC-1636 cassette stereo tape recorder: a..RECEIVER -This output .is,.the,raw but amplified echos re- cei ved by the transducer.... .--:-=:"~.-:------_.------.---------.-.--•..-~--;----_------_0 -..._ FISH -This output provides a 65 microsecond pulse every time the system deci des that theechos recei ved were that of a- fish and not passing debris {unless the debris becomes hung up on the pipe and counts continuously. c.TAPE PWR -This output provides a regulated 8.7 volts to power the tape recorder automatically for 3.5 minutes after each pri ntout • .The purpose of the tape feature is to permit calibration of the system,after the fact.at some later date.It has been found that visual oscilloscope observation of the receiver output is an excellent indicator of fish'passage,even-in glacially silty water • T7st conducted in Wood River have shown that,with a little practice. an oscilloscope observer can count the fish passage with a better than 95 percent correlation with an observer on the fish counting tower since passing debris echos are of a fleeting nature while fish 'can be seen entering and leaving the beam with a gradual build- up and decay of its echos • .Thus.by recording the receiver echos and the actual simultaneous fish counts that the salmon counter has electronica1'y decided upon.the two may be compared and system accuracy determined for any given site.The fish velocity control may then be changed to pern~nently calibrate system. ,."....., 1.10 -9- .- - ---": TT... To record,merely plug the de power cord of the tape recorder into the side scan TAPE PWR plug)plug the RECEIVER output into the right channel line input of the tape recorder.Plug the FISH out- put into the left channel line in of the tape recorderll Set the tape recorder controls as follows:SUPER ANRS)CR02-,-1 ine)(use- only TDK SA-C90tape).f/Set the recorder level controls to maximum, press the RECORD and PLAY buttons.Be sure the tape is inserted and at its beginning.When the TAPE PWR switch is"in the AUTO position,the tape recorder will automatically come on for 3.6 minutes after each print,thus recording a 3.6 .minute sample of -- the echos and counts each hour at the usual printout setting of 1 hour."Since each'side of the cassette has 45 minutes recording time and there are twelve 3.6 minute periods in 45 minutes this means that the recorder can operate unattended for a 12 hour period before turning over the tape. NOTE:Never leave the TAPE PWR switch in the nON"position)since this position is only used to set up the tape recorder or to record for greater time periods.Even if no tape recorder is plugged into the side s·canner)this would cause the sys- tem to consume 20 percent more power needlessly. INITIAL SET UP AND SYST81 TEST To verify proper system operation when first turned on or anytime desired, .do -the foJl owi n9: Before the battery is plugged in,which turns on the system,place the following switches in the noted positions: (1)PRINTER OFF. (2)TRANSDUCER NOT PLUGGED IN. (3)SAFETY SWITCH OFF.-- (4)METER SWITCH in BATT position. {5}FISH VELOC to ~.571. (6)DATA ON. (7)ACTIVE RANGE to about 50 feet. The remainder of the contro1s may be left in any position. Next,plug in the battery and then press the SET ~pu~ button.(This synchronizes the system.)Some of the FISH lights may remain on.To clear the system,press and hold the red TEST pushbutton .noting that each of the FISH lights blink in sectors 1 thru 11.The system is now cleared and ready for operation.At this·time,the SECTOR lights should be blinking and the BATTERY CO~DITION METER should be in the green. 1/FISH output is left or white cord. 2/Tapes should be run through fast forward and reverse once to lessen ~.17 -10-wow and fl utter effects. - - --. Press the two red CLEAR pushbuttons to erase any counts from the memories Press and hOld the red TEST pushbutton.This will simulate counts on ----- sectors 1 thru 11.Hold it in until a few hundred counts appear on th~ CUMUL counter.(You have to press the black READ pushbutton to see th1S. The next step will be to verify that counts have~been registered on each section of the 4-digit liquid crystal display"and-that-the printer is functiooing,and that all counts agree.To do this,turn on the PRINTER switch and momentarily press the black PRINT COMM pushbutton. The printer should now print out 12 lines of data.The left will be the sector identification number and should sequentially read 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0,1,2.The next column should - have printed the letter "C"Dial the large black thumbwheel switch through its 12 positions and compare the numbers in the 4-digit numeri- cal display with .the corresponding blue printed columns.They should agree. Next,add up the column of figures.The total should agree with the total CUMUL count within one or·two digits. Solar Panel· ,-The purpose of the solar panel is to charge the l6AH GEL-CELL battery supplied with the system._ Mount the solar panel such that it will receive a maximum average amount of light throughout the day.Pl ug it;nto the si de connector marked '.. SOLAR PANEL (observino oolarity).l!Put the METER switch in the SOLAR CHARGE position.If fu11 sunlight is falling directly on the solar panel, the meter will be at the.extreme right.In very c10udy weather the meter.wi 11 -·probably be in the red •.When ; t ;s at the red/green cross-. over point,the solar panel is supplying'twice as much current as the system is consuming,with the excess going to the battery.This con- dition will be adequate to indefinitely carry the system through the night hours •.Make sure no Dart of the solar panel is shaded because shadinQ one cell is the same as shading the entire panel. If the scilar panel is ~rinected :teclcwa;rd~.no ~ge wiil result,but '. .....the meter will read DO solar charge When e:o:posed -to light. III.TROUBLESHOOTING i..,.....- Har1'.zcomplete sets of printed ,circuit card spar~s have been supplied to Alaska Department of Fish and Game.They conta1~pre-tested cards of eve~ type used in the Side Scanner System. They ar"identified by a function name etched on the component side of the cards at the upper left corner of the ca~d_.The following.table lists the P.C.card names and their functions to a,d 1n troubleshootlng. tl!This means red to red and b1ack to black. -ll-.... -Printed Circuit Card Name ~ Location in P.C. Card File Card Functi on .... MEMORIES The memory cards store valid fi sh counts after the e1ectronic decision has been made if debris or fish •. (Slot 1 &Slot 2)They drive the 4 digit liquid crystal display and the (These 2 cards are printer.They have nothinq to do with the cumulative _ identical)-counter display.-c-The 2 cards"areidentica1 and inter':'-"-~_o"~ changeab 1e.The memory 'cara;n 's1ot 1 control s'-the .two'---:- most significant digits of the display and pril1ter fish counts,i.e.,the two digits on the left.The memory card in slot 3 controls the 2 least significant digits of the display and printer fish counts,i.e.,the two digits on the right • .(r-.... LOGIC (Slot 5) PRINTER (Slot 7) The logic card controls the system repetition rate (or "ping ll rate).It controls the duration of the transmit signal,the-11 simulated fish counts for test,the automati c range extens'i on duri ng auto test,the count- ing range,the dead range,the smolt YS.fish function 3 the power to the receiver,all the L.E.D.functions, the 12 sector scan,the cumulative counter,the sounder duration when fish are'detectecL~d the temporary memories whi ch deci de whether the echo detected.i s ...fi sh or debris.If debris,it-"fs'erased;if fish,it-iS--' routed to the previously mentioned permanent memories cards for storage and th~n'e5ased from this card.This card also controls the 2 •4 and ALT beam routing in conjunction with the bearnwidth switch. The printer card controls the printer time clock 3 the printer command,the 12 print sequencing,the printer sector 1.0.number printed on the left of the printed paper,the letters printed next to the left on the printed paper,the automatic self test timing,the erasure or automatic clearing of the data after print, the tape recorqer automatic power turn-on for 3.6 minutes after each print,and makes the decision whether a very 'high r.ate of counts is fish or debris and if debris it tells the printer to print the syrob:ll ~+D. -12- ~: ~:........... .: Printed Circuit Card Name & Location in P.C. Card Fi1e RECEIVER (Slot 11) CAUTION: If this card is changed,it w.i 11 be necessary to readjust the sensitivity screwdriver con- trol on the front panel as discussed earl i er in this manual. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY CARD. Located on front.- panel. Can:!Functi on The receiver card contains the receiver which takes the- minute fish echos,amplifies them 23,000 times and if the echo exceeds a predetermined threshold it triggers a device which sends a signal to the temporary memory card for subsequent "decision "as to 'whether it was fish-- or debris.This card also-contains a-gV regulator·to~'= power the entire system.It also controls the battery and solar charge meter and provides T.V.G.which means time variable gain which causes fish echos detected far away to be amplified at a greater factor than fish close by since the echo decreases with distance in a log manner.This card also contains the transmitter which transmits a 515 kHz signal to the transducer.The card also contains part of the circuitry to electronically simulate fish in the first 11 sectors for automatic ,and manual test.The tape recorder power regulator is located on this card also. This card contains a 4-digit liquid crystal display on the front panel.lfit becomes defective it may be removed from the inside by removing the two retain.ing -:"-.' 5-32 nuts'and replacing it with a spare display card. If this done,be sure the two flat plugs that are in- serted in its connector are firmly inserted in the new card i~identical orientation.The display has an .average life of about 7 years.It will be noticed that in cold weather the display takes longer to change its numbers.This;s a normal characteristic of liquid crysta1 di sp 1ays..... circutt card,disconnect the battery and solar panel. holding the front panel and carefully lift the front It may then be turned and laid down next to the i' - - Most of the card functions are self-explanatory so that in the event of trouble,a card may be replaced.Since many of the card functions are inter-related,a problem may sometimes not be definitely localized to a specific card and more than one card may have to be interchanged to cure the problem (one at a time). To change a printed Remove the 6 screws panel straight up. e1ectro.ni cs • CAI:1I'ICN:'!he else LJ:onic o::rq::or.e.."'1tS·on the c.ards 'are suceptible to i.mrediab: des"'-l.IUct.ico by static elect..-icity •'l11ey Sh:l\lld never :Ee h.and.le:i i.."'1 an offie where carpets generate static electricity. -13- - -..--: Replace the suspect card with a new one and retest.The system can be operated in the open position so it will not be necessary to close the system to test it~but be very careful not to short anything. To remove a card.'pull "up On 'the two card-ejectors.--To replace~'a card~><"~~'-O-~ press the card firmly"down-and hook the combination blacK card ejector/ inserter under the ridge of the card file and push the two black interters down.These will force the card into its sockets and may have to.alter-.._,~=: nately be"rocked"until the cardisfirmly'~seated ;n'-its'socket..''''.C.·_A-'-::~. CAUTION:NEVERrremOv'e o':::-replace -a card wi th power from'the battery or solar panel connected. To replace the panel,reverse the removal procedure being careful not to pinch any cables between the panel and the case.The 6 nuts are on sliding plates and may have to be repositioned with a knife blade if they were moved. IV.SIDE SCAN ARTIFICAL SUBSTRATE ~~.,. ---.- \.... - - ..- General Description- The array (Figure 1,2 and 3)is made up of three 18~foot long sections of tubes that plug together with an 18 inch overlap forming a single tube • .Off shore and on shore sections terminate the assembly ends.A 1/4 inch diameter wire rope runs through the assembly and is pinned to the off shore cap.The on shore cap has a threaded shaft and handwheel which is used to orovide tension holding the array s~ctions together by tensioning the cable.lI Aligmrent of the vortex shedding fins on ea.ch,section i.5.reguL""ed in order to orevent osci:1.lation or vibration of the array in fast currents.~...all anif tighte..Tl the 1/4"fults on the welded brackets.'!hese will.squeo-ze the slots toget..1:er thus securing the pipes to;ether.Y . NOT~:The bolts should be tightened with the pipe uDside down from the way it will lie on the river bottom.This will~p straighten the pipe. The off shore cap provides the wire rope termination.has a water check valve used for blowing out and f10ating the array,mounts the off shore cable attachment point and has a target attached for acoustic signal align- ment. The on shore cap has a 2 inch diameter hole in the end which is used to stake the array in position on the shore.A second 2 inch hole may be .used 11 Cable should be threaded on downstream side of bolts which hold sections together. 2/1978 and 1979 arrays:tighten 1/2 inch diameter bolts to 45 ft/lbs (second bolt from target end -tighten to 20 ft/lbs only).If too loose,'the array will bend excessively,allowing fiSh to escape under the beam.If tightenel to greater than 60 ft/lbs.-14-the bolts will break or the tube deform • .---=~.:-:. to tie off the array for safety.A mount for the transducer is provided on this cap.Both verical and horizontal adjustment of the transducer is possible.A 1/2 inch diameter x2 feet long bar is provided to use as a lever for ali9Ding the transducer on the 1976 systems.The new"systems have adjustment,hand whee 1s .-:\"M:nmt the 'transduce-r in th=u.:::if:e.r -3 holes of..:--~.- it IS h:msing.,=',,---,, A traveler,attached to the cable swivel,rides on a bar preventing rotation of the cable when -tightening.-,r-=",",'''''_''<-::_ -""'--,;,~"=",,",~,_,"',',_'NOTE :"__The cab 1e'-mus t ~be-as~~tight---as~possi ble~to '4'revent '.a~ray-~g:r:=~';'";-~-ZcjO;;;-'i: -:-'"~~~#~-;"-;~:~--,~•.~-"-breakup in fasttivers:-Harid tfghten only;-----.,' .~ - """ - A 1/2 inch threaded plug is provided for an air hose to blowout and'float the array prior to removal from the river bed.Netting is tied to the lower vortex fin.1/8 inch diameter holes s'paced at 1-1/2 inch intervals provide net tie points.Holes are provided on both top and bottom fins as installa- tion on thg oppos i te shore requi res turni ng the array end for end and 1"'0- ,tating 180 : NOTE:It has been found by A.D.F.&G.that if no air is available,the array mc;y be raised by allowing the pipe to_tilt down in the direction of the water flow.The fairings act as ailerons and wi'll raise the pipe to -the surface.Conversely,when sinking the array,the stake on the shore end should be attached via a "come-along ll to a tree and should be tilted upstream a few degrees to help sink the array and hold it firmly.ontha river bottom. Assembly Procedure for 60 Foot Array 1.Layout the following parts on a reasonably level sur.face paranel to the river bed in'the order listed.Leave 1 foot 'space between< parts. 1 each Off Share Cap.- 2 each 18-1/2 foot section with couplers attached •..' 1 each 18-1/2 foot section without coupler. 1 each On Shore Cap (screw in tension screw handwheel all the way). 2.Attach swivel end of 1/4 inch cable (36-1/2 foot long)to eye on threaded tension screw. ,3.Feed opposite end of cable (with eye)through the 18-1/2 foot tube sections.Cable must pass through center hole in bulkheads (2 places).and on downstream side of 3/8"bolts. -15- 4. 1'-"" \: - With the on shore cap transducer housing straight up,slip the first 18-1/2 foot section onto the shore cap (male),reduced diameter,align ~~ bo 1tholes arrl install 1/4 -inch diarret-cr 1:01 ts.Be sure 18-1/2 foot secti'on ;s facing in right direction.Fins go downstream.11 5.Insta 11 second -and'thi fd -sect;ons ins imi 1ar -manner.JJ 7.Install end plate (with slot for pin)onto off shore cap.Cable should project through cap center hole and extend out about 12 inches if all couplings are se~ted. 8.Start to tighten handwheel inside on shore cap until cable eye is. aligned wi-th slot in end plate. NOTE: Install pin through'eye and seat in slot of end plate.9. If couplings hang up and ~o not seat-the cable and --- tension secrew can be u'sed-to-pull-the-couplings to~::~'::;i-.'~ gether.-However;:c care must be taken .to'al i.gnthe -':;O>""'t~+-~~i .-fins-during coupling lnsertion'"as'~turning the'sections . after complete assembly may be difficult. 6.Insert cable eye through the off share cap and install cap on last section.Insert bolt.Target (curved projection)should be up. ,.... - """--{c-· -;;:.. 10.Tighten cab-le-handtight.using handwheel. ____.f~l,ly seated.,,~~,:.:.-,_,_ All couplings should now be ".'.....--- - - .... 11.Install coupling bolts and cap nuts not previously installed.Tighten to 20 ft/lbs·only;apPly silicone. 12.Install end cap onto·end plate covering cable and pin using two'3/8 inch bolts. 2/. 13.The array is now ready for placing 'into ~he river. Array Installation Procedure Installation of the array into the river will vary from one location to another dependent on local terrain and river conditions.·Primarily. ~urrent speed will determine whether the array can be floated and swung into place from a parallel"to the river position,see Figure 2A (slow currents 2-3 feet per second)or pushed into the river at right angles to the current 'with the off shore end controlled by a cable,see Figure 2B,current of 4 to 7 feet per second • 11 Coat outside of reduced diameter portions with cl ear s11 icone to prevent air leaks.Also coat both ends of bolts. 2/To prevent air leaks (when raising): 1)Wrap all seams tightly with grey 2"pvc tape (thi s may requi re cutting fins back 2-3"on each side of seam). 2)Pl ace 2 connected 811 hose cl amps on each s ide of seam --and over tape.- 3)Tighten clamps being careful to keep clamp nuts to downstream side of array and out of beam path._l 6- .-._. ~~0 .. - - A judgement as to the best procedure must be made at"each site based on the results of past experience.The following step~will apply to both methods. 1.Attach an appropriate shore cable 1/4 inch minimum diameter to up- stream end of clamp prov;dedon off shore ~cap.1f "~'~,..~:-~",:.._,-! z.Attach opposite end of shore cable to stake,tree or other available attachment point.CAUTION NOTE:In 7 foot per second currents cable tension of floating array will be as high as 850 pounds.- Push th~array'i ntothe ~Tlver7with'transducer-=h6us~i-rig'-irf~avertical'~J,.'~~-',Cc''''' position.(Vortex fins parallel to water flow.)Array must be positioned with reasonable speed as water will leak into the numerous unsealed joints allow;ng the array to si nk ;n 5 to 10 mi nutes.The array wi 11 have an initial positive buoyancy of about'900 pounds when floating.2/ 4.A 1-1/2 inch diameter steel stake should be ready to drive through the on shore cap into the riverbed during deployment of the array.This stake must be long enough to be driven securely into the rfver bed as well as extend out of the water.See following page for new inshore end instructions..' 5.Remove the 1/2 inch plug on top and the plastic plug on the side to permi t the pipe to si nk qui ckly., T.A1ignment of the transducer beam with the target mounted on the off shore cap is accomplished by separate horizontal and vertical adjust- ment procedures t see Fi gures 1Band 1C.' Horizontal r \....~_._.. 6.The array when installed should have at least 1/2 foot of water over the transducer. .- .- .' Loosen Knob "A"and the two horizontal,adjustment plate bolts.Install ad- justment bar into horizontal adjustment hole (do not loosen opposing side knobs Band 0).Adjust beam by moving bar forward or aft as required. When correctly positioned tighten the horizontal adjustment plate bolts. NOTE:This adjustment is a one-time adjustment and should not require readjustment until the transducer is replaced • •Vert;cal Loosen knobs A,Bt C,and O.Install adjustment bar into vertical adjust- ment hole.Adjust by moving bar fontard and aft in slotted hole.When adjusted tighten knobs A~S,C,and D. 11 Easier in and out movement of ,array while in water can be accomplished by ~sing an inshore cable also.REMEMBER the longer the cable,the easier it will be to move the array in ~nd out., 2/If correct sealing procedures are followed,the tube will not sink rapidiy. -17- ! !... ~.. ;:;;~:.f - I~- - (.r '4)The 1 1/2"diameter stake should be replaced with a 2"0.0.x 4'10ng steel pipe thread on both ends which ac.ts as a "p ivot point".Pipe "T"'s are attached to both ends after it is pushed through the holes provided on the inshore end.Movement of the array inshore from cur- rent pressure is prevented by placing a 4 x 4 or pole in the "opening ,_-._~,o ..:c-, below the transducer.housing and -buttingi'tCup aga-inst;thoe pivot -pole>::.."';';"t.:.;~~· We;ghts or stakes can then be used to hal d the 4 x 4 or pol e ;n place -- (see draw;ng)• -. 1. Array Removal Procedure Blowout water in the array through the check valve located in the shore cap.This is done by removing the l/2 inch pipe plug located in: the shore cap and replacing with an air hose.-Air pressure applied - here (as from a diver's tank)will force water out the check valve floating the array assembly. If no air is available,the alternate raising -method described..~ -"--",=.~--earlier may .be -used,~"i.e~.,...al1ow"the5hQreend·stake to -~til tforward"""3~ -(downstream)which will-raise ~the array by the ai1eron actiorCof the- fins.. 2.The floating array can now be hauled ashore either by pulling straight out or by pulling in the off shore cable. Array Disassembly Procedure.See Figure lA.15 and Figure 3 1.With the array on a reasonably level area-remove the end cap by unscrew· -ing the two 3/8 inch bolts • . 2.Untighten (scre~in)the handwheel inside the on shore cap.This will loosen the tension cable and allow-removal of the pin on the off shore' end plate. 3.Remove the end plate. 4. --------...._--~~- Drive a stake through the 2 inch on shore cap hole into the gr9und. Also drive a second stake into the ground about 10 feet from the opposite end of the array. i • --,. tf."A'il_o -- 5.Attach the "Y"cable .to the off shore cap,see Figure 3.Install come- along between stake and "yn cable. 6.Remove through bolt of first section to be disassembied{any order is .OK)~-.• 7.Pull apart with come-along. 8.Install 2 eye ~hort cable between sections pulled apart.See Figure 3. 9.Remove next through bolt an~pull apart next section. 10.Continue process until all sections are pulled apart. General Caution Notes 1.Before placing array in water inspect ch~ck valve operation. -18- 5. r --.... .- - I~('-. ',-, ~. ..... -..-~ 2.Cable must be tensioned before array deployment. 3.Do not turn array votex fins into current in currents over 4 feet per second.Excessive 10ad may damage array.~ 4.Installation of a cable around the on shore .£!E.to a stake upstream on shore may be useful in a fast current river. If corrosion prevents loosening of cable tension wheel on assembled array,the off_shore cap,pi.n may_be driven oU'j:,-after .removal of-cthec:.....-'..=-' cap,thus releasing cable tension.- 6.Handle exposed section ends with reasonable care to avoid nicks or tube distortion. 7.Be sure 1/2 inch diameter carrage bolt in coupling sections are tighten~~ to 45 ft.lbs.in order to eliminate coupling to tube clearance thus preventing array sag.Never exceed 50 ft.lbs. 8.Transducer.The transducer,although reasonably rugged would be des- troyed if dropped on a rock.Before usa;the radiating polyurethane face should be washed with a detergent,preferably liquid detergent with the liquid left on the face.This cleans off finger oils.Any oil or grease will 'completely block the high frequency output 'and make the transducer inoperative.In some rivers.a buildup of various forms of "crud ll may develop on the transducer face,-arte:r,!"week or two I so a quantity of liquid detergent should be.place<1~in the hand and the hand quickly put under water to rub the face of the transducer.This should be done whenever too much buildup of IIjunk"is felt or seen on the transducer face.A moderate amount of detritus will not affect nonnal operation... -1.9- . . 3/8"BOLT ,....-..] "I ") 1.1 ,/ 1, ;11 rl j J J OFFSHORE CAP DETAIL 'FIGURE lA OFF SHORE CAP , OFF SHORE CABLE;« RUN LOOP FROM'OFFSHORE CABLE AROUND END AS SAFETY AGAI~S,T ATTACHMENT STRESS (SEE DRAWING~(:,i 1'1,' :'1 } ,l ".;,, •I" : •J' ,~ 1 1 ....--~) ,i , :'I A CO\..it: -~.--TARGET PIN CHECK VALVE.PORT t, I • I I; 1 t,.,~i :'j ,,.. END CAP " ..: 11 :. I .j " " I .I Ii" ;'.·1'.,.. r..._ I·,1/4"WIRE .r-.• ROPE TENSION CABLE END EYE I ,', @, ;i 3/8""I BOLTS' ./,;),."."\i. el. f'" '0-' .''." t!, ? ", j J • .' ., ! I:i ') " STAKE HOLE 'tt' I f~j J I 'b f-J ,Ii I 1:IANDWHEEL / HORIZONTAL ADJUSTME: BOLTS f,,' ] ON SHORE CAP ,.'"'j , KNOB KNOB "~11 HORIZONTALr'-""~'---_---..---.-........:.:-:.:,...._.- ~ADJUST BAR HOLE j ).''] ") HYDROPHONE MOUNT )I I f Figur~1B ! I J '.,THREADED SHAFl'......,_._- CABLE ___ANTI-TURN TRAVL1~R I . • I • 1/4 11 WIRE ROPE rl'ENSION CABLE 1" ,I -"fHl~U ~OL'""\-\OLG,i Ij"'., ; .~ ,. i l., I' I 'j,"i.-: "" 'j 1",;i' ! .':'. " i KNOB '110".--~... :, J , (~.>)~.']J I ~'j ')_J! j .rr " 'ADJtrMENT BAR ;:~~:(;. HYDROPHONE ',~';~~.v.Ef("l'.rtAL ' ~/':,I AD!USTMENT'I :.~I I •.....,",.l'Ii·'I 1 ' ' I ,IKNOB,"BII ~_.I I'I ": I .~ ~.....~. ,.,"v·,j ~••J. 1/1."PIPE PLUO I,I AIR HOSE''.A., CPNNECTION ~I .,., 1.\'.,~)1 III'-)i J !L .,,'.(....~;~~..,....//~.:),.,{I,~/'"• "./. -7 .~~,...j ...:-.....•.....-.-. J .)i • ( j (,'Jt$ I ,I i .. ) I ' ......---.......---"'""--..-----:----l~, .-;. I ' ;.:.:-.!I --pQSSITIONE'lT' I . ',:""CABLE·::..j ',:,.::ARRAY~'---',,'".!.'1 .'.;.'.'':,.l---·J.·....;..·~_..·····..._,_....-;~;""'.~'r.,·~·-~'i·~~.:......:--..__._-!..',:I ~',.,l iI,•1 ' 0 •.,...,.. I •.,\;!.....~~~~~._+...........':i;· .....',I.,:l""~'RIVm~"';',;" ,........'1 •...•;; 7/'//·~7//.~/'7~.,Try ~/V' .'/./..///:..~£R}iY . (SUGGESTED ~".'.':i '.."u "ON SHORE ;.~~ ARMY WfntlOWENT)STAKE ;..:.1"'.:FIGURE Z~f!\' ... a:::>-C- ~ ~ ~ --7' ~ e::- ','I'., :,j !,'j ARRAY INSTALLED IN RIVER Figure 2 ~,I; ~STAKE 7:/ I I_..~--- ARRAY READY TO SWllNG.· OUT(FLOATIt:JG) / .. I.'/.///;/).':j:':;"'C./'./~_LL //__y .r;Q":'><..//~·U I . CABLE ~"i i.';.•i,,' ~,I"--:..-.'..~_.--.."------'------ -'.,:,:POS~HTIONED • "•i.'.....~._,.-~(/Y1~::~A~RAY'." 1"1'•.--,••-------,~J . .\:"STAKE _.-,--RIVER ._-~-~ \,,.,....-...••••lo··'.i ~........._,...~.....~......-.:.,.... ALTERNATE ARRAY DEPLOYMENT METHOD .(SL0y.'CURREN'!'STREAMS), j /)~'1 ,( J -j'")1 f 1 J J t;':··~)'·--"",!I : \ 1 1 ]j "" B...---')1 'STAKE DRVEN INTO GROUND STAKE .DRIVEN INTO aROUND .'i ", I 4"fl "IL1'~ :I) I'.)~,,' '1"-' ,i'~p THRU BOLT' I ON SHORE CAP...- EXTRA TURU BOLT '_Z EYE SHanT CABLE ZND JOINT TO BE PllLLED APARD ___TImU BOLT ;J~~.J'--., ,'i,~\. I I I I .I!,'j ,. , "i..i,i • , . I , 1"., ," " I, ;•If' )4'.","yIlCABLE ';:'...' f' .".20 1 : :'SE:CTiQN~, •••~•&• -, I " I ",- .,:/7;, OFF-SHORE CAP tl.,':l (t.. ~ If 1\. ;JI"I+C,1'fl,p •'.'.'.".". AR'~AY ':J\-:'/~~SE lv\~LY INITIALLY TlGIHEU KNOBS TO COMPRESS ntE SPRINGS TO All OUT 2/3 OF THEIR NO-TENSION LEflGTH.BEFORE WSTALLING HI \~ATER.ADJUST TilE 3 KtlOBS SO THAT TRANSDUCER FACE IS PERPEUOICU~AR TO PIPE. , "j 'f .,R''''·'' [["i,.:H~I)temoeT 6.",'.u8 ~ _1::~"'I.1 urh.,",nl.',nr-"rn"..lrnJlrrn 'I . i!".'~'",,\,I I , F::,;:r,') "")~F ", I,~,l~~I! "IISHORE~J:.,~,'ii'~;ii!,.. 'Iii, ..,i l :JI ·Iit :, II !Ii' i::I'1""I;' y(.t_ CABLE ,.,. FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS".'~,!I (T I~"TEN nOHN AGAINST TRANSDUCER ...A'\'{l~,', PLArE), .~~V''Iii '.J,.-(~~I 'il"IIII~. ,1,~1i~! "I'iI"'lilt:'.' 1.__•t._.' r<-('\ , I ,.I .,oj. ! II.~(l( tm'E:Use upper three holes. tt,~:..·~ ...~. .(---(, . VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT (TIGHTEfI 1 TURN CLOCKWISE FOR EACH 3/4 FOOT BEA~'RISE AT 6Q FEET.AWAY) OR VICE VERSA TO LO\~ER.BEAt1 HORIZONTAL AOJUSTr4ENT (t',' ,,'.:: I TIGHTEN LEFT KNOB AND LOOSEN RIGilT KNOB SH1UL TANEOUSL Y 1 TURN FOR EACH 1~FT.BEAM SHIFT TO TilE LEfT AT 60 fT.AWAY OR VICE VERSA TO SUI FT RIGIIT I - - .... APPENDIX II A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Oscilloscope Operation - - - July 16,1979 A.Menin OSCILLOSCOPE OPERATION for the SIDE SCANNER ~-7..=....:=-_~-:._-------~_._..~._ - TABLE OF CONTENTS THEORY OF SCOPE OPERATION ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• TRIGGERING .. SCOPE CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS . OSCILLOSCOPE CONNECTIONS TO SIDE SCANNER •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• OSCILLOSCOPE ADJUSTMENTS ....•......................................... 2 03 2 03 2 05 2 07 2 07 LIST OF APPENDIX FIGURES Appendix Figure Title II-I Oscilloscope controls.Sony Tektronic type 324 oscilloscope.2 10 -- -- .- II-2 II-3 II-4 II-5 Oscilloscope adjustments.Sony Tektronix type 324 oscilloscope..2 11 Properly aimed transducer when beamwidth switch is set to 2°and scope is triggered from XM 2°......2 13 Properly aimed transducer when beamwidth switch is set to alternate and scope is triggered from XM 40 ..............................................................................................2 14 Properly aimed transducer when beamwidth switch is set to alternate but scope triggered from XM 2°...... ...... .. .. .................. .............. .. ........ .... .. .............. .. .... .... .......... ..2 15 II-6 Improperly aimed transducer when beamwi dth switch is set to 2°and scope is triggered from xr~2 0 ..............................................................................................2 16 II-7 Improperly aimed transducer.Beamwidth switch is set to all and scope is triggered from XM 2°.....2 17 """ - .... II-8 II-9 II-lO II-ll II-12 II-13 Improperly aimed transducer.Beamwidth switch is set to alt.(or 4°)..............................2 18 Improperly aimed transducer.Beamwi dth switch is set to 2°and scope is triggered from 2°.........2 19 Properly aimed transducer.Transducer beamwidth switch is set to alt.scope is triggered from XM 4 0 ........ ........ .. .. ...... .... .. .. ............ .... .. .. .. .... .... .. .. .. .... ...... .... .. .. .. ...... .. ..2 20 Improper transducer aiming.Beamwidth switch set to 2°and scope trigger to XM 2°................2 21 Properly aimed transducer but multiple echos from wake of boat.....................................................................2 22 Improperly aimed transducer.Beamwidth switch set to 2°and scope triggered from 2°...............2 23 Appendix Table Title LIST OF APPENDIX TABLES .... - .... 11-1 Typical side scanner oscilloscope waveforms for various transducer aiming conditions................2 12 ~-... - I""'-~--'~~.~,.. \.,, This manual describes how to use the oscilloscope ;n conjunction with the side scanner.Although it.is specificial'y written around the Tektronix model 323 IIscopell~the same basic rules apply to virtually any model scope except for the location of controls: THEORY OF SCOPE OPERATION The scope is basically a time variab)e voltmeter.A bright dot moves across the screen at a constant rate from left to right.The speed at which it moves is detennined by the TIME/DIV control setting on the scope.At most settings.the dot moves so quickly that it looks like a continuous horizontal line to the human eye. The VERTICAL INPUT of the scope (on the left side of scope)is the same as the +&-input l~ads on a voltmeter except that a voltage connected to VERTICAL.INPUT scope'connector will cause an upward vertical deflection of .th~moving dot of light proportionaL to_the.amount_of voltage at ..theinput at_.-=._ the point in time that the moving dot happens to be when that voltage is con- nected.for example.if there is no voltage on the scope input for the first ~.ha1f of the trace.you will see a.straight line.If a +voltage is then applied during the middle'of the trace (or sweep a~it is usually called),the bright dot wingo vertically up to the corresponding place on the scope's face as determined by the VOLTS/DIY setting of the scope.Example:With a 2V/DIY setting.the dot would rise three divisions at the precise-instant in time that you connected the +of a 6V battery to the scope's VERTICAL INPUT with the -of the battery connected to the scope ground. TRIGGERING """The bright dot on the screen requires an electrical voltage on the TRIGGER INPUT of the scope (on the left side of scope)to start·the dot moving at the ,~.,~.__.'~riggeris ~equired for each "sweep"of the dot.At the instant in time that ,... .' -2- "'rate (or speed)'set by the TIME/DIV control on the scope's front panel.Thls· - a voltage is applied to the TRIGGER INPUT of the scope,the dot will start moving from left to right.This provides synchronization of what you see on - ..the screen wi th the side scanner.In the case of the si de scanner,the TR1GGER __)N_PUT will be ~nnel:te~to either XM2°;XM4°(or XM ALT.i.n the latest version ._.'of the side scanner)•.Ea.eh time the side scanner transmits a ·'burst of sound lJ , the transmitted voltage momentarily.appears'on the XM pin connector of the side scanner.At this"instant in time,this voltage causes the dot to start l"" .'"'" - - moving from left to right.Since you will have -the TIME/DIV set to2 ms .(MILLISECONDS)for proper,operation with the side scanner,this dot is now moving across the screen at the rate of 2 milliseconds (2·thousanths of a second)per division.This of course is too fast for the human eye to follow so it looks like a straight line to the eye.Sin.ce sound travels (in water) at about 5000 feet per secondwhi~h ~quals 5 feet per milliseconds (1 thous- anth of a second),when the scope's VERTICAL INPUT is connected to the RCVR (receiver)pin connector of the.side scanner,an echo (a vertical line)from a fish (or other object).25 feet away from the transducer'would be seen asa vertical line at 5 divisions from the left ~f the start of the sweep of the bright dot.This -is because it took 5 milliseconds for the sound to travel the 25 feet to the "fi sh"and another 5 mil 1;seconds for the ·'echo"from the fish to return to .the transducer for a total of 10 milliseconds round trip travel time.Since the scope is set to 2 milliseconds per division,10 mil1i- seconds would be 5 divisions. , To see the ·metal target at the end of the pipe which is about·59 feet away from the transducer,you shou1d expect to see this target 23.6 milliseconds from the face of the transducer (the start of the sweep)because atS feet per .- ,---:- -'\,......::..:-. - -3- milli~econ~travel time,it will take 11.8 milliseconds for the sound to hit .the metal target~nd .anqther 11.8 milliseconds for the "echo"to return to the trans~ucef or a rou~q trip travel time of 11.8 +11.8 =23.6 milliseconds • ._Since the TIME/OIVI.SIO~of the-scope is set-to -2 Msec/DIVISION~-that'would be just beyond the 1.0 di~~sions on the scope screen and would not be seen,·so .a fine va~iab1e adjustment knob located in the center of the TIME/DIV coarse control should_be ~rotated a little counter clockwise so that the echo from the metal target can be seen on the scope's face.Rotatino this small control counterclockwise increases the time per division to some amount greater than the 2 milliseconds per division that the coarse control was set to. SCOPE CONTROLS AND THEIR FUNCTIONS 1.POWER SWITCH-ON (see fig.1)-CAUTION:Be sure to shut off power when scope is not being used since it draws much more power than the side stanner and would rapidly discharge the battery. 2.POWER SOURCE SELECT SWITCH (see fig.2)-This is a small slide switch on the rear of the scope and should be pushed down to the EXT DC position whi'ch means that the scope is being powered by an external l2V from the side scanner. 3.VOLTS/DIV.ROTARY CD~rrROL (see fig.1)-This switch may be set as desired for viewing the side scanner RCVR output.It should be set ~o either -lV or 2V.If it is set to lV per division you may want to rotate the small IIf;ne control·'center-knob inside the coarse control VOLTS/DIY to reduce the - r'-. t~..--. - height of tpe vertical lines or fish echos to about 1 inch. 4.POSITION CONTROLS (see fig.1)-These 2 controls merely affect the horizontal and vertical position of the scope display.You may want to set the vertical position control so that the horizontal trace of the scope is a little above the bottom of the screen and the first vertical line on the 1eft 2 05 most often mis-set control). -4- "is about 1/4 inch inside of the screen.(This corresponds to the transmitted burst of sound or the transducer position). 5.INPUT LEVER SWITCH (see fig.1)-This should be down (in the DC p~~i tion)•.. 6.TRIGGER LEVER SWITCH (see fig.1)-This important switch should be in one of th~2.b~ttom external trigoer positions.either AC or DC.This switch ---..-.~ is locate~_on the rights.ide of the'mode1 323 scope. 7.TRIGGER KNOB (see fig.1)-This'is probably the most important (and ...._..._-_....-.--*-.. Its function is to assure that the start of the _.---.-".--------_.- sweep of the scope picture exactly coincides with the instant the side scanner transmits its burst of sound.This will cause the transmit burst vertical line to be at the start of the sweep (the extreme left side of the -trace).If this knob is rotated completelY clockwise or completely counterclockwise.'the scope trace wi 11 "free run".that is to say.it will never be synchronized with the'('. \..~~..- ._,j,transmit burst and therefore the transmit -burst vert;cal "i ne'o-ri the''scope IS' -face may occur anywhere along the scope sweep. 8.',TIME/DIY.ROTARY CONTROL (see fig.1)-This control s the speed at which 'the bright dot crosses the scre,en.For use with the sidescanner~it SDou1d be set to the 2 Ms (MILLISECONDS)position •. 9.ATTEN.SLIDE SWITCH (see fig.1)-This switch is located on the left side of the scope.A1though it can be operated in either position,stable triggering is a little easier to adjust if this slide switch is in the lOX position. 10.FOCUS AND INTENSITY (see fig.1)-~hese two controls are located on top of the scope. The intensity control should be rotat~d fully clockwise for maximum bright- (-:-~:ness of the trace.After adjusting the brightness,rotate the focus control,,"--,,--for the sharpest vertical lines. 1;""...-,..-:1- ....~'ti -5- _..At -nfght -you may ·want :to decrease the br:i"ghtness. the FOCUS control. If you dOt refocus OSCILLOSCOPE CONNECTIONS TO SIDE SCANNER 1.EXT.D.C.POWER (see fi g.2)-Thi s twin connection is'ocated on the -...--.--. right side of scope.This should be connected to the mating connector labeled "SCOPE"on the right side of the side scanner.CAUTION:This is the 12 volt power connection to the scope and does not have reverse polarity protection .....,-If these leads are reversedt-tne scope will burn out instantly....-. 2.EXT TRIG.(see fig.1)-This connector is located on the left side of scope.It should be connected to either the 2°or 4°(or ALT.in 1980 mode'side scanner).This is to provide triggering of the scope from the side scanner.Use either one of the supplied connector cables.The black pin on the connector cable is ground and may be connected to the god.pin of the r- \,./.side scanner or 1eft di sconnected if you Ti ke t s.i nce the scope wi 11 be grounded anyway through the p'ower connector. 3.VERT.INPUT (see fig.1)-This connector is a1so located on the .-left side of the scope.It should be connected to the RCYR connector on the face of the side scanner using the supplied connector cord which is identical to the ext.trig •.co~d.The black pin is ground and need not be connected to the side scanner ground since the scope is already grounded through the lZV -power cord. This is the vertical input to the scope and causes the brjght moving dot· of the scope to 90 up vertically when ~voltage is present on the RCVR output of the side scanner as it would be when a fish echo is prese~t. OSCILLOSCOPE ADJUSTMENTS 1.After all three connectors are in place (trigger,vertical input and external lZV power)turn on the scope power. 2 0'1 ---._._,,-----~_.__._-_._--.....,.-_..~......----'"-,-.----",..-_.,--_.,_.-'-"",~,--,--.~~->-'-"'.,~.__.~_.,-'---_.._~-~~~-""-----'---_." -6- 2.~Turn the -bfi ghtness control fully cl ockwi se. 3.Place the rear slide switch in the down (ext DC)position (Fig.2). 4.Place the ext.trig.switch on the left side of scope to the lOX - - -~, - "position. 5.Place the input lever switch on the scope face to the DC position "Jdown). 6.Place the trigger lever switch (on the right side of scope face). down~to the EXT TRIG DC position. 7.Set the TIME/DIV rotary switch to 2 ms. 8.Rotate the small center knob inside the TIME/DIV switch about 1/3 of a revolution'counterclockwise from "its fully clockwise..tdetentJ-position . .9.Set the VOLTS/DIY rotary switch to 1 volt. 10.Rotate the ~mall center knob inside the VOLTS/DIY switch"about 1/3 of a revolution counterclockwise from its fully clockwise (detent)position. 11.Push in the 2 POSITION controls located on the bottom center of the , scope face.These 2 rotary controls 'are also push-pull switches and should always be pushed in. 12.Rotate the trigger knob on the lower right side of scope face fully counterclockwise to its detent position.~-This wil1,~ause the scope to operate even without an external trigger so that you can adjust the two position con- trols. 13.Rotate the vertical position knob on the bottom center of the scope until the trace on the screen is about 1 division from the ,bottom of the screen. 14.Rotate the horizontal position control on the lower center of the scope face until the trace starts about one div;s;onfrom the left side of the ,r . ,\ ~_:-'-.' "',-- scope screen. The scope ;s now ready for final trigger adjustments. -7"- -.15.Put the side scanner beamwidth switch in the 2°position and connect -the -EXT -TRIG.'cab1'e -to the XM2°pin connector on the face of the scope • .;·-Rotate the TRIGGER knob on the right side of scope face to about the 10 olclock position.Somewhere near this point.the scope should be triggering properly as evidenced by a stable vertical ftspik.e lf being seen on the extreme left (the beginning)of the scope trace.Now place the beamwidth switch on -."tne:side~scaririe~to:the Alternate-position.The scope trace should 100k the same as it did in the 2°position meaning that you -are-still triggering only "'".on 2°.If it looks different or seems to speed up or get bri-ghter that means ..... - ".. .. you are slightly rnisadjusted.If so.rota"te the TRIGGER knob a bit until the scope picture does'not change as you switch between the 2°to the ALT"positions on the side scanners beamwidth switch. Now put the EXT TRIG connector cord in the XM4°connector (or the XM ALT. __~~_~!l~~l~?_q~m_~~~1J.:--Whe~L~he ~jde scanner-beamwidth switch -is in the ALT position the trace on the scope should~now be t.riggering twice as fast (brighter)as in the 20 position since now you are alternately triggering the scope twice as fast as you were.You are causing .the scope to alternately . trigger on 2~.4°t 21:1.4°etc.If you now move the EXT TRIG.cable connector back to theXM2°connector-you will see a change in the trace since it will only be triggering on the "20 beam (half as often). You should now see a stable vertical spike;about 1 inch high on the left side of the trace-"and_you should see the metal target echo (about 1 inch high)near the-right side of the trace if you increase the COUNTING RANGE con- trol on the side scanner to beyond 60 feet.To operate the side scanner normally.you should now reduce the -COUNTING RANGE control slowly until it just ceases to count the target (on sector 12)and then reduce it about one .~ (,~foot more for safety. - -, ~ \..- PAC-E OF .5coPE -\lOLTS/OIV---. ~:~~@m 0 0~""...I I>Q u ..-r.:...j .osmON •..,r.- TYPS 324 OSCILLOSCOPE 4=::·l!k'T E KT RON I X/TOIC'l'O.~...~..."" -LoC{1TFD c1:JAi LEFT urr 'lInG Dll1040lUZ Ext VUlT lHl'UT CAl OUT ()...~aLAN"•• SjD£-OF.SCO Pt="rn ..x~0 ~0 t@h .-\.....;>--..-"'JIll'.~"-l Fi~ure II~l.Oscilloscope controls.~ony Tektronix type.324 oscilloscope . •-.,l." f',,- .rlGj J ..... po-er ----.~......t1i.1'I ----ruT 77f/S SLJO£SW J TCH -1i1-D[N//al(EXT-Dc)?OSlrltJN ~-_....-----._---_.._--- C.D".....lec::u,;II'S'" ..t.,.... Figure 11-2.Oscilloscope adjustments.Sony Tektronix type 324 oscilloscope. ......'FIG-'~. A.Menin -T.Namtvedt,6-18-79 ~Table 11-1-TYPICAL SIDE SCANNER OSCILLOSCOPE WAVEFORMS FOR VARIOUS TRANSDUCER AIMING CONDITIONS FIGURE #CONDITION I~ 11-3.PROPER VERTICAL AIMING.2° 11-4.PROPER VERTICAL AIMING.ALT.BUT SCOPE TRIG.ON 4° II-5.PROPER VERTICAL AIMING.ALI.BUT SCOPE TRIG.ON 2° 11-6.IMPROPER VERTICAL AIMING.(AIMED TOO LO~J) ~II-7.IMPROPER VERTICAL AIMING.(AIMED TOO HIGH).2° 11-8 .IMPROPER VERTICAL AIMING.(AIMED TOO HIGH).4° ..-IMPROPER HORIZONTAL AIMING.(AIMED TOO FAR DOWNSTREAM)II-9. II-10.PROPER HORIZONTAL AIMING. 11-11.IMPROPER VERTICAL AIMING.(TOO LOW AND BOUNCING OFF SUBSTRATE. F"II-12.ECHOS FROM BOAT WAKE II-13.IMPROPER VERTICAL AIMING IN SHALLOW WATER,- - \ - -... -- - "'" ,....._...~h:t(. _.-, '-~ ....Uf V) o ""'"..JI ....J ...... .-t...l..Vt a ., ,I .~l,, ,I· o r4 Crt;~\"I 1 ),li I ('.:5)i .i I,i JID ~:'~i...r'1 .:./I',i J •;\ '0 7 \".',".0 ;;O.5CILL,O 5 C~··'E ~C!fcl£i1,"..I I .-• -0 O...n_~o~0 ---0 1fIf;,iJj,Ow 0",•~o dr '1.1 $T,,;'tYING ','Tti'l"';,fa~I. Tf,l?tfEr~{'}I .,"I .....,'',I \I I ,..••J J'~."ECltJo ~.'...../;'.I I·I ( , NDr VIlItY'N~IN J/~/6-HT::.,I t "J I •'.'4 ,I , "." RANGE a>NTIT{j L "tJ SiD£"scANNeR,SET 'To JU5r BEYc/YO mRGGT, (S£CT./2 WILL Coofr) I I I I .' " t " .~..... ,~. 1 " i-I , ..' I I.L ,I: ,71ISC REFLE'cntJN5 F/f,,,'1 flr~ oN '£/INc d/C (2'B£An MiJS~8£CLE"A~"TH/J~~)~ I sT HAL':!JJ!!T 6~CLelN..,' EXCEI'T At ~-"LL 51>; o I 0 0 ••~.I ..L ~rI I,I ;, I I'•'1.1'., . .."..:,.,..'.~.~!!:; ,ri ';'~n1,';.,':t;,'l~:ih'....\1~L ". • "I •••:~lol' :",'ir' "" .J, ••"I,,';••'•.FigUre~i~~4,!fiO(£1?Lt /I/!"1£1)mlJ;Y~DUCEI(wI/EN BEl7Jt1WID77! · 5 lJJ ricH /.5 SET '/0 A <TEt?;V/}rE ¢5CtJ?E .,/5 T!?16-GmlfcDFiTtJl1:XM.Lj-°.NoTE 1-°.[3El111 I .,JSS/(/I'1I1W6-sUAI1t CE tJj·~()JSl1l;4iE 8£10/..10 .mE ::;"Oc! fMlr oN 5U13sTtflt(r mUS'r;4{}S/N?1/£"iL.£"c.nM/5 i;fr)/lIIII4f.n:::C7ltJ~1 .ew $U!JSTIIItTE'5V!fF/tCF.TlI/~<5 O/~SINCE 771G"1-°8~1J..11-__';--t :"IV)t.L NOT QJuAIT !lNl Eetl05 8lfltJlI 0 _ -~- --"-. Til€"SOft'!bINT:....- --:'~~.'.,I ~.--:===:=-=--1~J3ff}t1~..J :,','!:.:2 d IJEII~..•.._~ ,1::1 •.........._.....o..0 .._.,_'.,}~ ./-,1,-_', . \ I I '.60 SUII.17ifIli'P:".::'-.-- --,-_ __. r A':) 1--''''' f$:'. •~I .'.I , II r'~J ".i II )1 )1ill,;..,.",'J , ,~"" 'I (.,.')I ,.,',I 'O.sCIL'L 0 5 C/':..l;!$C((E£tV ,~,",f',I ..:....1_._'__~~___..'.I.'I'I ..1".II ,{•i ~ ~EiJD Or LJ~r,t;«/NG 7ltlE ~ \I,'I,"I I I "•:I •..'l,.\ i I ,)I I I I I :.'.."~/,I .:1 '.'.',..':. I " •I ....,...•.!,'.I •'.~,. ,I RAN6:£'b);vT1ftJL .O"vi ,5/0£S"C-1NAlEI(SET j.\ ,JUST BcYoNP r7}/i'CE/; ,,!l'', ..(.5€C~12 WilL G(J1~Y>I I.;I l .--.-..................,..... .elUc.Hfr', f S71fdl1lG-{.r111J6ET:;'" .ECl/eJ.~ #6,YI1tf.YINvINHeI6lir.~~ '...I (..~. :i ." ":"..'.. /.:'.'...', I '.....I ' ';~,.sM/JLL 'Jfltrt3 , :~..'. AliFd/r ~".f'.... ,•..", ,I.:'j ,• t ." I " •• .~. C'I"'-1':.;'"7'i'.I ;r I ,'-...-.. I ,J',~ I-a,!>. C)l .. " Figure ,II-5. '. ,,.'" f!fofEI1 L'I /1/1\1£D TlfIJNf;OUCEi(. WHEN B£AI1WIDT/I SJIVlTcl-!/5 SET 7?J ,ftLr/iIf,Nl.tlE'BUT Scdf'~,TIfIU-EMED FI?IJ/'f XN 2 0 ....,!. :,," ., '.-" I " ,. ..' ---- n '~'\'------...:---:,.:.~~-~---------A~="~=-=='·-~1)J£I1I!J··.,.,;2."D£flt1 .,r .I .'...........-",:::.ij ,- I ' ,11 :-.... •I (;0 SUIlJlIflt.rc ~'i~~-.-.-_....\-- , '..~.. :1 ; .,. '.'..~ ~.. !I r..: ", Id 2°.~CII05 F/rot)filE'~ T ":,,',.)'/\.,'J'.l'~11,.'J 11 I 1 J I 1 OSBC/LLJOSCvrE'$c/fcEN '.!, ~""'I"'.....pl"¥".-,,. .',': .Gf06-flT '',; c Sr/forJ~" T1J1i'~r:r 15t:/I(J, ,1 ,I,.r ni SIPt=:f"CI/;Vt1Im SETI ,1 JUS[IJE(/JNO Tllrft5-E i (jECTS.~1~llfi2.WIL~Ct: II,i 'J I : "\ , I ..... .', 1\.:1 j...'!. 0 ",,~ .. .Ito (, " Figure II-6./l1f/l()f£IILYf]II1EDTlffJN5D:UCE!f WHEN I3fltI1WID77I--".";.,swrrcH /S.5t=r TO 21)*scofiS'/$TI1ICcfGfI?EIJ !l?{)1'1 ftl'1 2 ~ ,~.~. NOlE llIltT BE1J11 /51tl1vJ6 77J.o 1,0"&ClW51NG £cJIo5.77J If£"'. t)£77JIIA/£JJ rAlJf1 Ll/sr ~~F $o/)$TtflrTZ=-/t1fJEllr£Q7t1lvs';EVEN ".'.,1 .mDU~1f TflA6-I?T,~cflo /7 5TtrtJlllc;:.f,CV£5A1(Vl/I<Y /Nj{E~~1fT: ,,~, '. '1"1 I •1 ".....~-..-2 "~E(./J1'1 ONLy ...·'(\. .A ,....,'I Ir',0-'60 'SUlI.1');Mr.z:-_._,~!.)I ·...,iV \..!':r I ..,",,',,,'i ", i [J \ I, 1 , ~,·1 I •, I • , ~... \,, ",',. ...:. ~.: ,. I I'.t'I,:.'t' oj, I.,0', I .J l',':'1'";)~'1 1 1 1 1 "/-''1_ ,I'I ,) ,,..\,.,,..'I;•:I ii'os elL LOS C'I.:S',$CI(£61'/.'\i·;'/',"/.'!ii,I:" I ,.......•ft_."'P ~..........._''cr.,-~.d 'L,•~ ,.'',','I :'",',0',.. wEIlK,z..'71J/fC£T EC!lO:."?fNO dP'LIfn:..7Y/Akr'll/1E Sf/1ft VMYI!'IG-/tI/lElG(fT:"'~'i','/.',' " .i,'"'ithTfJ!f/r;/IT (IN wI:~:';",I,,j ,'.',/, ..::""/{AAl6£C<JN77JOL ON ,'',,:",~.::;'", )5/J}c Sc;}-tVA/EltJ ct 10 •i,f'J'i clUST,"&£YtJfl/D 7IIA'~r:i ,i ~,(SEer Ii!Witt (jJfJltAJ-J coUll ~..\ ,,.~ , , :. \'''''.: Figure 11-7..}. lt1fI10fE!lL'j 11/1'1£0 /1?i/1'I,50{JCEIf,'/3E11I1 W/DTI!sw/TC!f.IS 5ET TO ~........ ~.-0' ,,,,I •~:seth'/5 T!l/GfEIRI?E.tJ FtPtJl1 X/1 2_,.tYf?T{1i7'1J T 8£1111 /5 111/")£0 7ZrJ ll161/ ....,,f .../ JUST IJlltfELJ CflTCHII'IG-'llJ/(Ge/IN 81/)ettA;'"flL77/oU6-H 1-0 BC/l1'1 D~c5 .~.............•~.I .HIT 7111l6E!T:(SEE'1"161 §.),Low m5slA{ti-,:FI5H 1'1IJllJC11/SJ.fA:":.,I • •...'.., I....··... ;r.') ........ ,.(~i,~r((~,i""1 .-v'l,,' .:'.~ " 60 I SUB.5TA'I,r£:0 ':•••'''••'-.'. 1--"a2;-;:;0-_-~..:.:'1--t:---- - -~'.--~-_ ___['.,.:2 "OlE ",",.?1t1 ',.'.;,.,-...:...:...-",~"--.,, "0 _ ,.-- .','-'.:...:..:-;'~.----'", 'IU .:I~r t.!'••,......-" ])J ~ •, rlcr.v I ..•'J .....(1 n] ......-' r ,',"')'..•....r'"'"'-'...']i I /'',1 ,'I~J J i.1 it ti ,"]J r OS Ci L L.'0 5 CL 'E pCI(EE!y ",:.,,.-j:-¥{[J,ot;LlfG,1;~,71IJ:f,f!!~lJ I W ;....'-baa q I .........._..............I "l!!"......;''''."'....."1 /..',., ./['"'I v I • • "i I :•I .'1 J " '.'.•f).I ":I •~I ,... .,.1 ~..J 'i'I'I i . ,f\Atf6t?UJNT!J~OL 5Fff '/..10 JU$r 8£YCJN[),TIJtf6t::i (:;e:::r /2 ':!!!:..L CI>i.iNT vi.HEN I p I {3C/tl1w/om fW/7Lf!I}/111 'I' (oJ 1rIO#,S'ECT IE 11111 CO(JNi: .'.---i; , I ..I .vfrlf SWITCII IN eOon I]~r;r /'0 SinON,).)"I.,! ,•.:J I 1 1 "'j .' ",., ...'t'....:. '.:~ t.i·' . .;~~. "...': ••!'.~ sTl{();V(;1"TfJ/{Ccr EcII()~:Nor VAA);IAI~/N/IF/GII r:'~", ,..i I3IlJGHT aN n.f..: ~ '. I'1, '(jur dN 2'TItR6€T EtlllJ ,I W,L L (5E lIJvJ e1 Neff 1M16-II'T ~lNiLL V/lN..y /lJ HEI6HT;, ,(s€"lE iF/tT ,S ),,~,ii ,I:I ,. '"" F1 gure II-B. J.,) J.;...'. c ...' :.... ir1flfOfEIILy f)1!"}!!!/)71?/)tVS bOCE;'?,ff!lJt)IV/PriiSWIlL/f 15 SET'=--" -o'sC(JrE IS 7?i/6'€llfllIf),-fllin XM 1-?"..' .TO fJL -r.(olf 1-),!ftJT£r/ll)T I3.Eft 15ft/liED "{lJO 11161(,flL7lIOUGl/: 771£~()136111 SDL/O).!lilT.!TIfE":17itft5-ET:lilt:2°8&}11"JlJ$T ff)1EL .",).. Hrr5 rlflt~-(s£E plCrS fiJtft'Seo?£WItVffoIlJ1).... FI sH 11/'r)'L3lT'l1l SSE/),.;::~.1 I .'::,.', ','-----'----I.• ...:f •• ", ,"•••I IJ.--..,..-.......~--..................~.:.'~.'. . :60 '$Uff-fT/fIIll!:.'~.- - -~:>-~::t •','"::',.,I..• I........ , ,')" .j . '•••04.'I ." ".. 'I '.I '"1 ~.J,)t1../.,, "r-.•i .-I .,I -,,,,~'.~J)'~•I ..I' fifO of {,J5TE1'/lr'~)I'I£"SrI/rEI f •I ,f'J I \ •I,.f·,_"/.'//1 11..'(111 I t t'.,I I.'I I I I f.f)NGJ?:I~T~O~?,IfiT:! ,f ~I f \, Jtl;J$rr.,;(3.E'loND,TlJA~CE\.\ \ '.. ~If\t ,.f • };'P')I II-.I..\ I'' J ..J .IwEIll<GeNo F"~()n IV€!-, ,It'£11K !EC!Id F(M TIM'6'€T¥i '\Y.•"£17lI~If va)'1J1//t1I1T()N 1Of.:;;:, /IJ4T/ft/I1Y VIlJ?Y IN 11£/&-117:"~';.,,I ( '.,"fuT(/:'4;/fOS /J/}l SF VE/{)'".M \ ,'..Ct.05£T06liTlle?SO,:~. C.1I~€flJL <185Etwrr/ON J~NECeJ~j)~)'", •I I....'.-,,1; !-Ii,~-' ~ '.,- , .I }"I ,. ~l±.:::.-::==~~~.::-=~=:~~t.rr~;:-:-.,~-.-~':i.',~,:·. 1--:'.', ~, 1\') ,~ Figure 11-9.If'1f!iofEf<.LY !J1f1EO rtfll;15DUCE!?-!:~OJI1';JIj)TI!SWITCI/15 SET I ' -TO".s t·SCtJf£/5 71I'1/%/:;ffiEf)11011 g::;'f'1I5DUCE!1,/5/111'1£0 ',1'~!:j Too Filil DtJWIVS71l'ti'7lt~JUST jJf/I(ELJ HIWNf 71f(6-£T:Th'/5 WILL e/1 USE 1/11 ~VElfCliulfT ()I'/SfiLl1M/IN Tl/E LJ/~/;/}u=~r SlJ8f!lf1J7E 1J~{/JtJS£.!.;ffX£NG 5/1L/1dN llJIl)TO LIN6"Etf WHNS!7fEJJf1 (JF fifE B£rt$~CI?O>S/l1/6;IF S!lL'l1~I/"T.f:1'I,/)rw:r: To OVEl(C(iJNr NEIll(alb rJf .JUSS71?IIT';7il-81M,!!f=T/I£fA'(J8LBI.1IE'!lII111{c::",,, THE£'7111JNS/XXI:',f 11M!!'.1//?S7llEliI1 WI!L C(),fC 7"ItF(',fNJLE71,.0J:lHUS •.\../' I .-<".~,..!·,.I J - -:.';,.\-- -0:- ---''-.':..213c'J1/':It...:,--:'"-----.--.'••'L../,-----..----:':-.-~.-.t • '/9&/'/1 ""\ \ :-\ \ .o . ...-4 I-- \-. \ ., \ .. ..,--.~ .. '~ , c........- ...... • " -.-........ \j ""-----~~..----- .. .- .'..-._..~ ~....". .. "I 1. 1.......--(--..\:\ .. ------ _. ,. J;- '1"~-...\-' .r--11I1l<.r/::,(,j.;:'CIf?V,r,h/QlIf)! I /i ..-.f::/!JIJ of ~1.:/:;/r ,I '6 7i'l1 [".57/1). i I \.--.,,,.I', • •Fa.I::!4L="•:i:c;o"A ....*•n...."'/ 7 .: ..;.!G~~~it!~Vftf ~~nl,.~:I • ",,,.'.;;I ,J e "rt;,',It' ,." .~t.I ..I :",I I :-.,,',," .',,I....;.'I.,.,..;'fi.; , I ,"'11 ..."..."J"dlili ".'I '.'.. .t' ..' " •-t·'. .",'t,.'... .fp,••• I,'.'I:-I'flt:" \',';,t,",tfit t,,_t ,·r 4. "OJ.....) .t;:.!" • I ., ."', . :',~t. •1,:1 ...:,I . I I ,',...~.,.,. 11~1!'~••1,',-, , "t ••\";,.,,,1',1 ,·~;!i.l'·"1 ;,~,(:!~,--:;,A • .,(. i I ."~, I " , I .\•',I I"r '\If."f \I: ,,I fiItN6-£'CtJAfT!?I)L ~r.'I \'JU)T /3E)'IWO p,/J..r;sr:1 ,(;'f\\\;/I .I.,,'I 0/1-1-fA/JfJAiJLY ,'(j)~Jr-(dl\!: SB:r~!"01 1t 1:J~)I ,\'.Ii ','f \'',',,I I)' I I ..\/ I ,"I " 'I ", , ,I '\,I'I I I I I I :.I I I,\,\I . I I i 1..'\I'':1,/•I I Ii'\I ///1\1 ••,, ._--.-_."1------;:..,..•..•,to II •I'"" Figure lI-lfl?~fEl/LJ !T/lil:D7f/IJ;1/}DlXEtf:;'~£/JI1Wlj)TJI 5WlrCl/5ET TIJ 2: I . ,It/'lfF:5Ct)jJ£7if~fiEiJ IlItil'1i E.D ";i lVa-n--W!JT£;f /5 7tJo 5/1//LLtJw,' ,,'----,.."l£VEN,~.1 E. lJ 8ffl/Vl WHICH /5!'BoXi'.'l 'IN ~CtJUN/7Nfr-!r11t!j6E &v I 5/PIt"S0NIVE"A'W~U/.../J It/tVz:70 ge-/fE'fJtJCCO 76 /)(3IJur So 7lJ /J1£YL5 1 5lJI/FIJCF £0/0$mol'1 CIJUIVTlN<f;.71J-1!6f'r WILL 8£o8XutfED,'I f3 Y '.sUit Flic'/::CCf!t?>..'!it 1:'~:!/!!!:1..:~I?:.~~~\k~: ••.1:.~~--. ~I ') ,\J CI.,,', .... ...,...iI i .....f*L ')'. " - - - .~ APPEND IX II I A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Fishwheel Operation TABLE OF CONTENTS MAINTENANCE . 000 01 000 01 000 01 000 01 000 02.. ........ .... ...... ...... ........ .. ...................... .... .. ................ .. .. .............. .... ...... .. ...... .......... .. .......... .. ...... .. ........ ...... .. .... ...... .... .. .. .... .......... ...... .. ........ ........ .. .. LEAD WEIR. DEBRIS DEFLECTION. OPERATION ... DESIGN .... - LIST OF APPENDIX FIGURES Appendix Figure Title ,.... I II-I III-2 III-3 111-4 Side view of a fishwheel . Top view of a fishwheel ..............•.............. Fishwheel lead weir (upstream view). Fishwheel debris deflector (top view). 3 03 3 04 3 08 3 08 ,-APPENDIX III A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Fishwheel Operation Design A schematic of the type of fishwheel to be deployed on the Su/Hydro program is shown in Figure 111-1.The axle is adjustable to accomodate water depths ranging from seven (7)to four (4)·feet:the axle turns on nylon pillow blocks.The pillow blocks are designed to allow friction adjustments therein providing a breaking mechanism. Native spruce poles form the baskets and paddles.Basket web or netting is rubber coated fencing material.Floatation is provided by styrofoam logs shielded by plywood.The wheel is equipped with a plywood livebox which is collared between the two (2)offshore floatation logs.A fish sampling platform spans the two (2)outside floats on the downstream side of the livebox.The fishwheel is anchored by a cable or rope bridle anchored to a deadman upstream of the fishwheel.The wheel is kept offshore by a boom log arrangement as shown in Figure 111-2. Lead Weir The purpose of positioning the liveboxon the offshore side of the fishwheel is to allow placement of a weir on the inshore side between the bank and the near shore float.A sketch of the weir is 'presentedi n Fi gure 1II -3.The wei r is compri s'ed of several wi 11 ow or alder pannels contoured to the stream bed.The pannels are held in place by the downstream boom log and on the bottom,by the stream bed. The latter is accomplished by sliding the weir pannels into the water at an upstream angle to the riverbed.The weir is a critical component of the fishwheel.An improperly installed or incomplete weir will allow bank migrant fish to pass inshore of the wheel thus reducing catch. Debris Deflection At a few fishwheel sites it will be necessary to install a debris lead.A deflector which is reasonably efficient in channeling debris past a fishwheel is illustrated in Figure 111-4. Operation The fishwheels are designed to operate at 2.5 revolutions per minute (rpm).Under no circumstances should a fishwheel be operated at a speed greater than 3.5 rpm.The preferred speed is 2.5 rpm with a range between 2.0 and 3.0 rpm.For maximum catch efficiency,fishwheel baskets should be adjusted to scoop within six (6)inches of the bottom. Anything more than six (6)inches will reduce catch efficiency . .... .~...... Maintenance .... .'. 1 Lead weirs should be inspected to insure they are functioning once every (3)days.Debris cleaning should be performed as often as necessary but at least once every day.Inspection must be made twice daily for wear,broken components and loose riggings.Appropriate re- pairs are to be effected at first indication of a problem.Fishwheel basket depth should be monitored twice daily and appropriately adjusted . - - ,~..-[ ~.,...- .'11s...::r Q>.... u.. ~-------._.., j j j j j j .j j j j j j j j j •j . .-j -j j j j j j j I j j j j j j j j j j j Qls..::s C"l..-u.. N I--- j7}(~I 1:" l "2: 1 ~~~.... ~ ~ ~ 1 "'"-J ~ 1 ..J ~.\ "S~~\LJ ~ .I J:I 3 '-.../ J. I ~ )... I :t lit , V) ().... ..... ~ LL r-. ~, - - I L E;92)w£.IR.e""P S'T.RE,;/"f ) vIEw.) D~8~/S DET=LEr-loR.. Crol'VIEW) .--. lit IIr\ I I I J ,,""".....,.UJ.I Figure III-3. '- - \-- ~-~,, -, ~. Figure II1-4. r c ~,E I"OG5o..""/:.~~~~~-=.:....:.:..--!.'\ liNe "'1Itl " .... ...... ....... - - -. - .... APPENDIX IV A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Fish Tagging "".. - - TABLE OF CONTENTS DEVELOPMENT OF MARKING OF FISH 000 01 IDEAL FISH MARKS......................................................000 01 PETERSEN DISC TAGS....................................................000 02 FLOY TAGS.............................................................000 03 FDM TAGGING GUNS AND ANCHOR TAGS......................................000 06 DISK-DANGLER TYPE TAG.................................................000 07 LIST OF APPENDIX Appendix Figure Title Page IV-1 FDM-68 tagging guns and anchor tags 000 05 IV-2 Tag clamp holding two hypodermic needles (from Pe 1gen 1954)........................................000 08 IV-3 Disk-dangler tag in place (after Pelgen 1954)000 08 ------~---~~--'" - APPENDIX IV A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Fish Tagging (ADF&G,1976) Development of Marking of Fish A mark can be defined as a brand,label,seal or tag which identifies an object to show the maker or owner.Early tagging of fish was begun by land owners along streams who were interested in conserving salmon and trout runs.Charles Atking tagged Atlantic salmon in 1873 in Maine's Penobscot River and several recoveries were noted in following years.T.W.Fulton of Scotland (1893)and C.G.J.Petersen of Denmark (1894)both used numbered buttons or disks on plaice (flatfish)and other fish species in the Atlantic Ocean.The Petersen disk has been one of the most successful types of tags and most widely used over the years. Exact figures on the rate of development of tagging are hard to accumulate,but there are estimates that by 1910 about 100,000 fish had been marked with tags.By 1936,the total was around 600,000 marked fish.Presently many millions of fish (also molluscs,crustacea and sea mammals)are being tagged every year for the purpose of studying popu- lation dynamics and migrations. Ideal Fish Marks Information on what constitutes an ideal fish mark,the types of marks,purposes of tagging and methods of tagging and recovery are spread through the fisheries literature. J Arnold (1966)sU9gested the following criteria for an ideal fi sh mark. 1.It should be retained essentially unaltered for life of fish regardless of the age at which applied. 2.It should have absolutely no effect of fish's behavior, reproductions,life-span,growth,feeding,movement, vulnerability to predation,angling or other external factors. 3.It should not tangle in vegetation or nets of any kind. 4.It should be inexpensive and easl1y manufactured . .5.It should be usable on any size fish without significant alteration. {"oo 01 - 6.It should not be found in nature nor should it be possible to confuse it with any other mark,natural or artificial. 7.It should be easily applied to fish in the field without the need for an anesthetic. 8.It should be easily detected in the field by untrained personnel or the public. 9.If the marked fish is preserved as a scientific specimen, or for later examination,the mark should not be affected by the preservation. - :~ 10.There should be enough possible variations of the mark so that many individuals or many small groups can be identified separately. 11.The marking substance should not present any health or safety hazard to the biologist,fish,or the public. 12.The mark should not cause adverse public relations by spoiling edible parts of the fish. Obviously,no one mark satisfies all the above listed require- ments and it generally only satisfies a few of them.One of the critical ,-problems of a research project is to decide on the best mark for the particular circumstances. Both Floy and Peterson disc tags have been utilized in the Susitna River drainage in the past and will be used to tag fish at the Sunshine,Talkeetna and Curry tag recapture sites. Peterson Disc Tags One (1)inch diameter,sequentially numbered Peterson disc ~-tags will be utilized at the Curry site.The color code will be inter- national orange. ~Tagging procedures will be reviewed in the field as it is difficult to explain without having tags and a fish in hand.Generally, the following steps are followed: 1.Hold prepared tag (pin,disc,and numbered tag)with pl i ers and insert through the cart"il age immedi ately under the dorsal fin. - 2.Place a blank tag on the pin and cut off all but 3/8 inch of the pin with a cuttjng pliers. l~ 3.Twist remalnlng pin in an inward and rolling motion so that·the pin lies flat against the disc and forms a loop. Here are a couple suggestions that will help: 1.Use a sharpening stone to make a sharp point on the tagging pins.This can be done ahead of time and will make penetration easier. 2.Prepare tags prior to making fishwheel checks.Assemble tags in sequential order and stick them in a piece of styrofoam:pint clear buffer disc t tag. Floy Tags ~Sequentially numbered FT-4 Floy tags will be utilized at the Sunshine and Talkeetna sites.Color code for the Sunshine site will be international orange and yellow for the Talkeetna Site. Tagging procedures will be demonstrated in the field;generally the following steps are followed: 1.Slide tag over barbed end of tagging needle.Run the needle completely through the fish in the anterior carti- lage immediately below the dorsal fin. 2.Disconnect tube from the needle and tie-off with overhand knot. - Several suggestions are: 1.Keep two (2)or three (3)tagging needles available in the event of a loss. 2.Use a sharpening stone to maintain a sharp point on the taggin~needle.This can be done ahead of timet making tagging easier. 3.Prepare tags prior to making fishwheel checks.Assemble tags in sequential order on a board and tape them in placet thus allowing them to be withdrawn easily. i~OO.03 ,-- """ B.RESIDENT AND ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES '.." Figure IV-l.FDM-68 TAGGING GUNS AND ANCHOR TAGS ,. ,... .- - Ff!<, .... (actua~size) MODIFIED GUN INSERTS TAG UP TO 1-1/8 INCH THE FDM"-68 MODIFIED GUN HAS PROVED TO BE VERY EFFICIENT IN TAGGING VERY SMALL FISH AS WELL AS LARGE FISH.THE LONGER NEEDLE MAKES IT POSSIBLE TO INSERT A TAG INTO A SMALL BODIED FISH AT THE DESIRED ANGLE.THIS ALLOWS THE TUBING BEARING LEGEND AND NUMBER 'IO II FLOW" ALONGSIDE THE FISH"S BODY AS IT SWIMS.THIS PLACEMENT OF THE TAG IS NOT AS POSSIBLE WITH A SHORT GUN.THE REGULAR NEEDLE IS .085 OD. THE HEAVY DUTY NEEDLE (RECOMMENDED FOR FISH 10 POUNDS AND UP)IS .096 OD •.THE LIGHT NEEDLE IS .073 aD • i~OO 05 .- l. 2. -3. ~~ l. iP"2. 3. 4. ~ l. 2. .~3. 4. 5. - .,.. FDM-68 Tagging Guns and Anchor Tags Operating Instructions Loading Gun Place gun in left hand with forefinger through the trigger ring. Hold tag clip between the thumb and index finger of the right hand with the extension of the IIrunnerll (the bar holding the tags) toward the gun. Insert the runner into the feed slot of the gun.Press the runer down until the first tag engages the feed mechanism. Suggested Tagging Procedure A clip of blank tags is provided for practice tagging. Make certain the fish is held FIRMLY or anesthetized when being tagged.A squirming fish may bend the needle. Insert needle on the left side of the fish forcinq it forward through the dorsal rays and toward the anterior of the dorsal.This placement will lock the liT-bar"firmly behind the interneural rays. Once the needle has been inserted s hold the gun FIRMLY against the fish's body while compressing the handle.Do not release the compressed handle until the needle has been withdrawn. Unloading Gun '1.Pull the release lever (the'black metal lever in front of the trigger ring.)Withdraw clip . .If Gun Jams DO NOT attempt to clear the jam by forcing the tags through the mechanism.This will cause damage.'.. Remove clip from gun. Turn the plastic lock lever (right side near needle)180 degrees so lever points forward and remove needle. Remove jammed tag from from needle or gun.Inspect needle and ram. The tag (if not damaged)can be re-used by inserting the T-bar into the needle two thirds back from the point of the needle.This can be accomplished only if the tag clip has been removed from the gun. BE CERTAIN TO LINE UP THE SLOT IN THE NEEDLE WITH THE SLOT IN THE GUN. Care of Gun and Needle 1.Operate gun without tags in warm soapy water to remove dirt s slime and scales. 2.Rinse carefully in warm (not hot)water.Shake and wipe dry. 3.Store in warm area to remove moisture from inside aun. 4.Lubricate with "WD-40 1l which prevents rusts penetrates and dis- places moisture.. 5.WHEN TAGGING UNDER SALINE CONDITIONS s THE GU~SHOULD NOT BE EXPOSED TO AIR ANY LONGER THAN ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY.A PAN OF FRESH WATER SHOULD BE KEPT AT HAND TO IISLOSH"·OFF THE GUN CONTINUALLY.IF TAGGING IS INTERRUPTED,THE GUN (INCLUDING TAGS)SHOULD BE KEPT IMMERSED IN FRESH WATER.,.'i'.06.','00 .. "'" ..... Disk-Dangler Type Tag The disk-dangler type tag is attached to the body of the fish beneath the dorsal spine with two strands of wire.A small,visel'ike clamp holding two hypodermic needles of size number 18 is used to pass the wires through the fish's body.The needles are put in place and pushed through the body in one motion.The tag wires are then inserted into the hollow needles and the clamp pulled outward.Tags are attached with one wire anterior and one posterior to the origin of the dorsal fin.The needles are spaced so that their points are approximately one- hal finch apart.A spaci ng strap may be pl aced·between the wi res to keep them from pulling together and tearing flesh when the wires are twisted together.If a single person is tagging,however,such a strap may be impossible to hold in place.If care is used in twisting the wires,excess injury to the fish may be avoided without the use of such a spacer.Excess wire is cut off the twisting end,and the exposed wire and tag are bent back. .;~.n.,;0',f17··:"-v .V - .... - - - ----_.._---~---------------------.------ Figure IV-2. Figure IV.,3. Tag clamp holding two hypodermic needles (from Pelgen,1954) Disk-dangler tag in place (after Pelgen.19'54) -. - - - APPENDIX V A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Electro-Shock;ng~Operat;ons - - .... TABLE OF CONTENTS ELECTRO-SHOCKING BOAT OPERATIONS 000 01 Safety Precauti ons.............. ...... ... ........ .. ... ...........000 01 First Aid for Victims of Electrical Shock........................000 02 MODEL XV-BPG SELF-CONTAINED GAS POWERED ELECTROFISHER (Backpack Mounted)000 04 - APPENDIX V A.ADULT ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Electro-Shocking Boat Operations Safety Precautions These procedures must be adhered to for the safety of all operators of this equipment. 1.A minimum of two (2)persons is required to safely and effi- ciently operate the unit,provided the control box can be easily monitored by the boat operator.For two (2)man operations,the boat operator should be capable of adjusting voltage and amperage,activating the power switches on the control box,and shuting down the generator without having to leave his station as outboard operator. Should these conditions not be met,then a minimum crew would be three (3).One (1)person should monitor the control box at all times. 2.All personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the equipment and its operation.Personnel should be briefed as to emergency procedures should the situation arise. 3.All equipment,connections and wiring should be checked before each day's operation.Particular attention should be payed to the platform railing and safety foot switch.The railing should be strong and secure enough to support a man's weight. The safety switch must be free of rust and corrosion.It would be advisable to have the metal railing insulated with foam pipe insulation or plastic electrical tape.Wiring should be left exposed to facilitate inspection of the insulation. 4.··Only dip nets with fully insulated handles will be used. 5.Personnel will wear only hip boots or chest waders that are completely leak proof.The platform surface should be of a non-skid type.Rubber gloves are advisable as an added safety measure. 6.All personnel will wear life jackets or other adequate float- ation devices.Should anyone fall overboard,it is unlikely that he will have enough muscle control to swim. 7.Never start the generator until all connections for the particular mode of operation are complete.While traveling between points of operation,the electrodes should be disconnected from the electrical source if the generator is to be left running,i.e.,for night operations. - 8.Never change the position of the boom or handle the electrodes unless the leads are disconnected and all switches on the control box are in the 1I 0 ff ll position. 9.When disconnections are made or lines left disconnected,all switches on the control box should remain in the "off ll posi- tion to preclude any load on the wiring. 10.All personnel should be familiar with first aid treatment for shock victims and be trained in artificial respiration:At least one (1)member of the crew should have completed a recognized first aid course (hopefully he will not be the one injured). 11.The equipment shall not be operated in such a manner so as to endanger the public.The current shall be turned off anytime the public is in the immediate proximity of the aparatus,be it on shore,in the water,or in a boat. -In an emergency,the electrical current into the water may be broken in three ways: - - - 1.By releasing the foot pedal switch which is located on the platform and controlled by the dip net operator. 2.By turning off all switches on the control box.One (1)man must be operating the control box at all times. 3.By actuating the grounding switch effectively killing the generator.If possible,switches should be located both on the dipping platform and near the motor operator and wired so that activation of either switch will kill the generator: First Aid for Victims of Electrical Shock Should anyone fall overboard or receive an electrical shock, the,unit will be immediately shut off.Rescue the victim from the water or free him from the electrical circuit as quickly as possible.Act quickly,as an-y delay in removing the person from the electrical field or circuit will lessen the chance of resuscitating him.Do not endanger yourself ~ttempting to rescue someone with the power on. If the victim is not breathing,begin artificial respiration at once.Mouth-to-mouth resuscitation is recommended.Continue re- suscitation until you are certain breathing is restored.Frequently, after a temporary recovery,a victim will stop breathing again.If natural breathing stops,resume artificial respiration at once. Position yourself on your knees beside his chest. Find the lower end of his breast bone. Physical shock is a serious complication that is likely to occur after electrical shock.Shock can interfere with the normal action of the heart,respiration and circulation,so every precaution should be taken to prevent this condition from further weakening the victim.The victim should be lying flat and it is most important that he be kept as warm as possible,even during artificial respiration. The following procedure is recommended in cases where it appears the victim's heart has stopped: Place the victim on his back.l. 2. 3. ~4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Place the heel of your hand one inch above that end. Place your other hand on top of the first hand. Press down firmly with about sixty (60)pounds of weight. Repeat every second until heart starts. If necessary,apply mouth-to-mouth resuscitation as follows: one (1)operator -15 compressions,two breaths or two (2) operators -one breath every fifth compression. The above procedure would be life sustaining should the victim -go into ventricular fibrillation. Admittedly,the above first aid procedures are brief,but due to lack of more competent means to deal with electrical accidents, this should serve as a guide for emergency treatment until the patient can be taken to medical facilities., NOTE:A COpy Cf THIS PROCEDURE MUST BE (J\1J30ARD THE SHOCKING BOAT AT ALL TIIV[S!!!! - - B.RESIDENT AND JUVENILE ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Model XV-BPG Self-Contained Gas Powered Electrofisher ,-(Backpack Mounted) ~- --. Since the introduction of the lightweight,quiet and reliable TAS-300 alternator,Smith-Root,Inc.now offers the type XV-BPG,a gaso- line powered backpack electrofisher.Designed for very low to medium conductivity waters,the Type SV-BPG delivers a high 1100 volt peak DC for the very low conductivity waters and as much as 2.5 amps for the higher conductivity waters. Both the electrofisher and alternator are mounted on a com- fortable,reinforced plastic pack frame.The new pack frame not only outlasts aluminum packs,it provides an extra margin of safety from electric shock providing an insulation between the operator and the electrical apparatus.The pack frame harness has been designed to provide instant release should it become necessary to quickly drop away the complete pack frame from the operator. - - - - - - SPECIFICATIONS: Power Source Recommended Conductivity Range Input Power Output Modes: AC Pulsed DC Pulsed DC (x 2) Metering Voltage Selection Circut Protection Safety Protection Engine Kill TAS Model QEG-300 Watt gas- powered generator Approximately 10 to 200 micro- mhos/cm2 max.Useable to 400 micromhos 300 watts,450 watts intermittent (all voltage ranges) 130-390 VRMS in 130 volt steps 180-550 VDC peak fast rise,slow decay -360-11 00 V Output current 0 -2.5 amp Rotary Switch Electronic circuit breaker with reset Tilt switch kills engine if shocker is tilted beyone 45 degrees Push-button switch mounted on pack frame Backpack Frame Lightweight,comfortable frame with padded shoulder straps,padded hip belt and emergency quick release .- """ - ..." - - -I Wei ght 36 1bs . Standard Equipment:TAS-300 Generator,Anode Pole with Pull-Behind Cathode: optional Cathode pole available. Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice 1/81 {'no 05 ,~ - ~- APPENDIX VI A.ADULT ANADROMOUSFISHERIES STUDIES Habitat Site Locations B.INTEGRATED RESIDENT AND JUVENILE ANADROMOUS FISHERIES AQUATIC HABITAT AND INSTREAM FLOW STUDIES Habitat Site Locations TABLE OF CONTENTS SYSTEM OF SPECIFYING GEOGRAPHIC LOCATIONS 000 02 Appendix Figure VI-l VI-2 VI-3 VI-4 VI-5 VI-6 VI-7 VI-8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Title System used by ADF&G in this study to specify .geographic locations 000 02 Adult Anadrolllous Project study 1ocati ons on the Susitna River,Cook Inlet to Devil Canyon, 1981..............................................000 04 RJ and AH sampl ing locations on the Susitna River,Cook Inlet to Kroto Slough,1981 000 05 R~J and AH samp 1i ng 1oca t ions on the Sus itna River,Deshka River to Sunshine Creek,1981 000 06 RJ and AH sampl ing 1ocati ons on the Sus itna River,Birch Creek Slough to Sherman,1981 000 08 RJ and AH sampl ing locations on the Susitna Ri ver,Fourth of July Creek to Devi 1 Canyon, 1981 000 08 RJ and AH sampling locations on the Susitna River,Fog Creek to Jay Creek,1981 000 09 RJ and AH sampling locations on the Susitna River,Goose Creek to Oshetna River,1981 000 10 Appendix Table Title LIST OF APPENDIX TABLES ~i ,[!MMI ..- VI-l Resident and Juvenile Anadromous study sampling locations (Township,Range,Section,Grid)on the Susitna River,1981 000 11 """' - - - System of Specifying Geographic Locations .For conciseness and for use in the computer processing,it is convenient to use a modification of the General Land Office method of specifying locations as developed by federal and state agencies in Montana (MDFWP,1979). In this report,locations of features such as sampling points are specified by using 12 characters.The first three characters of the location give the township,the next three characters the range. The next two give the section number within the township,and the n~xt tract,the quarter-quarter section (40-acre tract),and the quarter- quarter-quarter section (lO-acre tract).These subdivisions of the 640- acre section in the northeast quadrant.If there is more than one feature in a 10-acre tract,consecutive digits beginning with 2 are added to the number.For example,if a sample was collected in Section 2"1,Township 9 North,Range 20 West,it would be numbered 09N20E21DAA2. The letters DAA indicate that the site is in the Nl/4 of the Nl/4 of the SE1/4,and the number 2 following the letters DAA indicates there are at least two sampling locations in this lO-acre tract. 09N20W210AA2 FigureVI-l.System used by ADF&G in this study to specify geographic locations. - - ;reference ~p Sunshine Tag/Recapture "femtna !River •Susitna Station' Sonar COOK INLET Figure VI -2.Anadromous Adult Project study locations,1981. N "'"' - COOK.IN LET' Figure VI ~3.RJ and AH sampling locations,1981. N t - - Figure VI -4.RJ and AH sampling locations,1981. N t .... ,... N t SCALE 5 0 5 MItESEE"S:::::;:==::=::==:::EF?3=i====~=:::::::JJ Figure VI -5.RJ and AH sampling locations,1981 . - ,~ .0::-N I.lJ 1..~ -.-.~,,- ~~~~,,\ICv~ - ..... SCA.LE SE3EC:EF3==r::::::EF330========:::::J~~I LE5 - -Figure VI ~6.RJ and AH sampling locations,1981. i::OO 08 SCALE 5 0 5 ~ILES f:F3::::::3::=EF""'d2::::Jbd;;;;;;;;C====::J1 - - - Figure VI -7.RJ and AH sampling locations,1981. Figure VI ~8.RJ and AH sampli~g locations,1981. N t 5CA.lE o Table 1.Susitna River Resident and Juvenile Anadromous Fish Sampling Locations. 1981. LOCATION MAP F"C.ODE SAMPLING LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION GilD Estuary to Talkeetna: ,.".1 A.Mainstem Susitna (.75 mile south of Alexander River Mouth)15 N 07 W 07..... B.Alexander River ....(Mouth)15 N 07 W 07 AB i (.75 Mile Upstream)15 N 07 W 05 F"(1.5 Mile Upstream)16 N 07 W 31 C.Mainstem Susitna-(Side-Channel Opposite Alexander R.Mouth)15 N 07 \~07 I"'"D.Mainstem Susitna (1.0 mile North of Alexander River Mouth)15 N 07 ~I 05 ~ 2 A.Mainstem Susitna (Willow Creek Mouth)20 N 05 W 34 CA -B.Willow Creek (Mouth)20 N 05 W 34 i (Parks Highway)19 N 04 WI 06 AC """3 A.Mainstem Susitna (100 yards Above Little Wi 11 ow Creek)20 N 05 W .27 BA-4 A.Slough A (Rustic Wilderness Subdivision)21 N 05 W 25 CB B.Mainstem Susitna (East Bank,700 yards- above Slough A)21 N 05 W 23 DO """C.Mainstem Susitna (West Bank.Opposit Sl.A)21 N 05 W 23 DA O.Mainstem Susitna (East Bank,below Slough....- E Head)21 N 05 t~24 BA .-E.Slough E (.25 mile above Rustic Wilderness SUbdivision)21 N 05 W 25 BC- (a-l) -Table 1 -Cont1d. ,.." LOCATION . MAP "'"C.ODE SAMPLING LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION G2.ID 5 A..Mainstem Susitna (West bank,adjacent to "'"Susitna Landing)(C)21 N 05 W 13 .BC (West bank,Slough Mouth)(A)21 N 05 W 12 CC B.Mainstem Susitna (.25 mile,West of -Kashwitna River Mouth)21 N 05 W 13 AB C.Mainstem Susitna (100 feet below ~L Kashwitna River Mouth)21 N 05 W 13 AC J D.Kashwitna River (Mouth)21 N 05 W 13 AAC .r---- J+A.Caswell Creek (Mouth)21 N 04 \AI 06 BA 7'A.Mainstem Susitna (Site A,below Sheep F Creek Slough Mouth)" (Site B,below Sheep Creek Slouth Mouth). J-B.Sheep Creek Slouth (Mouth)22 N 05 W 25 DO r-- I C.Mainstem Susitna (East channel,.5 mileI above Sheep Creek Slough Mouth)(D)22 N 05 W 24 DD L (East channel,.6 mile above Sheep Creek Slough Mouth)(E)22 N 05 W 24 DA,r D.Slough (~50 mile NW of Sheep Creek I Slough Mouth)(F)22 N 05 W 24 DB (.75 mile NW of Sheep Creek Slough L Mouth)(H) E.MainstemSusitna (Center Channel,.9 mile;-across from Sheep Creek 'Slough Mouth)(1)22 N 05 W 23 DB '~(Center Channel,.9 mile above Sheep-Creek Slough Mouth)(G)22 N 05 W 24 BC (a-2) Table 1 -Cont1d. LOCATION MAP ~C.ODE SAMPLING LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION G~ID 7 ~.Majnstem Susltna (Cont'd.) I F'"(Center Channel,1.0 mile above Sheep Creek Slough Mouth)(J)22 N 05 W 23 AB F.Slough L (West Center Channel,below !"""Echo Island)(L)22 N 05 W 14 CD G.Mainstem Susitna (Below Echo Island)(M)22 N 05 W 14 CD-,(Adjacent to Echo Island)(K)22 N 05 W 14 DC , B A.Mainstem Susitna (Below Montana Creek ~ Mouth)(B)23 N 04 W 07 AB -B.Mainstem Susitna (West Channel,Slough Mouth,1.25 mile above Montana Creek)(F)23 N 05 W 13 DC -. Side-Slough (West Channel,small sloughC. -l.0 mile below Montana Creek)(G)23 N 05 W 13 AD D.Side-Slough (West Channel,slough .25 mile ,...below Montana Creek)(E)23 N 05 W 12 DB E.Montana Creek (Mouth)(A)23 N 05 W 07 AB-F•Mainstem Susitna (East Channel,.25 mile .....above Montana Creek)(C)23 N 04 W 06 CD (East Channel,.50 mile above Montana -Creek)(D)23 N 04 W 06 CD G.Beaver Pond (West Bank,1.0 mi 1e above ~ Montana Creek Mouth). -H.Mainstem Susitna (West bank,slough Mouth above Montana Creek) 1!11!l1$li (East Bank,1.0 mile above Montana Creek) (a-3). Table 1 -Cont'd. ,----LOCATIONIJMAP ,C.ODE SAMPL ING'-LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION G~ID t . H.Mainstem Susitna (Cont1d.) (Center Channel,1.25 mile above L Montana Creek) I I.Slough (West bank,2 miles above Montana J~Creek) I 9 A.Rabideux Creek 24 N 05 W 16 AAB I (Mouth) ~ (500 feet Upstream) ! Mainstem Susitna (10 A..25 mile below -L-Parks Highway Bridge)24 N 05 W 15 BA h B.Mainstem Susitna (Parks Highway Bridge)24 N 05 W 15 BA A.Mainstem Susitna (1.0 mile South of t-Sunshine Creek Mouth)24 N 05 W 10 I B.Mainstem Susitna (.75 mile South oftSunshineCreekMouth)24 N 05 W 14 f-C.Mainstem Susitna (At Sunshine Creek)24 N 05 W 14 AA D.Sunshine Creek 24 N 05 l4 14 AAIr(Mouth) "1---p2 A.Birch Creek Slough (Mouth)25 N 05 W 25 (.25 mile below Birch Creek Mouth)25 N 05 W 25 -F (Birch Creek Mouth)25 N 05 W 25 - (Head)25 N 05 W 12 ~13 A.Trapper Creek (Mouth)25 N 05 W 15 t 4 A.Slough Fed by Cache Creek (Mouth),1.5 mi. South West of Birch Creek Slough Head 25 N 05 W 14 (a-4) Table 1 -Cont'd. LOCATION MAP ~GODE SAMPLING LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION GIHD 14 B.,Slough-Susitn~(1.0 mile South West of ,~,Birch Creek Slough Head 25 N 05 W 11 C.Mainstem Susitna (.25 mile below head of..... Birch Creek Slough)25 N 05 W 12 ..-D•Matnstem Susitna (South West side of Island,1.5 mile South of Cache Creek Mouth)25 N 05 W 01 .... E.Mainstem Susitna (South West side of island , 1.0 mile South of Cache Creek Mouth)25 N 05 rJ 01.- F.Mainstem Susitna (West channel,.75 mile -South of Cache Creek Mouth)26 N 05 ~J 35 G.Mainstem Susitna (Below Mouth of Cache-Creek Slough)26 N 05 W 36 CB (Mouth of Cache Creek Slough)26 N 05 W 35 DA- 15 A.Cache Creek (Mouth)26 N 05 H 36 CB ~~(Inside Mouth)26 N 05 W 35 ABC pWiIfr -- -, ,.... 1"'"'- ~ {a-5) Table 1 -Cont'd. I LOCATION II MAP SAMPLING LOCATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION GElD1C.ODE !Talkeetna to Devil's Canyon:r-.~A.Mainstem Susitna (Billian Slough Mouth)26 N 05 W 23 AAD2 J-B.Billian Slouth (Mouth)26 N 05 W 23 AAD3 h-(Open Lead Below Railroad Trestle)26N 05 W 13 CCD A.Mainstem Susitna (West side of Island,r-Chulitna River Confluence).~26 N 05 W 14 l-B.Mainstem Susitna (East side of Island,.25 mile North of Chulitna River Confluence)26 N 05 W 14 C.Mainstem Susitna (.75 mile North of t= Chulitna River Confluence)26 N 05 W 14 (1.0 mile North of Chulitna R.Confluence)26 N 05 W 11 (1.25 mile North of Chulitna R.Confluence)26 N 05 W 11 ¥A.Mainstem Susitna (Side-Channel Below Slough 2 Mouth)26 N 05 W 02 CBD~Mainstem Susitna (Side-Channel above •B. Slough 2)26 N 05 W 02 BCD... 19 A.Mainstem Susitna (Below Mouth of Whiskers -Creek Slough)26 N 05 W 03 ADC (Adjacent to Mouth of Whiskers .. r-Creek Slough)26 N 05 W 03 ABC3 :1 B.Whiskers Creek Slough (200 yards ".... above Mouth)26 N 05 H 03 ADB I"'" C.~hiskers Creek (Mouth)26 N 05 W 03 D.Mainstem Susitna (Side-channel,1.0 mile -east of Whiskers Creek)26 N 05 W 02 (b-l) -Table 1 -Cont'd. -LOCATION . MAP CODE SAHPLING SITES TmmSHIP RANGE SECTION GRID ""'"20 A.,Mainstem Susitna (.25 mile NW of Whiskers Creek Mouth)26 N 05 W 02 .". B.Slough 3 (Above Whiskers Creek Slough)27 N 05 W 35 CCC2 ....C.Slough 3B (Mouth)27 N 05 W 35 CCB D.Mainstem Susitna (Side Channel Adjacent-to Slough 3)27 N 05 W 35 CCA ....21 A.Mainsetm Susitna (Adjacent to Slough 5)27 N 05 W 01 CCA 22 A.Slough 6A 28 N 05 W 13 CAB3-23 A.Lane Creek (Mouth)28 N 05 W 12 ADD2 24 A.Oxbow II-(Mouth)29 N 04 ~l 16 CAD4-25 A.Mainstem Susitna (Curry)29 N 04 W 10 CBB2 .-26 A.Side Channel Below Slough 8A (Above Mouth)30 N 04 W 25 DBA (Below Mouth of Slough 8A)30 N 04 W 25 DAB """B.Slough 8A (Mouth)30 N 03 W 30 CBB (Above Mouth)30 N 03 W 30 BCD- (Beaver Pond)30 N 03 W 30 AAA ,..,..C.Mainstem Susitna (Above Slough 8A)30 N 03 W 20 ACB '27 A.Slough 9 (Mouth)30 N 03 ~I 16 CBB (Abqve Mouth)30 N 03 W 16 CBAB (Below Bend)30 N 03 W 16 CBAA- 28 .A.Mainstem Susitna (300 yards below 4th of -July Creek)30 N 03 W 03 DCAB (200 yards below 4th of July Creek)30 N 03W 03 DCAA =0 B.Mainstem Susitna (Side channel,adjacent to 4th of July Creek)30 N 03 W 03 DAD - (b-2) Table 1 -Cont/d. LOCATION .~iCODE SAMPLING lOCATiON TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION GilD-- 28 C"Side Channel (Beaver pond outlet,above F'4th of July Creek)30 N 03 W 03 .ADD 29 A.Slough9A (Above Mouth)31 N 03 H 36 DCB ~~ (Fi rst Poo 1)31 N 03 W 36 DCA (Open Lead)31 N 03 ~1 36 DBDC- (Second Pool)31 N 03 W 36 DBD ~B.Mainstem Susitna-Between 9A &10 (Lower,Lead)31 N 03 W 36 DBC.... (Middle,Lead)31 N 03 W 36 ACD (Upper,Lead)31 N 03 W 36 ADC~ 30 A.Mainstem Susitna-Below Slough 10 31 N 03 W 36 AAC4 ....B.Slough 10 (Lower,Pool)31 N 03 t4 36 AABD2 (Middle,Pool)31 N 03 W 36 AABA , (Tributary Stream)31 N 03 W 25 DDC ....31 A.Slough 11 (Lower Reach)31 N 02 W 19 DDD (r~i ddl e,Reach)31 N 02 W 20 CBA -B.Mainstem Susitna (Above S]ough 13)31 N 02 W 19 ADB3 C.Side-Channel (Above Slough 13)31 N 02 W 19 ADA .- 32 A.Slough 14 (Lower Bend)31 N 02 W 19 ACA r (Beaver Pond)31 N 02 W 19 ABD 33 A.Mainstem Susitna (Beneath Gold Creek -L Railroad Bridge)31 N 02 W 20 BAC2 B.Mainstem Susitna (Tributary Creek ""'" Above Gold Creek)31 N 02 W 20 BAA ~C.~ainstem Susitna (!'~O~jh Bank above GoldreekRailroadBrodqe 31 N 02 W 17 CDD tb-3) Table 1 -Cont'd. LOCATION . MAP CODE SAMPLING SITES TmmSHIP RANGE SECTION GRID 34 A..Slough 16 (Mouth)31 N 02 W 17 ABD (First Lead)31 N 02H 17 ABO (Second Lead)31 N 02 W 17 ABO 35 A.Indian River (Mouth)31 N 02 H 09 OD2 B.Indian River (Approx.3 miles Upstream)32 N 02 l~33 ABD5 G.Indian River-Beaver Pond (Approx.7 mil es Upstream)32 N 02 W 11 ADC2 £ D.Mainstem Susitna (Above Indian River)31 N 02 W 09 DCB2 36 A.Slough 17 (Mouth)31 N 02 W 09 DCA (Above Mouth)31 N 02 W 09 DBD B.Mainstem Susitna (Above Slouth 18)31 N 02 W 10 CBD ,37 A.Slough 20 (Mouth)31 N 02 W 10 ADA (Middle Reaches)31 N 02 W 11 BBD (Upper Tri bLltary)31 N 02 W 11 BBA 38 A.Side Channel Below Slough 21 (Lower)31 N 02 W 02 CAC (Middle)31 N 02 W 02 CAA (Upper)31 N 02 W 02 ABO .39 A.Slough 21 (Mouth)31 N 02 W 02 AAB (Middle)31 N 02 W 02 AAA (Upper)32 N 02 W 36 GGC r 40 A.Mainstem Susitna(Above Slough 21)32 N 02 W 36 AGD 41 A.Portage Greek (Mouth)32 N 01 W 25 CDB4 B.(8 miles Upstream,..Be1ow Thoroughfare Greek)33 N 01 E 25 DBA4 ~~N m ~.25 Arn? C.(11 mil es Upstream-Mouth of Thorouahfare Creek).33 N 02 E 17 GGB3 .- (b-4) Table 1 -Contld. LOCATION . MAP r-CODE SAMPLING La-CATION TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION GelD '.. Devil IS Canyon to Tyone River: ~Fog Creek (Mouth)31 N 04 E 16 DSB42A. 43 A.Tsusena Creek (Mouth)32 N 04 E 36 ADB """44 A.Deadman Creek (Mouth)32 N 05 E 26 COB -45 A.Watana Creek (Mouth)32 N 06 E 25 CCA 46 A.Kosina Creek (Mouth)31 N 08 E 15 BAS .... 47 A.Jay Creek (Mouth)31 N 08 E 13 BCC 48 A.Goose Creek (Mouth)30 N 11 E 32 DBC 49 A.Oshetna River (Mouth)30 N 11 E 34 CCD ~ - - .- . "'" r ;- - ,.... ,.., ~ (c-1 ) - - - - ,.". APPENDIX VII B.RESIDENT AND JUVENILE ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES ~samp'ing Techniques - .... ...,. TABLE OF CONTENTS UNDER ICE SAMPLING TECHNIqUES 000 01 Mi nnow Traps....... ........ .... ........ .......... .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .. .... .... ...... ........ .. ...... ...... .. .... ..000 01 Trot 1;nes .. .... .... .. .. .. .. .... .. .... .. ...... .. .. ...... .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .. .. .. .. ...... .. .. .. .... .... .. .. ...... ....000 03 Hook and Line (Jigging)......•...................................000 05 Burbot Sets "..............................................................................................000 07 Gill Net 000 11 OPEN WATER SArvIPLING TECHN IQUES... ... ......•.. ... .....•.. ...•....••. ...000 13 Mi nnow Traps..........................................................................................................000 13 Beach Seine...........................................................................................................000 16 Hook and Line........................................................................................................000 18 Electroshocker 000 19 Gill Net (Drift and Set)...........................•....•..•...•.000 19 LIST OF APPENDIX FIGURES Appendix Figure Title .... ,.... VII-1 VII-2 VII-3 VII-4 VII-5 VII-6 Minnow trap set under the lee.......................000 02 Trotline set under the ice 000 04 Hook and line jigging under the ice 000 06 Burbot set under the ice............................000 09 Gi 11 net set under the ice..........................000 12 Mi nnow trap set in open water.......................000 14 Appendix Table Title LIST OF APPENDIX TABLES VII-l Preferred hook size and bait types by fish s peel es ". . . . . . . . . . . . . .000 08 - B. 2) 3) 4) 1) 2) 3) 4) APPENDIX VII RESIDENT AND JUVENILE ANADROMOUS FISHERIES STUDIES Under Ice Sampling Techniques Minnow Traps: Assemble as depicted in Figure 1 Materials: One each-Minnow trap (17 1/2"long,9"diameter,1/4 11 square mesh One each-Minnow trap clip One each-(4 oz.)pint,screw-top plastic sampling bottle 15.0 1 -nylon seine twine,#72 Drill 1/4"holes through the plastic sampling bottle at 90°inter- val s around the ci rcumference of the bottl e P and 2"above its bottom. Dri 11 a 1/8 11 hole through the center of the bottl e 's screw cap. Thread a 6"piece of stout nylon line through the hole in the cap. Tie several overhead knots at the end of the line inside the cap so that the cap can be suspended from the line.Tie the other end of this line to the mesh on the minnow trap near the metal clip which secures the trap shut.Screw the cap onto the perforated plastic bottle and the bait container is complete.(Note-steps 1-3 should be completed prior to going into the field). Tie one end of the 151 nylon twine to the metal clip which is used to fasten the two halves of the minnow trap together. Setting (Figure 2): Mater'i a1s: One each-ice auger with 1011 diameter bit and an extension One each~spud bar One each-shovel One each-ice scoop One each-tablespoon,salmon eggs for bait . One leach-5 1 wooden marker stick One each-5 1 orange surveyors flagging tape Placement of gear.Minnow traps can be set in open leads or under the ice in areas that are generally 10 inches to 4 feet deep with slow to moderate currents.Traps are set at 5 yard intervals with 10 traps per sampling site. In order to set a trap underneath the ice,shovel all snow off the spot selected and auger one 10 inch diameter hole in the ice. Clean slush and ice chips out of the hole with the ice scoop. Measure and record the depth of the ice and the water beneath the ice. - ,... Figure 1.Minnow trap set under the ice. CURRFt-..lT.... r~oo 02 """ .- - 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 1) Probe the river bottom with the spud bar to determine the type of bottom which exists at the trap (silt,sand,gravel storie,etc.). Place approximately 1 tablespoon of salmon eggs in the bait jar and screw the top on securely.Thread the clip and the attached seine twine through both ends of the minnow trap as shown in the illustration. Insert the pair of metal hooks on the bottom inside edge of each half of the minnow trap.Once attached these hooks act like a hinge and the trap can be closed and fastened together at the top with the metal clip. Lower the trap through the hole in the ice and orient the trap length wise with the current.Feed out enough line so that the trap sits on the bottom.(Note-in areas with strong currents, additional weight such as a.rock can be placed inside the trap to anchor the trap in place.) Anchor the 5 foot wooden marker stick in the snow or ice next to the hole as shown in Figure 1.Tie the remaining end of the seine twine from the minnow trap to the marker stick.Attach approximately 1.5 feet of orange surveyors tape to the top of the stick to help identify the spot.(Note-when temperatures are below freezing, cover the hole with a piece of slit cardboard.The slit in the cardboard will allow you to align the seine twine in the center of the hole so that it won't freeze to the edges.Then cover the cardboard with snow to retard ice formation in the hole.) The same general procedure is used to set minnow trap sets in open' 1eads. Checking: Minnow traps are rebaited after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. Trot Lines: Materials: -One each-l ll X211 x 18 11 boardw/V-notched end One each-30'-36'-#72 nylon seine twine Two each-large (2/0)snap swivels One each-16-24 oz.sinker One each-l/4-l oz.sinker Six each-leaders or ganging w/baited hooks (Sizes of hooks dependent on species:#4-6 for burbot,#8 for trout Assembly (Figure 2): Cut a length of seine twine to 36 feet and tie a 2/0 snap swivel to one end;attach a 1 oz.Bell sinker to swivel., Figure 2.Trotline set under the ice. 1 ]1 1 1 1 fA1- B c..-p- E- F Go »jjJj -MARk£R..POLE ] ............... -)1) -o (:) o ~ c cuRRENT ~ E 2) 3) 4) 1) --2) 3) p111!m. 4) ,-5) 6) 7) 8) ~ Attach a s,econd 2/0 snap swi ve 1 15 feet from the other end of the twine.Fasten the 16-24 oz.sinker to this swivel. Tie a total of 6 overhand loops into the line at three foot inver- vals between the two weights.(Note-the loops should be at least 1 inch in diameter.) Tie the end of the line,w/o the snap swivel to the 111 X211 X 18 11 board.Wrap the entire length of line around the board lengthwise, from notch to notch.(Note-by not attaching the hooks until you're actually setting the line,tangling and loss of time is avoided. Setting the line (Figure 2): To use this trotline method,a reasonable amount of current and a minimum water depth of 2 feet is needed.A larger hole (lOll)is usually used for ease in recovery and landing fish. Unwind the trotline beside the hole and attach the small bell sinker to the end snap swivel. Hooks are baited variously depending upon species sought.In general cut fish,such as herring or whitefish are the preferred bait for burbot.Salmon eggs singly or in clusters are preferred for trout. Lower the sinker into the hole until you come to the first loop, where you attach a prebaited leader line.Continue lowering the line and attaching leaders until all 6 loops are hooked up. After the 6th loop,attach the larger (l6-24 oz.)sinker to the snap swivel.Lower this sinker down until it rests on the bottom. Tie a half hitch around the board with the line and center the line and board over the hole.The set is complete. Set two trot lines per sampling site at 10 yard minimum intervals. Trot lines are checked and rebaited after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. - -~ Pulling a set: 1)Reverse the setting procedures.As the line is pulled in,remove the hooks and sinkers and rewind the line on the board. Hook &Line (Jigging): Assembly (Figure 3): Materials: One each-Fiberglass Jlgging pole (Approx.length-2.5') 30 1 -20 lb.test,monofilament line ,'00 05 .- Figure 3.Hook and line jigging under the ice . >- - -- - - 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) One each-pack,assorted weights One each~pack,assorted single shank fish hooks (size-10 to 5/0) Setting (Figure 3): Materials: One each-ice auger with 6"to 1011 diameter bit,plus an extension One each-spud bar One each-shovel One each-ice scoop Bait-salmon eggs,salmon roe,whitefish,herring,etc. Placement of gear.The hook and line technique or jigging can be used in almost any area of the river that has stable ice conditions with at least 2 feet of water beneath the ice.However,it is generally reserved for use in deeper sections of the river such as pools,eddys,and tributary mouths. When fishing through the ice,shovel all snow off the sampling site and auger one 611 to lOll diameter hole in the ice for each jigging site.Jigging holes sho~ld be drilled no closer than 5 yards apart and 2 units of gear fished per sampling site. Clean slush and ice chips out of the hole with the ice scoop. Select the hook and bait of your choice,(Table 1). Affix the hook and bait of your choice to the 20 lb.test mono- filament line which has previously been wound on the jigging pole handle and threaded through the eyes of the pole. A sinker can also be attached above or below the baited hook if the current at the sampling site warrants on~. Lower the hook,line,and sinker through the hole in the ice into the water until the sinker rests on the bottom or at a satisfactory depth. Note the time and begin bobbing the jigging pole up and down gently. ~t this point the procedure can be continued until a fish is caught, the bait is lost,or until the sampler decides to change bait, tackle,or move to a more productive site. Standard effort forms should be fi 11 ed out compl ete1y regarding sets and habitat fished.The unit of effort consists of man hours spent fishing per baited hook. BurboJ Sets (Under Ice Application Only): Assemble as depicted in Figure 4 Materials: One each-l ll X211 X 18 11 board w/V-notche'd ends 15 1 -80 lb.test nylon line,yellow i~OO 07 Table 1.Preferred hook size and bait type by fish species. HOOKS SIZES BAITS - ..... Resident Susitna Na.No.I No.No.'.Insect lSalmon I Salmon Her-White-Shnmp Arti- Fi sh Speci es 10 6 2/0 5/0 Il-arva Eggs I Roe ring fish fi- cial i Lure I Burbot X X I X X X! Do 11 y Varden X X X Grayl i nq X X X Rainbow Trout X X X ~ Whitefish/sp . Humpback X X X Round X X X - """ - Figure 4.Burbot set under the ice. m:.....E~-H ARt<ER. POLE' A.BURBOT"S~T"SncK. o OVERHMJO Loop - c CUR'RE~T =====9)~ n F .- ..... - 1) 2) 3) 4) 5), 6) Two each-No.2/0 brass snap swivels or No.1500 trot line clip One each-4 oz.lead weight Two each-wide rubber bands One each-single shank fish hook (size-No.10 to No.5/0) One each-gil leader line (nylon or monofilament) Wrap a rubber band around each end of the notched 111 X 2"X 18 11 board,about 3 1/2 11 from the ends. Tie one end of the 15 1 piece of 18 lb.test nylon line to the center of the notched board with a half hitch. Wind the remainder of the nylon line around the 1"X 2"X 18 11 board between its notches. Tie a 2/0 snap swivel to the free end of the nylon line with a clinch knot and attach a 4 oz.lead weight to the swivel.Secure the sinker to the board with a rubber band. Use another clinch knot to attach the gil leader line to the single shank fish hook of your choice.The other end of the leader should be tied to a 2/0 snap swivel or a No.1500 trot line clip.(Note- this hook and leader assembly can be attached to the burbot set when you are ready to make your set.Hooks and leaders can be made up in groups of 8 to 12 and inserted in sheets of cardboard which are labeled according to hook size.Use of this method provides a safe and efficient way of transporting and storing hooks which are easily accessible when needed. Tie an overhand knot with a 1"loop in the 80 lb.nylon line approximat1ely 12 11 above the lead wei ght assembly. Setting (Figure 4): Materials: One each-ice auger One each-spud bar One each-shovel One each-ice scoop One each-5 1 stick with orange surveyors tape attached Bait-herring,salmon eggs,cheese,etc. 1) 2) -3) 4) ;""'- 5) 6) (l~ Placement of gear.Usually an area 2 1 to}'deep with slow to moderate current and stable conditions. Shovel all snow off the spot selected and auger one 6"to 10" diameter hole in the ice for each burbot set to be put out.Holes should be spaced at 5 yard intervals with 5 sets fished per sampling site. Clean slush and ice chips out of the hole with the ice scoop. Select the hook and bait of your choice. Affix the baited hook and leader to the snap swivel by the 4 oz. lead weight or to the 111 loop above it. Lower the hook,line,and sinker through the hole in the ice into the water until the sinker rests on the bottom or a satisfactory depth. "00 10 - -- 7)Using the remalnlng line,tie a half hitch around the middle of the notched board.Center the line in the middle of the hole and lay the board across the hole.(Note-in below freezing weather,place a slit piece of cardboard under the board so that it covers the hole.Then cover the set with snow.Th"is will retard ice formation in the hole. 8)Erect a 51 stick near the site and tie orange surveyors tape to its top to mark the location of the burbot set. Checking: 1)Burbot sets are checked and rebaited after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. Gill Net: Setting (Figure 5): Materials: - 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) One each-Gill net (length,depth &mesh size vary depending on species and size of anticipated catch.Enter on data dorms specifications and quantity. One each-ice auger with a 1011 diameter bit and an extension One each-murphy stick One each-spud bar One each-hooked pole (approx.6 1 to 8'long) One each-shovel One each-ice scoop 60 1 -1/4"nylon line Two each-stout wooden end poles (approx.height 10'to 15') 3.0'-orange surveyors flagging tape Placement of gear.Under-ice gi11nets are generally utilized in . the wider and deeper stretches-of the river with slow to moderate currents.However,by rolling up the length and width of the net, they can be set in tributaries and side-sloughs that are as small as 3 1 deep and 10'wide.Set only 1 gi11net per sampling site. Bore holes with the ice auger along the general line of set to determine the depth of the water under the ice. Shovel the snow from the ice along a transect where the net will be set.The length of this transect should be equal to the length of the net. Measure off the hole centers to be drilled along the transect so that they correspond with the length of the Murphy Stick.Mark these auger points by starting them with the spud bar. Using a 1011 auger,drill a cluster of three or four holes through the ice at the end points of th net and a single hole at each auger point in between.If the ice is thick~bore all the holes one-half way,add the entension to the bit,and then finish drilling the holes. ""'" <L1 U .~ <L1 ~..s:::: -+..J ~ <L1 "'C ""'"s:: ::::l -+..J <L1 III !""'"-+..J <L1 :s~. ~ .~~t!:l S LO U. <L1-~ ::::l C'l .~ LL. -. - p¥!l, 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13 ) 14) 15) Tie the 1/4"set line to the loop in the float line attached at the lead end of the Murphy Stick.Push the Murphy Stick under the ice and maneuver it in a direction that is slightly upstream of the next hole. Partner holds a hooked pole straight down the second hole to catch the Murphy Stick as it swings downstream in the current or torque on the butt end until the lead end appears in the hole. Use the hooked pole to catch the loop in the float line which.is attached to the set line.Untie the set line and secure it at the hole with the spud bar.Withdraw the Murphy Stick from the initial hole and repeat the process listed above until the set line is strung through the final hole. Roll the net to the proper height so that the float line will not contact the ice and freeze tn. Tie the set line to one end of the gillnet and pull the other end of the set line to string the net under the ice. Before the net is pulled completely through,an end pole is attached to the end still on the ice.This pole must be stout and long enough to reach the river bottom and protrude two to three feet above the ice. The end pole should be secured either by anchoring or driving the lower end 'j nto the ri ver bottom or by lashi ng the top end to a cross pole frozen into the ice at the surface. Attach the final end pole to the other end of the net after pulling it the remainder of the way through.Be careful not to pull too hard and lose the far end.Secure the final end pole. Cover the holes at each end of the net with snow to retard their freezing. Attach orange surveyors tape to each end pole to mark the set.An illustration of the final set it enclosed. - .- -- Checking: 1)Under-ice gillnets are picked after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. Open Water Sampling Techn.iques Minnow Traps (Open Water Application): Assemble as depicted in Figure 6: Materials: One each-Minnow trap (171/2 11 long,9"diameter,1/4"square mesh) One each-Minnow trap clip - - - Figure 6.Minnow trap set in open water. ,'00 14 ~, -2) 3) 4) One each-(4 oz.)pint,screw top plastic sampling bottle 15.0 1 -nylon seine twine,#72 Drill 1/411 holes through the plastic sampling bottle at 90°inter- vals around the circumference of the bottle 1 11 and 211 above its bottom. Drill a 1/8"hole through the center of the bottlels screw cap. Thread a 6"piece of stout nylon line through the hole in the cap. Tie several overhead knots ~t the end of the line inside the cap so that the cap can be suspended from the line.Tie the other end of this line to the mesh on the minnow trap near the metal clip which. secures the trap shut.Screw the cap onto the perforated plastic bottle and the bait container is complete.(Note-steps 1-3 should be complet1ed prior to going into the field). Tie one end of the lSI nylon twine to the metal clip which is used to fasten the two halves of the minnow trap together. Setting (Figure 6): Materials: One each-5 1 wooden marker stick One each-l.5 1 orange surveyors flagging tape 1)Placement of gear.Minnow traps can.be set in areas that are generally lOll to 4'deep with slow to moderate currents.Traps are set at 5 yard intervals with 10 traps per sampling site. 2)Measure and record the depth of the water. 3)Using sight,pole,or a lead weight tied to a heavy nylon seine twine probe the river bottom to determine the type of bottom that exists at the sampling site (silt,sand,gravel,stone,etc.)and record on habitat form. 4)Place approximately 1 tablespoon of salmon eggs in the bait jar and screw the top on securely.Thread the clip and the attached seine twine through both ends of the minnow trap as shown in the illustration. 5)Insert the pair of .metal hooks on the bottom inside edge of each half of the minnow trap.Once attached these hooks act like a hinge and the trap can be closed and fastened together at the top with the metal clip.Refer to illustration. Toss the trap out into the water so that it becomes oriented length wise with the current.Feed out enough line so that the trap sits on the bottom.(Note-in areas with strong currents,additional weight such as a rock can be placed inside the trap to anchor the trap in place.). Anchor the 51 wooden marker stick in the ground along the river bank as shown in the illustration.Tie the remaining end of the seine twine from the minnow trap to the marker stick.Attach approximately 1.5 feet of orange surveyors tape to the top of the stick to help identify the spot. Checking: 1)Minnow traps are rebaited after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. Beach Seine: Assembly (Figure 7): Materials: - .- - ,- 1) 1) 2) 3) 4) Two each-8'poles (aluminum or willow) One each-25 1 to 100 1 beach seine,6'deep,desired mesh size, weighted bottom line and trailing center trap (length, mesh size,depth of seine used to vary with sampling situation.Specs will be entered on data form). Amount of water actually fished will be highly variable in upper sampling areas,i.e.,samples not quantitatively comparabl e. 30 1 -#36 tarred nylon seine twine Tie each end of the seine net to an 8'pole using the tarred nylon seine twine,aligning the weighted bottom line with the base of each pole. Beach Seine Haul: Materials: Two each-crew members equipped with hip boots or chest waders Two each-2 1/2 gallon sample buckets Anesthetic (MS-222 or equivalent). Select a suitable seining area at the sampling site.(Note-the site should be free of debris and snags,and allow safe walking.) ~On~crew member ~rema"ins next to shore handl ing one pol e of the selne. The second crew member ~enters the water channel r.a~~ing the remaining pole.The seine is stretched between lCaaf s so that the center traF!~4s trailing upstream,(Figure1)-af».(Note-the seine(a.) may be rolled onto the poles to decrease the seine length to the desired distance.Roll even quantities of seine net onto both poles to mainta"inthe center trap 1/2 way between each pole.) Both crew members wa"lk at an even pace downstream.(Note-care must be taken to keep the weighted bottom lin~bf the seine in contact with the substra1:e to prevent fish escapement under the net.) - - -~ Figure 7.Beach Seine A A ~~u .'tV' ~v ~[Ii ,x :Y\ 'Y IV IJ\.~~~~~~...~,.... c f 1:OO 17 A -. - ,~ 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) otle o"~.v mernW.4+.c:.$"ec_~c"-c....>.....~~ When the desired distance is sampled,l(Astays stationary while~_____ wa 1ks downstream and toward shore.-u..e S4!ep ...!.C~~"'<::f""lv-~e:- When 1/2 of the seine length remains between f(and shore,IY wal ks towards ~~l.t~;"d-c ...w ...e...k Fr....F" Both poles are held together and the seine is brought to shore by grasping the weighted bottom lines and pulling the seine so that the center trap trails the net.(Note-the weighted bottom line must continually remain in contact with the substrate until the seine retrieve is complete.) Place all captured fish into the sampling bucket containing water and anesthetic. Complete desired analysis on fish,return fish to bucket containing clean water,and release fish after anesthetic recovery is complete. Roll net onto poles when sampling is completed and allow beach seine to dry before storing. Hook and Line: Assembly: Materials: One each-7'casting rod or 8.5 1 fly rod One each-medium size casting reel or fly reel Use 6-30 lb.test for line in casting rod with a lighter test for leader.For fly fishing using floating fly line 'with 10 inches or lighter test for leader. One each-tackle box with assorted lures,flies,single hooks,weights,snap swivels,extra line,bail springs,etc. Setting: Materials: Bait-single salmon eggs,salmon eggs in clusters,corn, or artificial lure,etc. - - 1)Placement of gear.Begin fishing by using a standard method of casting and reeling in.For fly fishing,your technique may vary but your final goal is to catch fish. 2)Select an appropriate hook size and bait or proven artificial lure. 3)Affix the hook and bait or lure to your snap swivel. 4)A sinker may be used when using hook and bait. 5)Note the time and begin fishing until you are successful or change bait,lure,or hook size,or move to a more productive site. ('00 18 ,FiR' 2) ~3) ~ 4) - - Checking: 1)Record fishing time in 0.25 hour increments. 2)Record hook sizes and bait types or lure sizes and types for each sampling site. E1ectroshocker: Materials and procedures will be provided upon receipt of operating instructions from the manufacturer~Smith-Root,Inc.In- formation available is attached.(Appendix V,Section B.) Open Water Gill Net (Drift and Set): Setting: Materials: One each-floating gill net (length,depth,and mesh size vary~gear specifics to be recorded on data sheets). One each-orange float~24"in diameter One each-outboard motor One each-riverboat One each-Anchor 1)DRIFT gill nets will be fished by pulling the net out,as nearly perpendicular to the river channel as possible,with the outside end of the float line attached to a buoy and the other end held in the boat.Operate the boat under just enough power to keep the net reasonably straight and perpendicular to the current.Mainstem areas fished by the method should be substantially free of surfact and subsurface debris and sufficiently shallow enough to allow the net to reach within a foot or less of the bottom.Gill nets will be drifted once a maximum of 100 yards at each sampling site. SET gill nets will be deployed by all crews in slack water areas and eddies on Susitna River mainstem. Deploying a gill net is achieved by tying one (1)end of the float line to the shore and "p1aying out ll the net from the side or bow of the boat and then releasing the end of the lead line and float line respectively.Properly positioned,the.net should extend offshore in a straight line or with a slight downstream arc. Pull ing a set gill net is achieved by tak"ing the anchored end first into the boat and going ashore as you restack the net.Stacking the net is accomplished by coiling the lead line and floating line in two separate piles leaving the net in between. i'OO 19 / ! - .... - ..... 1) 2) Checking:" DRIFT gill nets are monitored and picked after each drift through the sampling site. SET nets are picked after 24 hours and pulled after 48 hours. 20 APPENDIX VII I C.AQUATIC HABITAT AND INSTREAM FLOW STUDIES Instruction Manual - ,~ ,.... - - DIGITAL 4041 USERIS GUIDE How The 4041 Wo'rks When the 4041 is in operation,the four parameters are being measured simultaneously at the sonde unit (underwater unit). The resulting signals are transmitted in parallel up the cable to the indicator unit.In the indicator unit,the signals may be amplified or shifted.After this processing,the signals are ready to be selected by the user (via the panel switch)for digital conversion and immediate read-out. Calibration control(s)for each parameter are provided on the front panel of the indicator unit for user access.These con- trols are used to adjust the instrument before going to the field. This pre-field calibration adjusts for changes due to new pH fluid,a.fresh 0.0.membrane,re-polished conductivity electrodes,and so on. Zero-adjust contr.ols are not provided because the 4041 circuits automatically null any zero-offsets that may appear in the system. Some Details Twelve wires connect the sonde unit to the indicator unit: (4)for Conductivity,(1)each for pH,0.0.,and Common;(3)for Temperature;and (2)for Power. Temperature is measured by a high accuracy thermistor. whose resistance goes down as its temperature increases.The thermistor is in the -slim stainless steel tube in the bottom of the sonde unit.This single temperature signal is used to generate - the automatic temperature compensation for the other three parameters. Dissolved Oxygen is measured by the popular Clark polaro- graphic cell.It is the plastic device with a gold ring in its end and a dull silver pellet in its center cavity.As oxygen diffuses through the Teflon membrane (according to its partial pressure),it is reduced by a polarizing voltage established between the gold and silver electrodes.This produces a measurable current proportional to the partial pressure.A constant po- larizing voltage is maintained by the small,2.7 volt,mercury battery located in the sonde unit.This battery should be changed approximately every three months.See the maintenance \section for directions. The pH of the sample is measured using a pH-sensitive glass electrode,which due to the sample pH,reaches a certain potential with respect to a reference electrode.This potential is ampli- fied and buffered by the circuits in the sonde unit,and the resulting signal is sent to the indicator unit.The pH electrode is the glass tube with the small bulb on the end.The reference electrode is covered by a larger white plastic cover. Conductivity is measured using the four-electrode technique. A large enough current is forced between two electrodes,through the resistive,sampl e~to create a certain potential between two other electrodes.The current required to maintain this potential is proportional to the conductiVity,and this current is measured for display.The conductivity probe is easily recognizable by its gray epoxy body with four electrodes protruding from it into a white plastic cell .. .... .'.-. .... "... The display is read in the following manner:temperature. f pH and dissolved oxygen are read out directly.For example.a temperature of 21.8oC.will be displayed as 21 .8.A D.O.or pH reading of 8.1 will be displayed as 08.1.Conductivity is read out directly on the 2K scale.If the 20K scale is being used the number that is displayed will need to be multiplied by 10.In the ZOOK scale the reading will be multiplied by 100. For example.suppose the sample being measured has a conducti- vity of 1527 uS/em.Using the 2K scale the display will show 1527 (direct read-out).Using the 20K scale the display will show 153 (153 x 10 =1530 uS/em.).Using the 200K scale the dis- ~play will show 015 {015 x 100 =1500 uS/em.}. INITIAL PREPARATION Your system has undergone a thorough calibration and testing pro- cedure immediately prior to shipment.There are a few precautions that should be taken,however,before you attempt to connect the system components for operation: BATTERY CHARGE:The battery should be fully charged when you receive it.It is advisable however to charge the battery for a period of 24 hours to avoid an unexpected loss of power during operation. UNDERWATER CONNECTORS:In order to prevent unnecessary abrasion of the sealing surfaces of any underwater connector pair,a very light coating of the underwater connector lubricant should be applied to both sealing surfaces before you attempt to mate them. -03 - - CONNECTING THE SYSTEM COMPONENTS SONDE UNIT TO UNDERWATER CABLE:This paragraph applies only to those units that were ordered with Marine Connectors.Con- nect the Sonde Unit to the Underwater Cable by carefully aligning and mating the two halves of the l2-pin connector pair.This operation often requires considerabl e force and care_,should be taken to expel any air that may be trapped within the connector cavity. CIRCULATOR MOTOR TO SONDE UNIT:This paragraph applies only to those units that were ordered with a Circulator.Connect the (2-pin)connector that breaks out from the top cap connector, to the 2-pin motor lead by aligning the large pin on the male half .with the raised nub on the female half.Expel any air that may be trapped within the connector cavity. BATTERY PACK TO INDICATOR UNIT:A~tachthe battery cable to the Indicator Unit connector marked "12 VOLTS DC INPUT". CALIBRATION The procedures for calibrating the 4041 are simple and easy to perform.However,in order to expect good results in the field, all calibration checks which are pertinent to the measuring sys- tems must be.performed.TAKE NO SHORTCUTS.This is important since calibra~ion errors will be reflected in the accuracy of ~ll ~ subsequent measurements. FREQUENCY OF CALIBRATION:A complete calibration check should be accomplished before going to,and after returning from the .0·"'0 0 iff1·0'.~: -----~.._. - - .... .... .... .- - - - field.This dual calibration procedure will afford judgment as to drift due to sensor fouling and to the frequency and type of sensor maintenance required between field operations.Because of a multitude of variables encount~red under differing field conditions,there is no rule-of-thumb in establishing:1)the length of time that a system may be deployed without recalibration or 2}the extent of cleaning and maintenance required between field operations.These judgments are made on a case-by-case basis and should be expected to change in time. CONDITIONS:The calibration procedures should be carried out in a place where ambient conditions are under control and 'where there is a readily available supply of distilled or de- ionized water,reliable calibration standard solutions and main- tenance items.Generally,the laboratory is best suited but a field office or closed-in shelter will suffice . REQUIRED MATERIALS:In order to properly calibrate the 4041 the following items will be needed: 1)Calibration C~p' 2)Two reliable KCl standard solutions (known conductivity) 3)Two freshly prepared pH buffer solutions.Generally pH 7.0 and either pH 4.0 or 9.18 are used,depending upon the measuring assignment. 4)Disti-lled Water or De-ionized Water (approx.two 1 iters) 5)Absorbent tissue 6)Two screwdrivers (supplied in Accessory Kit) CALIBRATION PROCEDURE:At least one hour prior to calibrating the system (preferably the night before),take the followi~g preparatory steps. --------------~---------_..._-_.~._-_.- -- - -\ 1)Remove the "Storage-Cup"from the Sonde Unit. 2)Remove'the protective guard from the dissolved oxygen sensor. 3)Install the "Calibration-Cup"on the Sonde Unit and fill to the brim with tap water. 4)Seal the Calibration Cup with "the soft plastic cap and store the sonde unit,calibration standards,and the. distilled water at constant room temperature for at least one hour in order to bring the various sensors, temperature compensating elements,and the calibration solutions into thermal equilibrium (within a few degrees) All of the calibration controls are located on the front panel of the Indicator Unit.Adjustments,if necessary,should be made in the following manner: 1)Remove the appropriate seal-screw for the parameter being adjusted.. 2)Insert the small screwdriver through the access hole and adjust the calibration control in the direction which brings the reading into agreement with the value of the standard solution being employed. 3)Replace the seal-screw. A RINSE STEP will be used several times during the calibration procedure.It is to be performed in the following manner:Fill the calibration cup halfway with de-ionized water (or distilled). .- - Snap on the soft plastic cap;shake the sonde unit for ten seconds and then pour out the water.Repeat twice more using fresh de- ionized water:Remove the cup and shake as much of the rinse water as possible from the electrodes. DISSOLVED OXYGEN CALIBRATION:The Dissolved Oxygen system is the first to be calibrated since the water that has been stored in the calibration cup 'is used to maintain control of the temp- erature inside the cup.The calibration standard is Il wa ter- ----------_..._-_._------ - - ,.... .... - - saturated air at the temperature of the D.O.cell". Invert the Sonde Unit and remove the soft p}astic cap.Pour off enough water to bring the level to just below the D.O.mem- brane-retaining O-ring.With a clean paper towel or tissue blot any moisture from the D.O.membrane.Cover the calibration cup mouth with one of the hard plastic caps provided in the Accessory .. Kit.·.This will keep drafts from blowing on the membrane.Do not seal the cup with the soft plastic cap,because that could cause a partial-pressure change in the cup.Wait approximately 5 minutes,or until the reading is stable,then switch to the TEMPERATURE position ana record the temperature reading.Refer to the solubility table for the correct oxygen concentration at \ this temperatur~.Since the table valuei refer to concentrations at Standard Pressure it will be necessary to correct the value for local barometric pressure.This should be done in the following manner: Correct D.O.Setting =(Pressure/760mrn)x (Table value at Cup Temperature) EXAMPLE:If-T =28.7 0 C and Pressure =800rrm, Correct D.O.Setting =(800mm/76Omm)x (7.67mg/l)=a.07mg/l If youdon't have a barometer,the equivalent pressure may be estimated from your altitude by recalling that atmospheric pressure drops from standard sea-level pressure (760mm Hg)at the approximate rate of 2.5mm for every 100 feet of elevation.Therefore,the approximate atmospheric pressure at an altitude of 1240 feet,for example,would be:Local Atmospheric Pressure =760mm -(2.5 x 12.4) =729rrm Hg. Adjust the Dissolved Oxygen calibration control until the proper value (rounded to nearest tenth)is displayed.Pour out the water;and then follow with the RINSE STEP. pH CALIBRATION:Ca1ibrating the pH system requires the use of two pH buffer solutions.Depending upon the application. eit.her pH 4.0 or pH 9.18 is used in addition-to pH 7.0'--Invert the Sonde Unit and fill the calibration cup with fresh pH 7.0 buffer solution.Switch to "~H",and wait approximately 5 min- utes for thermal eqUilibrium.Then adjust the pH Calibration control until 7.0 is displayed on the read-out. Pour out the 7.0 buffer and repeat the RINSE STEP.Invert the Sonde Unit and screw on the calibration cup;fill with 9.18 or 4.0 buffer.After approximately 5 minutes.adjust the pH "Slope»control until either 9.2 or 4.0 is displayed on the read-out.Pour out the buffer and repeat the RINSE STEP Two - - - Times.--- CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION:Af.ter the second RINSE STEP, take a clean paper towel or tissue,and blot most of the moisture in the electrode area so that the standard will not suffer dilution. Install a clean calibration cup and in~ert the Sonde Unit. The Conductivity system is calibrated using at least two prepared KCl sta~dard solutions with a known conductiVity at 2S oC.From the table select two standard solutions with values of approximately one third and two thirds of the range you are most likely to en- counter in the field.For example,if you are going to be working in freshwater (0-2K scale)you would want to use a O.OlM standard and a O.005M standard.Select the more concentrated of the two standards and pour it slowly down the side of the calibration cup until full.If there are any bubbles in the bores of the con- \ .- ductivity cell block,fill the calibration cup again.When the reading is stable,adjust the Conductivity calibration control - - ~, - - until the display matches the value listed in the table.Empty the calibration cup and repeat the RINSE STEP Two times.Pour in the second standard.Check the reading on the Display.It should be correct within +1%of the range being used.For example,if the 0-2K scale is used the reading for the second standard should be correct ~20uS/cm.Pour out the standard solution. TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION:The Temperature system is factory calibrated and is accurate to +D.2oC.No calibration adjustment, is provided.A periodic check of the temperature system against a customer-owned ASTM thermometer could be helpful in detecting a system ma1function.Twenty minutes in a large,vigorously- stirred bath is necessary. FINAL PREPARATION· Turn the system off and disconnect the system components. Replace all rubber dust caps.Remove the Calibration Cup from the Sonde Unit and replace the protective guard on the dissolved oxygen electrode.Install the Storage Cup,filled with tap water, onto the Sonde Unit.The system is now cal ibrated and ready for transport to the field: FIELD OPERATION Remove the Storage Cup from the calibrated Sonde Unit and install the guard or the optional sample circulator.Connect the system components •.Lower the Sonde Unit into the water (sideways.if possible)and shake it to dislodge air bubbles trapped in the conductiVity cell blo~k.Release the Sonde ---------------~~~----------- - - Uni t and lower it to sampl e depth.Wait until the readings stabilize (D.O.is the best indicator),then record the value for each parameter.Repeat at new depths or locations. Fig.1 provides the user with a way to determine sea water salinity from the Conductivity readings obtained via the 4041. Fig.2 allows the user to correct Dissolved Oxygen readings for the "sa1ting-out ll effect of ionic solutions.The Dissolved Oxygen correction factor is temperature-dependent,so use the appropriate curve.The 2S oC curve should always be used in Fig. 1,however. Check the battery voltage occasionally;charge or change •batteries if the level drops below 10.5 volts.DO NOT charge the battery routinely after each day1s use.Doing so may shorten the life of the battery.Use the battery until the voltage level drops to between 10,5 and 11.0 volts.At this point put the battery on charge for 24 hours. The instrument case is hermetically sealed against moisture and dust.As long as the case seals are intact,the 4041 may be operated without harm in heavy rain or spray.The liquid crystal display is protected during cold weather by a built-in heater circuit which is automatically energized when temperatures drop below freezing.As long as the external battery is connected to the instrument the liquid crystal display is protected against freezing,down to a temperature of -20 0 e. STANDARD MAINTENANCE As long as the 4041 is functioning properly there is no need to perform the following maintenance procedures.However, in the event of biological or chemical fouling these steps are ~.C,'''f 1 <;.',-:.~,....: ," -. .- , necessary to restore the measuring elements to like-new condition. Servicing the Probes: 1)Remove the conductivity cell block'by unscrewing the two screws that hold it to the gray epoxy electrode mount. Carefully remove the O-rings from the electrodes.Polish the electrodes with a strip of fine emery cloth,being c.arefu1 not to scratch the nearby pH bulb.Polish the entire surface of each electrode,including the ends. Now,rinse any sanding residue away from the Conductivity electroqes ,and push the O-rings onto the electrodes. Carefully re-install the cell block and tighten it until the O-rings are about 2/3 as thick as they were when not compressed. 2)Remove the reference electrode sleeve by pointing it toward the floor (it's full of buffer solution)and twisting it while pulling downward (it's held 'on by a single O-ring). Discard the old buffer.Fill the reference electrode sleeve to the brim with.fresh.pH 7~OO buffer solution.Without tilting it,push it back on until it seals on the O-ring. Invert the assembly (sleeve pointing up now).Push and-twist the sleeve down until it butts against the bottom cap. The 7.00 buffer solution should have bubbl ed through the porous tip of the sleeve;if nof,repeat the procedure.For illustration,please refer to Figure 4. 3)Remove the Dissolved Oxygen cell guard.Remove the D.O.cell membrane-retaining O-ring.Discard the old membrane and shake out the old electrolyte solution.With the gold elec- trode facing up,hold a membrane against the side of the 0.0. fiOU'"..1.1-- - ---------------- cell with a thumb.Using the other hand,fill the cell cavity with fresh D.O.electrolyte.If a bubble is visible in the cell beneath the silver pellet electrode, shake out the cell and refill the cavity slowly.Over- fill the cavity,creating a high meniscus,then (still holding the membrane with a thumb)grasp the free end of the membrane and pull it quickly and tightly over the meniscus.Please refer to Figure 3. A quick firm pull is necessary to prevent wrinkling and additional bubble entrapment.If bubbles are visible beneath the membrane,or if tiny wrinkles are visible just outside the gold ring,start over with a new mem- brane.Otherwise,secure the membrane by rolling the membrane O-ring over the membrane,into its groove. Chec~~he membrane again for wrinkles,then trim the excess membrane.Replace the D.O.guard. 4)Screw on the calibration cup and fill it about half full of water.Add some detergent.Install the soft plastic cap and shake the sonde unit for 20-30 seconds.Pour out the soapy water.Fill the calibration cup half full of clean water;install the soft plastic cap and shake it for 10 seconds.Pour out the ~ater and repeat twice using clean water each time.Remove the calibration cup. Fill the storage cup three-quarters full of clean water and screw it onto the sonde unit. NOTE:If the sonde unit is to be stored for several days or more,add some Alconox or similar detergent to the water in the storage cup.This will help retard biological growth. ~~.1.-<, SERVICING THE D.O.POLARIZING BATTERY: 1)Remove the two allen-head screws from the top of the sonde tube" 2}Pull off the top cap by grasping the exposed plastic portion. (It might be helpful to insert the tip of a small screw- driver between the tube and tap cap to start the process) QO NOT pullan the connector. 3)Remove the battery retaining clip and install the new battery.Replace the retaining clip. 4)Make sure the sealing a-rings on the top cap are clean. Clean off any residue that may be pfesent inside the tube. 5)Take a small amount of the white a-ring grease and smear a light coating on the a-rings and on the sealing surface af the tUbe. 6)Install the top cap and screws .. 7)Hold the sonde unit up to the light,in a horizontal position, and check to see that all of the a-rings have made a good' seal.If not repeat steps 1,2,6,and 7. CAUSE COMMON PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS 1 SYMPTON . B 1 j J 1 ]i ) SOLUTION· J ) "j! 1 ~\ !I ~:~ ii ':i I:ii, , I.i.:\j , ![: 1'1 f (1)D.O.Reads Low Low Battery in Sonde Unit •• Insufficient Stirring .•.• Contaminated Cell or Membrane. •••.Confirm battery voltage is 2.7v •.•••Check to see that Circulator is working properly i.e.No shorts' in the motor lead .Replace the membrane k (3)D.O.Too High to Calibrate "'Ji 9 the sonde uni t up and dO\'ln in the water to dislodge any trapped bubbles .Replace Membrane .Check circulator operation.or if no circulator.maintain circu- lation of at least 1 FPM. Air Bubble on Outside of Membrane. factory .I l I, i I ~ I I If I I 'il I i \I ., \, (II tJ ~;:l .For power problems,consult factory ·.Replace membrane making sure the membrane is from a packet marked '.'standard ll ·.Open sonde and check connection and voltage on mercury battery, replace battery or secure connection •.Replace Membrane ..•.Replace mercury battery .For power problems,consult ... .... ....~ Contaminated Membrane. Erratic Circulation .. Contaminated Membrane .•. Dead Battery in Sonde Unit ••. No Power to Sonde Board. No Power to Sonde Board.! Wrong Menbrane (Too Thin),.• Membrane Stretched Too Tight,Hole in Membrane,. Wrinkle in Membrane. Mercury Battery in Sonde Loose D.O.Reading Drifts or is unstable during Calibration D.O.Reading Drifts or is unstable In-Situ D.O.Reads abnormally high or low (EX:55.0mg/l) D.O.Reads 1100.0 11 (6 ) (4 ) (5) (2 ) ~ ',), ,., -.- ""\.... B 1 1 I J 1 I f j ,]i 1 J I Clogged Reference Junction,••..••P1ease refer to #1 above. Cracked or Scratched pH Bulb 11 1,\1 I t I ! Ii, I! Ih; I SOLUTION .Mix up new Buffer and repeat •Refi1l reference probe with fresh pH 7.0 Buffer . • •Check pH Probe for scratches,cracks, or internal bubbles.If pH Probe is bad consult factory for replacement. CAUSE Bad Buffer,.. • . . • . • • • . • • • Clogged Reference Junction or Buffer • Solution inside Reference is bad Cracked or Scratched pH Bulb .... SYMPTOM I)pH Slope Will Not Adjust to 9.2 or 4.0 2)pH Response very slow ... ., Reference Filling Solution Low Cracked Bulb;No Power to Sonde Board 'I'i" II.II~:: I ' -I; :II(: I 'i1;::i r Iii [f1 !I:I'llI)1Iii r fl ,, .Consu1t factory for pH Probe replacement .Refil1 Reference with fresh pH 7.0 Buffer .Make sure the Reference Sleeve is seated tightly-over the O-Ring .Consu1t factory for repair checks .Make sure Probes are in solution .Consult factory for replacement of broken Probe or power problems .Refi11 Reference Probe with fresh pH 7.0 Buffer. ... .... No power to Sonde Board;... Electrode(s)Disconnected Electrode(s)Not in Solution ••• Bubble in pH Bulb;Cracked or Scratched pH Bulb Clogged Reference Jun~tion • Loose Reference Sleeve . pH Negative or Over 14 pH Unstable pH Won1t Respond 4) .... p.~ CPt 5) 3) '.'o o ,I I j "I j SYMPTOM 'I !J CAUSE )],1 lJ SOLUTION )-J j -~I I ·1 I I· I 'I'' ~ 1 Check for 'Bubbles and dislodge any that are present Clean the Electrodes Mix new standards and recalibrate "Jig"the Sonde Unit up an~down in the water to dislodge any trapped bubbles Clean the Electrodes Recheck Calibration with fresh standards... .... ... .. . .. . . . . ... Bubble in Cell Bore or in Probe Area of Sonde Unit Dirty Electrodes •....•••.•. Bad Standard • . . . . . . . . . • • • Bubble in Cell Bore;Bubble in Probe.'Dislodge any Bubbles as described in #1 Area of Sonde Unit above Cell Block Loose.. . . . . • . . . .Check Cell Block to see that it is secure Clean the Electrodes and recalibrateDirtyElectrodes•• Bubble in Cell Bore Dirty Electrodes Bad Calibration 2)Conductivity Unstable In-Situ or during Calibration 3)Conductivity Does Not Fall Into Specs (+1.0%of Range) During Calibration 1)Conductivity Reads Low In-Situ or during Calibration i~, [\ II .....,- <:;) o 1-. O'J ... !I:I! I I I ! i I IIiIIi~i':,I, I II!Fro.tue,l>.I If ng 1 Lo ~Il (•.-1)• .I I I I I I I :I .\:TEMP.0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 . o 14.16 14.12 14.08 14.04 14.00 .13.97 13.93 13.89.13.85 13.81 :1\ 1 13.77 13.74'13.70 13.66 13.63 13.59 13.55 13.51 13.48 13.44 Ol f IfI. 2 13.40 13.37 13.33 13.30 13.26 13.22 13.19 13.15 13.12 13.08 ::I:11.1 3 13.05 13.01 12.98 12.94 12.91 12.87 12.84 12.81 12.77 12.74 ~11....1 4 12.70 12.67 12.64 12.60 12.57 12.54 12.51 12.47 12.44 12.41 g 5 12.37 12.34 12.31 12.28 12.25 12.22 12.18 12.15 12.12 12.09 '":I,: 6 12.06 12.03 12.00 11.97 11.94 11.91 11.88 11.85 11.82 11.79 >-. 7 11.76 11.73 11.70 11.67 11.64 11.61 11.58 11.55 11.52 11.50 ~ 8 11.47 11.44 11.41 11.38 11.36 11 .33 11.30 11.27 11.25 11.22 ~ 9 11.19 11.16 11.14 11.11 11.08 11.06 11.03 11.00 10.98 10.95 g§ 10 10.92 10.90 10.87 10.85 10.82 10.80 10.77 10.75 10.72 10.70 ~I 11 10.67 10.65 10.62 10.60 10.57 10.55 10.53 10.50 10.48 10.45 u 12 10.43 10.40 10.38 10.36 1~.34 10~al 10.29 10.27 10.24 10.22 g l 13 10.20 10.17 1O.15 10.13 1 O.11 1 0.09 10.06 10.04 10.02 10.00 "0': 14 9.98 9.95 9.93 9.91 ·9.89 9.87 9.85 9.83 9.81 9.78 0 ::II 15 9.76 9.74 9.72 9.70 9.68 9.66 9.64 9.62 9.60 9.58 ~I , 16 9.56 9.54 9.52 9.50 9.48 9.46 9.459.43 9.41 9.39 >- 17 9.37 9.35 9.33 9.31 9.30 9.28 9.26 9.24 9.22 9.20 C 18 9.18 9.17 9.15 9.13 9.12 9.10 9.08 9.06 9.04 9.03 ~ 19 9.01 8.99 8.98 8.96 8.94 8.93 8.91 8.89 8.88 8.86 ~. 20 8.84 8.83 8.81 8.79 8.78 8.76 8.75 8.73 8.71 8.70-cS ill' 21 8.68 8.67 8.65-8.64 8.62 8.61 8.59 8.58 8.56 8.55 ~ 22 8.53 8.52 8.50 8.49 8.47 8.46 8.44 8.43 8.41 8.40 ffi 23 8.38·8.37 8.36 8.34 8.33 8.32 8.30 8.29 8.27 8.26 ~ 24 8.25 8.23 8.22 8.21 8.19 8.18 8.17 8.15 8.14 8.13 ~'.1...:. 25 8.11 8.10 8.09 8.07 8.06 8.05'8.04 8.02 8;01 8.00 1.1..' ; 26 7.99 7.97 7.96 7.95 7.94 7.92 7.91 7.90 7.89 7.88 0 .. 27 7.86 7.85 7.84 7.83 7.82 7.81 7.79 7.78 7.77 7.76 ~l ;1: 28 7.75 7.74 7.72 7.71 7.70 7.69 7.68 7.67 7.66 7~65 ~r 29 7.64 7.62 7.61 7.60 7.59 7.58 7.57 7.56 7.55 7.54 ~ .',30 7.53 7.52 7.51 7.50 7.48 7.47 7.46 7.45 7.44 7.43 16317.42 7.41 7.40 7.39 7.38 7.37 7.36 7.35 7.34 7.33 IIo327.32 7.31 7.30 7.29.,7.28 7.27 7.26 7.25 7.24 7.23 t. 33 7.22 7.21 7.20 7.20 7.19 7.18 7.17 7.16 7.15 7.14 ~ ~_4.34 7.13 7.12 7.11 7.10 7.09 7.08 7.07 7.06 7.05 7.05 IIi ca-.J 35 7.04 7.03 7.02 7.01 7.00 6.99 6.98 6.97 6.96'6.95 i II ,...•jil I )1 CONDUCTIVITIES OF POTASSIUM Jr'"lRIO--llLUT--jS A'~-1°C . M.W.=74.555 1 CONDUCTIVITY READING ON .1141 _.]PLK.bR:=JEN RANGE SETTING (uS/em) . I 1 II I [o ~.. NOTES:(1)Two conductivity standards are recommended for each range setting (boxed-in values). Make cal ibration adjustments with the higher concentration and check with the lower concentration. CONC.GRAMS/L uS/em M KCI 0.0005 0.03728 73.9 0.001 0.07456 147.0 0.002 0.1491 292.0 0.005 0.3728 717.8 . 0.01 .0.7456 .1.413K. 0.02 1.491 2.767K 0.05 3.728 6.668K O.1 7.456 12.90K 0.2 14.911 24.82K .0.5 37.278 58.64K 1.0 74 555 111 .9K ( i n 1:\ f: :'i [! ~l I I I i I , i i fI.. f.I: .it I' 248 586 129 1119 277 141 667 1290 718 147 292 1413 I I ,I I (0-2K)I (0-20K)I (0-200K)I !,¥..,,'".,.~!t r I. I I I I V') 0 ~ c:( 0z c:( l- V') z 0 I-< ~ to I-< -I c:( U >-I-....... ::> I-< I-....~u -':::> 0 0zc·0 U l.L.p...\.0c.u LU -I [(l c:( I- (2)Shaded areas are not recommended for calibration checks.~,I I ~ (~ Iii - CUSTOMER SERVICE In the event of instrument malfunction,please notify HYDROLAB immediately by telephone (512)255-8841.If tel e- - - - phone assistance will not suffice,authorization for the return of any part or all of the system will be given with instruGtions for shipping under a Returned Goods Authoriza~ tion Number.(RGA No.).---- Upon authorization,goods should be shipped by: 1)UPS,AIR FREIGHT,F~DERAL EXPRESS.OR MOTOR FREIGHT TO: HYDROLAB CORPORATION 12921 BURNET ROAD AUSTIN,TEXAS 78759 ATTN:SERVICE DEPARTMENT RGA No.----- 2)Shipment of goods by US Mail is NOT AUTHORIZED. 3)All shipments must be shipped PREPAID and INSURED unless otherwise agreed in .advance. 4)For Technical 'orApplications Assistance please ~contact HYDROLAB by Telephone (512)255-8841. , ",.., "'"" APPLICATION NOTE:(4000 SERIES INSTRUMENTS) USING CABLES LONGER THAN 100 METERS January,1980 - - \ Due to cable capacitance.cable combinations that exceed 100 meters in length will slightly decrease the accuracy .oT measurements in the 0-2K conductivity range.The 0-20K and 0-200K ranges will not be affected. For best results on the 0-2K.range: 1)Re-ca1ibrate the conductivity circuit when changing· from a short cable to a long cable,or vice~versa. 2)When using the long cable,note the conductivity reading with the conductivity cell dry.Subtract this reading from SUbsequent measurements. pH'REFERENCE CONDUCTIVITY D.O. i :MPERATURE CONDUCTIVITY ELECTRODES ..4041 PROBE ASSEMBLY - ..... ..4041 INDICATOR UNIT CALIBRATION CONTROL SEAL SCREWS HARD PLASTIC CAP .... SONDE UNIT IN THE INVERTED POSITION. SONDE UNIT INVERTED FOR D.O.CALIBRATION. CORRECT WATEf LEVEL FOR D.O. CALIBRATION ~~..~"..,.,""".,_-~ I'~' \? t",, I, , IrI "p ,Ii:, 'j ""\di II: , I J I ]J} SONDE WITH TUBE AND DESICCANT REMOVED STEP 3 10 PIN &2 PIN CONNECTORS (DISCONNECT THESE) STEP 2 J ·Rr-.j\clr'--jHE ~-l PO"lIZI"'--iAn-~'J REMOVE TOP CAP. STEP 1 ." o Cj .......(\.~ ~~ REMOVE BATIERY RETAINER CLIP. STEP 4 BATIERY REMOVED, NOTE:POLARITY MARKERS STEP 5 INSTALL NEW BATIERY STEP 6 ,lj Ii,.1,I Ii,,'i I I II iI' Ill!, ,'I _: i i 'III' II I"I ,I i Ii'i"[;; i l, - NOTE:SEAL-INSTALLING MARINE CONNECTORS - -- - - - CHECK D-RING SEAL AFTER SONDE IS RE-ASSEMBLED. EXPEL TRAPPED AIR WHILE PUSHING THE CONNECTORS TOGETHER. STEP 2 AUGN THE RAISED NUBS AND PUSH STRAIGHT TOGETHER. DO-NOT·BEND STEP 1 EXPEL TRAPPED AIR AGAIN AFTER CONNECTION IS COMPLETE. STEP 3 CHANGING THE D.O.MEMBRANE ..... """ - - - - .-, D.O.PROBE READY FOR \MEMBRANE REMOVAL STEP 1 REFILL THE D.O.CELL WITH FRESH ELECTROLYTE STEP 3 REMOVE OLD MEMBRANE STEP 2 .. NOTE:MEMBRANE READY TO INSTALL NEW MEMBRANE STEP 4 ..............o ~. ""()~ MEMBRANE READY TO BE STRETCHED INTO PLACE STEP 5 I HOLD MEMBRANE TIGHTLY ON BOTH SIDES OF THE PROBE. INSTALL RETAINING O-RING. STEP 7 ~ i ) WITH QUICK OVER-AND-DOWN MOTION.STRETCH MEMBRANE OVER CELL. STEP 6 " NEW MEMBRANE INSTALLED. TRIM OFF EXCESS. STEP 8 j j I 'I ~I , II 1,1 .I:, i'~ ! I I'II: !Ii I:. I.' i iii: " - SERVICING THE pH REFERENCE PROBE eo'. REMOVE THE REFERENCE SLEEVE. STEP 1 REFERENCE SLEEVE. (NOTE:TEFLON JUNCTION) STEP 3 REFERENCE PROBE WITH SLEEVE REMOVED. STEP 2 REFERENCE PROBE O-RING THE OUTER SLEEVE SEALS ON THIS O-RING. STEP 4 REFILL SLEEVE WITH FRESH pH 7.0 BU.FFER (CREATE A MENISCUS). ,STEP 5 ..... BEGIN REPLACING THE REFERENCE SLEEVE. STEP 6 ..... .- PUSH THE REFERENCE SLEEVE ON UNTIL IT SEALS ON THE O-RING. STEP 7 27 INVERT SONDE UNIT AND PUSH REFERENCE SLEEVE BACK INTO PLACE. STEP 8 ," -[~. WJlll'\-......(.-'.,--..-._-,...:.A,'.- f "; .\......./. ..- " ":..' • ...'.. ........ ~-'!;..- ~:......"'~ ..' ~ •.,""'::I" ~.. .'Techniques of Water-.Resourc~s Investigations •..M 4 _••• .-. .of the United'.States Geological Su.rvey..,;-.-.-, -;:.. ,.....~·5.. -~.'"....'. "".-~.4'...","."-.. ,, ..... h ,-:.' --.-' .-... -."..~: -..--.~-.... .:<{" ..".:.~'..:~.-. ..-~-..-,c,.- .." '·:,-..Chapter 82 ..' ~ ".'....~.....:; .-."~.~.. .:..~ .._----."'. '". CALIBRA TION-AND t-AJdNTENANCE ..'. OF ,VERTiCAL-AXIS TYPE CURRENT ~AETERS ."... •r...'._.-, \.-...'..", "~-.,.,,--."".,.~/::;./~~:;?:. -~..". !"""'1....J. ..... 1 ~ U ..... By Georse F.Smoot and Charles E.Novak - -Book 8 ,/;< / I INSTRUMENT A nON .---------------..._----'''--..-----.-"--.-..'.. ,.----;---'."'-_.- -. -'-:-.. CONTENTS "'"' Pref&Ce "~_ Symbols BElli m:its _ Aba~t _ Introduction _ Descriptio;;of the small Price current meter _ 1{oke~_ Tailpieee _ Bucket wheel.'__'.;,•_ Bucket-wheel hub _ Shalt _ ~vot ---~---------------Pivot bearing •_ Penta gear _ Contnct chatnber _ Bindinlt posts ,_ Calibration of current meters -- As3embly and dis:I.5Sembly of the small Price current,meter _ Pap 01\. 1 t 1 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 Assembly and thp.rlislls~emhly nf the llmall Pri!:!'_ ,current meter-{;rllltinucd _ Assemhly _ Dis~sembl)'.•~ Inspection and repllir of current meters _ Rotor and sh:~ft alinement _ Sprung yoke •:.. Damull:cd cups ..,_ Daml\~ed ta.ilpiece _ Contact ch:J.mher _ Pivot and bearing3 _ Lubrication _ Spin tests ~----.----.;,.:._ Routine cleaning anu oiling of current meters -_ Low-velocity Price meter _ Pygmy current meter .;-_ Ice meters -_ Selected references •~' a 8 9 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 12 12 15 15 ,I": ~. , ".' - FIGURES Pan 1.Photograph of small Price,PYl'my,and ice meters_.____ __ _3 2..Assembly diagram of type-AA Price current.meter'_______________________________4 3.Sample current-meter rating tal:ile________ _ _7 4.~embly diagram of pyl'ItlY current meter______________________________________13 15.Assembly disjU:Lm of ice meter______ _ __________14 TABLE 1.Adiustment of pivot • ----,"8 .- ).- I •I ··.. .i~: i- Cu SYMBOLS AND UNITS ..~..-. -_........•. o· t I . . .! ..,. "'" ,(~~ ~) VI S.,...llol C K .v v Cocstant. Proportionality conata.nt.. Angular velocity of meter rotor. Velocity. ;.. revolutions/see It/see o ,. ( .... "- CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE OF VERTICAL-AXIS TYPE CURRENT METERS -By George F.Smoot <lind Charles E.Nov<lIIc .... "-"."'~",..\..; - - I..- ,----,(. -..);) ...-, Abstract The purpose of this chapter is to describe the procedU1"e5 used in the manufacture and calibration of current metel'3 and to present in detail ill1'ormu.tiun pertinent to their proper maintenance and repair.Recent intefUlive lltudie.'i OD.the calibration of current meter.!and theeffectgof wearof the component parts oil the performailce of the mete,""have led to the adoption of new procedures for the manufacture, calibration,maintenance,and repair of meters.This chapter,therefore,updates the provisional manual "Care and Rating of Current ~tetel'3"(1957)by including these-new procedures. Introduction Precision instruments 0 and their proper u.''ie and ma.intenance are prerequisites for the collec- lection of accurate da.ta.Current meters are precision instruments and their proper use and lIlaintenance are doubly important because of the hard usage often received by them in mea- suring stream velocities.The following quotation from an earlier provisional manual emphasizes the importance the \Yater Resources Division at- taches to this aspect of streamflow measurements: The operation of &current meter,:IS of any scientific instrument.will be la.rgely affected by the way in which it,is used.While the design,material,a.nd con- struction or the meter may be Inrge factol'3 in its lUcce55iul operation,these factol'3 may not prevent errors due to impcopei'care and use of the instrument. In this connection each fieldman is urged to use the greatest po&Iible care to see that his meter is kept in proper condition. The condition of the fieldnum's current meter is one of the most important building stones in the foundation of good ::otrf:'tlmflow records.Routine servicing,inspection for minor damage,and proper lubrication should be standard operating proce- dure.The ailloullt of pride taken in maintaining o his moter in optimum condition is al:-:o a lllp.llimre of the pril.tc a man can be expected to'take in other area~of his work. This chapter updates the provisional nlanual "Care and Rating of Current :\[eters"(1957,out of print). Description of the Small Price Current Meter Rotating-element current meters can be broad- ly classified into two general categories according to the orientation of the revolving axle;the axis may be verticul,or it may be horizontal and parallel to the direction of flow.Cur.rent meters having horizontal a.xes with propeller-shaped rotors and those having vertical axes with cup or vane-type rotors have been experimented with ex- tensively to determine their respective advantages .and di:m(h'~Iltages. Altholl~h muny charaetcri!itics of different enr- rent mctcr.-;ure still unknown,the experiments and invcstigati6ns thus far conducted are con- clusive in OIle respect,namely,that current meters of either the horizolltal-or vertical-a...'Cis type when carefully degi~lled and constructed,and when used under favornble conditions,will measure accu- rately the velocity of flowing water.• When streamflow investigations were under- taken by 0 the Geological Survey in 1888,engi- neers of the Survey began experimenting with the vnryolls typf'!';of c'urrent·metp.J"l';.nvniInhlp nt that time to find one that could be used under a wide variety of field conditions.About 1896,as a.re- 1 ._."-..._-_......---------_.--..---_.---.-..,.0"'"'0 •.,1.ott 31..·0 2 TECHNIQUES OF WATER-RESOURCES INVESTIGATIONS ...nlt.nr t1w ....•inv(':':t:~:ltion~.th""~"rl~""ln,vvi ftF" hLi.:lt:r COli t~IIUllg ccrt::l.In ieatur~:i iJi the 1'ru.:u ("\acoustic and the large Price electric meters.This ',-/'meter,which w3SlIaUed the small Pri~e (fig.I), .-has sinl:l~Ll~cn u~t:ll by the Survey almost.ex- Clusively bef:ause of its adaptability to general stre~Lm gaging, TIle sm::l.ll Price current meter p~bably has been used more extensively and has been subjected to more investigation than an,}'other type of cur- .-rent meter.As a result of this extensive investl- .g:ltion and because of the natural advantages af- forded by the type,the small Price has been per- ,.,.,facted in its details;the type-A.-\..Price meter is now better suited togenernl use th:J.n any other meter.It is light and yet strong,sensitive ....yet durable.It will measure with a high degree of accuracy velocities ranging from 0.1"foot per second to more than 20 feet per second.It is easily repaired,it can be quickly taken apart for cleaning ~and oiling,n.nd it can be quickly reassembled with- out l=h::mge in rating. To properly use and care ror a.current meter, the user must be familiar with all of its parts,as ",'ell as with the asscmbled meter.If any part fails completely because of excessh,·c wear or damage, ....the condition is usually obvious.but small irre;z;- \ularities that may introduce large percentage er- '-_J rors in velocity determinations are not always ....readily detected.For this rcason the p::uts of the type-AA meter and their fUIlctional characteris- tics are described;the numbel":'l ::L...~igned to'the ","aniOUS parts in this description corrcspond to the ~ nwnbers used in the a.ssembl~;diagram of the type-AA current meter shown in figure 2. Yoke The yoke (8)ili a I-piece horseshoe-shaped casting nl:ldc of chromium-plated bronze.A short horizollt~tl rCar e.xtension contains a hole for l~olmcct.iol1 of the tailpiece.Thi:;oxtension I:on- tains two bosses-onewhich is slotted vertically amI.-~nd dri11f>fl horizontally for thf'!In.ng,,.r ann h.nngf'r surew,and one whi(~h is driUl.:d vert.ically for the keeper !"crp-w o(th.o t.ailpiece!.The ~lot.(or t.he han- ger is of such dimensions as to limit the tilting of tile m~ter so that neitner the yoke nor .the tail- piecc will strike the weight.The upper arm Of the ....yoke is drilled to receive the ~tf'm of the P-shared contact chamber;the lower ann is drilled to re- ('pin"the pivot.The~e h(ll~;;;:Ire ('n~xbl ~o m;to properly aline the rotor 3.S:':lembly and the pivot. The contact chamber and pivot are held in posi- tion by a keeper screw having a knurled fillister head. Tailpiece The tailpiece is made of a hard-rolled nickel- plated brass,and it consists of two separate vanes which,when assembled,are locked together at right angles to each other by means of a lever ar- rangement.This two-piece construction pennits the tailpiece to be taken apart readily for conveni- ence in packing.The nosepiece of the tail fits into the rear extension of the yoke.A means to balance the meter assembly is provided in the lower part of the tailpiece by a long horizontal slot contain-. ing a short heavy screw that may be adjusted to the proper position to obtain the d~ired balance. Bucket wheel The bucket wheel (21)consists'of six cone- shaved cups soldered to a frame to fonn a sym- metrical and balanced assembly 5 inches in di- ametcr and 2 inches high.The cups and frame are marie of ni~kf!!-plated hard roDed brMS. The fralne is centrally drilled for the shaft and notched for a dowel pin.The letter"S"is stamped on the frame to identify the top side of the bucket wheel.The year of manufacture is also identified-8-67,&-68,for example. Bucket-wheel hub The bucket-wheel hub (13)encases the pivot bearing ;J.ud the lower end of the shaft and sup- ports the bucket wheel..The hub is threaded in three places:(1)for the bucket-wheel hub nut, (2)for the bucket-raising nut,and (3)for the shaft.A small dowel pin maintains the bucket wheel in a fixcd position with referen.ce to the hll(~ket-wtlt::€'l hub.The bucket-raising nut is pro- viucll,;o that the pivot beuring can be rail:l€(!from the 'pivot when the meter is not is use. Shaft The shaft (13)is made of stainless steel and is of sufficient length to extend from the bucket-wheel hub to a point 0.008 inch below the cap of the (li '-. II>- -~.IO('~lI ..~'i !'.\.~,.~;"x. .\../,..;'.»C7::/,1"~,:'"l..••"'.'..G~~"""Ca..~,<~~.,.1./,"',\.(; .(~.,.".;,..\. ''ft ..'''#'' .{"(,,' jJ1,,i \/""-.' JJlJ~l; " II.Balance weiqht 12.Sha" 13.Bucket -wheel hub 14.Bucket -wheel hub nut ' 15.Raising nul 16.Piyot bearing 17.Pivot 18.Pivot-ad jus ling nut 19.Keeper screw for pivot-adjusting nut 20.aearing lug 21.Buckel wheel o ":l ~ ij :>;l illoc:~ Men ~ Ul >-J ~g Z (JJ ~ Z.... § ~"i ~=rx'*7'.-=.:~':,..~..".t_i o tJ (. o:...__~0_ " 10 EXPLANATION .1.Cop for conlact chamber 2.Contocl chamber 3.1nsuloling bushing for conloct binding post 4.Single -contact binding post 5.Penta -contact binding post 6.Penla gear 7,Set screw B.Yoke 9.Hole for honqQr screw ,10.Toilpiel;e --.:........ o Q W (Q Figure I.-A.semblv dinr'lll of type-A A Prlc.cur"nl meter. .''0 ) ~ ".;,;~,:i·i'·'" CALmRATION ANJ)~IAINTENANCE OF CURRENT METERS 5 ,""" /'\ "_i - -." -- !) r.ontact chamber.Th~upper onf}-half in/:h of th~ shaft is turned to O.12trinch diamcter and is rounded at th(~t.rlP to provide a slIIoolh fH~arill.g 'surfuI:e for thp.thrust of the shaft ag:.linsl.the bottom of the contact-chamher eap.An eer-cnrrie is cut.ill tIlt:O.i::l;j:';l ••::l Jid.HlcLCl"pan vI l-i.e i:ihuft -to provide a means for making an elpC't.ril'al contact for each revolution of the bucket-wheel hub.The shaft also contains an acme thread t.hat meshes with the penta gear within the eontact r.hamber..-\small hole is drilled at.about the mid,;. point of the shaft to facilitate the use of a pin for tightening the shaft into the bucket-wheel hub. Pivot " The pivot (11)is made of tempered,precip- itation-hardening stainless steel.The upper end of the pivot is ground and polished to form an angie of 900 and the peint rounded to a ra- dius of 0.005 inch.The lower end of the pivot is threaded to pro,~de for the hexagonal stainles!'i- steel.nut that is used to adjust the clearnnce be- tween the pivot point l\nd the pivot bearing.A slightly tapered flat surface on the pivot above the thrc:lds serres as 3.contact surbce for the pivot-keeper screw. Pivot bearing. The -pivot be:l.ring (16)is made of tungsten carbide and has highly polished bearing surfac-es. It is pressed into the cylindrical recess in the lower end of the bucket-wheel hub.The bearing being of greater hardness"than the pivot causes the major part of the wear to take place Oll the pivot which is easily replnceahle. Penta gear The penta gear (6)is made of stainlesH steel und .is fitted to mesh smoothly with the acme threads on -the shaft.The gear makes one complete revolution for each 10 reyolutions of the bucket wheel.Two gear teeth,180 0 apart,are extended beyond the others to provide a means for making two elec- trical contacts for each revolution of the gear, with the result that contacts are made a.t each fIfth revolution of the bucket wheel.The gear is mounted in a bronze frame in a horizontal posi- tion,and the assembly is housed in the contact chamber where it is held in place by means of a- hrass :wrc".-.The hase of t he franll~thrnu~h whi,.h- this !il:rew pa..<;!;e:;is slotted to pennit the arlj~l;.;t rtll~nl;of Uti'i!;1'ar h'l'th with thf~\W,mlOn thl~~h:lit. Contact chamber The COllt:.u:t r:ha.mter (2)is 1.\P-shupell t:hro-- 1lliWll-plated brtl.::is unit which hOll::ieti th~pema gear,the tipper part of the ~haft,tht>!'<h::'_tt beanllg,aUli thesin.~le-and pemn.-f:lH1rm~r.bin.i. ing posts.The upper end of the t:h:l11lber i:: drilled and threaded int('m:llly to Mrl')r :~k!111rt~,i cap.A small phosphor-bronze lug,hrazed to tht' r.hmllber wa.ll,SCl'YCS as the upper hearing for !"hc shaft.The :item of the'eont:Ll:t r:hambf!r f'X tend::; through the upper arm of the yoke :\0([is drilIf"i axially so that the shaft can pass into the f'hum.ht:r wi.th ample dcarance.The cap is ti~htly fittl:d ;:0 that the chamher serves as nn air trup to prcvp.nt silty wa.ter from entering the bearing. Binding posts Two stainless-steel binding PO:it.'1 (.H and (5)are pbced at-the rear of the lmllt:l.r:t chamber.One post is desil'!;ued to contal:t the el~ centric of the shaft und the other to (~ontact the two e."l:tended:teeth of the penta gear.They ~re iden- tical in constructiol:except for the leng;ths of the slender stai.nless sted cables that Terminate ill' beads of silver soide'l'"through which the COI1t.:l';~" are made.E"a.ch bil;i~~ng post is insulatetl from the contact chamVe'f"by '"hushing (~)made of nylon. Calibration of Current Meters The prin"ilp:li 0;"lperation of :l rotatin~-cle ment type vclocity neter is based on the pro- portionality betwf''?;:the local flow veloeit.:)·:md the resulting anglo ;....vcloc~ity of the 1lleter rotor. The velol:icy of the water is determined by r·ouat- ing t·he number of revolutions of the rotor during a.me:lSured.interval of time anu l:onsulting the meter calibmtion table.' If an i.deal eurrent meter,that is,one equipped \\ith a correctly'shaped rotor and a frid iOlll~"$ bearing mechanism,were to measure the flow yelocity of a perfect liqui.d,the relation betweel\tit? flow velocity and the rotor speed would be ..-er}" simple: •---,..•• ,6 TECHNIQUES OF WATER-RESOURCES INVESTIGATIONS .i Because there is rigid control in the manu- facture:of the small Price meter,virtually identi- .-~~) ,.,......: .." ') j' That part,V ==2.140N +0.015,to the left of the parenLheties is the equation UtiOO for computiug velocities shown in the table less than 2.155 feet per second.. That part,V =2.150N +0.005,to the right of V represents velocity in feet per s~ond. .; N represents the number of revolutions of the bucket wheel per second. cal meters are produred and.for all practical 1,,11 1".1'-:=,th~ir ral.i.:r.;,;,'-'4,uatiuu.::>an:iuerl~ica.i.. Tilerefore,there is no need to calibrate each meter individually.Instead,a standard rating is es- tablished by cn.1ibrating a large number of meters that have been constructed according to Survey specifications,and this rating is then supplied with each meter. To insure that all small Price meters are virtually ident.ical,dies and fixtures for their manufacture were purchased by the Water Resources Division and supplied to the manufacturer in 1967 for use in constructing meters.These S3Jne dies and fIx- tures will be supplied to the successful bidder in subsequent years.All rotors m.anufactured by use of the standard dies and fIxtures are stamped US"on the top side of the bucket wheel.The year of manufacture is also'identified-5-67,8-68,for example.To further insure that all meters are identical,quality control procedures are followed, including the-rating of a sample of meters from- each new group procured. For convenience in field use,the data from the· current-meter ratings are reproduced in tables,a sample of which is shown in figure 3.The velocities correspond1ng to a range of 3-350 revolutions of the bucket wheel within a period of 40-70 seconds are listed,.in the tables.Thjs range in revolution and time has been found to cover general field requirements.To provide the necessary infor- mation for the few instances where extensions are required,the equations of the rr.ting table.are shown in the spaces provided in the heading.B&o- cause of lim.ited :;pace,the equations are presented in an a.bbreviated form. The expre;;sion '"=::!.l-10~+O.Ol.j (2.l.j5) V =2.150:\+0.005 ::;hown in the heading of the table in figure 3 is to be interpreted as follows: (4) (2) (3) (1)v ==KN For N less than 1.00,. V =KIN +Ch Fot N greater than 1.00, V ==K~+C" ;rrhere ./.......... {.here V denotes the local flow velocity,K is the ~propol'tionalityconstant,and ~is the 1'Ot.or speed exp~':'ed in revf)lutions per unit of tim~.In actual practice there are resistances opposing rotation !"'causw by friction betweeu the liquid and the rotor :lnd b}"t be nlcchanical fril.'tion of the bear- ings.Consequently,this simple relationship does """,not exist,and one must be detennined empirically. The establishm.ent of this relation,known as "rat_ ing the current meter,"is done for the Survey by ....the X utional Bureau of Standards. The current-meter rating station operated.by the National Bureau of Standards in Washington, D.C.,consists of a sheltered reinforced concrete basin -100 fect long,G feet.\\;de,and 6 feet deep. Atop the vertical walls of.the basin and extending its entire length are steel rails that carry an elec-· I"""t.rically driven rating car.This car is operated to move the current meter at a constant rate through the still water in the basin.Although the -rate of travel can be accurately adjusted,the average velocity of the moving car is determined for each run by making a.n independent measure- -ment 1)£the distance it trayels during the time ''tat the revolutions of the bucket wheel are elee- ·~~.ically coumed.A scale graduated in feet and . ,..,.Jenths is used for this purpose. A small Price meter is rated by tol\-"ing it at eight different velocities (0.25,0.50,0.75,1.10, UiO,2.20,5.00,andS.GO feetp ersecond).A pair of -~unsaremadeateach velocity.A pair consists of two :rnverses of the basin,one in each direction.The data obtained consists of 16 obserVations of the """I .•h ('1:"),l',",e Ol"lty 01 t .e car ~ana rC':O.UtlOIl5 per seCollet )f the rotor eX).The meter rating is determined from these data and is expressed as two linear -~quations:' .'. .~ CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE OF CURR~NT METERS 7 () ,--"..- NOe-/....,.....",,.,..,.... ":":":j~":": ~~~fq~~...........1....... ~::~t~~: ODlOa:I'~caa:lCO•• •t • • • ..- oco on N o... ...... .. o... CIS......· ... N., 00 N...· ..o...· ...., '"· .......· .. ~... ~....· ......0.................. f ~......,NNN....,...... I .,00 ........... Qa 0 A· I .••• !......g i ~,~t; ........_...............·.. Qt\l2Nj..... NNN•••I No ...1a:)COe-.........·.. 0""""'...............·.. ......, <0 ... N .,.·.. q- .....- ... '"...· ... ""...· ..g· ....... NNN............,.,. - ,....) .....,.......o...,o...o.. ___••,••_4.'(---i-tOO••36 .- TECHNIQUES OF WATER-RESOURCES rN\7:STIG\.TIONS :i.l,,"~.~,,~''''''~Il::.\:''''~::"':~~~~"-\·.it....t::u.>.l~-.I..·l~fui.l"":.Ij,pUt~i ..g 1'=the values for V more than 2.155 feet per second. ..The tenn within parentheses (2.155)is theveloc- !'~v common to hoth equations.. """...~Data do not indiaate that there is any signifi- cant difference between 3.rod ra~ing and a.cable suspension rating when Columbus-type weights "...and hangers are properly used with the meter. rherefore,no suspension coefficient is indicated, and noue should be used. Assembly and Disassembly of the SmafJ Price Current Meter To provide the proper care to a current meter) r"""'rhich is of extreme importance as pointed out _arlier,each fieldman should become thoroughly acquainted with all the component parts as well as .-rith th.~assembled meter.He should also be unilbr with the steps outlined below,which are necessary to assemble or disassemble a meter. Assembly The prut;eJurc iu ~emblillg the .:ilUUU Pri<:o i''trrent meters may best be followed by referring Jigure 2 which shows a.seetional.view of a t;:J,e-AA meter·and the names of the parts. f"""1.Assemble the two vanes of the tail':' I ~e (10).. 2~In.c;ert th~tailpiece assembly,with bal- :l""'Ce weight underneath,into the yoke (8)and f :ht€'n the tuilpicee set screw (i). 3.P1:lec the buekct wheel (21)onto t.he buck- I T L •(1-~)·-j'h t'.;.:.'..~1··1 "S"e,l;.;;.w ,1('(',lillb ",:·ne ~,~(,lL~.n.~(up- ~.I'd,:lnd with the <10\':e1 pin on the hUb fitting tht!notch ill the bucket-wheel frame.These parts nre held together by means of the bucket-wheel-h )nut.. 4.Plnee the bucket-wheel assembly within the :r.rnl::-of thp yoke (8)ami rn<;~thE'~hl1.ft (12) tt:""Jugh the hole in the upper arm of the yoke. ~,."".t h~~h:1ft diTc,.,tl~·into t.hl"hU!'kpt-wheel hub (13)1hen insert a pin into the hole in the shuft., ar\,use the pm to tight.en the shaH in the hub. ~5.I.f)o;"m the penta gear (G)in the contact ch~mher (2)hy It single tnm of the limal1 screw th~passes through the :tdjusting slot of the gear pa.i Do not remove this screw completely as it is ,difficult to replace. 6.Slip the contact chamber,with the cap (1)removed,over the upper end of the shaft and into the hole in the upper limb of the :roke. This should be done with great care in order not to damage either the threaded shaft or the penta gear. 1.Aline the contact chamber with the yoke by making the centerline of the yoke bisect the angle fonned by the two contact binding posts. Some meters have been provided with grooved marks on the front of the eontact chamber and on top of the upper arm of the yoke;rnaking these marks coincide insures the proper alinement. 8..Tighten the yoke set screw (7)to hold the contact chamber in place. 9.Screw the cap (1)onto the contact cham- ber. 10.Insert the pivot (11)through the halain the lower arm of the yoke after placing a drop of oil in the lower bearing and on the pivot. ll.Adjust the pivot.as described in table 1. This adjustment allows a vertical play of 0.008 inch,the amount of play used when the meter is rated. 12.Return the meter to an upright position, and remove the cap hom the contact.chamber.Ad-. just the penta gear to mesh properly with the. threads-on thesh3.ft and tight~nthesinall (umium- bered)screw which hold,-;the penta gear assembly.. 13.Spin the bucket wheel rapidly while Tabl~f......diustment of pivot Operatian I.__•_..Make sure tha.t·the meter has been properly oiled'• t hen hold meter in inverted p"'shiun with pivot uppermost. 2.__. _Release keeper screw (19)for pivot.adjusting nut (18)an"unsrrew dlf~lIut :t few turns. 3 Relell.~e ~ct screw (i)nnd advance pivot unt.iI an vertical pilly of the IUlb a.~8emhly is ~limil1at~. ·L.___Til?;htell ;,et ~crew (7)temporarily :lond advam;e pivot adjusting nut (18)until it touches t.he yoke. 5 __•'.Re If'l\se set.screw (7)(nr)t too far becnu.o;e the pivot shnultinilL revolve)and ad....::mce the pivot adjU:lting nut one-fourth turn.Then tight.en kl'eper screw (19). 6._.__Push the pivQt inward as far 3-"1 it.will go and tighten set 5crew (7). ..... ....... -' ,.,_.,. ,. f.t . (.r , i,.. ;,.;. ., .. ·0 ...·,'U ·3·i""j!J • .. CALIBRATION AND MAIN1'E~ANCE OF CUItR.F.NT ME"l'ERS ~(~...J - , -I, ("""I watdling the lll:tion of tlw pent:LJ,1;.-:lr til laake ,,11:-1: tha.t therei~comp·lete freedom of :ll:tion bd\Vl!~n ttw gen.r :lnd the threads 011 the shaft.Then apply oil to the penta gear and to the three hearing sur- faces (oue drop on the vertical shaft and two on the horizontal shaft that supports the gear). 14.Adjust the contact wires so that these wir~touch the edge of the single and pentll ec- centrics "ery lightly.Then rep1:lce the cap on the contact chamber and listen with a headset for II sharp click. 15.Place the 3.Ssemhled meter-on a solid sur- face with the shaft vertical,and.make a ~pin test (see page 10). Disassembly In general,the disassembly of small Price current meters offers no difficulties and hence it will not be desnribedin detail.The following pre- cautions,however,should be ohserved. 1.Removal of the contact chamber from the yoke should be done carefully and v,.;thout exert~ ing appreciable force,so that the penta gear a.nd shaft will not be damaged. 2.The collta.ct-chamber cap should never be unscrewed when the upper end of the shaft bears forcibly against-its underside.a condition which e."cists if the bucket-wheel raising nut h::tS been previously tightened,and if the pivot ad- justment has been m:t.de so tight that there is no play between the end of the shaft and the under- side of the cap.. When the bucket-raising nut has been tightened,the upper end of the shaft bear;;against the underside of the cap at a point that is about threEH5ixteenths of an inch "off center"with re-. spect to the center of the cup.If those two r~rts are in contact with each other when the cap is being either tightened or loosened,a severe bend- ing force occurs at the point where the upper end of the shaft emerges from the upper bearing. Lack of attention to this suhject is a.common cause forllbent shafts"on Price-type current meters. When the buckct-wheel-and-hub assembly is. raised from the pivot by means of the raising nut, the bucket wheel should always be held stu.tionnry and the raising nut should be turned by hand.The bucket wheel should never be spun with the raising nut held stationary,as this method may cause several exees::;turns which may result in the . shaft.lj(,,~ulllillJ.!;11I~lIt or the yuki:IWI'I)Jllill~:;Jlrllll~. Inspection and Repair of Current Met~rs To make sure that the rmrrent meter is in good condi tion and is prnperly luhrif'ated,the opernt.ol·shonld exnmin~it,hot h hf'forp.:mri aftf'r ea(:h dis(~harge mea.<;urerncnt,wit.h r(~1.!ard 10 r hp details under t lw heading iUlIllf·diatdy foUf1\\-ing. Bccuu::;e all meter pa.rts are manufuf'turNl to hp. interchangeable without ufft!ctinll;the ·r:alibrn.t.inn of the meter,rephwcment of any oi th("pomponpnt parts can he made in the field. Rotor and shaft alinement By spinnin~the bucket wheel slowly and then watching the meta!fra.me to whieh the r.\1P~are. f 3.Stened,eccentrici ty in the hucket-wheel-and-hub assembly m:Ly he rendily detected.If ereentric- ity is ohserved while making this test,either the wheel or shaft is bent,ann further tests should be mane to 'ind thp C:OIlT~e of t.h('Pl'l"pntril'ity.Thp ":l~. should be removed and the movement of the :5haft inside the contact chamber should be observ~L If, while the bucket wheel is rotating,any eceentric- it.y in the movement of the top of the shaft is oh- served,the shaft should be removed from thea-'S- sembly and should be further tested hy observing its performance while rolling it on ac1enn flut sur- face.Any meter found to have a hent shaft should be repaired by rephcing t.hat shaft with a newone. H eccentricity is not found in the ~h:lft.it may hp present in the buekct wheel.Should th£'fault [il~ there.the rotor ~houlri he rt'phwed with :l nf'W one. Sprung yoke The yoke may become sprung so that the dis- tance between the upper and lower anns is too small Or too great to pennit proper adjustment of the rotor a.ssembly within th!s spn.ce.It In:ty also be distorted so that the c03..~ial holes will no Conger properly aline the rotor assembly and the pivot.. If either of these t'onditions ig sltspertE'fi.thp aline- ment and spacing should be checked with n.spe- cial yoke :llinement gage that is available from the Property ::\[aintenrlll'~p.Sedion.Silvpr ~t16!l.!!,).fd. ...-. 10 TECHNIQUES OF WATER-RESOURCES INVESTIGATIONS --: ".' .- - .- - - - T ..1.l:~:;r·.tn ,h(':,hn,",,~.th·~"~:",,.>'!H'\-.~~:" (tlt<Lt part-from the slot for the hangcl'W th~end onto which the tailpiece fits)occasionally becomes bent.A bent stem causes the bucket wheel to as- sume a position that is out of proper alinement with the floW'lines of the water.If the amount of distortion in the yoke is minor and can be properly straightened,this should be done;if not,the yoke should be replaced with a new one. Damaged cups The bucket wheel and cups on it have nlore influence on the meter rating than has any other component.Cups should therefore be eXllmined closely as any small distortion will cause a change in roting.Only for the hlost 111.inor dents where the r.ups can be str:lightlened to r<like new"con- .dition should repairs be attempted;otherwise the .bucket wheel should be replaced with a new one.. Damaged tairpiec:e The tailpiece should be examined for damage. It may be straightened it'the damage is not too serious;otherwise it should be replaced with a new one. Contact chamber The contact chamber should be exainined for proper meshing of the penta gear with the acme thread on the shaft and for proper adjustment.of the contact wires,Proper adjustment of these parts should be maintained at all times.It should olso be inspected for excessive wear of the upper bearing.Any missing or damaged parts such as s""r.:,w:=;,dWll1.Qef <::11'5,or binding posts .-;hould be replaceU.Should the need arise,the entire contact chamber may be replaced ~'ith a new one. Pivot and bearings The pivot :should be examined with a mag- nifying gl:l:;s to see whether the point is frn.c- tllred,rough,or warn flat at the apex.The point of :l new pivot is rounded to u,radius of approxi- :haldy O.GO.j ill~hj wea.r n::sultillg in a radius rrrr>".t"r th:m 0.010 J!1,...h i~('X""""""!F'.If :my of thp,,(> couditions exist,the pivot should be replaced with a new one. To examiue the l>ivot Learing conveniclltly, the contact chambpr should he removed carefully ::nd tlH'h\trk(>t.-~·l1l'el-:l1lr!-llll h :Joo'f'mbh'~hf)uId be tilted to one side so that the lower ~of the yoke will not obstruct examination.The pivot bearing should then be examined for possible fracture,pits,or roughness.If any of the above are found,the entire hub assembly should be replaced with one containing a new pivot bearing. No current meter should be packed or trans- ported with the pivQt bearing resting on the pivot. The pivot and pivot bearing should always be sep.- arated by the raising nut. Lubrication All bealing surfaces should be inspected to see that they have a.thin coating of instrument oil. The small Price current meter has bearing surfaces a.bove the bucket wheel in addition to the pivot bearing.These consist of (1)the bearing surfaces between the penta gear and the acme threads on the shaft,(2)the cylindrical bearing of the small shaft of the pen~gear,(3j the cyJindrial bearing of the shaft within the bearing lug,and (4)the thrust bearing between the shaft and the cap. Spin tests The spin test is an easy method of determining the condition of.the bearings of a current meter.In making this test,the meter should be placed so that the shaft is in a vertical position and the bucket wheel is protected from air currents. The bucket.wheel iii then given a quick turn by hand t.Q start it spinning,the duration of which is tim.cd.with a stopwatch.A.s the rotating bucket nears the stopping point,its -motion should be carefullyob.:;cfvcd to see \\"h.cthtr the stop is ab- mpt or gradual.Hegardless of the duration of the spin,if the bueket wheel comes to an abrupt stop•. the cause of such behavior should be found a.nd corrected before the meter is used.In such in- st.ances,a lark of oil,th~maladjustment of the penta gear,and a misalinemcnt of the yoke are possible sources of trouble that should"receive clulv a.ttention. The normal spin for a small type-AA Price shoulll be u.pproximatdy 4-minuLt::;and should llnr!,..r no ~irl'um:;:t:Jn('('''h,..1('''''th:m 1I{minutcs. Large variations in the durn.tion of the spin test will be introduced by slight \'u,l'utions from the vertical po"ition of the shaft.Some operators accordingly provide themselves with a small cir- I .'.~ .J~ j ..... CALmRATION Ah'1J MAINTENANCE OF CURRENT METERS 11 (. \ '-..."" I 1 . l cular level vial that can be phced on the cup of the meter to help them ma.ke such a test with the shaft a[illeU ill a truly vcrti,:al positioll. Anothl~r l:omll10n test t.o determine r he ('()lIdi- t.ion of the bearing;of a {~llrreflt.1Il1~l!~r il'i lu hold the meter!'O that th~shnft is in a vnrti{~al posit.ion and while keepinl{the shaft ill as ncu.rly a fixed posi- tion as possible,to revolve the yoke a.m.l tu.i.lpicce in ~horizontal plane around it.If the bucket wheel reInI~ins in a.fixed po::;ition,it is all inJi- cation that the be::lring:3 a.re satisfactory,whereas if the bucket wheel tends to revolve with the yoke and taiIpi.:ce,it is an indication that the metel"re- quires attention. Routine Cleaning and Oiling of Current Meters At the end of ea.ch da.y's use,the current meter should be thoroughly cleaned and oiled.The pivot and pivot bearing need special attention;unlike all other parts of the "meter they are suhj{lct to rusting amI,therefore,it is desirable tha.t they be dried before they JIC oiled. The outline below gives a step--by-step prore- dure for the cleaning and oiling of current meters. Equipment: L Screwdrivers of proper size for use on set screws in the yoke and on the pivot-adjusting nut. 2.Large soft cloth that will readily absorb wa.ter for wiping the outer surfaces of the meter. 3.Cotton-tipped swabs for cleaning the bear- ing surfaces. 4.Supply of oil (instrument oil that is avail- able from the Property )'Iainteo.o.nce Sect:oll is recorrunended)in a cont:l.iner with facilitie.that pennit a drop of oil to be applied in places that otherwise are difficult to rea.ch." Dismantle the current meter as follows: l Release the raising nut. 2.Release the two set screws in the yoke, holding the conta.ct chamber-and the pivot in place with forefinger and thumb. 3.Remove the contact chamber from the yoke slowly and carefully.Do not remove the-cap at this time. 4.Remove the pivot from the yoke. Clean the parts as follows: 1.Pivot bearing. a.,:lcaIl and dry the air pocket "'lLd ·'tlle ...c ~ pivot hcarinp;,Il::;inp;n c:otton-tippcd swab. b.Inspe(;t the pi ':0 t henri np;. 2.Pivol.hor{~in the yoke. Swah tJJI~pil.·(Jt.hoil~ill tIlt:yokl~with a ,:ot,t.oll-t.ippl~l."wa.b. :I.Shaft. Clean aut!dry the :>huft-(Jurtil:ula.dy the acme threads. 4.Pivot. Wipe the pivot until it is thoroll~hly dry. J>.Contact chnmb~l". a.Remove the cap and shake out auy wa- ter that Inay be trapped within the"contact chamber.Occ:lsionall)',clean t.he ch~ultber thoroughly by nllowing hotwllter to flow into it under pre5i~ure.A jet of W:l.tcr such as that is:minlt from a.hot-water tap is "recommended.Iloppe':I powder solvent ha..')been used suceel!::;fully to remove gummed oil if cleaning with hot"water is not successful. b.Wipe-the interior of the stem of the con- tact chamber. o.Swa.b the hole in the bearinp;lug hy mea.ns of a r.otton-tipped swttb in:-;erted throngh the 5it"m of th...Mnt~H~t ~hnmhf'r"Glp~lliin!r thp. hole in the h~aring lult from the top frequently causes the contact wire~to bend and e....entually b~ak,whcre:lS cleaning itfrom the bottom neither hends the.wires nor n,ffects their"adjustment. Oil as follows: 1.Shaft. Apply a film of oil to (a.)the acme thretds (lib era.l1y ,so that the excess oil will later ~pr~d over the penta gear and the penta shaft),(h)the area.that enters the be:l.ring lu~,and (c)the uppermost end of t!lE'"haft. 2.Pivot bearing. Apply u thin fihn of oil over all expo:sed parts of the pivot beuring. 3.Pivot hoJe in yoke. Apply a drop of oil to the sides of the hole through which the piyot passes. 4.Pivot. Apply a thin film of oil to the pivot. Reassemble u.:s follows: l.Replace the pivot and tighten t.he set ~erew that holds it in place.;\:Iake sure tha.t the pivot lock nut bears agailltit the yuke,:.LUU tlw.t the :i~t screw bears against the flattened part of the pivot. ......••., -----------..-........... 12 TECHNIQUES OF \VATER-RESOURCES INVESTIGATIONS ""'"2~Fit.t.he r.ont·lwt I'h:lmhpr owr the end of -Low-Velocity Price Meter TIl(>Gf'Ologir'l!1 STJrve~..dcsi!!ltr>Q t h('fir,;\t of its pygmy current melC'rs (~('e fig.1)in 193G.The ~pygmy l'UlTt'ltt llll'tl.'t·is of the Price type ill that it eontains :\('np-type bucket wheel mounted on a (). ."........-...' j vertic:!l shaft ha....ing b('arings that operat~in :lil"p"t-!;et:1.The bucket wlled iii :!inche::l ill di- ameter (two-fifths the size of that in the smaJI Price current meter).The pygmy meter is de- signed part.lcularly for thE'm£>:lsurC'ment of di.."- charges of those streams that are so shallow that the sm:ill Price current meter fails to perform accurately,but whi~h have too great a flow robe mea8ured conveniently by eit!ler volumetric means or with small weirs. The pygmy meter differs from the type-AA small Price current metcr in respects other than size (see fig~4).The contact chamber is an inte- gral part of the yoke and contains a single-revo- lution contact only.The meter has no tailpiece nor has it any provision for suspension from a cable.There is no bucket-wheel raising nut on the pygmy meter,but a small brass plug is pro- vided to replace the pivot when the meter is stored or transported. The bucket wheel revolves about 2!4'times as fast as that of the small Price current meter.This relatively high speed,combined with the fact that no multiple-contact arrangement is provided, limits its use to conditions where the revolutions are counted aurally to velocities not ex~eeding 3 feet per second. The Survey'::!pygmy current meters are con- 'structcd so that the buck"et..wheel-artd-hub asSem- bly may be removed from the yoke as a unit for convenience in cleaning and oiling.Instructions for removing and replacing such IlSsemblies follow: To remove the bucket-wheel-and-hub assembly from the yoke: 1.Remove the cap. 2.R0lea"e the "et ;::crew holtling the ;ll;;ot In the yoke. 3.Remove the pivot. 4.Tighten the set screw into the yoke (other- wise,it may offer difficulties in removing the bucket wheel). ;"i.Lowcr the bucket wh~cl to the lowest po:sition in the yoke and carefully slide it forward and out- ward.If it,is found that the bucket-wheel-and-hub assemhly docs not ~ome out freely,return it to its OIiginal PO:;itiOll auu rotate it one-:sixth of a ~url1. Hep::'at 1hi~opC'ration nntil ~ll("(,f'S~flll.~ever apply force in removing the bucket-wheel-and hub assembly because the shaft and eccentric may beeome bent. Pygmy Current Meters- \ )The low-velocity meter differs from the genera -purpose Price meter in.that the·penta gear is· -removed and the single eccentric is replaced by a doublt'eccentric which make:s two electrical <:on- t:.l.Cts for each revolution of the bucket wheel. _These meters arc produced by the same uic5 and fb:ture:"'l used .in the manufacture of the general puqio:;c mcter.Con:s<.:qucntly,they also have a Sill~dt'standard ratill~.ant.!::lny parts may be-repb.:eJ.wit bout the tlccl.':).-,;ity or calibratIOn.The durat.ion of tlw nonnal spin should be 4.%-5 min- ute:-,:mu it should ueycr be less than 2~lIlinutes. .....In all rcspeets other "than those pointed out above the two types of meters arc identical and all of the preceding.pnrngrnph;;apply t~the low- .....Yelol:ity mcter. f~.1.,"•••~r'·l'i,r ::~:,.::.l~••~••I"f'·.~r :~!,n:t'~:H': ()yokl."Do this :slowly and.carefully without ;;:applying much force,othenvilse the penta gear or :shaft may become damaged. 3.~.1a.tch the marks on the contact chamber ,-and yoke,and tighten the Sl~t screw holding the contn.ct chamber in place.• 4.Check the contact wires.The adjustment P"'"of hoth the single--and penta~contactv.;res should be examined to be sure that the adjustments are as light as possible without impairing the elet'tri- cal contact..~ 5.Replace the cap on contact chamber. 6.::\IO\'e the bucket-wheel-:.l.nd-hub assembly _up and down to·detennine whether the pivot ad- justment is correct. 7.Check the operation of the current meter _with a spin test.• 8.Unless the current meter is to be used im- mediately,raise the pivot bearing off the pivot by !"""means of the bucket-raising nut. ,-- {I \j l ~.',. -c.: C"l 12 >-r.... tJ:I S..... 0 Z >Z t:' ~>.... ~ I-) 1>1 Z>Z C"'l ttl 0.., nc:: ~ ~J M ~ rl ~ ~ trI· Vi ~.\('.1-L .."-..J f) l}-)..-J.-- 543 l .._.__~L._ r:~-' };C ..L -'-0..,..._./ o 6 10.Buckel-wheel hub II.Bucket-wheel hub nul 12.Buckel wheel 13.Pivol bearing 14.pivor- 15.Pivol set screw 16.Pivot-adjusling nut keeper screw 17.Pillol-adju ~itin9 nul flsur.4.-Auembly dl"fom 01 py,,,,y el/",,"I mel". ~¥ EXPLANATION ».I i I .Cap for conlact chamber 2.Binding-posl beaded wire ,3.Binding-post insulaling bushing 4.Binding-post body 5.Binding-post nul 6.Yoke 7.Yoke sel screw 8.Upper beo;ing 9.Shoff 7 -I-------_._-..... B -'",~ H:;.. (. 1 (.,).-.-'),r----; I ! l I I .." •c) C.> • • Fleu"5.-An.mbly di.S"'"01 Ie,m.t.,. ! ;/ !i iI I ! I I . I I I I I I' I ~ ~ ~ &l o.., ~ ~ ~rnoC:'"~[;l. en I~~ ~ -p-,..,..JJC)"i (. TOP VIEW .EXPLANATION 10 ..Vane hub I I •Vane hub nut 12.Raising nut 13.Pivot 14.Pivot bearing 15.Pivot-adjusting nut 16.Compression-spring assembly 17 •Set screw () I .Yoke 2 .Contact chamber 3.Binding-post insulating bushing 4.Binding post 5.Binding-post nut 6.Shoft ~7.Magnet 8.Glass switch 9.Vane l }-(' ~~ ] I j 1 1 ~~ J\._/5 15 12 SIDE VIEW 1\l; ""-....1 i ~oo ~ Wi '"j 8' r 'J:(.~.~, ,~ .:...",.." CALIBRATION AND llAINTENA:\CE OF CURRENT i.IETERS 15 ,.,.., -. 1"""1 .•r I ~i I ~I i i \'·'·'1 -\~) (~ ~.'... - '() To insert the buckct-whccl-anu-hub us:-icmbly into the yoke: 1.With the pivot removedl set screw tightened, cap removed,a.nd yoke l.md shD1t heltI up:5idc: down,direct the upper end of the :shaft into the hole of the upper bea.ring,and carefully adjust the bucket wheel into position within the anns of the yoke.Do not 3.IlPI)'force.If the bucket wheel can- not be placed within the yoke without forcing, remove it,turn it one-sL'{th of a revolution,and re- peat until successful. 2.Unscrew the set screw to a.position that will pennit the pivot to be inserted. 3.Insert the pivot, 4.Tighten the set screw and tum the yoke right side up. 5.Replace the cap. Investigations have shown that there are very . slight differences in the rotors of pygmy meters that prevent a.standardized rating.Because the rotors are not identical,they cannot be replaced in the field.l\14~ters are calibrated individually and each is supplied with its own rating table.A pygmy current meter which has been damaged should be returned to the Property :\-hintenance &etlon for ~paii and fef!alihrntinn.Th~durntion of the normal spin should be approxirnately 151 minutes and should never be l~s tl;1~half a. nUnute. Ice Meters Ice meters (see fig.1)are also the vertical-a.;,:!s trpe but dir.er from the Price in that the rotor used consists of four curved vanes.Other differ- ences ma.y also be seen in figure 5,which illustrates the assembly diagram of the ice meter.They are: L'There is no rear e.~tension of the yoke.The lHetcr is l-'Jppurtcd by ;~S(:c:l.iOIl of ;;pllci:.ll W:.lU- in~rod that SI:rt'WS into the top of the cont:.lct chamber.The objCf:t of thi!'l arrangement i.~to reuuce the :iizc of ~he ice hole rcquin:u for inserting the meter. 2.The upper hearing is a small sphere instead' of a sleeve., 3.The c1cctricu.l COlltn.ct is lJ.llUlgnctically actun.ted glass-sealed s~-itch.There are two con- tact closures for each rc\·olution of the rotor,one each time the poles of the magnet are alined with the leaves of the switch. Assembl.r or disassembly of the ice meter offers no special problems except that the magnet is very brittle and must he-handled with C3re,as all parts should be.Care and lubri~ation should be of -the same type dcsr,ribed for the Pri~e mete•. Investigations have shown that there are very slight diffcrencl}.'in the rotors of ice meter.:>thllot . prevent a standardized rating.Because the rotors are not identical,they cannot be replaced in the field.:!.teters are calibrated individually and e:lch is supplied.with its own rating table.An ice meter· which haS heen damaged should be returned to the Property ),Iaintcnance .Section for repair and re- nalihrntion.Thf"riurntion of the nonnnI S!"in should be approximately 5 minutes and should never be less than 2 minutes. Selected References Buchanan,T.J.,and Somcr.l,W.P.,1968,Discharge me1\llurements at gaging station5:U.S.Ceol.Survey Technique;!,\~;"ater Rescources Inv.,book 3,chs-p. AS.(In press) C,.>rbect,D.:>1.,and ,.>the!";'.19';5,Stre-~m-!l::tzi:llt pro- cedure:U.S.Ceo!.Survey Water-Sl:\pply P:lper SSS. Smoot,G.F.,and Carter,R.W.,1968,Are individUlll current-meter flltings necessary?:Am.Sue.Civil Engineenl Jour.,v.94,no.HY 2.. ) I t I I f .. ( I .------------------------ 402 •6th Street South P.O.Box 599 Kirkland,WA 98033 Phone (206)827-9572 :WX 9~~-449-2870 I~ .,------------------------- (- ..- - OPERA.TING INSTRUCTIONS for MODEL "J"THERMOGRAPH UMPORTANT:READ CAREFULLY ~. ..........: - - i 100 46 rr -- PLEASE READ CAREFULLY , f""BEFORE HANDLING THE INSTRUMENT Peabody Ryan has been the leading manufacturer of portable thermographs for more than SS years.Our instruments have proven ideal for unattended,long-term .....monitoring of ambient air or water temperatures. The Model "J"is a new generation of portable thermographs.It has not only the fast response of the Ryan Model "F"and "R",but has the timing of the quartz movement.The chart size has been enlarged for easier reading and inter-. pretation and a new type of chart advance has been added to allow longer periods, up to 180 days,unattended.Provisions for unloading and loading during field use have been incorporated into the design. Ryan thermographs are engineered and built to be as rugged as possible.But, please remember they are precision instruments.Improper handling can damage the sensitive clockworks and mechanical linkage. These thermographs should always be treated as you would any laboratory instru- ment.If you follow these instructions thoroughly,and take reasonable care in handling arid using the instrument,it will operate reliably and accurately. r~ 4'r'j j ENGINEERIN-G DATA - Models Movement Power Chart Advance Sensor Chart Calibration Range Accuracy Weight Dimensions Enclosure Maximum depth of use Accessory items J-180 (six months)J-90 (three months) Quartz timing mechanism One 1-112 volt HC"cell battery (included) Sprocket drive Fast response probe:Hi-expansion.liquid filled system operating a bellows mechanism.Time constant:75 sec.(2/3 span in 75 sec.full span in less than 8 mins.) Pressure sensitive strip chart perforated to ac- commodate sprocket drive 2 inches wide.24 feet long with lineal day span length. 5 ranges:_5°to +25°C.0 to +30°C.+5° to +35°C.+10°to +40°C.+IS°to +45°C Temp ±2%or .6°C Time ±.2%or 3 min I day 2.5Ibs. Largest diameter:4.875 in. Tank length:8.25 in. Sensor extension:2.90 in. Heavy cross-section polycarbonate thermo plas- tic.international yellow 500 ft. 1 additional clamp 1 additional "0"ring 1 additional chart transport with chart U.S.Patent 3.487.691 Other Patents Pending ,- HOW TO OPEN Please note the hinged coupling around the middle of the instmment.The 'purpose of this coupling is to maintain the water tight integrity of the unit. (See picture on cover.) I~ Grip latch of coupling'firmly with one hand and the unit with the other.Pull latch in an outward motion allowing it to pivot.The draw wire will then disconnect from the other side of the coupling. Spread coupling and remove from unit.Set aside for reuse in sealing the unit. With one hand,grip the bottom half of the unit and with the other hand grip the top half (cover)of the unit. With an easy pulling motion,separate the two halves. IMPORTANT NOTE:DO NOT TRY TO REMOVE THE TANK HALF FROM AROUND THE SENSOR lliffT. Set the lower half on a level surface with opening up.Then turn the other half upside down (sensor pointing down)and set inside the other half with sensor down inside. REMOVING CARTRIDGE FROM UNIT This unit has a removable cartridge'for easier loading and unloading.The chart has approximately 22 ft.of usable length,if used continuously:a ~ of 1-1/2"per day on the 180 day unit and 3"per day on the 90 day umt~ The charts are pre-rolled on a core to make loading easier. 1 2- 3 With the pen assembly facing you,fmd the locking screw on the left side of the instrument.Unscrew this screw until the end of it clears the top of the shaft. Grip instrument firmly with one hand and with other rotate cartridge from the top holding grooves. Firmly pull the cartridge from the bottom holding grooves in an out- ward motion at approximately the same angle as the grooves. ., .- ,- """1 ,JQ$\ .- - -5 INSTAl~LING CHART INTO CARTRIDGE Holding the cartridge finnly in one hand,release the core shaft retain- ing clip.This can be done with a slight pulling motion with the finger nail. Lift the shaft assembly from the groove in an upward motion until the gear clears the edge of the cartridge. Shaft assembly should then pull away from cartridge with ease.Set cartridge aside. With the shaft assembly in one hand,pick up a pre-rolled chart. Insert the shaft assembly into the spool core.Line up lugs on gear .with grooves in chart CODe.Seat firmly against gear. NOTE:MAKE SUR.:E THE SPROCKET HOLES IN THE CHART ARE ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE WmTE GEAR. Insert small shaft end into the cartridge,then slip .flatted shaft end into groove until retaining clip locks shaft in place. ., -~ I \-~~ "'"'I -1 ~ 3 4 .,... - THREADING AND ATTACHING CHART Remove the tape from the end of chart.Hold·chart firmly so that it will roU,but not unravel. Thread chart across platten (under the guides)around the drive sprocket and under the take-up spool. Attach the end of the chart (gray backing side up)to the take-up spool with a piece of tape. Rotate the take-up spool one or two turns.Maintain a light pressure on the chart roll.This will eliminate buckling or bulging of the chart. NOTE:IF CARTRIDGE IS NOT TO BE USED IM- MEDIATJELY,WRAP A LIGHT RUBBER BAND AROUND CARTRIDGE TO KEEP THE CHART FROM UNROLLING. The unit comes with an extra cartridge so preloading of the chart can· be done in the lab and the cartridge used later at the sit~location . .. LOADING CARTRIDGE INTO UNIT ;~ NOTE:IF RUBBER BAND WAS USED,REMOVE IT.- U 'ore loading the cartridge into the unit,reference data may be placed on the chart.Place cartridge on a flat,dry surface and write data across chart u;"ng the flat part of the cartridge as a writing surface• .... Before loading _cartridge,rotate take-up spool until the top of the reference data is at the edge of the flat portion of the cartridge. Gripping cartridge and instrument firmly,with flat side of cartridge facing the penpoint.slide the shaft ends into the bottom holding grooves.Push firmly until they are well seated. Rotate cartridge so the other set of shaft ends slide into top holding grooves.Make sure they are well seated. 4 With your screw driver,reset the locking screw . ....rr- ---...--..,;--:;--~_.........--.. i~OO -, I ~2 3 4 CLOSING AND SEALING UNIT Check "0"ring to be sure it is clean. With one hand holding the bottom half,pick up the other half (with sensor and chart transpIDrt)._Reverse it so the _sensor is pointing up._ carefully insert the chart transport into the optming of the other half. Make sUre two tank halves are seated evenly over the "0"ring. Pick up clamp and place it around the flanges in the center of the tank.Make sure the flanges are inside the damp groove all the way around. Holding the clamp firmly around unit with one hand,attach the draw wire over the hook on the opposite clamp half.Pivot the clamp latch toward the ins~ment.(If excessive force is required,check to see if the "0"ring is seated on the flanges and if the clamp is seated over the tank flanges.) When the clamp is secured,there is a post on the clamp with a hole in it protruding through the hole in the latch.Insert a paperclip or small piece of wire into the hole in the post and bend it over so that it will not fall out. This will prevent the latch from coming undone while the unit is in use. ~-"_....._.-------,-~-_.__.---~._-,---- - INSTALLING YOUR INSTRUMENT i~use of the air trapped inside the sealed container,it may have a tendency ~float. 'nen the instrument is installed at the site location.it should be anchored s :urely to some object that will not readily move.This can be done by looping a cord or wire through the holes in the outside of either end of the i"""'itrument and then securing the cord or wire to the object. CHANGING THE BATTERY :to change the battery,first remove the chart transport assembly according !the inStrucdons. :1 With a flat tip screw driver.loosen the slotted screw. ~Pivot the cover plate,exposing the battery. • , I :l ; I 3.... 4 Tum the instrument upside down and the battery will fall out. Replace with a new battery,size C,1-1/2 volts.(Recommend use of Eveready Alkaline Powercell.)Make sure (+ )is pointing up, Push battery down slightly and pivot cover plate back into position. Tightc~n slotted head screw and replace transport assembly. There is a sticker on the cover plate indicating when the battery should be replaced.An Eveready Alkaline Powercell should give.at least 12 months of continual use. i 1 00·-55 'I_...' ('I REMOVING USED CHART Follow the same procedure from "How to Open"through "Removing Cart- ridge from unit". .J.the cbart WillS allowed to run the full length: ~1 ,~ r--'3 Take the loose end (should have a piece of tape already on it)and re-attach it to the spool core. Rewind it and follow 1 through 3 of "Installing Chart into Cartridge"'• Remove used chart and reload with new chart. --::-----.--=-_=-.~~- --r the chart has run for only a portion of the length: With :a sharp object,cut the chart along the edge of the platten.Hold Chart Spools so it wiII not unroll. -2 Stick a small piece of tape on the end of the chart. - - 3 Using a cylindrical object,attach the loose end of the used chart with a piel:e of tape and unroll the chart from the take-up spool onto the cylinder. From here,follow procedure outlined in "Threading and Attaching Chart"'. --( r- -.: r- REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE ~ If the unit does not work properly,or is damaged,return to: Ryan Instruments,Inc. 402 6th St.South, Kirkland,WA 98033 Any questions concerning the operation of the instrument,phone:(~06)827~9572. Aftf:r each use,and BEFORE the instrument is opened,clean off all grit or other matter,and wipe the case and clamp completely dry. NOTE:THE AIR THAT WAS TRAPPED INSIDE THE SEALED INSTRUMENT MAY HAVE A TENDENCY TO CONDEN- ,SATE AND CAUSE SMALL AMOUNTS OF MOISTURE. "'"EACH TIl\1E THE UNIT IS OPENED,WIPE DRY THE INSIDE OF THE TAJ."lK ~~D AS 1'd..4J.~OF THE OTHER PARTS AS POSSIBLE.lV.aAKE EVERY EFFORT,TO KEEP THE INSIDE OF THE INSTRUMENT AS CLEAN AND DRY AS POSSIBLE., ..... The large "0"ring on these instruments may be used dry,but should be cleaned each time the unit is opened.The flanges of the tank should be cleaned before reseating the "0"Ring. The small probe port "0"ring on the Model J was installed at the factory and not accessible for dose examination.Lightly clean grit and other matter off the ring area so it will not nick the ring and possibly cause leaking.Do not use a lot of force,as it might cause the seal to be broken . ..... - i' ••_.~'IiII!.( ----'-".-()-~-0-'-,~'-~,'_1"'1'J \~-\.."',.....---l 1 )-J i ]1 1 1 1 1 SE.,Gr IOI\LJ I sh:l,;fFICI-\I IbN~]J 1 --. /~ BATTERY ACCESS COVEhlUNOERSIOEI -PANEl METER SWITCHABU TIME CONSTANT OPTION 10 r I; 1:\~I rl il!i o C) CJ' Q.') to' i i GENERAL DESCRIPTION The Marsh-McBirney Model 201 Portable Water Current Meter is a general purpose instrument,designed for maximum versatility in both laboratory and field applications.The instru- ment consists of (l)a transducer probe with cable,and (2)a signal processor housed in a portable case. The instrument senses water velocity in one direction and presents this velocity reading directly in feet per second on a panel meter.! ~ The instrument is powered ~six standard D size cells con· .tained in a battery compartment in the instrument case.Access to this compartment is through a cover plate on the bottom of the case. The case is approximately 7 inches wide by 4 inches high by 10 inches deep.The standard length of the cable attached to the transducer probe is-20 feet. I [,[ tl .1 Absolute Calibration Calibration of all MMI water current meters is traceable to a calibration facility where the flow is known to within .. ±I%. Long Term Zero Drift The Model 20 I incorporates features which reduce long term zero drift to less than ±0.07 feet per second.This effect is separate and distinct from the slight motion of the panel .meter which is due to electronic noise. RANGE OF MEASUREMENT The instrument will measure flow velocities up to 10 feet per second.The panel meter has three full scale ranges:2.5, 5,and 10 feet per second,ally of which can be selected by a rotary switch on the front panel. ,i r r: fv ! J.--1 - SECTION12 1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS UNPACKING AND PRELIMINARY SETUP I.Carefully remove the instrument from the shipping carton. 2.Remove the battery compartment cover (bottom side of instrument)UIHj insert six 0 size cells according to the polarity indicated in each battery slot.If the probe connector option is included,plug the probe con~ nector into the mating connector on the front panel. 3.Set the selector switch to the CAL position.The meter should indicate in the CAlibrate sector of the scale.This indicates the batteries are good and the instru- ment is operating properly.Insert new batteries if the meter fails to register in the CAL sector.If the meter still fails to register correctly,con tact the factory. 4.Place the probe in a non-metallic (plastic)bucket filled with water,and rotate the selector switch to the 2.5 fL/sec.setting.Move the probe gently in the bucket,and /'" PROBE ORIENTATION TO FLOW DIRECTION FLOW DIRECTION 1}iiI}} ACCURACY The overall accuracy of the instrument is based upon three factors: I.Long term zero drift which.is less than ±0.07 fL/sec. 2.Linearity of response which is ±2%of reading. ,3.Absolute calibration which is ±2%of reading. Linearity of Response The reading can deviate from an exactly linear response to increasing water flow due to minor variations in flow stream~ lines at increasing velocity.This factor is smull enough to guarantee that the reading is within 2%of nominal over the velocity range of the instrument. --~~ ~ oo <:;1 <0 the meter should respond to the motion by indicating the velocity of the probe.Remember that the instrument has a filter which will cause the meter output to lag behind the actual velocity of the p'robe when it is oscillated. j I J i I I I 1 )1 1 J 1 J 1 MOUNTING CONFIGURATIONS This filter time constant can be changed if required;con- tal;t the factory for details.If the instrUI11ent reading appears erratic.see Section 5. 5.tvlounl the probe in either a wading rod or cable suspension configuration as shown.The meter is now ready for making measurements.Remember to wait at least 20 seconds after positioning the probe before reading the panel meter. EXTERNAL CONTROLS AND CONNECTIONS The phQtograph on page I shows the external features of the Model 20 I Portable Water Current Meter.The following items are called out in the figure. I.Panel Meter. 2.Selector Switch -selects meter function. a.OFF -turns entire unit off. b.CAL -checks both the meter circuits and the ba tteries. c.2.5,5,10 -selects meter full scale range. 3.Battery cover location. 4.Panel Me~er Zero Adjust. 5.Probe. I, r1 I: ~'~ r I-tk SECTION 3 THEORY OF OPERATiON ... The Model 20 I consists of a sensor probe with attached cable and an electronic processor with a panel meter readout. The probe consists of LIn electromagnet inside a molded plastic housing and a pair of electrodes spaced 180 0 apart on the sen- sor surface.Water flowing around the sensor probe interacts with the electromagnetic field to produce a small voltage in the water near the probe which is sensed by the electrodes. This extremely small voltage is amplified,demodulated,fil- tered,and displayed on the panel meter as shown in the block diagram on page 13.~ .. CABLE SUSPENSIONWADINGROO PROBI CABLE MOOELaOI \ I'RO••"" ........ O~) c;:; o C\. DIGITAL PROCESSOR AND MAGNET DRIVER The digital processor generates signals used in the magnet driver,calibrate circuit,sample and hold circuit,and phase sen~ sitive demodulator.The digital processor consists of an inte- grated circuit oscillator and digital decoders to generate a 50- 50 duty cycle square wave at 30 Hz.This signal drives a power amplifier which controls the electrical current flowing in the -.electromagnet contained in the probe. This instrument is a sophisticated measuring device con- sisting entirely of solid state circuitry.The circuits which are used have been designed in a straight-forward manner for ease in troubleshooting.These circuits can be divided into the fol- lowing major areas. I.Digital Processor and Magnet Driver. 2.Amplifier and Detector. 3.Calibrate Circuit. The block diagram provided on page 13 depicts the signal paths through the instrument. jected into the unit before the sample gate,testing most of the circuitry.Proper operation is indicated by the meter re- maining within the CAL region. .POWER SUPPLY The standard operating voltages of the instrument are plus and minus 4.5 volts DC provided by six 0 size batteries.The batteries can operate the instrument for over 100 hours con- .tinuously.Normal battery drainage is approximately ±40 rna at ±4.5 volts. j11)l]J) EXTERNAL FEATURES The Model 20 I contains the following front panel features: 1.Selector Switch - a.Provides a sensitivity control for the panel meters. b.Allows the user to verify that the unit is still in calibration. c.Provides a check on the condition of the batteries. 2.Meter.-The panel meter has three scales which are selectable by the panel switch.This switch changes the resistor in series wi th the panel meter. t l, jJ~)i 1 J SECTION 4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION B) ~..."'"\..,... c:~ 0) t-~t AMPLIFIER AND DETECfOR This circuit first amplifies the flow-induced voltage (approxi- mately 6 microvolts per foot per second)which is present at the electrodes mounted on the probe surface.Then it samples this signal,amplifies the sampled signal,and synchronously detects and filters the signal to provide an output which drives the panel ... meter. CALIBRATE CIRCUIT A resistor in series with the magnet leads generates a voltage proportional to magnet current.This voltage is then reduced by a resistor divider to a level comparable to the flow voltage.When the front panel switch is in the CAL position,this voltage is in- 1 J ... Routinely check the condition of the batteries by setting the front panel Selector Switch to the CAL position and noting that the meter indicutcs in the CAL section of the scale.If the meter does no t ind ica te properly,replace t he batteries as in- structed on puge 3,step 2. Routine maintenance of this instrument·is confined simply to cleaning of the probe with a mild soap and watet to keep the electrodes free of non-conductive grease and oils. The meter race,switch knob,and front panel can also be cleaned with soap and water.Do not use any hydrocarbon solvents on the meter face or probe as these may damage the surface. To check the meter zero,place the probe in the center of a lloll-metallic (plastic)container of fresh water,wnit 30 minutes to insure that the water is stationary,and then proceed as follows: I.Set the Selector Switch to the 2.5 ft./sec full scale position. 2.Note the meter reading.If less than 0.1 ft./sec., zero is satisfactory. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .<1\0 • ,.." I I SECTION 51.,~IN·I~,~l\N(,t:1 I j i 1 1 i 1 of the container exaggerates the anomaly by interfering with the free field magnetic and electrical fields.This is especially true if the container is electrically conductive and made of ferrous material. Remedy: a.Use the largest water container available. b.Use only a nonconductive,non-magnetic con tainer. c.Hold the probe away from any container wa]]s. 2.Symptom:Noisy or erratic zero when probe is initially immersed in water~which improves after several minutes for no apparent reason. Cause:The electrode material reqUires immersion for a short length of time to become completely wetted.This problem may also appear momentarily when testing be- tween water samples of sharply different conductivities, such as between fresh'and salt water. Remedy:Immerse probe for several minutes in the .water to be used before taking readings.Tllis problem is normally only noted with new probes,but could occur if a probe is completely dry from lack of use.Washing the probe with a mild soap and warm water will aid in re- moving ahy nonconductive films.It is permissible to lightly wet sand the electrodes with 600 grit sandpaper if washing does not reduce the noise level. I 0- o 0';) (-...:J TROUBLESHOOTING InitiolOperation Initial operation of the instrument may require familiarity with its characteristics.The following notes may assist the first time user. I.Symptom:Noisy or erratic zero while held station- ary in a small container of water. Cause:Using the probe in a confined·space is an artificial environment.Holding the probe near the side It ... -~··----T·_·-·-- /..,. ..0 ..(\...-""f 1'---"-......__.....~~lF",I .\~.~;:r-:"!"'~""\.. I I ~-!".~".". \ - ~---,'--''""~:~,,,-~~_,c"""",,,',·~.....~-- 1 1 1 1 - I';J. a:w-'I-<t w ::J ~2 I""-Z<t 1.0 w~-J CJW~2 0 0 0 0-~I- 0U ::::>en w ex:>-~I-0(J) (/J2(J)-0, I "'"co M At) .0::- 0:c 0 gj mc '>: 0- f/) ~ ..2 Gi>- 0u C GJ E.::J.. &Iicc0 in ell CI">C0">: 0-u (/):=~c 0GJ G)'u (/)>- -(12 >..... - - - ~ "l- ~. ~'> ~-~ C\ .{0\ 'S-a / liten .5..a.en ~g:. oo C GI E::s.. iiicc o -u;en ">gac-;: ~t%c ~ Q)0 -CD.~>- ]-1 ~r '. -::._l.E _'J:Of._I\JTS-f'"1 Page GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............•..:......•••....•....••••...2 Instrument ......•.•••.••.•••••••..••.••..••...•.••••••....2 Probe •.•....•..••...•.....•••.•.•••....•••••.•...•.......3 Accessories and Replacement Parts ;.•.•.••.......3 SPECI FICATIONS I. II. III. OXYGEN PROBES AND EQUIPMENT .1.YSI 5739 D.O.Probe ...••.........•.••.••..••••.•...........4 II.YSI 5720 B.O.D.Botle Probe .......•••.•.••..•.............••5 III.YSI 5750 B.O.D.Bottle Probe •....••••••••••••.•.•...•..••••..6 IV.Cable Adpators ..............•.•.••••••••••...••....•.••.•..7 V.YSI 5791 and 5795 Submersible Stirrers ••...•.....•.•••.•.....•7 VI.YSI 5721 Battery Pack ••........•..••.•••••••.•............•8 OPERATING PROCEDURES I.Preparing the Probe ..........•..••...•...•...•......•••••...8 II.Preparing the Instrument ••......•...........•..••••........•10 III.Calibration ...............•...•.••.••.••.......•..•...•.•.10 IV.Dissolved Oxygen Measurement ..............•••.•'.'••••.....13 V.Calibration Tables ....•.........•..••••.••••.•.••.•........13 VI.High Sensitivity Membrane ••••..•.•.......••.•.••..•.•...••.14 VII.Recorder Output ..............•....••.•••••••.........'.....15 2.MEASUREMENT A.Adjust the SALINITY knob to the salinity of the sample. B.Place the probe and stirrer in the sample and switch the STIRRER control to ON. C.When the meter has stabilized switch to the appropriate range and read ,D.O. D.We recommend the instrument be left on between measurements to avoid necessity for repolarizing the probe. ,. I I :',I 1.1 ~:I gl O':i f+~' i- 3.GENERAL CARE A.Replace the instrument batteries when unable to adjust to red line.Use l2) Eveready No.935 "C"size or equivalent.. B.In the SA TT CH ECK position the voltage of the stirrer batteries is-displayed on the red 0-10 sCllle.Do not discharge below 6.0 Volts.Recharge for 14- 16 hrs.with YSI No.5728 charger. C.Membranes will last indefinitely.depending on usage.Average replace- ment is 2-4 weeks.Probe should be stored in humid environment to pre- vent drying out. D.Calibrate daily. DISCUSSION OF MEASUREMENT ERRORS ..••••.••..••..•...•......16 .... INSTRUMENT CASE ...••.•...•....•..•........•................17 INSTRUMENT BATTERIES .............•••..••••••••••.•••••••.•••.18 GUARANTEE AND REPAIR ..•••••..•.....•.••..•••,•••..•.•...••.18 SCHEMATIC I;)IAGRAM •....••.••.•••••••••••••.•••..CENTER SPREAD ,. SPECIFICATIONS Temperature Compensation ± 1%of D.O.reading for'measurements made within ±5°C of calibration temperature. ±3%of D.O.reading over entire range of -5 to +45°C probe temperature. System Response Time Typical response for temperature and D.O.readings is 90%in 10 seconds at a constant temperature of 30°C with YSI 5775 Membranes.p.O. response at low temperature and low D.O.is typically 90%in 30 seconds. YSI 5776 High Sensitivity Membranes can be used to improve response at low temperature and low D.O.concentrations.If response time under any operating conditions exceeds two minutes,probe service is indicated. I.Instrument Oxygen Measurement Ranges:0-5,0·10,and 0-20 PPM (0-2.5.0-5 and 0-10 PPM with YSI 5776 High Sensitivity Membrane) Accuracy:± 1%of full scale at calibration temperature (±0.1 PPM on 0·10 scale).or 0.1 PPM (whichever is larger). Readability:.025 PPM on 0-5 scale:.05 PPM on 0-10 scale:0.1 PPM on 0-20 see Ie. .~ I ] 'Ir''.....~])perl 1Ten lture Jge ]),1 1 Instrument and probe operating range is -6°to +45°C.Large ambient temperature changes will result in 2%loss of accuracy unless Red Line and Zam are reset. II.Probe Cathode:Gold Anode:Silver Membrane:.001"FEP Teflon (.0005"FEP Teflon available) Electrolyte:Half saturated KCI Temperature Compensation:(See SPECIFICATIONS.I.Instrument) Pressure Compensation:Effective 1/2%of readi(lg with pressures to 100 psi (230 ft.sea water) Polarizing Voltage:0.8 volts nominal Probe Current:Air at 30°C =19 microamps nominal Nitrogen at 30°C ==.15 microamps or less Power Supply The YSI Model 67 is powered by two disposable "C"size carbon zinc batteries (Eveready 935C or equal)providing approximately 1000 hour operation. Recorder Output o to 114-136 mV.Recorder should have 50.000 ohms minimum input im- pedance. III.Accessories and Replacement Parts YSI 6720 -Self Stirring BOD Bottle Probe VSI 5750 -Non Stirring BOD Bottle Probe "YSI 5739 -Oxygen Temperature Probe for field use.Combine with one of the following 4 cables for desired lead length: -Detachable leads for use with YSI 5739: VSI 5740-10 10'Cable YSI 5740-25 25'Cable YSI 5740-50 50'Cable ___,..YSI 5740-100 100'Cable ___ YSI 5740-150 150'Cable YSI 5740-200 200'Cable YSI 5721 -Battery and charger pack operates YSI 5791 and 5795 W Submersible Stirrers. YSI 5791 -Submersible ·Stirrer for field use. Y I 5795 -Submersible Stirrer. YSI 5075 -Calibration Chamber for use with field probe. YSI 5988 -Carr(ing Case. YSI 5775 -Membrane and KCI Kit.Standard -includes 2 each 15- membrane packets (.001"thick standard membranes)and a 30 ml bottle KCI with Kodak photo flo. YSI 5776 -Membrane and KCI Kit,High Sensitivity -includes 2 each .15-membrane packets (.0005"thick membranes)and a 30 ml bottle KCI with Kodak photo flo. ) ,II' -]i] Tempereture Measurement Range:_5°to +45°C ' Accuracy:±0.5°C plus probe which is ±0.1°C Readability:0.25°C \ ~\:N(;n""'t Dt:~JRIF ,,IN The YSI Model 57 Dissolved Oxygen Meter is intended for dissolved oxygen and temperature measurement in water and wastewater appiications.but is also suitable for use in certain oth~r liquids.Dissolved Oxygen is indicated in PPM (parts per million)on 0-5.0-10.and 0-20 PPM scales.Temperature is indicated in °C on a _5°to +45°C scale.The dissolved oxygen ranges are automatically temperature compensated for solubility of oxygen in water and permeability of the probe membrane.and manually salinity compensated. The probes use Clark-type membrane covered polarographic sensorS with built in thermistors for temperature measurement and compensation.A thin. permeable membrane stretched over the sensor isolates the Sensor elements from the environment,but allows oxygen and certain other gases to enter.When a polarizing voltage is applied across the sensor.oxygen that has passed through the membrane reacts at the cathode.causing a current to flow. The membrane passes oxygen at a rate proportional to the pressure difference across it.Since oxygen is rapidly consumed at the cathode.it can be assumed that the oxygen pressure inside the membrane is zero.Hence.the force causing the oxygen to diffuse through the membrane is proportional to the absolute pressure of oxygen outside the membrane.If the oxygen pressure increases. more oxygen diffuses through the membrene and more current flows through the senSor.A lower pressure results in less current. -. oo 0) C,n 2 3 \ I ~I.,...:),'"1"0"""1 Pacll,cluc"l"O'",for .'JYSI r--tobo.vd,5486 -Beater Boot Kit -includes (6)A-05486 Boot.(1)A-05484 Tip.(4)A-05485 Spring.Used only on 5720 and discontinued 5420A. YSI 5986 -Diaphragm Kit for use only with YSI 5739 0.0,Probe. YSI 5734 -Adaptor makes is possible to use discontinued YSI 5400 Series Probes with YSI Model 57. YSI 5735 -Adaptor makes it possible to use YSI 5739.YSI 5720 and YSI 5750 Probes with discontinued YSI Models 51A,54RC and 54BP. OXYGEN PROBES AND EQUIPMENT There are three oxygen probes for use with the YSI Model 57 Dissolved Oxygen Meters.Descriptions of where they are used are contained in the follow- ing paragr~. I.YSI 5739 D.O.'Probe The YSI 5739 probe.with built-in lead weight and pressure compensation,is an improved design that replaces the discontinued YSI 5418.5419.5718 and 5719 probes.(See Figure 11 . For user convenience the probe is equipped with a disconnecting cable to facilitate changing cable lengths and replacing damaged cables or probes.The probe 'and cable assembly,is held together with a threaded retaining nut.The connection is not designed,for casual disconnection and should only be dis- connected when necessary. 1 \.------ "\~'jJiscc .,the '.'J unfl the ''Jing ljld sli''}dow,')cabl! to expose the connector.Pull gently on the cable and connector until the connec- tor comes away from the probe body. To reassemble.inspect the connector and "0"ring for cleanliness.If the "0" ring is frayed or damaged remove it by squeezing it in the groove causing it to bulge.then roll it out of the groove and off the connector.A replacement "0"ring is supplied with the cable. Push the connector into the probe body.rotating it until the two halves mate. A light coating of vaseline or silicone grease on the "0"ring will make reasssembly easier.Air trapped between the connector halves which may cause them to spring apart slightly,is normal.Screw on the retaining nut.hand tight only.NOTE:If erratic readings are experienced.disconnect the cable and inspect for water.If prese!:'t.dry out and reconnect,replacing the "0"ring.jf necessary. Pressure Compensation , The vent on the side of the probe is part of a unique pressure compensating system that helps assure accurate readings at great depths of water.Pressure compensation is effective to 1/2%of reading with pressures to 100 psi (230 ft. water).The quantity of air bubbles trapped under the membrane determines how serious the pressure error will be.which is why proper preparation of the probe is essential.(See OPERATING PROCEDURES.)The system is designed to accom- modate a small amount of trapped air and still function properly.but the amount should be kept to a minimum. The compensating system normally does not require servicing and should not be taken apart.However.if electrolyte is leaking through the diaphragm or if there is an obvious puncture.the diaphragm must be replaced.A spare is supplied with the probe.Using a coin unscrew the retaining plug and remove the washer and the diaphragm,flush any salt crystals from the reservoir.install the new diaphragm (convolution side in).replace the washer,and screw in the retain- ing plug.. 1 j t ..... .,'oo 0;) (::./~ \,4 ,.~.)-\~..'"\..i ,;..NUT "j ..,......,~.'.)'_CABLE.•f~:!",,,aMr~.....!.,"r"'~""'''O''RING i'.fl';>'-':'~.;!.);'l ;:..".':',,.:..'f'-'_PROBE't~§iJ..:.,.,1,.,..:•.,,:1.//"../D~~~:RAGM.!,j .>.,i!t'V'flI"l./WASHER;:,....,,",,'lilt;,"RETAINING TEMP '"'''~tV ,/If)PLUGS£NS~:A~Y'f(~1 (I \U ~!l::.--OXYGEN '.../!;)SENSOR I......'.'....,--!':l~!"BRANE.'""t''\0 RING".r;MEMBRAI'iI! ....f.I_~~1'......8£I'iISOR~.GUARD FIGURE 1 fI' II.YSf 5720 B.O.D.Bottle Probe The YSI 5720 B.O.D.Bottle Probe replaces the discontinued YSI 5420A B.O.O.Bottle Probe for measuring dissolved oxygen and temperature in standard B.O.D.bottles.It is provided with an agitator for stirring the sample solution. available in models for 117VAC (95-135VAC.50-60 Hz)or 230VAC (190- 250VAC,50-60 Hz)operation.(See Figure 2). When using the probe.plug the agitator power s~ply into line power and the probe plug into the instrument.With the agitator turned off place the tapered probe end into the B.O.D.bottle and switch agitator "ON"with switch on top of probe.The probe should be operated with a minimum of trapped air in the B.O.D, bottle.A slight amount of air in the unstirred region at the top of the bottle may be neglected.'but no bubbles should be around the thermistor or oxygen sensor. Stirrer Boot The probe uses a flexible stirring bOdt to transmit motion from the sealed motor housing to the sample.If the boot shows signs of cracking or other damage likely to allow leaking into the motor housing,the boot must be replaced. In fresh water applications boot life is normally several years,but this may be shortened by exposure to hydroca~bons.moderate to strong acids or bases, 6 IV,Cable Adaptors All YSI 5700 Series Probes are designed for direct use with the YSI Model 57 Dissolved Oxygen Meter.However.to use the discontinued YSI 5400 Series Probes with the YSI Model 57.cable adaptor YSI 5734 is required.(See Figure 5) III.YSI 5750 B.O.O,Bottle Probe The YSI 5750 B.O.O.Bottle Probe replaces the discontinued YSI 5450 B.O.O. Bottle Probe.It is similar to the YSI 5720 B.O.O.Bottle Probe,except that it does not have a stirrer.Agitation of the sample must be provided by other means.such as a magnetic stirrer.(See Figure 4) FIGURE 4 j'JJr~1--1 ~ I 1-,) .~.:'l',~.I ,.,,~~...........,~,"'":-.)0".:\~:'i:::'.·:'::,:"""'1'~~··'''·~!liL;."'..',.~."."~'!;."a~·.....••..,f",,""'"I~"Ii~.:...:......,'.I -'--J i II11~~""'-'' r::1rq" ,."'::'<~ .""."11'.;'~....' ';:;!~ r-r-'. 1 ] " I i'.f I .i (5 p 6) ozone.or direct sunlight.For maximum life rinse the boot after use in con- taminated samples.(See Figure 3) Boot replacement is as follows: 1.Pull off old assembly and clean shaft. 2.Slide on new assembly making sure the back spring is on the grooved area of the shaft.A small amount of rubber cement may be used. 3.Check that thllre is sufficient clearance between the tip and the end of the shaft to permit turning withou~binding. 7 )) FIGURE 6 .'R,/,'"~"J~ 1:~'''~'""'\'~I 1,- FIGURE 5 V.YSI 5791 and 5795 Submersible Stirrers The YSI submersible stirrers are accessories that perform the function of stir- ring the sample being studied when making dissolved oxygen measurements in the fjeld.Tile YSI 579'1 stirrer can be used with the following dissolved oxygen probes:YSI 5418. 5419.5718. 5719.and 5739.The YSI 5795 stirrer is only for,, usa with the YSI 5739 Probe.(See Figure 6).---""...... When a stirrer and probe are assembled.the stirrer agitates the sample direct- ly in front of the sensor by means of a rotating eccentric weight which causes the spring-mounted hermetically sealed motor housing to vibrate.An impeller on the /",end of the motor housing flushes the media across the oxygen sensor.(See sales1.'literature and instruction sheets for further information). ,.,...--------------'\. .If FIGURE 3 FIGURE .2 ...~p..~:o~ T1P--~g A·06484 =;IJ t ---11--3 SCALE 2/1 BOOT 32 6 ~;Ji, :.:... .,,I ~ I ] 6/'-" i,~o~ ~:v '(0B.'!I1 } 1 I v-.>t'f J:~~JA 1 Ii·s c (lUt,iO""", l)JtJ C ,~ ... "\V\ j 0'1" /((,.~ (V1~v~el iJ i OPERATING PROCEDURES , lVI.v~Ll .!1~A"'lery~~-·,one'-.....l rger.l ]1 ~'I The Y~I 5711 tiettery PaCK and Charger IS ofrered as an accessory to operate either the YSI 5791 or 5795 S\Jbmersible Stirrer when the stirrer is used in con- junction with the YSI Mode!57 Oxygen Meter.The YSI 5721 can be purchased with tho YSI Model 57 or installed at a later time.(See sales literature and in- st/uction sheet for further information). 8 I I ! ..j I, '; I I '1 i ,I i I 1! ~ -~.. ,t'!I.Preparing the Probe All YSI 5700 Series Probes have similar sensors and should be cared for in the same manner.They are precision devices relying on good treatment if high ac- ~.curacy measurements are to be made.Prepare the probes as follows.(See Figure 7) ALL PROBES ARE SHIPPED DRY -YOU MUST FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS 1.Prepare the electrolyte by dissolving the KCI crystals in the dropper bottle with distilled water.Fill the bottle to the top. 2.Unscrew the sensor guard from the probe (YSI 5739 only)and then remove the "0"ring and membrane.Thoroughly rinse the sensor with KCI solution. 3.Fill the probe with electrolyte as follows: A.Grasp the probe in your left hand.When preparing the YSI 5739 probe the pressure compensating vent should be to the right.Successively fill the sensor body with ,electrolyte while pumping the diaphragm with the eraser end of a pencil or similar soft.blunt tool.Continue filling and pumping until no more air bubbles appear.(With practice you can hold the probe and pump with one hand while filling with the other.)When preparing the YSI 5720 and 575C probes,simply fill the sensor body un- til no more air bubbles appear. B.Secure a membrane under your left thumb.Add more electrolyte to the probe until a large meniscus completely covers the gold cathode. NOTE:Handle membrane material with care,keeping it clean and dust free,touching it only at the ends. C.With the thumb and forefinger of your other hand.grasp the free end of the membrane. D.Using a continuous motion stretch the membrane UP.OVER,and DOWN the other side of the sensor.Stretching forms the membrane.Jo the contour of the probe. E.Secure the end of the membrane under the forefinger of the hand holding the probe. F.Roll the "0"ring over the end of the probe.There should be no wrinkles in the membrane or trapped air bubbles.Some wrinkles may be removed by lightly tugging on the edges of the membrane beyond the ..a"ring. G.Trim off excess membrane with scissors or sharp knife.Check that the stainless steel temperature Sensor is not covered by excess membrane. 4.Shake off exceSs KCI and reinstall the sensor guard. 5.A bottomless 'plastic bottle is provided with the YSI 5739 probe for con- venient storage.Place a small piece of moist towel or sponge in the bottle and insert the probe into the open end.This keeps the electrolyte from dry- ing out.The YSI 5720 and 5750 probes can be stored in a 8.0.0.bottle containing about 1"of water. ~~:l!-~, T I <: I ! ,••1 I "I I )1 )J j -I ) ... .. J~, J 6.Jlbral 1m laJefini ..eper ]on l .'1 Av(),,,pl jlnt is 2-4 weeks.However.should the electrolyte be allowed to evaporate and an excessive amount of bubbles form under the membrane.or the mem- brane become damaged.thoroughly flush the reservoir with KCI and il)stall a new membrane. 7.Also replace the membrane if erratic readings are observed or calibration is not stable. 8."Home brew"electrolyte can be prepared by making a saturated solution of reagent grade KCI and distilled water.and then diluting the solution to half strength with distilled water.Adding two drops of Kodak Photo Flo per 100 ml of solution assures good wetting of the sensor.but is not absolutely es- sential. 9.The gold cathode should always be bright and untarnished.To clean.wipe with a clean lint-free cloth or hard paper.NEVER USE ANY FORM OF ABRASIVE OR CHEMICAL.Rinse the sensor several times with KCI.nlfill • and install a new membrane. 10.Some gases contaminate the sensor,evidenced by discoloration of the gold. If the tarnish cannot be removed by vigorous wiping with a soft cloth.lab wipe.or hard paper.return the probe to the factory for service. 11.H2S.502,Halogens.Neon.and CO are interfering gases.If you suspect erroneous readings.it may be necessary to determine if these are the cause. 12.If the probe has been operated for extended periods with a loose or wrinkled membrane the gold cathode may become plated with silver.In this event return the probe to the .factory for refinishing. } I ! ..~ .t ,.~~ ,,~~J BA ,oJ. ,. ,II" ;, q, ~ \ I I ! I I I, ': E F G I \ FI~URE 7 9 1 I I 11 I I Ir-", -_Jateri··Jeri J J]I,.' 1.Air saturate a volume of water (300·500cc)by aerating or stirring for at least 15 minutes at a relatively constant temperature. 2.Piace the probe in the sample and stir.Switch to TEMPERATURE.Refer to Tahle I for the PPM value corresponding to the temperature. 3.Determine local altitude or the "true"atmospheric pressure (note that "true" atmospheric pressure is as read on a mercury barometer.Weather Bureau reporting of at:nospheric pressure is corrected to sea level).Using Table II determine the correct factor for your pressure or altitude. 4.Multiply the PPM value from Table I by the correction factor from Table II to determine the corrected calibration value for your conditions. EXAMPLE:Assume temperature =21°C and altitude =1000 feet.From Table I the calibration valua for 21 °C is 9.0 PPM.From Table II the correction factor for 1000 feet is about 0.96.The corrected calibration value is 9.0 PPM X 0.96 =8.6 PPM 5.Switch to an appropriate PPM range.set the SALINITY knob to zero,and ad- just the CALIBRATE knob while stirring until the meter reads the corrected calibration value from Step 4.Leave the probe in the sample for two minutes to verify calibration stability.Readjust if necessary. Air Calibration 1.Place the probe in moist air.BOD probes can be placed in partiallv filled (50 mL)BOD bottles.Other probes can be placed in the YSI 5075 Calibration Chamber (refer to the following section describing calibration chamber)or the small storage bottle (the one with the hole in the bottom)along with a few drops of water.The probe can also be wrapped loosely in a damp cloth taking care the cloth does not touch the membrane.Wait approximately 10 minutes for temperature stabilization. 2.Switch to TEMPERATURE and read.Refer to Table I -Solubility of Oxygen in Fresh Water.and determine calibration value. 3.Determine altitude or atmospheric correction factor from Table II. 4.Multiply the calibration value from Table I by the correction factor from Table II.' EXAMPLE:Assume temperature =21°C and altitude =1000 feet.From Table I the calibration value for 21"C is 9.0 PPM.From Table II the correction factor for 1000 f1.is about 0.96.Therefore.the corrected calibration value is 9.0 PPM X 0.96 =8.6 PPM. 6.Switch to the appropriate PPM range.set the SALINITY knob to zero and ad- Just the CALIBRATE knob until the meter reads the correct calibration value from Step 4.Wait two minutes to verify calibration stability.Readjust if necessary. The probe is n9w calibrated and should hold this calibration value for many measurements.Calibration can be disturbed by physical shock.touching the membrane.or drying out of the electrolyte.Check calibration after each series of measurements and in time you will develop a realistic schedule for recalibration. For best results when not in use.follow the storage procedures recommended for the various probes described under OXYGEN PROBES AND EQUIPMENT.This will reduce drying out and the need to change membranes. i .. • ~ .. 11.-..._"},.•ir~·,In:~..lentj .Jil) It is important that the instrument be placed in the intended operating position vertical,tilted.or on its back -before it is prepared for use and calibrated,(See Figure 8).Readjustment may be necessary '!Jhen the instrument operating posi- tion is changed.After preparing the probe proceed as follows: 1.With switch in the OFF position.adjust the meter pointer to Zero with the Screw in the center of the meter panel.Readjustment may be necessary if the instrument position is changed. 2,.switch to RED LINE and adjust the RED LINE knob until the meter needle aligns with the red mark at the 31 °C position. 3.Switch to ZERO and adjust to zero with zero control knob. 4.Attach the prepared probe to the PROBE connector of the instrument and adjust the retaining ring finger tight. 5.Before calibrating allow 15 minutes for optimum probe stabilization. Repolarize whenever the instrument has been OFF or the probe has been disconnected. FIGURE 8 , I J I I I (10 I .i, III.Calibration The operator has a choice of three calibration methods -Winkler Titration. Saturated Water.and Air.Experience has shown that air calibration is quite reliable,yet far simpler than the other two methods.The three methods are described in the following paragraphs.,II Winkler Titration 1.Draw a volume of water from a common source and carefully divide into four samples.Determine the oxygen in three samples using the Winkler Titration ,,;, techniqu'e and average the three values.If one of the values differs from the I other 2 by more than 0.5 ppm.discard that value and average the remaining .\two. I 2.Place the probe in the fourth sample and stir. '3.Set the SALINITY control to zero or the appropriate salinity value of the sam· pie. 4.Switch to desired PPM range and adjust the CALIBRATION control to the average value determined in Step 1.Allow the probe to remain in the sample for at least two minutes before setting the calibration value.and leave in the sample for an additional 2 minut~s to verify stability;Readjust if necessary. I 1) i I i I .... oo ...Jo I ~f 1 V.Calibration Tables Table I shows the amount of oxygen in PPM that is dissolved in air saturated fresh water at sea Jevel (760 mmHg atmospheric pressure)as temperature varies from 0°to 45°C. t /~~~\ IIV.~-lolve'-Jyger'---jlsurCltl 1..]j With the instrument prepared for use and the probe calibrated.place the probe In the sample to.be measured end provide stirring. 1.Stirring for the 5739 Probe elln best be accomplished with a YSI submersible stirrer.Turn the STIRRER knob ON.If the submersible stirrer is not used. provide manual stirring by raising and lowering the probe about 1 ft.per sec- ond.If the 5075 Calibration Chamber is used.the entire chamber may be moved up and down in the water at about 1 ft.per second. 2.The YSI 5720 has a built-in power driven stirrer. 3.With the YSI 5760 sample stirring must be accomplished by other means such as with the use of a magnetic stirring bar. f 4.Adjust the SALINITY knob to the salinity of the sample. 5.Allow sufficient time for probe to stabilize to sample temperature and dis- solved oxygen.Read dissolved oxygen. • Table I -S()lubilitv of Oxv,gen In Fresh Water Temperature PPM Dissolved'Temperature PPM Dissolved °C .Oxygen °C Oxygen 0 14.6 23 8.7 1 14.2 24 8.5 2 13.9 25 8.4 3 13.5 26 8.2 4 13.2'27 8.1 5 12.8 28 7.9 6 12.5 29 7.8 7 12.2 .30 7.7 8 11.9 31 7.5 9 11.6 32 7.4 10 11.3 33 7.3,. 11 11.1 34 7.2 ~©,..12 10.8 35 ...7.1 13 10.6 36 7.0 -"'!14 1.0.4 37 6.8 I 15 10.2 38 6.7 16 9.9 39 6.6 17 9.7 40 6.5 18 9.6 41 6.4 19 9.3 42 6.3 20 9.2 43 6.2 21 .9.0 44 6.1 22 8.8 45 6.0 Source:Derived from "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater." 13 ! FIG4RE 9 Iii~~.I. .<~<,: \~i~,:. tlJ---l~ l alib:CO')~ho--')lrl 1 J 1 I i The YSI 5075 Calibration Chamber is an accessory that helps obtain max- imum accuracy when air calibrating in the field and ;s also a useful tool when measuring in shailow water iles:;than 4 HI.As shown in FigUi6 9.it consists of a 4-1/2 ft.stainless steel tube (1)attached to the calibration chamber (5)and the measuring ring (7).For calibration insert the solid rubber stopper (6)into the bot- tom of the calibration chamber (5).Push the probe (4)through the hollow rubber stopper (3}as shown in Detail A.For maximum accuracy wet the inside of the calibration chamber (5}with fresh water.This creates a 100%relative humidity environment for calibration.Insert the probe-stopper assembly in the top of the calibration chamber. During calibration hold the calibration chamber under water and calibrate as described in the Air Calibration procedure.Keep the handle above the water at all times.After calibration the chamber can be used as a measuring aid by removing the probe-stopper assembly from the calibration chamber (5)and placing it in measuring ring (7).(See Detail C).Slowly stir the water with the wand when measuring. ...... )0le-I . f -.l I 'j /-,),. , • I \12 .; • j "\ B .1 I I 15 ~&H':'1+1 Moon &J RECORDER RECORDER ounUT INPUT &0.000 OHMS PlNI 0 • .01-1 . PINA 0 3 FIGURE 10 Recorder Output Plug The YSI Model 57 is supplied with the necessary parts to construct a water- proof recorder plug for the YSI Model 57 Dissolved Oxygen Meter.The cable and potting materials are not included.(See Figure 11). General purpose epoxy potting materials of medium viscosity and moderate cure rate are recommended.'The two tube kits available in hardware stores are satisfactory. 1.Prepare the cable end by stripping back 3/16"(5MM)of insulation.Tin the ends with rosin core solder.If polarity is important pin "A"is the (+)terminal. 2.Disassemble the connector pieces and slide the mold.ring.extension.and coupling nut over the cable.Solder the leads to the appropriate connector pins with rosin core solder. 3.Check all connections.The two leads should show electrical continuity to the pins and should not contact the body or each otr.,r. 4.Re-assemble the pieces and hold the connector upright.Pour the epoxy mix into the plastic mold until full.Refill as the epoxy settles. 5.After the epoxy cures the plastic mold may be removed with pliers or knife. FIGURE 11 ,-..." -)VIC _-,JCOR~~J OU ._t -I.11 j'li Output at full scale is 114 to 136 mV. Use a 50K or higher input impedance recorder and operate it with the ter- minals ungrounded.(The YSI Modals BOA and e1A strip Chart recorders are compatible with this system for laboratory use). Many recorders have an adjustable full scale sensitivity feature.When using this type.use the 100 mV range and adjust the full scale (span.range control. sensitivity.etc.)control to give full scale chart deflection with full scale oxygen meter deflection.Refer to the recorder instructions.For recorders without this feature.a simple driver network as shown below can be constructed.This is adoquate to adjust the signal for full scale chart and meter deflection on the 100 mV fixed range recorders. I ~ ,Ii" i Tral'...v .•.}COri-"J'l fa('~-'Jat 51".,'-'Jbe u~"cor _.'jle Cf"'-. tion value rr)r the effects of atmospheric pressure or altitude.Find true at· mospheric pressure in the left hand column and read across to the right hand column to determine the correction factor.(Nota that "true"atmospheric pressure is as read on a barometer,Weather Bureau reporting of atmospheric pressure is corrected to seal level.)If atmospheric pressure is unknown,the local altitude may be substituted.Select the altitude in the center column and read across to the right hand column for the correction factor. VI.HIGH SENSITIVITY MEMBRANE Use of high sensitivity .0005"membranes (YSJ 5776)in place of standard .001"membranes (YSI 5775)when measurements are to be made consistently at low temperatures (less than 15°C).Calibration and readings will be made just. as if the standard YSI 5775 membrane was being used. The YSI 5776 High Sensitivity Membrane can also be used in certain situations to increase sensitivity at temperatures above 15°C.The ranges thus become 0.25.0-5 and 0-10 PPM.When calibration with high sensitivity mem- branes is attempted at temperatures greater than 15°C the selector switch must be set to 0-20 PPM.Multiply the calculated calibration value by 2.For example: at 21 °C and 1000 ft.altitude the calibration value would be 8.6 x 2 or 17.2. Remember the 0-5.0·10 and 0-20 PPM ranges are now 0-2.5.0·6 and 0-10 PPM.and all PPM readings must be divided by 2 for a final reading.When operating ill this manner accuracy wi,lI be degraded slightly. 14 Table II -Altitude Correction Factor Atmospheric Pressure Equivalent Altitude =Correction mmHg or Ft.Factor 775 540 1.02 .. 760 0 1.00 745 542 .98 730 1094 .96 714 1688 .94 699 2274 .92 684 2864 .90 669 3466 .88 654 4082 .86 .....~638 4756 .84 623 5403 .82 608 6065 .80 593 6744 .78 578 7440 .76 562 8204 .74 547 8939 .72 532 9694 .70 517 10472 .68 502 11273 .66 Source:Derived from "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater."i ~ ., j I '\ Type /I A.errors are due to probe background current. ( meter reading ppm) Error =0.5%1-C,alib.value X calib.value.p.P.M.( B.errors are due to the probe non-linearity ""Error =0.3%of reading . , C.error is caused by variability in the probe membrane temperature coefficient. Error so:zero if readings are taken at the calibration temperature.I Error =±1%of meter reading if readings are taken with 5°C of the dalibra-1;;',I tion temperature.' Error =±3%of meter reading all other conditions. .,. ir"......"v'l~,..",L,-1J ']1C._..i>rs a_~_...e an __...~y to .J\ate _.•.•_>Oe tl..••••llin :l._v h.II......."Com. puting the altitude correction factor. Error ==1.8%of reading . D.errors consider the possibility of onlv 50%relative humidity when calibrating the probe."the actual relative humidity Is 50%instead of 100%the errors will be as follows:' .045 .045 Error ppm Error in Percent of Reading (.)0.3 (-)0.6 (-)1.15 (-)2.11 H '3.60 Calibration Temperature:±:C o 10 20 30 40 Description linearity Range Change Salinity Probe Batkground Probe Linearity Temp.Compensation Temp.Measure Pressure Altitude R.H. Type 11\ 18 IC IIA Example of 8 Typical Error Calculation The example given presumes the air calibration technique.If calibration is done with air saturated water.the relative humidity consideration III 1·0)is eliminated.Ir the Winkler calibration method is used.Type III errors are deleted and replaced by the uncertainty attributable to the overall Winkler determination. Data:Instrument calibrated at 25°C.elevation estimated at 2000 ft ..±500 feet.normal barometric pressure presumed.calibrated on 0·10 ppm scale at 7.8 PPM,Readings taken on 0-6 ppm range at 4.5 ppm.temperature 20°C.Salinity of 20 ppt. liB IIC lilA IIIB IIIC 1110 Calculations =.01 x 4.5 ppm =.01 x 4.5 ppm ~=.026 x 4.5 ppm x 40 ppt .056 =.005 x (1.j::~~~)x 7.8 ppm .016 =.003 x 4.5 ppm '.014=.01 x 4.5 ppm .045=.015 x 4.5 ppm .068=.017 x 4.5 ppm .076=.018 x 4.5 ppm .081=.016 x 4.5 ppm ....072 Maximum possible error =.518 ppm Probable Error ±.259 Considering a statistical treatment of the probable error at any time for any in- strument.it is likely that the actual error in any measurement will be about 1/2 of the possible error.In this case the probable error is about:±:.26 ppm out of a reading of 4.5 ppm or 6.8%of the reading. J .i I1 Individual Sources of Error This description of sources of error can be used to attach a confidence to any particular reading of di$solved oxygen.The particular example given is for a near extreme set of conditions.As a generality.overall error is diminished when the probe and instrument are calibrated under conditions of temperature and dis- solved oxygen which closely match the sample temperature and dissolved ox· ygen. Type I A.Is the error due to the meter linearity. Error ==± 1%of full scale of the measurement range. B.Is the error due to tolerances In the instrument when transferring a reading from ono range to another. Error ==±1%of the meter reading if the reading is taken on a range one range away from the calibration range. Error ==±2%of the meter reading if the reading is taken on a range two ranges away from the calibration range. ,C.Is the error due to the design and components of the instrument salinity com- pensation circuit. Error ==±2.5%of ,the meter reading X sample salinity ppt 40 ppt salinity I ,' ·}DIS ...~.,IsIOI~u)ME~..JREIV,..,~J ERI.~.J;.I Ii There are three basic types of errors Which can occur.Type I errors are related to limitations of the instrument design and tolerances of the instrument com· ponents.These are chiefly the meter linearity and resistor tolerances ..Type ii errors are due to basic probe accuracy tolerances.chiefly background signal. probe linearity.and variations in membrane temperature coefficient Type III errors are related to the operator's ability to determine the conditions at the time of calibration.If calibration is performed against more accurately known con- ditions.Type III errors are appropriately reduced. CJ:J Type 1/1 A.errors are due .to the accuracy Of the instrument thermometer when used to measure the exact probe temperature during calibration. Error =±1.5%of reading. B.errors are due to the assumption of mean.barometric pressure.' Daily variation is usually less than 1.7% Error =±1.7%of reading.., 16 PRICE S1.00 b.:'inMa£~~mAA£~~·~~~~W'~~ liiJSTRUCTiONS FOR YSI 5791 A AflD 5795A SUBPJlERSIBLE STiRRERS AND YSI 5492A AI'JD 5721 BATTERY PACKS ,- .,.., The YSI submersible stirrers and battery packs are.acces- sories for YSI dissolved oxygen meters.They perform the func- tioln of stirring the sample being measured when conducting dissolved oxygen measurements in the field or in the lab. ~.-~ l1\ISTALLATION -YSI 5791A SUBMERSIBLE STIRRER The YSI 5 rrer IS for use with the following YSI dissolved oxygen probes:YSI 5418.5419.5718.5719 and 5139. When the stirrer and probe are assembled.the stirrer a{/itates the sample directly in front of the sensor by means of a rotating eccentric weight which causes the spring-mounted hermetically sealed motor housing to vibrate.An impeller on the end of the motor housing flushes the media across the ox- ygen sensor. All probes are installed in the same manner by simply removing the guard from the probe and screwing the probe into the stirrer until it bottoms out,about three turns.To avoid en- tanglement of the probe cable.it may be helpful to twist the probe and cable three turns in the opposite direction before S(;rewing the probe into the stirrer.This is preferable to dis- connecting the cable.. The dimension between the end of the probe and the stirrer impeller is critical for proper stirring (see Figure 11.If necessary to achieve proper spacing.the diaphragm on the bottom of the stirrer can be removed and the impeller and motor assembly raised or lowered by adjusting the locknuts on the tnotor a~.sembly mounting screw.The motor and housing assermly is hermetically sealed at the factory;don't tamper with it.:' The probe and stirrer cables can be taped or tied toget~er to facilitate handling.; If the stirrer is to be used in fast running streams or if the probe is being used as a depth indicator.additional weight may be desirable.A hole in the motor mounting stud is provided for attaching weights.Weights over 16 oz.are not recommenped. After completing assembly conneetthe stirrer cable to the •YSI 5492A Battery Pack when using any of the YSI Model 51 or 54 instruments.or to the stirrer/charger connector on the YSI Model 57.(See battery pack installation elsewhere in this instruction sheet.plus the instruction manual for the instrument being used.) IINSTALLATION -YSI 5795A SUBMERSIBLE STIRRER MOTOR & HOUSING ASSEMBLY DIAPHRAGM wv.LOCKNUT ~WASHER $ ,LOCKNUT ~.X I -~\DIAPHRAGM !VVASHER-., ~, Figure 1 MAINTENANCE OF SUBMERSIBLE STIRRERS The YSI 5791A and 5795A stirrers are made with all exposed parts fabricated from plastic or stainless steel to minimize maintenance.Some routine procedures will greatly aid in optimizing performance and stirrer life.Most important is to keep the assembly clean;sand.mud or other debris on the impeller may seriously affect stirring.Inspect occasionally and flush off as needed. Adequate stirring can be verified by moving the operating probe-stirrer assembly up and down in the water at about 1 ft. per second.If the oxygen reading increases while this is being done.stirring speed is probably too slow.Three items to check are:impeller.diaphragm.and power supply vo~tage.(See battery pack instructions.)If the impeller is grossly damaged with one or more broken blades.continued use is not recommended and the motor and housing assembly should be replaced. SUBMERSIBLE STIRRER REPLACEMENT PARTS The YSI 5795A stirrer is for use only with the YSI 5739 probe.It differs from the YSI 5791A by offering the con- venience of a single cable for both stirrer and proble instead of separate cables for each.1, The probe is mounted in the stirrer and the stirrer connected to the power supply in the same manner as described for t~e YSI 5791A stirrer.r i 100 YS1077512 YS1077519 YSl050824 YS1077510 74 Motor &Housing Assembly (includes locknuts) Case Diaphragm Clamp Diaphragm H...HAlU~TION -YSI 5492A BATTERY PACK {-F""fhe YSI 5492A Battery Pack can be attached to the case of '-.-!of the Model 51 or 54 dissolved oxygen instruments to ( ."·JVide power for operating either of the submersible stirrers. To install the battery pack -remove the six screws and rear cr"'er of the instrument.Sandwich the battery pack between tf instrument and rear cover and fasten with the longer serews provided (See Figure 2).It is important to keep the nameplate and serial number in case questions arise concern- i("""service or warranty.CAUTION:Disconnect battery charger b ore unscrewing cover of the Model 54 instrument. nemove the batteries from the battery pack by unscrewing the knobs at the ends of the battery pack.Take off the plastic b....ls and reinstall the batteries so the terminals contact the b;tery pack terminals.Only ONE battery position will work. fhe batteries provide adequate stirring until discharged to .5.25 volts under load.over SO hours of use with a 4 hour/day Q-Y cycle.To determine battery discharge measure the voltage a:oss each battery under 100 mA load.If this is not feasible. a'aequate stirring can be verified as described in MAINTENANCE OF SUBMERSIBLE STIRRERS.If battery n-Iacement is indicated.replace with Ray-O-Vac 941 or equal 6,'OJt spring terminal lantern batteries. GUARANTEE AND REPAIR Figure 3 RECHARGEABLE NICKEL CAOMIUM SUBMERSIBLE STIRRER BATTERIES DISPOSABLE CARBON ZINC INSTRUMENT BATTERIES 8088 I The rechargeable batteries should have a service life of 500 to ,000 recharge cycles.deRending on variables of individual batteries and chargil19"""'aridd'ischa-rging conditions-lf....the batteries will not ,hold a charge above 6.4 voltS.-oiieor-~ batteries may require replacement.To locate a defective battery fully charge the bal1~ries and check each battery voltage with a voltmeter while operatin~submersible stirrer If . dividual battery is generating less t an.0 ts.or shows any signs of leakage.it should be replaced.Replace batteries in sets or with exact replacement types.Mixing batteries of different manLJfacture can shorten life of the set.When using the YSI Model 51 or 54 instruments an alternate power source.which can be used in place of the YSI 5492A Battery Pack.is any'S VDC battery that will deliver .050 amp current.A 12 VDC battery can be used in conjunction with a resistor in series.Consult the factory for details. NOTE: """" Customer Service Department Yellow Springs Instrument Co ..Inc. Yellow Springs.Ohio 45387.U.S.A. Phone:513-767-7242 • All YSI products carry a one-year unconditional guarantee on workmanship and parts.exclusive of batteries.Damage through accident.misuse or tampering will be repaired at a nominal charge.if possible.If you are experiencing difficulty with a YSI product.even if the guarantee has expired.it may be returned for repa!r t?any authorized YSI dealer or to the factory. ~ I t ! 5492 BATTERY PACKbXvGENMETER COVeR _________~'r;::,==="/~~:i~L.ii:MINAl.S r---OXYGEN METER ~.CASE L I, l- Figure 2 INSTAlLATION -YSI 5721 ~ATTERY &CHARGER PACK The YSI 5721 is offered as an accessory 'to operate either submersible stirrer when used in conjunction with the YSI ~odel 57 dissolved oxygen meter.The battery pack consists of nickel cadmium batteries and a·line operated charger. ,.;>pecify either 117 VAC or 230 VAC input when ordering.) The batteries fit inside the YSI Model 57 instrument case. ~!move the instrument rear cover and install the five batteries ith the plus <+)terminal of each battery in the red cup end of tile battery holder.As shipped.the batteries are charged and proper installation can be checked by switching to the SAIT --lECK position.The meter should display at least 6.0 volts on e red 0-10 PPM scale.If there is no indication the batteries .-'''ould be checked for proper contact in their holders.If the \;ding is low.one battery may be reversed or one of all cells .,-ny reqlJire recharging.Plugging the charger into the stirrerl I larger receptacle should immediately bring the meter reading t~u 6.0 volts or more if all cells are properly installed.(See Figura 3.) IF'" f . f ~; ~ t.9•••••.Il"".•.~. -~.......:nID: "I Scientific Division Yellow Springs Instrument Co.,Inc• Yellow Springs,Ohio 45387,U.S.A••Phone 513~767-7241 ITEMOO4482 P/NA·05762·B DECEMBER 19758.K.PRINTED IN U.S.A. •:~~~.~.,,~.-,~~.r -~.--.~,...:.. Figure 1 "".I "--."-11.."~J ,:.":Ii III.YSI 5739 DISSOLVED OXYGEN PROBE The YSI 5739 probe.with built-in lead weight.is an improved design that replaces the discontinued YSI 54 t 8• 5419.5718 and 5719 probes.(See'Figure 1.). The complete probe consists of the YSI 5739 probe body plus a YSI 5740 detachable cable.The detachable cable is a convenience feature that facilitates changing cable lengths and replacing damaged cables or probes.The probe and cable assembly is held together with a threaded retaining nut.The connection is not designed for casual disconnection and should only be disconnected when necessary. To disconnect the cable unscrew the retaining nut and slide it down the cable to expose the connector.Pull gently on the cable and connector until the connector comes away from the probe body. To reassemble.inspect the connector and "0"ring for cleanliness.If the "0"ring is frayed or damaged remove it by squeezing it in the groove causing it to bulge.then roll it out of the groove and off ::he conr:ectc~.A replacement ..a ..ring is supplied with the cable. 10'cable 25'cable 50'cable 100'cable 150'cable 200'cable YSI 5740-10 YSI 5740-25 YSI 5740-50 YSI 5740-100 YSI 5740-150 YSI 5740-200 .... -:'I ~J.~.~:~~,~r·"~·~::~:.~i )\!:J ~t :L~~~\::t~ I I, f1;.::'9·;:~~,;!.::-~:-:~·~~.,\~;_~~s+):~:r~?j-·ILrr~~~~;~:r~~h:lit::=~·.~~~i~~~~;,-_:J~E~;;;Z'·;M!;~~~&if~tfia.~~~ F"The probes described in t~is instru\tion sheet are designed YSI 5735 ~Cable Adaptor to mate YSI 5700 Series Probes for direct use with YSI Models 51B~54ABP.54ARC and ~7 with dis~W1tinued YSI Models 51A.54BP and· Dissolved Oxygen Meters.The probes can also be used with 54RC DI!fSolved Oxygen Meters. discontinued YSI Models 51A.54BP lind 54RC Dissolved Ox-YSI 5486 -Beater Boot Assembly for YSI 5720 Probe. ygen Meters when the YSI 5735 Cable Adaptor is employed (See Accessories).I I.PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Elich YSI 5700 Series Probe is ~comPlete polarographic systl~m in itself.A thin permeable me 'brane stretched over the sensor isolates the sensor elements f m the environment,but allows gases to enter.When a pol.izing 'voltage is applied across the sensor.oxygen that has prssed through the mem- brane reacts at the cathode,causin a current to flow. n,e membrane passes oxygen at rate proportional to the pressure difference across it.Since ox gen is rapidly consumed at the cathode,it can be assumed tha the oxygen pressure un- der the membrane is zero.Hence.the orce causing the oxygen to diffuse through the membrane is pr portional to the adsolute pressure of oxygen outside the m mbrane.If the oxygen pressure increases,more oxygen diffuses through the mem- o brane and more current flows throU~h the sensor.A lower pressure results in less current.j I"""II.SPECIFICATIONS J "., Cathode -Gold I,.. Anode -Silver . Membrane -.001"FEP Teflon (.005"FEP Teflon available) Electrolyte -Half saturated,KCI Temperature Compensation -(Se instrument specifications) Pressure Compensation -effectivrl tol /2%of reading over a 100 psi range (230 ft.water)'. Response Time -90%DO valuej in 10 seconds Polarizing Voltage -0.8 volts "Tinal .Probe Current -Air at 30°C -r 19 microamps nominal -..Nitrogen at 30o~=.15 microamps or less ACCESSORIES AND REPLAtEMENT PARTSIi YSI 5986 -Diaphragm Kit ' YSI 5775 -Membrane and KCl Kit.Standard -includes 2 each 15-membrane packets (.001"thick standard FEP Teflon membranfls)and a 30 mt bottle KCI with Kodak Photo Ao." YSI 5776 -Membrane and KCIKir.High Sensitivity -in- cludes 2 each 15-membrane packets (.0005" thick FEP Teflon membranes)and a 30 mt bottle' KCI with Kodak Photo Flo . .YSI 5945 --.:"0"ring pack -contains replacement "0"rings for all YSI 5700 Series Probes. Detachable cable: -- - .... .- - PRJCE $1.00 Push the connector into the probe body.rotating it until the IWO halvl~s mate.A light coating of vaseline or silicone grease on the "0"ring will make reassembly easier.Air trapped .i"""etween the connector halves which may cause them to spring .(,Jart slightly,is normal.Screw on the retaining nut.hand tight only.NOTE:If erratic readings are experienced.disconnect the cable and inspect for water.If present.dry out and reconnect, """)placing the "0"ring,jf necessary. 't"RESSURE COMPENSATION The YSI 5750 B.O.O.Bottle Probe replaces the discontinued YSI 5450 B.O.D.Bottle Probe.It is similar to the YSI 5720 B.O.O.Bottle Probe,except that it does not have a stirrer. Agitation of the sample must be provided by other means,such as a magnetic stirrer.(See Figure 5.) Figure 4 ";;.,;~"\..','i- :::= STIRRER BOOT SPRING..A~5U5 A'~~~8;-1L 31]1 .--m- t ---H--3~ SCALE 2/t BOOT Figure 3 V.YSI 5750 B.O.D.BOTTLE PROBE The probe uses a flexible stirring boot to transmit motion from the s·ealed motor hbusing to the sample.If the boot Shows signs of cracking or other damage likely to allow leaking into the motor housing.the boot must be replaced. In fresh water applt:ations boot life is normally several years.but this may be shortened by exposure to hydrocarbons. moderate to strong acids oribases.o:tone.or direct sunlight.For maximum life rinse the boot\after use in contaminated samples. (See Figure 4.) Boot replacement is as folows: 1.Pull off old assembly a d clean shaft. 2.Slide on new assembly making sure the back spring is on the grooved area of the haft.A small amount of rubber ce- ment may be used. 3.Check that there is sufficient clearance between the tip and the end of the shaft to\permit turning without binding. MS 31Q6A CONNECTOR tCONNECTS TO INST>lUMENn WHITE SHIELD REO GREEN BUCK Figure 2 lSI 5139 CONNECTOR IPINS] TEMP.TlURM1STOR '-"-_---'VIEWED FROM 8ACK OF PROBE YSI 5740 CONNECTOR l.IACKSI j J J J i \ F"':V.YSI 5720 B.O.D.BOTTLE PROBEi ).. ,...The Vllnt on the side of the probe is part of a unique pressure Dmpensatingsystem that helps assure accurate readings at Jeat depths of water.Pressure compensation is effective to 1/2%of reading with pressures to 100 psi (230 ft.water).The _..Jantity of air bubbles trapped under the membrane deter- ,lines how serious the pressure error will be.which is why ,.Iroper preparation of the probe is essential.The system is designed to accommodate a small amount of trapped air and Ftill function properly.but the amount should be kept to a ninimum. The compensating system normally does not require ser- vicing and should not be taken apart.However.if electrolyte is . ,..leaking through the diaphragm or if there is an obvious punc- 'ure,the diaphragm must be replaced.Large accumulation of ;alt crystals around the diaphragm plug may be due to a poorly tightened plug or dirt underneath the diaphragm.Cleaning the """",arts in water and retightening may be tried before diaphragm ·ep/acement.A spare is supplied with the probe.Using a coin mscrew the retaining plug and remove the washer and the diaphragm.flush any salt crystals from the reservoir.install the ,....flew diaphragm (convolution side in).replace the washer.and ;crew in the retaining plug. r>ROBIE SCHEMATIC The YSI 5720 B.O,O.Bottle Probe repla6es the discontinued YSI 54-20A B.O.O.Bottle Probe for measuring dissolved ox- -Igen and temperature in standard B.O:O.bottles.It is provided I .vith an agitator for stirring the sample sdlution.available in _.nodels for 117VAC{95-135VAC,50/60 H:t)or 23QVAC (190-250VAC:50/60 Hz)operation.(SeelFigure 3.) !"""When using the probe.plug the agitato~power supply into ine power and the probe plug into the in~trument With the agitator turned off place the tapered probe fond into the B.O.O. '3ottle and switch agitator "ON"with swit9h on top of probe. ~he probe should be operated with a minimum of trapped air in :he B.O.O.bottle.A slight amount of air in the unstirred region I.3t the top of the bottle may be neglected.but no bubbles should be around the thermistor or oxygen sensor. I"'" '~lt - ".... Figure 5 l ,. VI.PROBE PREPARATION AND CARE....,I 1.Prepare the electrolyte by dissolvin~the KCI crystals in the dropper bottle with distilled watel;'.Fill the bottle to the top.II ....2.Unscrew the sensor guard from the probe (YSI 5739 only) and then remove the "0"ring and ,fnembrane.Thoroughly rinse the sensor with KCI solutionl 3.Fill the probe with electrolyte as follows: ALL PROBES ARE SHIPPED DRY -YOU MUST FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS A.Grasp the probe in your left han .(See Figure 6.)When preparing the YSI 5739 probe.the pressure compen- sating vent should be to the rig t.Successively fill the sensor body with electrolyt while pumping the diaphragm with the eraser en of a pencil or similar soft.blunt tool.Continue fillin 'and pumping until no more air bU.bbles appear.(Withr'practice you can hold the probe and pump with one and while filling with the other,)When preparing th YSI 5720 and 5750 probes.simply fill the sensor body until no more air bubbles appear.I . B.Secure a membrane under YOU(left thumb.Add more electrolyte to the probe untH J large meniscus com- pletely covers the gold cathode.'NOTE:Handle mem- brane material with care.keeping it clean and dust free, touching Hanly at the ends. C.With the thumb and forefinger of your other hand. grasp the free end of the membrane. D.Using a continuous motion STRETCH the m~mbrane ·UP.OVER.and DOWN the other side of the sensor. Stretching forms the membrane to the contour of the probe. E.Secure the end of the membrane under the forefinger of the hand holding the probe. F.Roll the "0"ring over the end of the probe.There Should be no wrinkles in the membrane or trapped air bubbles.Some wrinkles may be removed by lightly tugging on the edges of the membrane beyond the "0" rin~• G.Trim off excess membrane with scissors or sharp knife. Check that the stainless steel temperature sensor is not '.covered by excess membrane.' 4.Shake off excess KCI and reinstall the sensor guard. 5.A bottomless plastic bottle is provided with the YSI 5739 probe for convenient storage.Place a small piece of moist towel or sponge in the bottle and insert the probe into the open end.This keeps the electrolyte from drying out.The YSI 5720 and 5750 probes can be stored in a B.O.D.bot- tle containing about 1"of water. 6.Membranes will last indefinitely if properly installed and treated with care during use.The result of poor membrane application or damage is erratic readings.The cause of erratic behavior can be loose.wrinkled or fouled mem- branes (by algae for efBmple).or bubbles in the probe from ~Iectrolyte 1055.If any of these signs occur it is good prac- tice.to thoroughly flush the reservoir with new KCI and replace the membrane. 7."Home brew"electrolyte can be prepared by making a saturated solution of reagent grade KCI and distilled water. and then diluting the solution to half strength with distilled water.Adding two drops of Kodak Photo Flo per 100 ml of solution assures good wetting of the sensor.but is not ab- solutely essential. 8.The gold cathode should always be bright and untarnished. To clean.wipe with a clean lint-free cloth or hard paper. NEVER USE ANY FORM OF ABRASIVE OR CHEMICAL Rinse the sensor several times with KC\.refill.and install a new membrane. 9.Some gases contaminate the sensor.evidenced by dis- coloration olthe gold.If the tarnish cannot be removed by vigorous wiping with a 50ft cloth.lab wipe.or hard paper. return the probe to the factory for service. 10.H 2S.S02'Halogens.Neon.and CO are interfering gases.If you suspect erroneous readings.it may be necessary to determine if these are the cause. 11.[f the probe has been operated for extended periods with a loose or wrinkled membrane the gold cathode may become plated with silver.In this event return the probe to the factory for refinishing. :. VII.GUARANTEE ~ND REPAIR All YSI products carry a one-year unconditional guarantee on workmanship and parts.exclusive of batteries.Damage through accident.misuse,or tampering will be repaired at a nominal charge.if possible,when the item is returned to the factory or to an authorized YSI dealer. If you are experiencing difficulty with any YS[product.it may be returned for repair.even if the guarantee has expired. YSI maintains complete facilities for prompt servicing of all YSI products.,_ j ! Yellow Springs Instrument Co••Inc. Service Department P.O.Box 279 Yellow Springs.Ohio.45387.U.S.A Phone:513-767-7241 \ -I ~ ~~f~~_'~:~).-'-.).§1 &J gJ.OJ 0;.cg? ABC D E F GL-=-_-:---J Figure 6 I ..I..... 4,00 78 ~_~~~~~,~~~~~~2.~~ ~-4rJ~j 'YELLO\,\I'SPRJ NGS •.OHIO,4'~3U7, LI ~''"f~UDNr,:767-72.42 (AncA COOl:513) ,.•;;...i.~~;.TELex 20-5437.....' .- .' 5075 C/\LIBRATION OLt\1,ffiER -SUPPLEMENT TO INSTHUdioNS When u.sing ·the 5075 Calibration Ommber ,-lith the YSI o).,"ygen ))robe 5739)a total immersion depth of hlO (2)fect is recommended .. Exceeding this depth r;ould cause errors in calibration . .If the prob(~is at a significantly (i.e.,5 degrees C) different temperature from the calibrating temperatur~)quicker ....-alibration will be achieved :,y placing the probe ill the \\'ater for a mmutc to alloh'it to come to calibratjng temperature.111en s]lake the ;'ll-obe dry and assemble into the chamber as dcscribcd in the in- .stnrncnt j11struction mnnual.Proceed as usual following thosc'in- structions. .. ,.. .' ':a •.., ....." .' .~ "... ... -~ ~•<:> .In ~o 0··~-" t. ·. {"\ 0 .\~ lD..\w (,) a: Q. -en > .-..._...........-.- ....co C"J It) ~ o :Eo &c ~en ~ '0> ciu i E i .E CJ) > ce w....w ~ ~u•en M M ...J W Ca ~ ,....ce a LL .... ,.... .J )I J I )J I 'i lrAB __JF Ce.._.INTt 1 .' Ii i ~t4 : o«:p (j) !'-f-~ I !'-, ',,- > ,fill I .. Page GENERAL DESCRIPTION • • • • • • • • • • • • • . • • • • • .••2 SPECIFICATIONS •••..•••••••••.•••'•.•..••••2 OPERATION PROCEDURE •••••••••..••••••.•••4 1.Setup '"'".I • •••4 2.Temperature . . . . • • . • • • . . • • • • • . . • • . . • •..5 3.Salinity .•.•.....•.••'.• • . . . . . • . . . • • •.•5 4.Conductance • • . • • . . • • • • • • . . • • • . . • . . • ..•5 5.Error ..:::ll =~e ~..'"• • • • •'.• • • • • • • • • • • • • •••6 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION,MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION.. • . . • • • . . . • • • • • . . • . • •••9 1.Description •........•...•.••••..••.•..9 2.Maintenance . . . • . • • . . • • • . • . . . . • . . • • . .•.9 3.Calibration . . . . . . . • . • . • . . . • • • • • . . • . . ..•9 PROBE •..•..••••.••.••.••.•.•••••.•..••12 1.Description of YSI 3300 Conductivity/Temperature Probe 12 2.Maintenance •.•'..••..•....•..•.......•12 ... I j. I I .. 1 ., I 1 , 1 1 1 J .I 1 J J .-1 -)1 I +50 to ·2°C ±O.l°C at .2°C,±0.6°C at 45°C plus probe. See Error Section. ±0.15°C at .2°C to ±0.37°C at 45°C Readability: Readability: 2.5 ~mhos/cm on 500 ~mho/cm .range 25 ~mhos/cm on 5000 ~mho/cm range 2 5 a )lm h 0 s/ c m on 5 aaaa ~mho/cm range Temperature Compensation:None Accuracy: 0-40 %0 (parts per thousand)over temperature range ·2 to +45°C. Above 4°C,±0.9 %0 at 40 %0 and ±0.7 %0 at 20 %0 plus conductivity probe. Below 4°C,±1.1 %0 at 40 %0 and ±0.9 %0 at 20 %0 plus conductivity probe.See Error Sec- tion. Readability:0.2 %0 on 0·40 %0 range Temperature Compensation:Manual by direct dial from ·2"to +45"C Temperature Range: Accuracy: Salinitv Range: GENERAL DESCRIPTION The YSI Model 33 S-C·T Meter is a portable,battery powered, transistorized instrument designed to accurately measure salinity, conductivity and temperature.It uses a probe consisting of a rugged, plastic conductivity cell and a precision YSI thermistor temperature sensor combined in a single probe. Conductivity in umhos/cm is the measurement of electrical conduc- tance a sample would have shown if measured between opposite faces of a 1 cm cube.Salinity is the numbor of grams of salt/kilogram of sample (%0 =parts per thousand).This measure· ment assumes the sample contains a "standard"sea water salt mixture.The sample temperature is measured in degrees Celsius. Salinity measurements are manually temperature compensated by di rect dial.Conductivity measurements are not temperature compensated,however,a temperature function is provided on the instrument to aid with calcLllation of corrections.Also,when just temperature and conductivity are known it is possible to calculate salinity,and when only temperature and salinity are known it is possible to calculate conductivity. SPECIFICATIONS Conductivity iRes'0·500,0·5,000,0-50,000 ~mhos/~'.:•ang .em with YSI 3300 Series Probes.o II (Note:The "~mho"designations on C·the instrument are a shorthand form i for "~mho/cm".l 00:Accuracy:±2.5%max.error at 500,5,000 l\:;.'I and 50,000 plus probe i ±3.0%max.error at 250,2,500 Power Supply Two 0 size alkaline batteries,Ever- I and 25,000 plus probe eady E95 or equivalent,provide See Error Section approximately 200 hrs.of opera. I t' t 2·If I;n.~ .l J, ';:', , .. J 1 -)l j J 1 J I ---B i ]]1;J 1 jJ -. I i i I j' Probe Accuracy: Instrument Ambient Range: YSI 3300 Series Conductivity/Tem- perature Probe Nominal Probe Constant:K =5 ±2%of reading for conductivity and salinity. Error of .to.1°C at O°C and fO.3°C at 40·C Satisfactory operation -5 to +45°C. A maximum error of ±0.1 %of the reading per °c chanoe in instrument temperature can occur.This error is negligible if the imtrumunt is read-, justed to redline for each reading. 2.Temperature Set the switch to temperature.Read the temperature on the bottom scale of the meter in degrees Celsius.Allow time for the probe temperature to come to equilibrium with that of the v·vater before reading. 3.Salinity (a)Transfer the temperature reading from Step 2 to the temperature knob on the instrument. (b)Switch the instrument to the SALI N iTY position and read salinity on the red 0-40 %0 meter range. (c)Depress the CELL TEST button.The meter readiJ19 shou Id fall less than 2%;if greater.the probe is fouled and tho measurement is in error.Clean the probe and re-measure. 4.Conductance (a)SWltch ~:,I-il2 i',-,i~tt:!r to ',j-,L1 X""00 ttrr.;~l)~/c,"j',;;~!nr,n.jf ~," ~~)~:(j,L:);;,:,-:,e':\'::;(0 'C'l!~~,)~j':),,:'-,',",;,ci-; -. e-o -':.1"-v ...:f\ I. J ,:1.. .,'JL,l.j '\-tern,::;~~.J ;0,-1 f'j ... ~I ;V,80", ,'j ","'1 \~.. ;"e.j'l,1"l.iJ C(J""I~,ot IjD (,;CC.~;'I·'i)ll·jn';(I, -a.:i SI,'1.J!~);.~:.er.I.~:., Ie),)"j~;l;~e )I'o.)e ir,to t,~le iJ.obe jack on the siGO o'f the ;J l~r\1Jl e~I..' IG;}\.'..~;t;j'.J':..".:jf ,n tl"d3 ~i IJt:Ol:~o Q8 rrlcusLJriJG \Sed ;J(OJC Answer 00 ,CJ,;, \<, .....;,..13 ,J.II",8 ',.J cxam;)ie:,,eaG;n~ ,'\';Li..I;""I;j ;~·:~/r~. ,L ~L ;'('1 ,-i 0 slC ;:~I ".' ......v'-;. ~" \___...._~.._r."".-.em-"-r,...-,',_~__'~--~"''''''';''''''''l''~'''-'''.'~':''''''''''''_._aaiiJ.,r,_~_/!J::~"'''',Y~~oI:I':l'.1=::r,'~'."~I·_i"r."'!i;:po;~ml'""!;'~'-";:'~·l"~l',q...:;',',;' 360g ±162llmhos!cm for probe and instrument X10 ±4.5% and instrument combined 15°C OAGC 15°C :t OAoe for probe Range %Reading Error .Accuracy Example:Reading Total Error Accuracy o I I J I I I 100 200 JOO 400 --- "mhos/em.RANGE READING Example:Reading 360 Ilmhos!cm Figure 2 :I 8.,""'--- (2)Conductivity Figure 2 shows the worst case conductivity error as a function of the conductivity reading for the probe and instru- ment combined.. t"o,4 READING .114030 Figure 1 (b)When measuring on the Xl 00 and X 10 ranges,dopress the CELL TEST button.The meter reading should fall less than 2%;if greater,the probe is fouled and the measure- ment is in error.Clean the probe and re-measure. NOTE:The CELL TEST does not function on the X1 range. 5.Error The maximum error in a reading can be calculated by using the graphs in the following sections. (1)Temperature . The temperature scale is designed to give the minimum salinity error when the temperature readings are used to compensate salinity measurements. Figure 1 shows total error for probe and instrument versus °c reading. °C/IEADING 7 l'--__~;.6 --'--~-~1I·~ r I i i I ! 1.0 .9i .8-~._l C1>,7 q',6 I .6COtOc .4E/I/IO/l~;;;.. ,3i .2 .1 20 o _ 100 ... I ,r -\I )I l j )"J .J 1 1 1 -]»1 1 1 1 '11Ii• (3)Salinity The salinity readings are a function of temperature and conductivity,therefore the accuracy is a function of both. The temperature scale and temperature control have been designed to minimize the temperatura error contribution to the salinity error.The error shown in Figure 3 is the total of the temperature and conductivity probe,the temperature scale and the salinity scale errors. 6.5% 10 partlthousand,@ 1Q°CExample:.Reading 4030 •4 TO.4S"C ·2 TO •4'C 20 "00 SALINITY READING %of Reading Error I 8I 8 (; 4I:1:%01I·READING I Figure 3 2 Q 100 ........ oo COc..a Accuracy .I t 8.!. I • \ 10 %0 ±0.65 %0 for all errors.combined worst case. ... r './...\ 1 J \1 1 J '1 1 J 1 1 J 1 1 ).1 -1 1 i I..• !. I -. oo co r',"V~ ... .. .. .If· CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION,MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION 1.Oescri ptiol'1 The circuit is composed of two parts;a multivibrator and switching transistors.The multivibrator produces a square waveform voltage. Thu SCiuare wave Is applied to t\'VO svvitching transistors.They alternntely apply two batteries of opposite polarity to the probe thus providing AC power which minimizes polarization effects.The meter is in series with one battery and measures the current from it. The current from the battery ig proportional to the conductance of the cell.Salinity is measured in a special range conductivity circuit which includes a user-adjusted temperature compensator.In the tempurature,redline and X1 positions the multivibrator operated at 100 Hz.In the salinity,X100 and X10 positions the multivibrator operates at 600 Hz and on these ranges pushing the CELL TEST button drops the frequency to 100 Hz allowing the operator to judge the degree of probe polarization. 2.Maintenance The only maintenance required is battery replacement.Two "0" sizo alkaline flashlight cells,such as Eveready E95 or equivalent batteries will provide 200 hI'S.of operation.Accuracy will not be mllintained if zinc-carbon "0"cells are used.Battery replacement is indicated when the redline adjustment cannot be accomplished. Replace batteries every six months to reduce the danger of corrosion dw?to leaky batteries.To replace batteries,remove the six screws from the rear plate.The battery holders are color coded.The Positive (+button)end must go on red • 3.Calibration It is possible for the temperature knob to become loose or slip from its normal position.In an emergency the did':can be re-positioned.It must be emphasized that this Is .an 'emergency 9 '.. ... J / ,\,"-"'\})J .)1.)I )--JJ1].1 .J .j -.]J -1 )'.. f r f procedure only,and that the instrument should be returned to the factory for proper recalibration at the earliest opportunity, (a)Read the temperature and conductance of the solution. Determine the salinity of the solution by running a line vertically on the graph from this conductance valuo until it intersects the appropriate °c line (interpolate as required for CALIBRATION CHART ·2 o'e 10'C ..RED WIRE temperatures between the given °c lines).From this intersec- tion extend a line horizontally to the edge of the graph.This determines the salinity for this sample. Example:25000 JLmhos and 20°C gives a salinity of 17. (b)Remove the °c knob,switch to SALINITY,and turn the control shaft until the meter needie indicates the salinity value determined in Step (a).In the example given,the value is 17. (c)Switch to TEMPERATURE (Note:This temperature reading must be the same as Step (a);if not,begin again at Step (a).) Place the knob on the control shaft (without turnin!)the control shaft)with the knob pointer at the same temperature as the meter reading and tighten both set screws securely. At earliest opportunity recalibrate using the following procedure or return the instrument to factory for service. (a)Set the instrument for a salinity measurement as normal. (bl Substitute a 1000 JLf capacitor and 112.7 ohm 0.1%tolerance resistor for the probe. Connect the resistor and capacitor between the green wire and red wire on the jack connections inside the instrument.' o .'\N'v II I GREEN WIRE 112.7 n 1000#' .1% l' 'r ,II 2O'C 30·C 40.000 pmhol 20.0001c.oOO 2!1 5 30 35 10 40 j iii iii iii iii iii I I i I I I i I Iii i i t 1'.of iii pi I I i v(iii lAC.I ~1SZ ~ 8 20 d....g cd "4 I I (10 11 l .IIJ .. 1 ( ]',..i ].I j r 1 1 1 J 1 } I!",\ 1 '.{] Time (minutes) 5 6 8 11 16 ... Meter Reading 11lmhos) 30,000 25,000 20,000 15,000 10,000 Cleaner";or Lysol Brand "Basin,Tub,Tile Cleaner." For stronger cleaning a 5 minute soak in a solution made of 10 parts distilled water,10 parts isopropyl alcohol and 1 part HC1 can be used. Always rinse the probe after cleaning and before storage. CAUTION:Do not touch the electrodes inside the probe. Platinum black is soft and can be scraped off. If cleaning does not restore the probe performance,re·platinizing is required.. (b)Re·Platinizing Equipment Required - 0)YSI #3140 Platinizing Solution,2 fl.oz.(3%Platinum Chloride dissolved in .025%lead acetate solution). (21 YSI Model 33 S-C·T Meter. (3)50 m1 glass beaker or equivalent bottle. (4)Distilled water. Procedure - (1)Clean the probe as in Section (a)-either method. (2)Place the cell in the beaker and add sufficient solution to cOlier the electrodes.Do not cover the top of the probe . (3)Plug the probe into the Model 33,switch to the Xl00 range to platinize the electrode.MOlle the probe slightly to obtain the highest meter reading and continue platiriizing for the approximate time shown below: i t I 'T ·0 .ff' 2.Maintenance (a)Cleaning When the cell test indicates low readings the probable cause is dirty electrodes.Hard water deposits,oils and organic matter are the most likely contaminants. For convenient normal cleaning soak the electrodes for 5 minutes with a locally available bathroom tile cleaning preparation such as: Dow Chemical "Bathroom Cleaner";Horizon Industries "Rally,Tile, Porcelain,and Chrome Cleaner";Johnson Wax "Envy,Instal1t (c)Turn the temperature dial until the meter reads redline. Now instaU the temperature knob with the arrow at 2SoC.This is a temporary calibration only.Return the instrument to the factory.for proper recalibration. PROBE 1.Description of YSI 3300 Series ConduetivitylTemperaturo Probe The YSI 3300 Series Conductivity Probes are designed for field use, embodying construction and design for rugged,accurate service. Each probe features a built-in cell constant of 5.00 to.l , a precision YSI thermistor temperature sensor of iO.l°C accuracy,at O°C and ±0.3°C at 40°C and a low capacitance cable assembly terminating in a three terminal 0.25"dia,phone type connector. The 3310 has a 10 ft.cable and the 3311 is a 50 ft.version.Other lengths are available on special order. The probe has a rigid P.V.C.body,'platinized pure nickel electrodes, and a durable cable,providing re,istance to a wide range of .water·borne substances. r I I I Il 12 13 I , , ... I I· f J \,1 ]J 1 1 )J 1 J J i -1 A-,;-.... 1 !•."'::\.J.1 I. ~15 where:K = R= C.= C2 = shows the values of conductivity this solution would have if the distilled water were non-conductive.However,since even high purity distilled water is slightly conductive,the measured conductivity will be higher by an amount equal to the water's conductivity. Temperature 0 C ConductiVity (Absolute Mic;omhos/cm 3 ) 15 1141.5 16 1167.5 17 1193.6 18 1219.9 19 1246.4 20 1273.0 21 1299.7 22 1326.6 23 1353.6 24 1380.8 25 1408.1 26 1436.5 27 1463.2 28 1490.9 29 1518.7 30 1546.7 The operator may use the standard solution and the table to check accuracy of a cell's constant or to determine an unknown constant. The formula is shown below: K =R(C,+C,) 10 6 Cell Constant measured resistance in ohms conductivity in absolute micromhos conductivity in absolute micro mhos of the distilled water used in making solution .ff· (4)After the elapsed time remove the probe and rinse in fresh water. (5)Return the solution to its container.2 oz.of solution should be sufficient for 50 treatments. 3.Probe Use (a)Obstructions near the probe can disturb readings.At least two inches of clearance must be allowed from non-metallic underwater objects.Metallic objects such as piers or weights should be kept at least 6 inches from the probo. (b)Weights are attached to the cable of the YSJ 3310 and 3311 Probes.The YSI 3327 Weights are supplied in pairs with a , total weight of 4 ounces per pair.Should it become necessary to add more weight to overcome water currents,we suggest limiting the total weight to two pounds (8 pairs).For weights in excess of tWo pounds use an independent suspension cable. In either case,weights must be kept at least 6 inches away from the probe. (c)Gentle agitation by raising and lowering the probe several times during a measurement in~ures flow of specimen solution through the probe and improves the time response of the temperature sensor. 4.Cell Calibration &Standard Solutions The YSJ #3300 Series Cells are calibrated to absolute acaccuracy of ±1-1/2%based on a standard solution.Since the literature on conductivity does not indicate a consistently 81:cepted standardization methods,·we have chosen the .01 demal KCI solution method as determined by Jones and Br.adshaw in 1937 as our standard.Recent textbooks,as well as the ASTM standards, concur with this choice. The solution is prepared by diluting .745 grams of pure dry KCI with distilled water until the solution is 1 kilogram.The table below 14 I .1 I ...-..... 0). COl oo ,- I Ii II· ~ ..J '"., .~ r i ,.1 ,, .,, J }i J }}J 1 })~1 l ,..---- l'g R,C1 and C2 must either be determined at the same temperature or corrected to the same temperature to make the equation valid. Note:For further inforrr.ation on conductivity and the above standard information,refer to A5TM Standards Part 23 -Standard Mathods of Test for Electrical Conductivity,or Water and Industrial Waste Water -ASTM Designation Dl126-64. YSI MODEL 33 USED WITH YSI 51A,54 and 57 OXYGEN METERS If the Model 33 salinity measurement ;s to be used for salinitY correction on the 51 A,the reading should be converted to Chlorosity.The formula is: PPM ChlorositY =.Salinity %0 -0.03 x 103 1.8 For these instruments the 0.03 can be neglected so the equation simplifies to: .t REPAIR FACILITIES If you are experiencing difficulty with a YSI product,it may be returned to the YSI Customer Service Department for repair,even if the guarantee has expired.YSI maintains complete facilities for prompt servicing of all YSI products. GUARANTEE The Model 33 S-C·T Meter carries a one year unconditional guarantee on all workmanship and components.Damage through accident,misuse.or tampering will be repaired at a nominal charge when the instrument is returned to our plant. Cells are similarly guaranteed.. Note:In communications regarding this instrument,please mention model number and serial number and the type of failure experienced:. -, ._'.0 0 ~) 0 'I PPM CI "S5 %0 x 103 1,8 o 9 18 27 36 S %0 I I I I I o 6,000 10,000 15,000 20,000 Pf'M CL For salinity correction when using the Model 67 use the salinity .reading direct from the Model 33.No conversion is necessary. Model 33 salinity readings taken in conjunction with Model 54 dissolved oxygen readings can be used to correct the Model 54 for salinity and to make post measurement salinity corrections to dissolved oxygen data.Correction tables are available from the factory.l 16 "..." .. 1 1 1 J j ).I }1 'J J }»J 1 )!] ........--.c· .0 CO 1-',,;,, ACCESSORIES AND REPLACEMENTS 5992~20 Replacement pH Electrode for Model 5985·20 Meter 5992·50 Rep~acement pH Electrode for Model 5985-40 Mete~ 5985·05 AC Adapter for 115/230vAC operation . 5977·04 pH Buffer,4.00,vial of 12 capsules 5977·07 pH Buffer,7.00,vial of 12 capsules 5977.09 pH Buffer,9.00,vial of 12 capsules 5977·10 pH Buffer,10.00,vial of 12 capsules READY·TO·USE BUFFER SOLUTIONS These,prepared buffer solution standards offer excellence in" precision and consistency.With these ready.to·use buffer solu- tions,you are guaranteed an accuracy of ±0.01 pH nt 25 0 C. These buffer solutions are.dated to assure freshness.Double protection against contamination - -unbreakable plastic bottles have shrink-sealed caps and are packed in individual plastic bags.Color·coded solutions. Container pH 4.01,Red pH 7.00,GJ:een pH 10.00,Blue Volume Cat.No.Cat.No.Cat.No. Pint 5942-20 5942·40 594,2-60 .". Quart 5942·22 5942·42 5942-62 Gallon 5942·24 5942·44 5942-64 ,. 12·15·76 .4. INSTRUCTIONS FOR DIGI-SENSE®pH METER I.GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS Whenever transferring the electrode from one solution to another,it is essential that the electrode be thoroughly rinsed in water and any excess water should be shaken off. Doing this will prevent contamination between samples. When immersing the electrode in sample or buffer give a moderate stirring action to the electrode.This improves electrode response and gives more accurate reading. If you store your electrode for an extended period,put ,. several drops of distilled water in the plastic cap and place cap on the end of the electrode .. For improved accuracy and consistency of readings it is important that buffers and samples are at the same tem- perature. II.PREPARATION FOR FIELD OPERATION Install batteries by removing the four screws from real' of pH meter and inserting batteries supplied. BATTERY REPLACEMENT "BAT.LOW"indicator will signal when it is time to replace batteries.Just remove the four screws from back of meter case and replace the si\'1.5 volt,size "AA", alkaline batteries. PREPARATION FOR AC OPERATION. Set the optional AC adapter,using switch on rear of adapter,to appropriate voltage (either 115 vAC or 230 vAC)then connect adapter to pH meter and power outlet. Meter is now "on"and should be calibrated by following steps in calibration procedure. ~....,...~(" " j' f{~·-,., \,/ )1 j J I )•J 1 l J j }}1 ]J 1 » III.CALIBRATION PROCEDURE 1.Connect electrode to meter. 2.Set "temperature"knob to the temperature of the buffers. 3.Immerse electrode in buffer pH 7,press push-button "on"switch located at left side of meter, and adjust "standarize"knob to reading of 7.0. 4.Rhise electrode in water. IV.TROUBLE SHOOTING In many cases poor'performance or lack of performance can be traced to causes other than instrument malfunc- tion.Some of these are defective electrode,weak batteries, contaminated buffers,temperature difference between buf· fers and poor calibrating and measurement technique. If your pH meter is not operating satisfactorily the -fol- lou,;ng "heel,,,"hnn1d h ..·11'1<1..:1",....,..""..-'-"a"I"~""'..u·v"...._"""......__w. Try a new or another set of batteries. Check meter by recalibrating with fresh buffer solu- tions. Review your calibrating procedure. Use another electrode of assured accuracy in above checks. " ......--oo CO t~,· .-'\. \- 5.Immerse electrode in the second buffer,depress "on" switch and adjust "temperature"knob to reading of the burrer. 6.Rinse electrode in water.Your DIGI·SENSE is now ready for use. NOTE:The "temperature"knob serves the dual'purpose of both temperature compensation and meter cali· bration.Therefore,upon completion of the cali· bration procedure the temperature knob does not necessarily indicate the actual buffer temperature. ·2· ('. ('.,1·' ." The following problems and corrective action will help in locating the trouble source: 1.Sluggish response:use a mild detergent to remove any dirt or film on the electrode tip,and rinse thoroughly. If condition persists,replace electrode. 2.Excessive drift:same ,procedure as above. 3.Same reading from tWQ differe'!fl.buffers:replace elec· trode. NOTE:Repeated fluctuations of more than ±O.l pH unit •is an indication that the batteries are nearing the end of their life and should be replaced. .3 . A"···~:. ,,'0- - ) - ..... - ELECTRODE INSTRUCTIOi\lS Sealed Combination Electrodes --(Ag-Agel Reference). -8mm (1)Wet entire outside of electrode,except the cap,in tap water.Carefully remove the lower rubber sleeve.NOTE:This lower sleeve is used only for storage and shipping. (2)Use a wet paper towel and clean the wick area by wiping several times. (3)For first time usage,or after long storage,soak the lower end of the electrode (including the wick)in tap water for five minutes.This will allow the wick to commence flowing. (4)If air bubbles are present in the bulb area,shake downwards to fill the bulb with the solution. pH lVleasuremer~ (5)After following the above instructions,thoroughly rinse the e!~ctrod8 tip in distilled "'Jater.~~ext insert the electrode tip in 1:!.:r;c·,,'~tuffer,close to the sample to be te~ted. (6)Adlust the.standardize control on pH ii'="CS",-<",,:il mete::eeGs the value of the buffer. (7)Thorough1v rinse electrode with distiaed \'/ater,theil ins:::rt electrode in solution to be tested. flJOTE:This electrode tip should be rinsed in distilled water between each measurement to prevent contamination of the next solution. Cleaninfl the Electrode fa}It is necessary to clean the.wick and buib er~a thoroughly before using the electrode. Improper cleaning may produce drift or slo'N response. Storage (9)Storage of the electrode for a short period,immerse the membrane in a buffer of 4 or 7. During this period,the rubber sleeve should be over the filling hole.The wick rubber sleeve should be off. (10)For long storage (over one week)the plastic cap should be placed into position as when the erCJtrode was received.Then place back in the box and store. '.•c 1l'".,'.L;,\......{: ..~.;'...::'.:';,,''.'...',' ;'~'.~...." "," • I :,;. , •,.' ':' '!-.;;, ," ..- '.\. - :'.~:-"';1 ''', "''::t.:': '~ .fIIIIIII"'...ilII· ,'10{) ",..l,,,,,,.· 1'1 '"i d-'til.- t. .(/") .'(!>' ;> VI ill. ... '....fo': )\' ,-;, 1 ..... ....,. \j.. .'cPo ",..' I .~'.. ". ",:' ~:.;,. :1, .~', ".,"..~. :'," .." ,"\.,' ,',',~ ..~,,.....' ;;:', ..;. ""., ';..~'..;;. j",'I"j,,.,.,,....:!:....t" :.:~I. ,'···h-·~"I' ,.:,,>•. ".~,~.•1,_',.;:l .;').:.,= ... "~." (, 5U~}:':?O [II ,placement pH Electrode for• '7.Rinne clectr'ode In water. , 1.; " .. " ;~ >.~ ...•.l...•~~:i;.~.~j21i[t1ii,!i(i,~ft:~:L_.J_:,:~.,;~,.,.l:;_.. ,,. ;;:~ ',.'/ .l:'·.:,;.:i~Ji,~i,~1[~£i~~~i~' ~.:-:r~;~::f:·7r~.'~?J ',~:~Z~:t~~~~r>;,~;';{·~.~~'~~r'T W~:' ""~r~t"\"~~~';lS~ff}iI(/p!,tJ;'"*~:"i*t..r J ~~:~.,t r~<i\!l r;~;..,"~~~<:;~'f;·J:".:;.(g·..:].:~:/."5~~·:~?··1·~~,"::,.r~~\~ .'.:•'•",,,;".';.•.;,:•.;.,,,',j',,", Calibrate with pH buffer"solutions 4.00 and'7.ob for expected readings bela\'1'7pH;calibrate with 7.00 arid 10,00 for above 7 pH.Prepare buffer solutions by emptying contonts of buffer ..AC OPEI1J1.TION "cnpsuies supplied into cle.an containers and dis80lvinn each •'\ ",.':/with ~oo ml of water (dif.~i~le.d.w:',t:;r.IU!':'~~!£ibjo)..So!utions being Set thn optlon,fll AC adapter,using swit~h on rear of adapter,to....':~C!l TCK:.dfor pH shou~be ~y:r~d.'.~.j.l ;..Cl~.:lnJl.)g,probe rogue-appropriate voliage (either 115vAC or 230vA~).Then connect '.,.,:(-lar,y v.iI\assure maximum uc~t..r~cy.nv pr~oc IIL~f~equency adapter to pH meter .and power outlet.Meter IS now "on"and.,':\}~of cleanjng should b~detGnr:ineo b~c~eratll1g conditions.should be calibrated,following steps ~2),through (6)above. ::·~-/~f""-FiE:...D ,OPERATION'• ,.,.-~,".'SATTEi1Y nEPLACEMENT " ....~'.':i ·l.:·'·I~'stall batteries by removing the fOL:r screws from rear of pH ,.:';';,meter a[ld inserting batteries suppiied.. ."BAT.LOW"indicator will signal when it is time to replace ;.::,J ' "battcrkls.•lust remove the four screws from back of meter case ,.':;j 2.Connect electrode to rt)eter.ancI roplnc0 the six 1.5 volt,sIze "AA",alkaline batteries....;..,... ",::'3.Set "TEMPERATURE"knob to approximate tomperature of.,J b It ':-:.',:)u"er..'ACCESSORIES AND HEPLACEMENTS ..,1 • ..'':;4.Imrr.crsc electrode in buffer ,7.00.prCSG push-bulloll "ON" .''.-<~witch locat0d at left.side of moter,and adjust "STI\I'JDARD- ":.'~IZE"knob for [\'digital roadout ot 7.0 (7.00 for,four--rlinit mode!)...) ,','J 5.P,inse electrode in water.5D/J!).l.)!j I\C Adapter for 115/230vAC operation. ,," 6.Immerse electrode,in buffer 4.00 or 10.00"c1epmss "ON'";!!)i'!'O:,~pH Buffer,~.OO,vlal of 1~capsules. switCh,and adjust "TEMPERATURE"kn~b.for a diuital read-~,:1/7 O(pH B~f!cr,1.00,vl~1 of 1_capSUles. .out of 4.0 or 10.0 (4.00 or 10.00 for four-digit modol).,J.)11,10 pH BLit ,or,10.00,Vial of 12 capSUles. ..:.J [--~-;-'-'-~~::"l:;U i L""""""",-=~..,.~..=~-~""'---..._..-.._.;.......t,:,: ,, -I 1~"", !,i ) Ji f1~ ;j( j~ 1 j- t- ~ i .- [ ~ f ~ l ~ r , I........ I'j Io. ,~ FEBRUARY 1977 .1""1--,':,'"'i':.z _,,_~-:'-.': ~.. ..;.'.EI ••..--,,,'. ~''.-..'-', IFATHOMETIER® ·PRECISION SURVEY DEPTH RECORDER, INSTRUCTION MANUAL [ I - - .... tEAYTHEO~ Raytheon Marine Limited Warranty Marine Products ~Marine Company _aDpub at ac:h_product apm.t dofecta III matIriaI uw:I worIcmaMhIp ~JIOnI1lI1_.and wiD npair orexchange MY pubpI'IJftII to be defective at nodwpfora period at lWO YEARS&casthed.teatoriliDalhlstalJatiaa.EXCliYTASPROVlDEDBELOW. DI!ledswiD becorrec:ted &tU autMnzed RaytManMarineCtnnpany SerYb Statio...1'heftwiD be ....d>arte lor....for.period at ONE YEAR &om d.te at ClI'iPM1 illltaDatiDII.EXCliYT AS PROVIDED BELOW.and durifta tlu.tilnelt~~ywill_trawl_atilllAuthori=lSerYbStatiall~upto. ~at10C1hilhwaYlZIiIeI.~~~.r~F J,~ ",W~LJ!dITAnONS -.e·-A"~1!ClII Marine Company wiD nat be~Jem~which ....bem IUbjected toacddent,.o.-.or .......DOlr U1YequipncIt em which theterial p~'"bem lmIoved',a1tend,orlmltilated. j,.~"'"<.r Exczpl:where Raythecm Marine Ctnnpany ....perfOnnecf theinst&il.aik,...it __.no RIpOIIIibilIty for cIunqe IncuInd durina;installation.•~ nu.wuranty ileffectiwon!y wfthJesped to theCll'iPM1 ~hom Ra~Companyor_ matharized Raythecm Marino Company ~"...... {,., A valiilmd warranty artiEicale Uld ItatioIllogboolr.(If ilpplicablel IIIIIIt be madNnilabJe to the authorized Raytheon Marine Scmce Station RopreMllWive at the time at.mce.- On raclarinstallationa,the znasnetron.TIR ceil ldywtron.and modulator tube (If applicable).and cathode ny tabeuwwmnniedforSIXMONlHS hom date at ClI'iPM1 instaI1aticm. Chart :paper.1tyIli.atylua beib.lamr-.and fuoos ate COIlIUJIIable iteml.and aft.not CI>YeI'ed by this WlII'l'UItF. AD.eDIt UIOCiated with traNducer replacement.other than the COIC of the tranIcIucer ItIe1f.II spedficaJIy exduded mDll\thiI warrant)'. TraveI_will .not be ac:eq>ted for products that do.not require iNtailation by an Authorized Scmce Statioll. Rayttw"",Marine Colllpany equiplllGll or parts thereof whidl have bem repaired or a1taed aulslcle at iIII plant except by ~.u1horizedRal'd-Marine Company Scmce StatiON an!not warranted IIlUly raped. ThIs warnnty iI STRlcny UMlT1!D to the termllndXated heftm.Uld no other ~warrmtln or mnecIIeI dIawncler W1l be bl!>diDs em Raytheon Marine Company.TO·-reE EXTENT CONSISTENT wrm STAnAND FEDERAL lAW,(1)AN'IlMPUED WARRANTIES SHAll BELlMITED TOniE SAMEllME PERIODS STAim HERE!NFC)REXPRESSWARRANTIES,AND(2)RAY11iEON MARlNE COMPAN'I SHALL NOT BE UABLEfOR CONSEQUENnAl DAMAGES UNDER AN'I EXPRESS OR1MPLIED WARRANTIES RElATING TO nus EQUIPMENT. RAnliEONMAIUNE COMPANY 6761a1and Pond RoM.Mano:Mster.New Hampohhe03UO NOTE:THE SAMPLE WARRANTY STATEMENT IS FURNISHED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. PLEASE REFER TO THE WARRANTY CER- TIFICATE ISSUED WITH YOUR EQUIPMENT FOR SPECIFIC TERMS AND CONDITIONS. - - - PURPOSE THIS MANUAL CONTAINS IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF YOUR EQU IPMENT . RAytHEON MARINE COMPANY products are supported by a worldwide network of Authorized Service Repre~entatives. The below-listed Raytheon Marine Company Factory Service Centers will either assist you directly,or refer you to an Authorized Service Representative. FACTORY SERVICE CENTERS - ..... CALIFORNIA: 633 N.Marine Avenue Wilmington,Ca.90744 (Los Angeles) Phone:(213)835-0147 FLORIDA: 1107 N.Ward Street Tampa,FI.33607 Phone:(813)877-9418 LOUISIANA: 525 Jefferson Street New Orleans,La.70121 Phone:(504)835-6491 NEW HAMPSHIRE: 25 Industrial Village Londonderry,N.H.03053 . (Manchester) Phone:(603)668-1600 NEW YORK: 756 5th Avenue Brooklyn,N.Y.11232 Phone:(212)768-2511 DENMARK: Rayscan-Copenhagen Siljangade 6-8 DK2300 Copenhagen S Denmark Phone:451-550702 TEXAS: 1203 Galveston Street South Houston,Tx.77~ Phone:(713)941-2700 WASHINGTON: 4800 20th Ave.NW Seattle,Wa.98107 Phone:(206)782-0292 u~",..1} JAPAN: 3-12-1 Kaigan Dori Naka-Ku Yokohama,Japan 231 Phone:045-212-3633 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT'D) Section 7 MAINTENANCE 7.1 General 7 .2 Lubrication 7 .3 Internal Controls (Factory Set) 7 .4 .Alignment Procedure LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-2 -. - Figure No. 3-1 3-2 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-5A 5-1 5-2 5-3 7-1 7-2 7-3 Title '1245A Beam Pattern 200T5HAD Beam Pattern Typical Transducer Over-Side Installation Recorder in Operating Position Chart Paper Threading Belt and Stylus Replacement Platen Assembly Platen Clutch Assembly 7245 Outline 200T5HAD Outline 115/230 VAC Power Supply-Installed Transceiver PC Board Motor Control PC Board Chassis Plate -Rear View ii 3-4 3-4 4-3 4-3 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-12 5-2 5-2 5-4 7-6 7-7 7-8 ] 1 I~ •I SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 1.1 PRINCIPLES OF ECHO DEPTH SOUNDING Echo depth sound~ng'is a method of measuring water depth by computing the time interval required for sound waves to travel,at a known velocity,from a known point to a reflect- ing surface and return.If the time is measured between the transmission of a sound and the reception of its echo,the distance may be computed by multiplying one-half of this time interval by the velocity of sound in water. From fresh water at the freezing point to the warmest water of the highest saline content likely to be encountered,there can be a variation in the speed of sound of from approxi- mately 4550 to 5050 feet per second;the speed increasing with both higher temperature and salinity.The division of change is roughly three fifths for temperature and two fifths for salinity.The speed of sound also increases slightly with increasing pressure; however for water depths measured with the DE-71gB equipment,the correction for pressure would be n1egligible and therefore will not be considered in this text. The foregoing shows that under widely differing water conditions the sounding accuracy could be affected as much as ±5%due to the speed of sound in water variation.Under normal conditions of operation in a given area,variations of the speed of sound in water will usually be less than ±0.5%.The DE-71gB equipment is calibrated for a speed of sound in water of 4800 feet per second,which is the figure commonly used for naviga- tional purposes in salt water.However,for accurate survey work a speed of sound cor- rection must be applied to the soundings to obtain the accuracy designed into the equip- ment. 1.2 EFFECTS OF FOREIGN MATERIAL,THERMAL CrtADIENTS,ETC. A hard bottom,such as rock or sand,provides the best reflecting surface for sound waves;however,.strong reflection is also possible from air bubbles in the water,such as are present in the wake of another vessel.Weaker sound reflections (echoes)are generated by small fish,bits of seaweed and even by temperature variations in the water. If the sensitivity (gain)control of a depth sounder is set.too high,it is sometimes possi- ble to obtain sufficient echo return from the water itself to mark the chart to a depth of as great as one hundred feet.At a slightly lower setting of the sensitivity control,it is sometimes possible to observe thermal or salinity gradients and micro-organisms. 1-1 ;·,·U·"f ;./~U~··,V.J..V SECTION 2 DESCRIPTION 2.1 GENERAL """The DE-719B portable,precision,survey-type Fathometer®Depth Re.corder is a complete echo depth sounder designed to provide a detailed permanent recording of underwater ",",topography in water depths between 2 and 410 feet.Ease of set-up and operation,plus the extreme accuracy and low power consumption makes this an ideal instrument for un- derwater surveying.· The DE-719B Recorder is designed primarily for portability;however,it may be mounted on a bulkhead.For maximum portability,space is provided in the rear half of the case -for stowing the transducer,rigging and power cable.A zippered canvas cover is pro- vided for protection during handling and transportation . ....A bracket ,designed to support the recorder in an inclined.position for easy viewing and operation,is built into the back portion of the case.Additional brackets and clips are incorporated in the back section for securing the transducer,cabling,and extension "..pipe.. _The DE-719B is advancE~design equipment using completely solid-state circuitry,mag- netic keying and electronically controlled chart speed.The equipment is housed in a splash-proof,aluminum case to assure maximum protection when operated under ad- """verse conditions.The viewing window in the front cover is hinged to permit access to the chart paper for annotations.A safety guard covers the stylus and belt assembly to prevent accidental contact with the rotating stylus arm while entering notes and data on the chart paper.. The DE-719B provides high resolution recordings due to the narrow transducer beam -width,high sounding rate,four selectable chart speeds and high signal frequency.The versatility of the DE-719B is further enhanced by a TIDE and DRAFT control,a SPEED OF SOUND control and a RANGE doubling control.Any changes in the setting of the pre- ....ceding controls is permanently recorded on the chart paper for future reference.Fix marks can be inscribed on the chart by the FIX MARK switch.(A remote switch may be connected.) The operating controls such as the power OFF jSTANDBYjON,RANGE SELECTOR,SEN- SITIVITY,CHART SPEED and the FIX MARK control and the RANGE X2 (doubles range -on all scales)control are located inside and are accessible through the hinged front .window. - 2-1 "'" ,.... - - The standard chart paper furnished is graduated in feet;however,chart paper gradua- ted in meters is available as an option from the office where the DE-719B equipment was purchased. The DE-719B equipment is designed to operate from a 12 VDC source;however,on special order it can be furnished with a built-in power converter to operate from a 115/230 volt, 50-60 Hz power source.This does not affect the ability to operate from a 12 VDC power source. 2.2 OPTIONS AVAILABLE 1.115/230 VDC power supply,#M33105. 2.7245A narrow beam transducer,#M396005. 3.Metric graduated chart paper,#587630-1. 4.Remote Fix Marker Switch,#7273-5010Gl. 5.Maintenance spar:es kit,#M33125. 2 .3 TRANSDUCER The model 200T5HAD transducer is a two-way energy conversion device which functions like the combination microphone/speaker in an intercom unit.During transmission,it converts pulses of electrical energy into pulses of supersonic energy which travel through the water toward the bottom.During reception it receives the echoes of supersonic ener- .gy which are reflected from the bottom and converts them to electrical signals.Reference Section 3 for specdfications. 2.4 SPARE PARTS.KIT A small spare parts kit (P/N~:-5Q31G1)is furnished with each DE-719B system.The kit contains replacement fuses,stylus,brushes and chart paper. 2-2 P""2.5 SPECIFICATIONS Depth Range Sounding Rate Voltage Input Current Input 0-55,50-105,100-155,150-205 Feet 0-16.5,15-31.5,30-41.5,45-61.5 Meters 534 Soundings per minute 12 VDC 2.5 Amperes - i -~ ~ ,. ,~ ~.... I I ] 1F1'" 1- ]~ Accuracy· Operating Frequency Tranducer Transducer Beamwidth Chart Paper Speed Chart Paper Recorder Dimensions Net Weight ±O.5%±1"of indic&.ted depth 208 kHz Barium titanate -Model 200T5HAD Optional.Model 7245A SO at the half power points 1,2,3,4,inches per minute 7 inches x 60 feet Height (including handle)-18" Width 15-3/8" Depth 9-1/16" Recorder w/transducer and rigging 47 lbs. Recorder only -38 lbs. J~2-_3 _ SECTION 3 TRANSDUCER DATA 3.1 GENERAL i'rhe 7245A transducer has been designed for precision survey work and other applications nhere a very narrow bea.m pattern is required.Such an application requirement would result where it is necessary to accurately delineate the sides of a dredged channel,or a,.... :rench for the underwater laying of pipe or cable.The narrow beam pattern is also use- ,luI for more accurately outlining a submerged obj ect such as a sunken vessel.The trans- ~ucer is also useful for measuring wave heights,where the narrow beam can differenti- !Lte between the peak and trough of the waves.The 7245A transducer has been designed 'to match the electrical characteristics of th~model 200T5HAD transducer supplied with ~he DE-719B Survey Recorder and is supplied with a cable connector for use with the DE- '19B equipment.The model 7245A differs from the model 7245 in that it contains a built- in matching transformer to match a 50 ohm line impedance,which is also the transducer ~utput impedance of the DE-719B equipment. Because of the larger radiating area and greater directivity index,there will be at least 1""".6 dB improvement in echo strength compared to the smaller 200T5HAD transducer sup- llied with the DE-719B equipment. - .2 SPECIFICATIONS Operating Frequem~y: Transducer impedance: Transducer Beam Width: Minor Lobes: 7245A Transducer 204 to 210 kHz. 50 ohms +J18 ±20%at operating frequency. 2.750 inclusive at -3 dB points. 3.50 inclusive at -6 dB points. 4°degrees inclusive at -io dB points. First lobes down at least 11 dB,peaking 4.5° either side of center;all minor lobes beyond 100 down at least 21 dB,and beyond 35 0 down at least 40 dB . .00 1 0"'.;.~"4 3-1 ~----~_.~._------------------....,I,I., Cable: Housing Material: Mounting: Beam Pattern: Outline: Operating Frequency: Transducer -Impedance: Transducer Beam Width: Minor Lobes: 7245A Transducer (Cont'd) Supplied with 30'of 2 conductor #18 shielded and neoprene jacked cable.having 0 .D .of 3/8". Supplied with Cannon type XLR-3-12C con-- nector plug for use with DE-71gB Survey Recorder. Additional cable up to 1500'in length may be used. Silicon bronze housing with sound window of polyurethane. The mounting stem should be vertical within 10 of the bottom for best resolution. Reference Figure 3-1. Reference Figure 5-1. 200T5HAD Transducer 208 kHz. The impedance at 200 kHz with the trans- ducer immersed in water shall be in the range of 50 ohms :t15%. Peak response within 2°of mechanical axis. -3 dB points not more than 100 apart. -10 dB points not more than 180 apart. First sidelobes at least 15 dB below on axis response.Outside ±35°off axis •the response must be at least 20 dB below on axis at any angle including sides and rear. 3-2 - Cable: 200T5HAD Transducer (Cont'd) The cable is shielded twin with stranded copper shield,all tin plated.Each con- ductor is the equivalent of 16 strands of #31 AWG.The total cable length is 30'±6". Housing Material:Red brass housing. ~ Mounting:Same as 7245A. -Beam Pattern:Reference Figure 3-2. Outline:Reference Figure 5-2....., 3.3.OPERATION """ The 7245A transducer with connector supplied,is plugged directly into the DE-719B trans- ducer socket.No re-tuning of the equipment is required. "'", 3-3 1 I 1 1 ,t i )i 1 J 1 1 l\ I.·.~, 30~:lO~10"0"3~~~1~~:330" rTnrrn,I'Tl'I r'11 I IT'r1rJ n I rIII I'r I I I"r ii'1[1'll11fl"TIn "linT Figure 3-1 7245A Beam Pattern Jjf:-J;:-'~o·'J~O:it~--i~~~IfITT'lTlITfT1 T 'TTlTryrTTfTlTTf'TlTTTTTI TnrqITl1p 11 fTTTlTTTITl i I TIT Figure 3-2 200T5HAD Beam Pattern ,_...;,......,",.;,......"'_.,l,&...iL~'~',:..~,...,...!.i;i&Mt;:> SECTION 4 OPERATION .-4 .1 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS .- "'" ,-, - 1.OFF/STANDBY/ON:Applies power to equipment.In standby chart drive and stylus are disabled but the equipment is warmed up and ready for instant use. 2.SENSITIVITY:Adjusts the receiver sensitivity (gain). 3.FIX MARK SWITCH:A spring loaded s;ylitch causes the stylus to inscribe a reference mark the full height of the chart paper.A remote fix-mark switch is avnilable as an optional accessory. 4.TIDE and DRAFT:Adjustment 'to advance or delay the start of the trans- mitter pulse to compensate for tide .and/or draft differences. 5.SPEED OF SOUND:Enables operator to vary stylus drive motor speed to compensate for salinity content and temperature of water . ,6.RANGE Xl.X2:Changes speed of stylus to multiply scale by 2 Le.from 50 feet per phase to 100 feet per phase. 7.CHART SPElm:Selects the rate of chart paper feed;1.2.3 or 4 inches per minute. 8.CAL ZERO:Enables the operator to adjust the first maker line to 0 (zero) on the chart paper.This is to compensate for stylus wear.etc. 9.FEET SWITCH:S elects the desired operating depth range. 4.2 OPERATION:INITIAL SET-UP 1.Remove the battery cable and the transducer and support tubes from the back section of the recorder case. 2.Assemble the first section of the support tUbing to the transducer.Back off-on the hex nut on the transducer stem far enough to allow the keyhole slot in the tubing to slip over the screw.Tighten the hex nut with a wrench so that it seats firmly in the round part of the keyhole slot. 4-1 ------------~-._---~~.---~~..~..~- CAUTION Do not turn the screw. - 3.Assemble the remaining sections of the support tubing. I NOTE I Unscrew.but do not remove.each screw only as far as necessary to clear the keyhole slot.As each section is assembled tighten the screw so that it seats firmly in the circular part of the keyhole. .". - 4. 5. Slide the clamping ring over the full length of the transducer cable and support tubes.Secure the ring as close to the transducer as possible. Install a guy wire or line in the eye of the clamping ring.This is to pro- vide strain relief for the support tubes when the boat is underway. Clamp the assembled transducer and support tubes to the side of the boat (see Figure 4-1). I NOTE I Before immersing.wash the transducer face with a solution of liquid detergent and water.(This should be done each time the system is used.)The detergent removes any oil or other foreign matter which might prevent thorough wetting of the transducer face.. The support tube should be veritcal in the thwartship plane.In the fore and aft plane the lower end of the support tube should be tilted slightly forward.This will prevent the forrr.:3.tion of air bubbles on the transducer face due to ,cavitation.Adjust the forward guy wire or line to hold ~his alignment. I NOTE I The transducer face or radiating surface should be SUbmerged to a depth of at least one foot while underway. .- 6.Set the recorder on the seat or deck of the boat.Prop the recorder at an angle with the built-in support.(See Figure 4-2.-) 4'00109 . 4-2 """ - .- - ._----. I Figure 4-1 Typical Transducer Over-Side Installation Figure 4-2 Recorder'In Operating Position 4-3 i ,00110 - .... 7.Plug thE~transducer cable into the appropriate receptacle in the back of the recorder chassis. 8.Plug thE~battery cable into the BATTERY receptacle on the back of the re- corder ehassis. 9.Make sure that the OFF jSTANDBY JON control is in the OFF position.Con- nect the battery clips to a fully charged 12 volt storage battery.BE SURE TO OBSERVE POLARITY. 10.Set the FEET Switch to the 0-55 foot range.Set the RANGE Xl,X2 control to Xl (control is located inside hinged front window).. 11.Open the front cover of the recorder and rotate the stylus belt counterclock- wise through one complete revolution by rotating the upper pulley.Check that the stylus rides in the track at the left side of the assembly and the pulleys turn smoothly.Close the front cover and latch securely. 12.Turn'the OFF1STAND BY ION control to ON.This applies power to the re- corder eircuitry,stylus drive motor and the chart feed motor. 13.Adjust the front panel CAL ZERO control until the "calibrate zero line"falls on the zero calibration on the chart paper. I NOTE I For this adjustment the direct transmission mark should be moved off the zero calibration by the TIDE and DRAFT control. After the CAL ZERO adjustment is completed readjust the TIDE and DRAFT control until the direct transmission mark falls on the chart paper zero line, or as required. 14. :- 15. ~16. Adjust the SPEED OF SOUND control (located inside the hinged window)un- til the calibrate mark falls on the CALIBRATE line near the bottom of the chart paper.This adjusts the speed of sound to 4800 feet per second. Set the chart paper speed to the desired feed rate:1,2,3 or 4 inches per minute. Turn the FEET switch to the range which brackets the approximate depth reading., .... i'00111 4-4 I NOTE ., The zer'o transmission mark appears only on the 0-55 foot range. 17.Advance the SENSITIVITY control slowly clockwise until the bottom echo appears.Continue advancing the control until there is no change in the depth indication.Read the upper edge of the recording for the proper depth reading. 4.3 ADDITIONAL CONTROLS The instructions in Section 4.2 outline the steps required to place the DE-719B in opera- ,....tion.The following controls may be used as required to further utilize the versatility built into this unit.- - 4.3.1 CHART SPEED There are four distinct chart paper speeds available;1,2,3 and 4 inches per minute. The higher the paper feed the greater the bottom detail. 4.3.2 FIX-MARK Switch This switch when pressed to the right will inscribe a mark on the chart paper for time and/or position reference.Annotations can be made adjacent to the fix mark by opening the hinged window in the front of the recorder.A guard prevents accidental contact with the rotating stylus and belt assembly. 4.3.3 TIDE and DRAFT Adjustment This adjustment permits the operator to advance or delay the transmitter pulse to compen- sate for tide and/or draft variations.The latitude of adjustment is from a minus 5 feet to plus 30 feet. 4.3.4 SPEED OF SOUND Compensation This control allows the operator to compensate for variations in the temperature and sa- linity content of the water.Adjustment of this control permits the accuracy of the re- corded depth reading to be calibrated to a lfcheck-bar"reading.A calibration marker, F"'"indicating the amount of compensation,is permanently recorded on the chart for future reference. ···O·Ol~"•'l.~ 4-5 -----~----_.-_.----- ..... 4.4 HOW TO INTERPRET RECORDINGS .- - -. - - """ A basic factor to be considered when interpreting bottom conditions is that a hard bottom will reflect an echo more strongly than a soft bottom.To obtain bottom readings.set the SENSITIVITY control to the minimum position that produces a good consistent record. A flat bottom composed of rock,sand or packed mud usually results in a fairly thin dark trace on the chart paper.This type of bottom creates multiple echoes in shallow water caused by the signal bouncing back and forth between the bottom and the surface.These echoes show as multiples of the actual depth which is always the shallowest reading.. A soft mud bottom produces a broad echo of light intensity.The broad echo is caused by the reflection of the transmitted signal from the top of the mud and the hard surface be- neath the mud.The thickness of the soft mud layer can often be determined by a split in .this type of echo. Another indication of the type of bottom is the the relative setting of the SENSITNITY control required to obtain recordings at various depths.The strongest echoes are gen- erally obtained from the air-water interface.Rock,sand,metal,wood,fish and plank- ton return echoes in a diminishing order of strength.The air-to-water transistion may occur when passing over your own or another vessels wake. During deep water soundings,the conical sound beam propagated from the transducer is reflected from a large area of the bottom resulting in a wide echo;whereas in shallow water the sound wave is reflected from a smaller area and produces a narrower echo. 4.5 OPERATOR.R.EPLACEMENTS 4.5.1 Chart PapE!r Removal Procedure (Figures 4-3,4-5) 1.Disconnect power from the equipment. 2.Releasle case latches and swing front cover down. 3.Rotate drive pulley (13)slowly counterclockwise to position recording stylus (8)off paper. 4.Rotate take-up knob (16)to wind chart paper onto the paper take-up roll (20).Guide paper by hand to avoid fouling. 5.Release quick-lock (1)and swing platen assembly (14)to the r:ight. 6.Grasp paper take-up roll (20)in left hand,lift up spring loaded paper take-up arm (17)with right hand to disengage upper end cap. 4-6 .- 7.Grasp paper take-up roll (20)in left hand.lift up spring loaded paper take-up arm (17)with right hand to disengage upper end cap. "'"8.Lift and tilt the1paper take-up roll (20)to disengage it from lower end cap (21).and remove the roll . .-4.5.2 Chart Paper Installation Procedure 1.Disconnect power from the equipment. Release quick-lock (1)and swing platen assembly (14)to the right. Rotate drive pulley (13)slowly counterclockwise to position recording stylus (8)off paper. Pull up knurled.spring-loaded paper supply knob (27).tilt paper supply roll shaft (215)away from the platen. Remove the empty chart paper spool from the paper supply roll shaft (26) and install it in position on paper take-up roll (20)by raising paper take- up arm (17).taking care to engage spool end slots with key projections on end caps (lH)and (21). 2. ~ 3. 4. -5. - 6.Hold paper retard spring (25)to one side and slide new roll of chart paper down over paper su~ply roll shaft (26).taking care to engage slotted end of chart paper spool with key projections on end cap (22).Release paper retard spring (25). 7.Tilt paper supply roll shaft (26)back to normal position.pull up paper supply knob (27)so it clears the frame.Release paper supply knob (27). making sure that it seats securely in its frame socket.Check position of paper retard spring (25)against paper supply roll. 8.Thread leading end of chart paper to the left around paper feed roller assembly (21:).under the stylus guide block (10). 9.Swing platen assembly (14)to the left to its normal position. 10.Draw the loose end of the chart paper across the platen assembly (14)to the live roller assembly (15). 11.Swing platen assembly (14)to the right to its open position while contin- uing to draw chart paper around live roller assembly (15),threading pa- per between frame and paper take-up roll. - 4-7 -I ! 12.Attach loose end of chart paper'to spool with the tape supplied with the new roll. 13.Rotate the take-up knob (16)to wind two or three layers of paper onto the paper take-up roll (20).guiding the paper by hand so it aligns properly. When all the slack is removed from the paper.it should lie flat and wrinkle- free on the platen assembly (14). 14.Swing the platen assembly (14)to the left and fasten the quick-lock (1). 15.Rotate the drive pulley (13)counterclockwise and check the recording stylus (8)for straight and smooth travel over the chart paper. 16.Raise the front cover up into the closed position and secure the latches. 17.Operate the equipment at maximum chart speed to check chart paper travel and stylus function. NEW CHART ROll - DRI'VE ROLL \ PAPER TAKE'UP ROLL Figure 4-3 Chart Paper Threading '.OU·~'1..4l ON.I I".1,.., 4-8 ~. - """ 4.5.3 Recording Stylus Removal Procedure (Figures 4-4 and 4-5) 1.Disconnect all power from the equipment. 2.Release the latches and lower the front .cover. 3.Rotate the drive pulley (13)slowly counterclockwise to position the record- ing'stylus (8)off the paper. 4.Remove stylus from holder by compressing the ends sufficiently to clear the holder hooks.Push down lightly to compress the sponge pad and permit dis- engagement from the center hooks. 4.5 .4 Recording Stylus Installation Procedure 1.Disconnect all power from the equipment. 2.Release latches and lower the front cover. 3.Rotate drive pulley (13)slowly counterclockwise to position recording stylus (8)off paper. 4.Engage center loop of.new stylus with center.hoo.k on stylus holder.The sponge pad must be depressed to permit insertion of the stylus ends into the end hooks. NOTE -Hooked end of stylus must be toward the guide. 5.Rotate drive pulley (13)counterclockwise to insure that one end of the stylus engages the trolley (11)Vee groove.and the other end maintains full contact with the guide rail and the chart paper throughout the full length of travel down the chart paper. 6.Raise the front cover up into the closed position and secure latches. 7.Restore power.turn the equipment on and allow to operate for approxi-. mately five minutes.or until the recording stylus (8)inscribes a smooth. straight line when the FIX MARK switch is actuated. 4.5.5 Stylus Belt Removal Procedure (Figures 4-4 and 4-5) 1.Disconnect all power from the equipment. 2.Release lat.ches and lower front cover. 3.Rotate drive pulley (13)slowly counterclockwise to position the stylus off the paper. 4-9 - Stylus Stylus Belt Assembly 5B620B-1 Guide fl,amp 7430-10B4P1 Rotate stylus belt assembly, by hand,in direction shown. Align stylus so that the "Loop" at top of stylus engages trolley in the center of ''V''groove. j Stylu, 7430-1069PI NOTE: Trolley Stylus Paper Travel "----"-----::;:~...:..-_-==- Rotate stylus belt assembly in a counterclockwise direction and insure that the stylus contacts edge of plastic guide throughout full length of travel. - ,... 1.When a new stylus is installed,operate the equipment on the Xl RANGE for approximately five minutes,or until the stylus draws a straight line when the FIX MARK switch is actuated.This "break-in" period is necessary to remove any burrs which might be present on the writing end of the stylus. 2.When a new stylus belt is installed,adjust the belt tension for optimum straight line recording.Install stylus and observe mark inscribed on chart pa per when FIX MARK is actuated.If mark fluctuates more than 1/16 inch from side to side.increase tension until "track"cea ses to fluctuate. Figure 4-4 Belt and Stylus Replacement .,&1 u··,1·~t''J,'U .li 4-10 , ~~1 ,- '"i , .".1 )W 'l~J~l~s~U··~....:'.'j;ii~'"''1'~\::~-,'\,L:'i~-"l?,i/;'-,";,.:~ ).....11 ·········3J p~"'<'jr',,.,'l.]1'"''i~J"i;'·1 \""".,,j,·,:·:,t j 1.""t',t J l'~~:~!l f"3 1 l;m~ I ,'""", ';cl:"~.-)"ljf~~X;.,. l !P- I ,I-' I-' I"~ -', o C" ~.-\. 00 28 !Qe.~ FRONT VIQ~' 14 , WHEN A NEW STYLUS BELT IS INSTALLED,ADJUST~NSION REGULATOR SPRING 4 FOR BEST STRAIGHT LINE ECOROING REAR VIEW :~t;:~;~·~':.:.~~_:~'":', I Quick Lac 373-7IBBPI II Trolley 7430-I068PI 22 End Cap 7430-1025PI 2 Tension Req Screw 7430-1067Pl 13 Drive Pulley 7430-1076G2 23 Paper Supply Roll 7430-1013PI 2 Self Lac-Nut 203-1011P47 14 Platen Any 7430-5013GI 24 Paper Feed Roller Any 7430-1 079G I 4 Reg Tension Spring 7275-1016PI 15 Live Roller Assy 7430-107BG2 25 Paper Retard Spring 7430-1062PI 5 Tension Arm 7430-1006Gl 16 Take Up Knob 231-7184PI 26 Paper Supply Shart 7430-1007P2 6 Stylus Guide Ramp 7430-1084Pl 17 Paper Take Up Arm 7430-1008PI 27 Paper Supply Knob 7430-1014PI 7 Idler Pulley 7430-1076G3 18 Platen 5B6090-2 28 Chart Millar 315-7228P2 B Recording Stylus 7430-1069PI 19 End Cap.Paper Take 7430-1026PI 29 Stylus Motor 315-7221PI 9 Stylus Bell Assy 586208-1 20 Paper Take Up Roll 7430-1007P4 10 Stylus Guide Block 586166-1 21 End Cap (Lower)7430-1026PI Figure 4-5 Platen Assembly J 1 ]1 ~I D )J 1 ..~I J i ] >l:>- I t-' t-:l -..•-oo ~ 1:'-.\ ~~" ...... L~ I I Sleeve Bearing 302-7183P17 10 Motor Pinion 7430-1029PI 2 Drive Gear Clutch 7430-1030PI II Drive Clutch Spring 7430-1037PI 3 End Cap·7430-1026PI 12 Clutch Hub 7430-1017PI 4 Friction Clutch Washer 7430-1020PI 13 Spring Pin 293-1022P237 5 Compression Spring 288-7187Pl 14 Live Roller Gear 7430-1028PI 6 Take-Up Drive Shaft 7430-1007P4 15 Drive Train Assy 7430-1036PI 7 Retaining Ring 362-7176P17 16 Live Roller Assy 7430-1078G2 8 Shim Washer 236-7174PB 17 Bearing Retainer 7430-1087PI 9 Idler Stud 7430-1016Pl Fig-ure 4-5A Platen Clutch Assembly ""-,~._~~~~~,_..,~j , •,~, i f .-, i, j --------- 4.Release tension on stylus belt assembly (9)by pressing down on spring- loaded tension arm (5)while slipping the belt off the idler and drive pulleys. 4.5.6 Stylus Belt Installation Procedure 1.Disconnect all power from the equipment. 2.Release latches and lower front cover. "... 3. .- 4. ~ 5. Depress the stylus belt tension arm (5)and loop the new belt assembly (9) over the idler pUlley (7)and drive pulley (13)so that the recording stylus (8)is in the position illustrated in Figure 4-4;Front View .. Rotate the drive pulley (13)counterclockwise by hand to check the belt for proper tracking around the pulley. Check for straight line recording at maximum chart speed"Adjust as re- quired. 6.Install a new stylus as described in Section 4.5.paragraph 4" .- 7.Restore power to the equipment,turn on and observe the mark inscribed on the chal"t paper when the FIX MARK switch is actuated.If the mark fluctuates from left to right,increase tension of regular spring (4)until the mark does not deviate . ..... 4.6 OPERATOR AnJUSTMENTS ,..,. 4.6.1 Calibration Marker Adjustment (Standard Chart Paper) The speed of the stylus drive motor can be varied by the operator to compensate for vari- ations in the speed of sound in water using a "check bar"or the calibration marks gener- ated within the DE-719B,as a reference. The fixed reference marks are generated by a stable time base circuit which produces two sharp pulses spaced lexactly 20.833 milliseconds apart.These pulses are electrically su- I"'"perimposed on the analog output to the recording stylus and will fall exactly 50 feet apart on the chart paper when the stylus drive motor speed is adjusted to the speed of sound in water of 4800 feet per second.The sharp line inscribed on the chart by the transmitted pulse is adjustable to the zero depth calibration on the chart by the CAL ZERO control and the line initiated by the second pulse will fall on the 50-foot chart "calibrate"line. 4-13 - r .... - - .... - For each one percent change in the speed of the stylus drive motor (from a base speed or 4800 feet/second)the calibrate mark will change position by one-half foot.For example. if the stylus drive motor speed was increased by two percent the calibrate mark would move from the 50-foot "calibrate"line to the 51-foot graduation.Conversely.if the motor speed was decreased by four percent the mark would move from the "calibrate"line to the 58-foot graduation. The "calibrate"line is also used to indicate the recording phase in use.The line is inter- mittently broken into a series of one.two.three or four short dashes to indicate the first.• second,third or fourth phase. Adjust as follows: 1.Be sure that the stylus drive motor speed is adjusted to 3350 RPM. 2.Adjust the CAL ZERO control until the calibrate zero line falls directly on the chart paper zero line. I NOTE I The direct transmission pulse can be moved off the zero line by the TIDE and DRAFT control while makeing the calibrate zero adjustment. 3.Adjust potentiometer R210 until the second calibrate pulse ,falls exactly on the chart paper "calibrate"line. I NOTE I Adjustment of the SPEED OF SOUND control,R30S,varies the position of the 50-foot calibration line by plus and minus three feet.The calibrate lines (at zero and SOreet)are not present when operating on the X2 range. 4.6.2 Calibration Marker Adjustment (Metric Paper) When your DE-719B is ordered from the factory with metric chart paper installed,the unit will be factory calibrated for metric scales. If your DE-719B is calibrated for use with the standard chart paper and it is desired to change to the metric chart paper,it will be necessary to re-calibrate the built-in marker calibrate circuit.This is necessary since the 50-foot calibration line does not agree with 4 14 .- .... - - an even number in meters and the actual calibration point for the metric paper has been set at 15 meters for ease in reading.The ratio between 50 feet and 15 meters is 0.9821 and the calibration marker adjustment (internal)must be changed by this amount. The adjustment procedure is as follows: 1.With the standard chart paper (feet)installed.adjust the SPEED OF SOUND control so that the calibration marker lines fall at exactly 0 and 50 feet on the chart paper. 2.Remove the plastic cover from the "Motor Control"printed circuit board and "adjust potentiometer R210,in the upper right hand corner,until the 50 foot calibrate line falls at 49.1 feet on the chart paper. 3.Remove thE~standard chart paper and install the metric chart paper.Make certain that the original 50-foot calibrate mark on the standard chart paper now falls at 15 meters on the metric chart paper. CAUTION DO NOT READJUST THE "SPEED OF SOUND"CONTROL DURING THIS OPERA TION . I NOTE r If metric paper (PIN 587630-1)will be used only occasionally it will not be necessary to recalibrate,merely bear in mind that the calibrate mark will fall at 15.27 meters instead of 15 for a speed of sound of 4800 feet per second. When the DE-719B is calibrated for metric operation the drive mo- tor speed will be 3290 RPM rather than the 3350 RPM called out in "the manual.In the X2 range the motor speed for metric operation will bE!1645 RPM rather than 1675 RPM as specified in the manual. GOi22 4-15 SECTION 5 INSTALLATION- 5.1 RECORDER Although the DE-71gB recorder is designed for portable use it may be installed perman- ently.The slotted key holes in the back of the case permit bulkhead mounting.The _battery input power cable (or AC power cable)and the transducer cable enter the case via the two holes in the back.The holes are of sufficient size to provide clearance for the power and transducer cable plugs. If desired,the recorder may be mounted at a 45 0 angle for easy viewing and operation. Installing the recorder with the right'side toward the bow of the vessel will make the recording naturally assume the correct correlation with the over-the-bottom travel of the vessel . .... 5.2 ·TRANSDUCER ....The type 200T5HAD transducer (furnished with the DE-71gB)may be installed temporar- ily as described in the Operation section or it may be permanently installed . ....5.2.1 Permanent Transducer Installation 1.Select a location which is close to the keel and will not be subject to turbu- lent water passing across the transducer face.The transducer must be completely immersed when the boat is underway;also the radiating surface must be as nearly parallel to the water line as possible. - 2.Leave sufficient space within the hull for tightening the nut on the trans- ducer stem and for routing the cable to the recorder. 3.Remove the screw and locknut from the side of the transducer sleeve (see Figure 5-2). 4.At the selected location bore a 1-1/16 inch hole through the blocks as shown. 5.The block outside the hull should be streamlined to conform to the shape of the transducer to reduce the possibility of water turbulence. 6.The filler block inside the hull must be thick eno\lgh so that the nut/washer does not seat against the top of the transducer sleeve before tightening -against the filler block. 5-1 - ..... , t Figure 5-1 7245 Outline -L ,-......:li.--.;.......__--...L I"~,,,.:.-¥;T -I-,.:..a I s ~ 1"4 7 rr,DIA,-.--.-------: - Figure 5-2 200T5HAD Outline TRAN~DuCr::R '=8~34-S-I ADAPTER 2.445-10,5".3 _"'OIA.--- •~. 4 L :c:o-y..--I--~~;~I'tE NUT .2.IS!;-IOIO", ",~ict'_~~•~a 207-71 "'~P45.3 -t. I 12 ~~ Ii-.-- j~_l.....----+-_ .lrnOMNECTOR PLUG 2.7"-70IlPI_:==n ~::-=------------ Ll."D,A.q.. "'" .... - 5-2 .- 7.Remove the plug from the cable;do not cut the cable. 8.Coat the inner and outer fairing blocks with a good quality seam filler or bedding compound. 9.Thread the cable through the hole in the'outer fairing block and the hole in the hull. 10.Insert the transducer stem up through the outer block and the hull . 11.Before launching the boat,wash the face of the transducer with a solution of liquid detergent and water. 5 .2.2 Cable Installation 1.Inside the vessel,thread the cable through the hole in the fairing block, canvas wash.~r (well coated with white lead)'.and the bronze nut/washer. 2.Place the above,in the order listed,over the protruding stem of the trans- ducer,and tighten nut/washer securely. 3.If the cable'end becomes wet with bilge water,wash with fresh water and dry thoroughly. 4.Route the tra.nsducer cable to the recorder location by the most direct path keeping the cable as far as possible from ignition wiring. 5.If the cable is too long,coil it and store it out of the way do not cut as this would impair operation. 6.Reinstall the plug. 5.3 115/230 VAC POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION The AC power supply is designed to mount on the main chassis below the platen assembly i as shown in Figure 5-3. ,~ To install: 1.Remove the plastic plug from the hole in the main chassis marked J303. 2.Mount the power supply chassis as shown in the photograph. 3.Connect the black lead to the bottom terminal on TB303. 5-3 - - ,- I - - - - 4.Connect the red lead to the second from the top terminal on TB303. 5.Connect the jumper straps on TB301 for 115 or 230 V AC depending on pow:" er source.The strapping diagram is shown on the back of the main chassis panel.(Ref.Figure 7-3.) 6.Connect the AC power to the connector J303. 7.The OFF/STANDBY ION switch on the front panel will control the application of power to the equipment. Figure 5-3 115/230 VAC Power Supply-Installed i'uOl26 5-4 .~ \ I, SECTION 6 THEORY OF OPERATION 6.1 TRANSMITTER The transmitter circuitry is basically a Master-Oscillator Power-Amplifier configuration __operating at a frequency of 208 kHz.Transistor Ql02 operates as a pulsed oscillator nor- mally in a cut-off state.When a positive-going signal is received at the base of Ql02 from the TIDE and DRAFT ADJUST circuit,it oscillates at the frequency determined by _the collector tuned circuit.The length of the pulse is determined by the build -up time of the RC network in the emitter of Ql02;this is approximately 200 microseconds in both the Xl and X2 modes of operation.The secondary of the oscillator transformer is coupled !""'"to the base of Ql03 which functions as a class flC"amplifier with the collector tuned to the oscillator frequency by the primary of Tl02 and the transducer capacity.Operating volt- age for the transmitter amplifier is furnished by the built-in inverter.The inverter con- !""'"sists of a 150 kHz oscillator the output of which is rectified and filtered and clamped to 40VDC by zener diode CRlOl.The inverter oscillator operates from the 12.6 VDC sup- ply voltage and is tuned to 150 kHz by ClO!,Cl02 and Ll02. 6.2 RECEIVER- The transmitted pulse and the returning echo pulses are coupled to the receiver by the secondary of transformer Tl02.The receiver consists of two transformer-coupled stages, Ql,O:~and Ql03,tuned to 208 kHz.A factory set internal gain control,R1l2,determines the maximum sensitivity of the receiver.The front panel SENSITIVITY control permits the operator to vary the receiver to the desired gain level.The output of the receiver is rectified and filtered to remove the 208 kHz component.The resultant DC pulses supply the collector of QI06,the stylus oscillator,which is Colpitts configuration tuned to ap- .-proximatley 22 kHz.The output from Tl05 is fed to QI07,an emitter follower,and in turn.,to Q30l the power amplifier.The output of Q30l is fed to the stylus by the step up cup core transformer T301. 6.3 MOTOR SPEED CONTROL The stylus drive motor is a series wound DC motor;the speed is variable and is control- led electronically as follows:Speed sensing coil L305,which is wound on a small per- -manent magnet,is positioned such that a toothed disc,mounted on the motor shaft,is in the magnetic field of the coil.When the motor shaft and toothed disc rotate,a frequency directly proportional to the speed of the motor is generated in L305.The voltage devel- -oped is fed to the base of Q207 where it is amplified and fed to a one-shot multivibrator, n-l i Ii :1 il'i t ~ i',t i'"il :1 iI-I i '{ ,~ ! ~ :1 t! I: II, ,I 'I 'l' ! 11 -'I 11 (i ~j 'I,q ,'I 'I "I!\; i /i I :1 !j II 'I!1 ilq "'I " 1; - - - Q208 and Q209.The multivibrator is triggered at a rate determined by the speed of the motor.Capacitor C217,in the base circuit of Q210,functions as an integrator;therefore the input to Q210 is a DC voltage which is inversely proportional to the speed of the motor (the voltage fed to the base of Q210 is maximum when the motor is stationary).Q210 com- pares the voltage on C217 with a zener voltage at CR207;when the output falls below the zener level Q210,Q211 and Q302 decrease conduction and maintain the motor at the pro- per speed.Zener diodes CR206 and CR208 limit the square wave signals from the multi- vibrator to the same amplitude irrespective of power supply variations.The voltage being compared is a result of frequency only,rather than of possible amplitude variations. Transistor Q302 and the drive motor are supplied power from an unregulated source which will vary with the ship f s power line variations.The drive motor circuitry is designed so that motor speed changes are slight regardless of farge line voltage excursions.Diode CR301.connected across the motor,prevents the voltage on"Q302 from rising too high when the transistor cuts off and opens the winding.The motor speed is governed in the same manner for both the Xl and X2 scales by merely changing the Rep Rate of the multi- vibrator with the Range Xl.X2 control 8302 and associated components.R305,the Speed of Sound control.permits the operator to vary the motor speed to compensate for varia- tions of the speed of sound in water of various density and temperatures. 6.4 CHART DRIVE MOTOR CIRCUITRY' The chart drive mechanism is advanced by a stepping motor at the rate of I,2,3 or 4 inches per minute;the speed is selected by the front panel control switch S304. The electronics circuitry supplying power to the stepping motor consists of the following: A unijunction transistor Q212 with a repetition rate determined by C221 and a resistor selected by S3 04.Four different repetition rates are necessary to produce the I,2,3, and 4 inch per minute paper feed.The repetition rates are factory set by adjustment of R241,R242,R243 and R244. The theory of operation of the drive motor circuitry is as follows:each time the unijunc- tion Q212 fires,a positive pulse is developed across R247 which controls a flip-flop cir- cuit consisting of transistors Q213 and Q214.The pulse cuts off whichever transistor is on and in turn biases the other transistor on.The positive square wave outputs from the collectors of the flip-flop transistors are coupled via emitter followers Q215 and Q216 to the base of the stepping motor transistors Q217 and Q218.This causes Q217 and Q218 to alternately turn on and supply power to the stepping motor.From the above explanation it can be readily seen tl1at with a faster unijunction rep.rate the stepping motor will turn faster. 6-2 6.!>TIDE AND DRAFT ADJUSTMENT CIRCUITRY .....The positive-going pulse from the keying pick-up coil (L30l-L304,depending on wh.ich phase is in use)is coupled to Ql08,amplified and fed to the base of Ql09 which is the first transistor of a single-shot multivibrator.This pulse is negative and cuts off Ql09.The length of time Ql09 is off and QUO is on is determined by the RC discharge time of Cl27,R135 and the setting of potnetiometer R303 (Tide and Draft adjustment). The output of the transistor QUO is differentiated and coupled to the base of Ql02, the 208 kHz transmitter oscillator,turning it on. __6.6 SPEED CHECK MARKER The Speed Check Marker circuitry,which operates only on the Xl mode,causes two fixed marks,20.833 milliseconds apart,to appear constantly on the chart paper.The first of these two marks is adjusted by the CAL ZERO control,R307,to appear on the zero line of the chart paper at all times;the second mark automatically appears on the CALIBRATE line near the bottom of the chart.The second mark (calibrated)will be interrupted periodically to indicate the phase on which the recording was made.For example,two interruptions with one solid mark indicates operation on phase 1 (0-55 ""'".feet);three interruptions with 2 solid marks indicates operation on phase 2;etc.The primary purpose of the Speed Check Marker is to indicate the speed of the stylus drive motor.Should the motor speed vary the operator will be alerted;for example,should .....the motor run too fast the second mark will be below the calibrate line,and conversely if the motor is running too slow the second mark will be above the calibrate line.The ."Speed of Sound IT control allows the operator to vary the motor speed in accordance with local operating conditions. The electronics circuitry for the Speed Check Marker operates as follows:Pickup coil !"""L30!is connected through a coupling capacitor C20l to the base of Q20l which amplifies the positive going pulse impressed across the pickup coil.The amplifier pulse (now negative)is coupled to the base of Q202,the first transistor of a single-shot multivibra-.... tor.turning it off.The length of time this stage remains off is determined by the RC discharge time of C205.R207 and R307.The output of Q203,the second transistor ....of the multivibrator,is differentiated and its positive going pulse is fed to the base of Q204 which in turn conducts and turns on the unijunction Q205.This disrupts the normal repetition rate of the unijunction circuitry,the normal rate being determined .....by C208,R211 and the Rep.Rate adjust potentiometer R2l0.It is this trigger pulse that appears on the zero line of the chart paper.The purpose of this multivibrator is to permit the operator to either advance or delay this trigger pulse with the front _panel control until it coincides with the zero line on the chart paper.After Q204 restarts the unijunction,it reverts back to its normal Rep.Rate.The initial pulse of this Rep. RatE~,which is factory set by R2l0.shows on the "calibrate"mark on the chart paper . .....Both the "zero"and "calibrate"marks are coupled to the Colpitts Oscillator in the receiver via Q206 the pulse amplifier . .....The interruptions in the "calibrate"mark (to indicate Phases 1,2,3 and 4)are obtained by mechanically grounding the base of Q206 through C225 and S303 to obtain the proper number of dashes which corresponds with the particular phase in use. 6-3 i~00129 .... SECTION 7 """MAINTENANCE 7.1 GENERAL ,.,..A routine maintenance schedule should be initiated to assure that your DE-719B equip- ment is kept in peak condition and ready for instant use.A program of regular mainten- ance can go far toward preventing major breakdowns and unnecssary downtime. The recorder interior should be protected from excessive moisture.The recorder is de- signed to withstand dampness,but severe drenchings could render it inoperative and -lead to costly repairs.Condensation of water vapor (due to lowering temperature when ;humidity is high)could cause malfunction;therefore.the equipment should be stored in a dry,well-ventilated location.- The unit should be checked periodically to be sure that all hardware is tight and the cab- inet (inside and outside)should be kept clean.Carbon dust will collect inside the re-i corder case as a result of the recording process.The recorder interior should be clean- ed with a soft brush and rag;the frequency of the cleaning operation will be largely de- termined by the amount of usage .- 7.2 LUBRICATION.... The DE-719B is constructed with oUite and ball-type bearings which are designed to pro- ,...vide many hours of trouble-free operation.The bearings are pre-lubricated at the fac- tory and will not require further lubrication for the life of the bearing.The drive gears are-nylon,therefore do not require lub-rication.All hinges and hasps should be period- I'-icalJly lubricated with a light oil to prevent seizure,especially when the equipment is used around salt water. -7.3 INTERNAL CONTROLS (FACTORY SET) ,...The following controls are preset at the factory and should not be readjusted without the proper test equipment. .- Control R112,Internal gain R2l0,Marker circuit R227,Scale X2 speed adj. Function Sets receiver g"ain to 40-microvolt maximum Sets rep.rate of unijunction Q205 Trim potentiometer,sets stylus motor speed on scale Xl ."'~:l.r.·i"~."tt. -."..!~~I...-iI I~ Control R241,Paper feed adj. R242,Paper feed adj .. Function Sets rep.rate of unijunction Q212 to feed chart paper at 1"per minute Sets rep.rate of unijunction Q212 to feed chart paper at 2"per minute - R243,Paper·feed adj. R244,Paper feed adj. 7 .4 ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 7 .4.1 Equipment Required 1.Calibrated oscilloscope Sets rep.rate of unijunction Q212 to feed chart paper at 3"per minute Sets rep.rate of unijunction Q212 to feed chart paper at 4"per minute 2.Signal generator capable of covering from 190 to 220 kHz with 10 ohms output impedance. 3.Accurate Strobotac 4.200T5HAD transducer (to be the same transducer which will be used with the DE-71gB)• 'J .4.2 Stylus Drive Motor Speed Adjustment The recording mechanism is designed for operation with a drive motor speed of 3350 RPM to coincide with the calibration for the speed of sound in water of 4800 feet per second _when operating in the Xl (normal)mode.In the X2 mode the motor speed is reduced to 1675 RPM.The exact motor speed can be determined by an aCCUl'ate Strobotac or an elec- tronic frequency counter connected to measure the frequency generated by the "tone .....wheel"mounted on the motor shaft.(The number of teeth has been selected to provide a direct RPM count,) -To adjust:. 1.Set the RANGE Xl,X2 switch (S302)to the Xl mode.- 2.Set the SPEED OF SOUND control (R305)to midposition . .- 7-2 - ·-----~----~~.........~c..____"""..-'_"'"""..\.....""""';;""''''''-,'m ...."'.~ 3.Using an accurate Strobotac set the stylus drive motor speed to 3350 RPM (±15)by carefully adjusting R229. 4.Set the RANGE Xl.X2 switch to the X2 mode and adjust R227 until the motor speed is 1675 RPM ±15.Return RANGE switch to the Xl position. NOTE I An accurate strobe reading can be obtained by triggering a frequency counter from the Strobotac. 7.4.3 Calibration Marker Adjustment 1.,Be sure that the stylus drive motor speed has been adjusted to 3350 RPM. 2..Adjust the CAL ZERO control (R307)until the calibrate zero line falls directly on the chart paper zero line. I NOTE I The direct transmission pulse can be moved off the zero line by the TIDE and DRAFT control while making the calibrate zero adjustment. - 3. 4. Adjust R210 until the second calibrate pulse falls exactly on the 50-foot line on the chart paper. I NOTE) Adjustment of the SPEED OF SOUND control,R305,will vary the position of the 50-foot calibrate line by plus and minus three feet. The calibrate lines (at zero and 50 feet)will not be present when operating on the X2 range. _-=-==-.-_"=."..~---c.::::.=.':c:=::-:::::'::::::::::::::.:-....~.__ - - ..... ..... 7 .4.4 Tide and Draft Adjustment 1.While operating on the Xl range,adjust the TIDE and DRAFT control until the mark inscribed by the direct transmission falls on zero. 2.Switch to the RANGE X2 mode and adjust R304 until the direct transmission mark is on the zero line on the chart paper.(Do not alter position of TIDE and DRAFT control while making the above adjustment. 7.4.5 Chart Paper Advance Adjustments The chart paper drive mechanism is driven by a stepping motor whose armature advances 15 0 each time a pulse is alter.nately applied to the two field coils.A gear reduction of 45:1 is built into the motor and an external gear reduction of 3.11:1-is incorporated be- tween the drive motor and the chart paper drive roller.The square wave pulses which drive the stepping motor are generated by controlling a flip-flop circuit (Q218 and Q214) from a unijunction (Q212)time base circuit.The time constant of the unijunction is con- trolled by the four position CHART SPEED switch (S304).A separate trim-pot for each of the four speeds is provided for close adjustment.The output of the flip-flop is followed by two stages of push-pull amplification to drive the stepping motor. To adjust the trim-pots proceed as follows: 1.Connect a calibrated scope to pins X and N of the motor control printed cir- cuit board and observe square wave pulses of approximately 12 volts ampli- tude with transient leading edge reaching above 20 volts.Set the CHART SPEED switch (S304)to the one inch per minute position.Adjust R241 for a pulse length of 53.6 milliseconds ±3%. 2.Set the CHART SPEED switch to the 2 inches per minute position.Adjust R242 for a pulse length of 26.8 milliseconds ±3%. 3.Set the CHART SPEED switch to the 3 inches per minute positionL Adjust R243 for a pulse length of 17.87 milliseconds ±3%. 4..Set the CHART SPEED switch to the 4 inches per minute position.Adjust R244 for a pulse length of 13.4.milliseconds ±3%. [NOTE I The vertical timing lines on the chart paper are one inch apart . 7-4 ,I I I •I I I I I I I 8 ~ I j' .." - 7.4.6 Transceiver PC Board Adjustments The transceiver is tuned,at the factory,to match the particular 200T5HAD transducer p;m.t furnished with the equipment.If the transducer or a transceiver component is replaced. a slight retuning of the transmitter and/or receiver section may be required.Proceed as follows:- -1.Place the transducer in the water and plug it into the equipment.Connect the oscilloscope across the transducer terminals and turn the equipment on Observe the direct transmission (transmitted pulse)and the first echo return. 2.The DC voltage across the transducer should be 40 volts ±10%. 3.Adjust the tuning slug in T101 for maximum first echo return.The trans- mission pulse should be at least 80 volts peak-to-peak and 100 to 200 micro- seconds in length. 4.To tune the receiver;suspend the transducer in air two feet from a hard flat surface.Connect the oscilloscope between the secondary of T104 and ground.Set the gain control to maximum and tune T103 and.TI04 for the maximum number of multiple echoes.If feed-through from the 40-volt in- verter is present,tune L102 until minimum feed-throug.h js seen. 5.Connect the signal generator in series with the cold transducer lead (gen- erator hot lead to transducer and generator ground to DE-719B ground). Set the signal generator output level to 100 microvolts,50%modulated,tune generator for maximum receiver response.Maximum should fall at 208 kHz ±7%. ·6 "Reduce the signal generator output to 40 microvolts.adjust the internal gain trim-pot,R1l2,until the receiver output level results in a medium gray re- cording on the chart with the CHART SPEED set at 1 inch per minute and the RANGE switch set on the Xl mode. _7.4,,7 Notes -1.Actuating the FIX MARK switch should cause a straight,dark fix-mark line on the chart paper.The line should be straight within 1/32 inch .Note that when a new stylus is installed,it may take several minutes of "run-in"be- fore a straight fix-mark line is obtained. 2.The life expectancy of a new stylus is approximately 40 hours when operated in the Xl mode.Double this life should be expected when operating in the X2·mode. '-'."'.('..13 /;~.-U \)'-± 7-5 .- - ,.". - -------- Figure 7-1.Transceiver PC Board 7-6 .....* .' I I I -- q)o N U I -R217- -C210- -R216- -R215- )0206 ~! +-C202-N-Co)N If d) ~*(,) -C208---R211-R210 -R213-;.0204 '±-C220- -R212---I'...... -R209.,..0205 II -R254-~R21o-"*-'CR20,..-C207--R256--CR211- -R208-~0 ."Q 1'0 Jo"O -C205-l,.216,..215 ~217 ....218 -A20S--R207--R259-o -R253--R252- 0202)203)I I.I -r-:.to No 0 C"'l _0214 IllNlll Nlll NN N N ~-R249-lf~lf"'l -A 24S-10213 -R233- -R255-R241 R242 R243 R244 -e204- -R204-0 ) +-R201-201 ::1~:-R203-u -e203--C221- -R21S--R202--R246--R247- - + "-R205-C201 0212&.,010 -C224- -R245- ,... N Na:: en N Na:: -R239- -R240- -C218-+ -CR20S'"*'-R224- 'CR20a-"*,J 0211 -R23B- -R234- -R235- -R237..... C214 - + -R236- C~.F+J 0210 -CR201* -R231- I J,-R226- g ~1111 I -R22S- ~a::~-R 232- I Y*N N .**-r.r tr (02098~0 -R22!:;- N N 20S .'"a:a::~TR 201uc.;• .-R222- -G213-0 "'t I I ~ C219 +207 JJ M ~ +NN-R220-N N a:: -C211-';NI If I -R221-u * ...-cR20~ .- .... .... Figure 7-2.Motor Control PC Board -- - 7-7 .}~~~~ ,--:,.:~J• - - - \';~;;"'i't".fB~wm1:&f~~~';:'';:~if:$~~"",:-~:;:'';tmffl._·'"rmu"-....., Figure 7-3.Chassis Plate -Rear View 7-8 How It works FOCUS Step 1.Pick an object the distance to which you want to measure.Examples:tre~,bush,rock,window frame,fence post,building corner,roof corner or peak or sign.You may use any distinct object as the target. Step 2.Look at the object through the viewfinder. The object will appear as a double image.Focus eyepiece until what you see is sharp.(Note: Focusing the eyepiece will not bring the double image together.) Step 3.Hold unit steady and turn tape-knob until a single sharp image of the object is observed. (Note:If you do not observe a double image olthe object check to be sure that your fingers are not obstructing either front window.) Step 4.Read distance at the red.line on the tape indicator.You have now measured the distance from the front of unit to the object. I This unit may need adjustment before you I can expect It to give accurate readings. If you find your first readings to be Inaccurate,refer to page 4 for "adjustment Instructions." .bPERlTINd INS"RUC-fIONS~ Ranging 600,610 &620 n ~N~I~~ A padded vinyl carrying case Is available for $11.95.The model number is 33·600.If your dealer Is out of stOCk,send your check or money order to RANGING INC.,90 North linCOln Road, East Rochester,New York 14445,and the case will be delivered to you promptly. Ranging producls are warranledlo Ihe original purchaser for two years from Ihe dale 01 purchase.Any producl deleclive in material or workmanship Will be repaired or replaced.withoul charge.when returned with the shipping charges paid 10 RANGING INC..Service Deparlmenl.90 Lincoln Road Norlh.~ast Rochester,New York'4445. Excepllon,end Exclu,lon" To Ihe extenllhat any or alf 0/Ihe /olfowing exclusions are prohibiled by the lawai any slale or municipality and cannol be pre·ernpled.Ihey shalf nOI be applicable. L There are no warranties covering consequential damages.incidental damages.and incidenlai expenses.including injury 10 properly. 2.There are no olher warranlies except as set out above and the implied warranties are Ilmiled in dura/ion 10 Ihal of Ihe express warranties. 3.This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have olher righls Ihal vary Irom slale to slale. ~J I i IMPORTANT:To obtain optimum accuracy with your unit,please follow these suggestions: 1.In making readings,always come fiOm the lower end of the read-out scale up to the distance you are measuring.In other words,if you are measuring a distance known to be approxi- mately 150.make sure that you are moving the tape from a lower reading such as 150, up to the 170 reading.Never take readings by moving the tape from a higher reading to a lower one. 2.Select a conspicuous target which has good contrast. 3.Do not take readings through glass windows or doors. 4.You must spend some time training your eye to recognize when the images are in perfect coincidence.With practice your readings will become very accurate. Product Warranty (Limited) RANGING INC. Measuring Systems 90 Lincoln Road North East Rochester,New York 14445 n i FIGURE 7 111 FIGURE 6 FIGURE 8 1 your unit.If it reads correctly,the unit will perform distance measurements at all distances within its capability,accurately.If,for instance, the distance is 120 and the unit reads 135, an adjustment will be necessary.DO NOT ADJUST THE UNIT UNNECESSARILY. If you must adjust the unit,follow lhese steps: 1.Note that the tape-knob has two sections in it. 2.Grasp the smaller section and hold it firmly. (Fig.7) 3.Grasp the larger section and separate it slightly from the smaller section and turn it until the proper footage reading appears opposite the red-line on the tape indicator.(Fig ..8) Final adjustment may be necessary. If the red line indicator does not line up perfectly with the correct distance,push down on the read-out window and slide it sideways until the red line is over the correct distance. (Fig.9) 4.Make the measurement again to check the .accuracy of the reading and make any final adjustments necessary using the same steps (1 through 3). J, 3o J J 5 6 1 1 I I 1 )j i I i I j ,i )-1 o A LENGTH OF BUILDING !I STAY CLOSE TO CORNER Distance to peak (158 minus 67 =91) Measure side of building or house to get length of roof. Building Dimension-Stand ciose to one corner of the building.Look at the other corner in the viewfinder.Turn knob until single image of corner is seen. Distance indicated is the dimension for that side of structure.Note:error slightly increases as you move away from the corner of the building.For best measurements.stay as close to the building as possible. Adjustments What to do if the two images seen in the viewfinder are not on the same plane 1.To adjust,place a small screwdriver in the access hole on the bottom of the unit marked-ADJ. 2.Hold the unit to your eye.Keep it perfectly level and look through the viewfinder at an object.Turn the screw until you bring both images of the object into line.(Fig.6) What to do If the distance r.edlngs are wrong Distance measurements are made from the front of the unit to the object.Although your unit has been calibraied at the factory,you will probably want to check to be sure that it is measuring accurately.To accomplish this,pick an object at 'a known distance.Something from 100 to 150 away is ideal.Carefully measure the distance with See oaoe 7. ----"~- A DISTANCE ON TAPE B DISTANCE FROM WALL TO TAPE MEASURE (ONE FOOT OR 30.5 OM.) A PLUS B EaUALS WALL TO WALL DIMENSION A DISTANCE TO PEAK B DISTANCE TO CORNER A MINUS B EQUALS WIDTH OF ROOF Room Sizes-if possible,stand at door jamb to make these measurements.When this is not possible,stand against the wall opposite a promi- nent target on the other wall.Place the back of your head against the wall and measure across the room. Add one foot or 30.5 em.to the reading you get,as the unit wHI be located this distance from the wall as you are making the measurement.Move to another wall and take the other dimension in the same manner. Root S'jzes-Stand at a corner of the roof and move away from the building so that the roof corner and peak are roughly in the same plane of vision. Measure distance to the peak.Measure distance to the corner.Subtract to obtain the proper dimension.Example:Measurement to peak of roof minus measurement to corner =width. 1 46.5y. 1 85.5' 1 48.5m. ~')\ <;~ TBi II 1 39.5'1. ~ ,, 38 1JQ,4~~0 I 36m. j 71.5' 1 31m. A DISTANCE ON TAPE INDICATOR B YOUR HEIGHT C A PLUS B EQUALS C HEIGHT OF OVERHEAD WIRE Reading the tape You have now learned the technique of measuring with a rangefinder.A littie practice and you'ii . make accurate measurements,quickly,easily,safely, with a minimum of effort.Apart from the obvious advantage of requiring only one operator,measure- ments are made on line of sight and are not affected by tape sag,obstructions.or undulations in terrain. The tape read-out employs a computer plotted system.Read-out characters change as distance increases.Here are examples of the tape read-out: Heights-Stand beneath the object the height of which you want to measure.Make measurements by sighting up at the object and turning tape-knob. Read the distance on the tape indicator.Now add your height to the distance indicated. Methods of measuring 610 1 (YARDSl 32y. 620 (METERSl 600 1 (FEET)63' - ~ ) I "" ,.."" lB Subtracts from statistical data in storage registers R"G through R"5 using·numbers in X- and V-registers. CLEAR w Clears statistical storage registers (Roo through R"5). [EJ Accumulates statistical data in storage registers R"G through R"5 using numbers in X-and V-registers. Mathematical @ Computes square root of number in displayed X-register. o Computes square of number in displayed X-register. (Y!J Computes reciprocal of number in displayed . X-register. S w Computes means (averages)of x and y values accumulated using [EJ. o Computes standard deviations of x and y values accumulated using [EJ. Statistical @J Computes area under the standard normal distribution curve to the left of x. ~Computes x, given the area under the standard normal distribution curve to the left of x. IIJ Linear estimate. Computes esti- mated value of y for a given value of x. m Linear estimate. Computes esti· mated value of x for a given value of y. Iill Linear r~ression.Com- putes v-intercept and slope for linear function approxi- mated by x and y values accumulated using@.The value of the y- intercept is placed in the X-register;the value of the slope is placed in the V-register. CD Correlation coefficient.Com- putes "goodness of fit"between the x and y values accumulated using [EJ and the linear function which they approximate.Fold Out HP-32E .Advanced Scientific Calculator - - - '';;--.' 0 \)""-,.1-)'0'"_J/,-,i ..... -.-'...---~--'..--'....:._-.'l Contents The HP-32E Advanced Scientific Calculator . i·~r.·:.~~ .~-, -J r 0Ff'1llD0N - I 2,3 I.f 5.6 1-32 I.;",I ~All REG r: Cal':j'II e m .... ..... R.,QLJ R ••CR:] R.,~ R.o~ R.leE] R'2 QiCJ Storage Registers R,c=J R,c=J R,c:=J R,c:J R.c::=J R,c=J R,c:J R,c:J R.t:=l ..'"SIN cos TAN8dB3~~ fB~8EH _$tNH cos,",TANH fHE.9b98d LN lOG ',;,y ~Q3Hd~ fiX SCI ENG!Seee. l-;,:;:LR j }:- IBElBIBe m T c=:J z c=J V c==J Displayed X c=J LAST X c:::=J Automatic Memory Stack ~E 3 ~Advanced Scientific Calculator 4 Idex :4 Itures of the HP-32E 7 k 7 Display 7 ,egisters ,..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . ...8 Functions . •• . . . . . . •. . . . . . . • . . . •. •. . •. . . . . ...8 rlations .......................................•...•8 I and Correcting Data 11 ...................................•.......•.......12 d Deviation . . . . . . . . . . ...14 ~egression 16 :stimation .........•.....................•.........19 iori Coefficient 20 Distribution 20 ...................................................24 ISum 25 ifference :..................................26 ~Functions .•.•...........•...•••.•. . . • . • . • . • .•.•.27 thmetic ...................•.......•...............28 ,:Sen ice and Maintenance 31 :;Error Conditiolls 41 2 ..". ~ ~J 'W:d .... -' J ......-k'!!;"'';'"'kitl"?..-Wfrt *{,rIw .ti.~-',~.h ) \) J J L.--. J 1 OFF~ON Power switch. [IJ Pressed before function key.selects gold function printed above key. rn Pressed before function key.selects blue function printed on lower face of key. CLEAR I PAfFIX I Cancels the follow- ing keystrokes or sequences of key- strokes when pressed after them: CD.rn,I]§J, @].1]§J8, CillJ8.1]§J0. 1]§J8.1mJ0. []@G,[]@08. ImJG8, @Q]08. []@G8.[@. [§J,~. Digit Entry [Q]through m Digit keys.. 8 Decimal point. IEmBIt ,Enters a copy of number dis- played in X-register into V-register. Used to separate numbers. @BI)Changes sign of mantissa or exponent in displayed X·register. J11FunctionIndex !!ill Enter exponent.Digits keyed in immedi- ately following this key comprise the exponent. Display Control @ Fixed point display.Followed by a digit key.speci- fies fixed point notation display. ~Scientific display.Followed by a digit key.speci- fies scientific notation display. [@ Engineering display.Followed by a digit key,speci- fies engineering notation display. ,..ANT'Mantissa. Temporarily dis- .plays all 10 digits of the mantissa of the number in the X-register. Number ManIpulation @IJ Exchanges contents of X·and V-registers. Ili!l Rolls down contents of stack for Viewing in displayed X-register. 4 1 1 IlliJ Clears con- tents of displayed X-register. CLEAR@i]Clears contents of stack registers (X,V,Z. and 1).LAST X register,and all storage registers (R o through Re•and R.o through R.s). Storage @[l Store.Fol- lowed by a digit key o through 8 or by a decimal point and a digit key 0 through 5. stores displayed number in specified storage register. Also used to perform storage register arithmetic. @]Recall.Fol- lowed by a digit key 0 through 8 or by a decimal point and a digit key 0 through 5. recalls value from specified storage register into the displayed X-register. CLEAR lE®Clears contents of storage registers Ro through Re. ILSl xl Recalls number displayed before previous operation back into displayed X-register. i-' I 1 StatistIcal @)Computes area under the standard normal distribution curve to the left 01 x. @l Computes x. given the are.a under the standard normal distribution curve to the left of x. CD Linear estimate. Computes esti- mated value of y for a given value of x. m Linear estimate. Computes esti· mated value of x for a given value of y. G.:D Linear regression.Com- putes y-intercept and slope tor linear function approxi- mated by x and y values accumulated using (EJ.The value of the y. intercept is placed in the X·register;the value of the slope is placed in the V-register. o Correlation coefficient.Com- putes "goodness of fit"between the x and y values accumUlated using (0 and the linear function which they approximate. i 11 CD Computes means (averages)of x and y values accumulated using (0. o Computes standard deviations of x and y values accumulated using (E. @ Accumulates •statistical data in storage registers R.o through R.s using numbers in X-and V-registers. (EJ Subtracts from statistical data in storage registers R.o through R.s using numbers in X· and V-registers. CLEAR 8J Clears statistical storage registers (R.o through R ••). Mathematical @ Computes square root of number in displayed X-register. o Computes square of number in displayed X-registe,. lliJ Computes reciprocal of number in displayed X-register. 5 il o Places value of pi (3.141592654) into X-register. GJ Factorial. Computes n'(n-1) ...3·2·1.where n is number in X-register. 0,8.0.8 Arithmetic operations. Trigonometric [§J@@~ Computes sine, cosine,or tangent of number in displayed X-register. ~lcos-'111'N''i Computes arc sine. arc cosine.or arc tangent of number in displayed X-register. @QJ Sets radians mode for argument of trigonometric functions. ~Sets grads mode for argument .of trigonometric functions. ~Sets decimal degrees mode for argument of trigono- metric functions. '~i!D Converts decimal degrees to radians. )j .- --z..),\DOO "_~~_'_"'."':~"""'''---''''''''''''''''~''''''''''',A'''''''';'''''''''''''''''''''''~_~iT"6'-·(~i·6::%i:i·Af~~ I.OEGI Converts ~Computes I.mm I Converts radians to decimal natural logarithm inches to degrees.(base e,millimeters. 2.718281828)of §Converts I•HMS I Converts number in displayed degrees Celsius to decimal hours or X-register.degrees Fahrenheit. degrees to hours,[EJ Natural anti- minutes,seconds or logarithm.Raises ~Converts degrees,minutes,e (2.718281828)to degrees Fahren- seconds.power of number in heit to degrees BJ Converts hours displayed X-register.Celsius. minutes,seconds or ~Computes I·,bm I Converts degrees,minutes,common logarithm kilograms to pounds seconds to decimal (base 10)of number (mass). hours or degrees.in displayed X-register.~Converts ,-Hyperbolic CE:}Common anti-pounds (mass)to logarithm.Raises kilograms. [j;fr'iiIJ ICOSH I ITANH I 10 to power of Computes hyper-number in displayed ~Converts bolic sine,hyper-X-register.liters to gallons bolic cosine,or (U.S.). hyperbolic tangent Polar/Rectangular G!!0 Convertsofnumberindis-Conversion played X·register.EB Converts gallons (U.S.)to rectangular (x,y)liters. I SINW'II cosw1 11 TANW1 I coordinates in X- Computes inverse and Y-registers to Percentage hyperbolic sine,in-polar (r,(/)rID Computes x .-...."...~.....• .~.:#verse hyperbolic coordinates.percent of y. cosine,or inverse -~Cotlvertshyperbolictangent ~Computes .of number in dis-polar (r,(/)coordi-percent difference played X-register.nates in X-and between number in Y -registers to rec-Y-register and tangular (x,y)number in Logarithmic and coordinates.X-register. Exponential (EI Raises number Metric Conversion LID Computes in Y-register to ~Converts percent that x is of power of number in millimeters to the number (~x)in displayed X-register.inches.storage register R.,. 6 "..",. .,.,; ~ ~ - ~ -'1- c) ()ri, 'j ..........-e V J--......'~.)IIiIIIM J_'''''''~'~::'''@'fref?rfi1'j''''2t(r,6nn''-l':H""'ldl i "'1 r j Solving Problems With Your Hewlett-Packard Calculator ALL REG SlKlI!!eB @:ife@ It's the "key"to solving problems with ease and confidence:It's part of the RPN logic system in your new Hewlett-Packard calculator.A logic system so amazing in its simplicity and power that,once you've tried it,you'll never be content with any other system . This book describes the Hewlett-Packard RPN logic system.If you're new to HP calculators,taking the time to read it thoroughly will be the second best investment you've made (the first was purchasing your new HP calculator).Even if you already own another HP calculator,you may find some new features you're not familiar with. If you're like most people who buy a new calculator,you can't wait to get started using it.We don't blame you.In fact,that's just what we want you to do.That's why we wrote this book.It's not very long and, when you've worked your way through it with your new calculator, you'll be well on your way to being an RPN expert like other HP owners.And,you'll wonder why anybody makes a scientific calculator without an IENTERt'key.We wonder too. So,turn the page and get started. 5 1 ,i ~llrJ..~".2~~.,..Q .......::');;2~Zt·:,~:.·-H-:'_~\::i·.",-~_~_~':':,'I ...:t·"t~'·~·I··':·:I;·~···-'~-,n;<W.Mn,rrf'·rrrrid;l"f'''1;rl t n trt ~, , J]-71").) Getting Started '] problems,it tells us where the problem is,so we can fix it as quickly and inexpensively as possible and return it to you without deiay. -J-;:~l--j'.,j~,J Section 1 Getting Started I~1~J Power On To begin working with your HP calculator,set the power switch to ON. If your calculator has a PRGMIIlIlJRUH switch,set it to RUN. Note:Using the sali check may cause memory and the regis- ters to be cleared.depending on which calculator model you have. Example:Key in 10912.45 (the depth in meters reached by the Bathyscaphe Trieste in the Marianas Trench on January 23,1960.) Keying In Numbers Key in a number by pressing the digits in sequence,as though you Were .writing on paper.A decimal point must be keyed in if it is part of the number. Operating Power . Your Hewlett.,Packard calculator is shipped fully assembled,including a battery pack.You can run the calculator on battery power alone,or you can connect the bauery recharger and use the calculator while the battery is charging.If you want to use the calculator on battery power only, charge the battery first (refer to Battery Charging in your owner's handbook).Whether you operate from baueries or from the recharger, the battery pack must be in the calculator. Keystrokes 10912.45 Display 10,912.45 Self Check Routine Your new Hewlett-Packard calculator is loaded with features that help you operate it with ease and confidence.The self check routine,a feature found on many sophisticated electronic instruments and computers,was designed for just this reason.We don't expect you to ever have a problem with your calculator,but if you think that it isn't operating properly,try this: (') (j o---'"'.-e.:Keystrokes I sio II ENTER .1 Display -8,8,8,8,8,8,8,8,8,8, The resulting number 10,912.45 is seen in the display.Notice that commas arc automatically inserted for you.Answers can be read quickly and easily.with less chance for error. Negative Numbers To key in a negative number,key in the digits.then press ICHS)(change sign).The number,preceded by a minus (-)sign,will appear in the display. Example:Change the sign of the number now in the display: You can change the signs of negative or positive numbers in the display. Change the sign of -10,912.45 now in the display. The display shown above will appear if the self check determines that your calculator is operating properly.Press any key to clear the display. If the display shows Error 9,the self check routine has determined that your calculator is not operating properly.You should then send it in for service (refer to Shipping Instructions in your owner's handbook).Pres- sing any key will replace the Error 9 in the display with a number that tells a Hewlett-Packard service engineer which circuit in the calculator is at fault.That's right.The calculator not only tells you it's having 6 Keystrokes . ICHsl Keystrokes ICHsl Display -10,912.45 Display 10,912.45 ~ ., .~; .~.,;.-"...."'--~.'''1 It n 'liter]r itt ,,(J!'.r;i6~;I"'W(hiifT7Jn'~1brtn'rhrrintrwIii..'.'.tt t K..'I '...."....."'.....··1-'·~]-1 ..]"j 8 Getting Started Getting Started 9 Clearing One-Number Functions ~) Some keystroke sequences in this handbook require the use ofprefix keys to make them applicable to your calculator.Check your calculator keyboard for proper execution sequences. Any number that is in the display can be cleared by pressing ICLX) (clear X).This key erases the displayed number and replaces it with zero. Keystrokes Display ICLXI 0.0000 If a mistake is made while keying in a number,press ICLXI to clear the entire number.Then key in the correct number. Note:The number shown in the display is always desig- nated by x on the function key. Functions Keyboard Most keys on the keyboard perform two or more functions.One function is indicated by the symbol on the flat face of the key.another by the symbol on the slanted key face,and a third by the symbol wriuen above the key on the calculator case. To select the function printed on the flat face of the key.press the key. To select the function printed above the key.first press the prefix key OJ,then press the function key. To select the function printed on the slanted face of the key.first press the prefix key ®'then press the function key. Try these other one-number function problems: Remember:First key in the number,then press the function key. Key in X-number, Press function key for answer. Use the ~key. Use the @ key. Use the ILOG I key. Display 8. 0.1250 Display 0.0286 59.1608 1.2149 Example:Calculate 1/8 • One-number functions are functions that require only one number present in order for an operation to be performed.such as (liJ,ILOG)• or []![J. To execute one-number functions: I.Key in the number.• 2.Press the function key (or press the applicable prefix key,then the function key). To use the one-number function llil (reciprocal)key.key in the X- number then press 00. Keystrokes 1/35 V3500 log 16.40291" Two-Number Functions Two-number functions are functions that must have two numbers present in order for an operation to be performed.The m'G .0.and ill keys are examples of two-number function keys. Keystrokes 8 llil To select the function printed in gold above the key,1irst press the gold prefix key CD,then press the function key. To select the function printed on the flat face of the key,press the key. To select the function printed in blue on the slanted face of the key,first press the blue prefix key [[)then press the function key. LOG~· ~:-.-. ~ r') ----..s::: ~ ','.'. ,;: -.1J!ltl l!!u/,t..r-"Xf'-.-",C','__'"e,riwtttW[lrltllf lrTnrtr t r?fpl1S1mfrirtemttllltiltwNi{I'?'it n !to'··$it $.:r isJ1.1 ,"]1 1)'-]"1 -1 10 Getting Started Getting Started 11 1 J ] Two-number functions work the same way as one·number functions- operations are performed only when the function key is pressed.There- fore,both numbers must be in the calculator before the function key is pressed. To place two numbers into the calculator and perform an operation: I.Key in the first number. 2.Press (ENTERt'to separate the first number from the second. 3.Key in the second number. 4.Press the,function key to perform the operation. All arithmetic functions are performed the same way: The 0 key is also a two-number operation.Used to raise a number to a power.it works in the same simple way as every other two-number function key: I.Key in the first number (y). 2.Press IENTERt'to separate the first number from the second. 3.Key in the second number (power). 4.Perform the.operation (if applicable,press the prefix key,then 0). When working with any function key (including ~),remember,the number shown in the display is always designated by x on the function key on the calculator. Example:Calculate 78 • Try the following problems using the (l:)key.Keep the simple rules for two-number functions in mind. You work through the problem the same way with your calculator-one operation at a time.Solve for the intermediate result first... 3,375.0000 5,184,0000 24.5153 387,420,489.0 Intermediate result. Display 13. 13.0000 2. 15.0000 (13 +2) (15 to the third power) (72 squared) (601 to the 5/10 power) (3 to the 18 th power) ...and then solve for the final answer.The intermediate result is automat· ically stored inside the calculator when you key in the next number.To continue ... ...then you would multiply this intermediate result by 5. /5 ~2)x 5 =75 Chain Calculations The simplicity and power of the Hewlett-Packard RPN logic system becomes very apparent during chain calcUlations.Even during extremely long calculations,you still perform only one operation at a time.The automatic memory stack stores up to four intermediate results until you need them,then inserts them into the calculation.Thus,working through a problem is as natural as if you were working it out with pencil and paper-except the calculator takes care of the hard part. Example:Solve (13 +2)X 5. If working the problem with pencil and paper,you would first calculate the intermediate result of (13 +2)... ,5 ~2)x 5 = 15 3 .722 .601,5 31B .Keystrokes 13 (ENTERt) 2 (B Display 15.000 11.0000 26.0000 6.5000 8 is designated by X. The answer. Keystrokes 13 (ENTERt)2 m 13 (ENTERt'2 G 13 IENTER t,20 13 tENTERt'2 G Display 7. 7.0000 8. 5,764,801.000 To perform 13 +2 13 -2 13 X 2 13 +2 Keystrokes 7 IENTER t , 8 ~ ) ) ) -~...... l ~ :,,,'.•'.."'.:$ift~"li.lar Tn tr,wtf 'j".,f . . •PO 1':'to 'tt toM"$'1 $''~,1 I ,'".,r,,t!!L_~~.,_,pc1).-)11 1 Pt c.'>.•,,,-••"""1 '"j ,',..'j 1 I 12 Getting Started Getting Started 13 1 1 } Try these problems.Notice that you have to press leNTER.1 to separate numbers only when they are being keyed in one immediately after the other.A calculated result and a new number are automatically separated. Keystrokes 5 o Display 5. 75.0000 Intermediate result from preceding operation is automatically stored when you key in this number. Pressing the function key gives you the final answer. Even more complicated problems are solved in the same ~imple manner-using automatic storage of intermediate results. Example:Solve (3 +4)X (5 +6). Solving with pencil and paper,you would: /(3 +4)x (5 +6) First calculate for the result}1 t{ of these parentheses......then for these parentheses... ...and then you would mUltiply the two intermediate answers together. Then multiply the intermediate answers together for the final answer: The problem is solved the same way using your calculator. First add 3 and 4: Then add 5 and 6: Since another pair of numbers must be keyed in,one immediately after the other,before you can perform a function,you must use the IENTER_I key again to separate the first number from the second,There is no need to press (ENTER.)before you key in the 5.The intermediate result is stored automatically. Display 77.0000 Display 7.0000 Display 11.0000 Keystrokes o Procedure (7)x (I I) Keystrokes 3 (ENTER.,40 Keystrokes 5 IENTER',60 The two intermediate results are multiplied together. Notice that your calculator automatically stored the intermediate answers and brought them out when it was time to multiply.You didn't have to write down or key in the immediate answers from inside the parentheses before you multiplied. Keystrokes Display 2 2. IENTER.I 2.0000 4 4. 0-6.0000 12 12. G 0.5000 18 18. IENTER.I 18.0000 6 6. 8 12.0000 3 3. 0 36.0000 13 13. IENTER.I 13.0000 6 6. 0 19.0000 4 4. 0 23.0000 5 5. 8 18.0000 8 8. G 2.2500 13 +6 +4 - 5 8 (2 +4) 12 (18 -6)x 3 Solve: ('- )n () '-.1 r'- J hl::,]j-J ,.. Now,continue on through the book to learn more about your calculator and the power of RPN. Remember,the jENTERt'key is used only for separating the frrst number from the second in any operation requiring the entry oftwo numbers.The calculator knows that after it completes a calculation,any new digits keyed in are part of a new number. Now that you've done some calculating,you can begin to fully appre- ciate the benefits of the Hewlett-Packard logic system. Here are just a few of the benefits of RPN: ______~__"......-_~_.-----~--:r-~----~- ""'" ..... .....< ~ .... ~ -' .... ~ - -.. oj ~ ,~.-";' Getting Started You neve~JuNe toWbft wiihJforttiU.i~\i;~eiunctionata time.: Your liP calculator cuts problems down to size instead of making them more colDPlex..'.' Intermediateresults,,-o.ppear as they are calculated. Pressing a /unction'/cey executes that junction immediately so each step can be checked as you go. Intermediate results are handled automatically.There is no need to .write down long intermediate answers when working on a problem. You calculate in the same 'order as you do with pencil and Paper. Thinking the problem through ahead of time'is unnecessary. • • • • ., 14 ", ~.' .~..,:~:.;..',~--:~..; .:..".:', """ -.rJ Fmo%\ «<t@) I ::J U Z--«~~ If) ~0::: W0::::z W ~;-.-:-",::.--I~w $ ~:-.J 0 .-Z-/:~""'" I J B)I-'L---.J-I..............~...,tl_J-"~--J ~.CUi ']j ) !\)ot~ Your new Minolta Weathermatic-A is the ideal do-anything,go-anywhere photographic traveling companion.It is just as at home in a backpack on top of a mountain or skiing down one as it is a't the beach or around the pool. Its rugged watertight construction and 110 format conveniences,such as drop'in cartn;dge film loading,built-in electronic flash,and compact size makes taking quality photos simple and easy in even the most adverse conditions. Please read this manual carefully all the way through and follow the simple instructions .for the best results and longest service with your camera,Then keep it for later reference as needed. IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS When using your camera,the specific cautionary notices in the owner's manual should always be observed and complied with,as well as basic pre- cautions,including the following: 1.Head and understand all instructions. 2.Close supervision is necessary when the camera is usep by or near children.Do not leave the camera unqttended while in use. ",, :. .1-.._L...:J-""L-1_L-1--'-J-W--.,....'--~,>"'1-1-'--,-r-J--- )I J ,) "'r) l--~11-"""; i 2 3.Do not operate the camera if it has been diopped or damaged -until it has been examined by an authorized Minolta service facility. 4.To protect against electrical shock hazards,do not immerse the camera in water or other liquids while the camera's back cover is open.~Iso do not open the back cover while in or und~r the water,or while the camera is wet. 5.To reduce the risk of electric shock,do not disassemble this camera,but take it to an author- ized Minolta service facility when some service or repair work is required.Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the camera is sub- sequently used. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS " 3 NAMES OF PARTS ••••••••••••••••6 SUMMARY OF OPERATION •••••••.8 PREPARATION AND BASiCS •..•••10 Opening and closing the back cover ••.•••••••••.••••10 Install ing the battery •••,.........13 Checking the battery ,•..••,•.••,.14 Loading and advancing film •...,..,15 Viewfinder.:,.,•••••••,••••,••••18 Focusing ••"..•,.••"".••••••19 TAKING PICTURES (WITH EXISTING LIGHT).,••,•••,•••",•••••.••22 FLASH PICTURES •••••••••,••,••24 UNLOADING THE FILM ,••,•••,.,25 USING YOUR WEATHERMATIC·A IN VARIOUS WEATHER CON· DITIONS AND PICTURE TAKING SITUATIONS 26 CONTENTS jj On or near the water ,26 5 At the beach 27 In rain,mist or fog , .28 In snow and cold weather 29 TAKING PICTURES UNDERWATER.30 F oousing 30 Tips for taking pictures underwater ..31 ACCESSORIES ••••.•••••••••.•,.31 Sportsfinder ••..••.•.,......•.,.31 MAINTENANCE OF O·RING .,.••.•32 TECHNICAL DETAILS,••••••.••••33 TROUBLE·SHOOTING GUIDE .,•••••35 CARE AND STORAGE,•••••••••••••37 -1ji1 I.",",) ('Ii (~o--\) \'l ~ -I~j~-:e---1-1-r-!-,.--1'.,tt·tl._',.-r wi -'-~i-'-J 1 I 1 ~)~J C)oo--U') \l'J 6 NAMES OF PARTS Shutter release Focus knob Sportsiinder alignment index ____Viewfinder _Light sensor ~Exposure/function control knob I.Lens-cover glass BUilt-in flash Back-cover release knob [L.----Back-cover release tab Film·advance lever ____Strap eyelets Flash.range table Film-data window Film-chamber cover Battery-chamber cover Flash-monitor lamp " 7 .._~__.._."""..;."'i'rn'Afan,r",${HeWitt'L_~_____~....'--_ ]J 1 i I I J J.t -1 J J I »1 1 i SUMMARY OF OPERATION 8 The steps pictured on this page outline use of your Weathermatic-A in normal "on-land" conditions.They give a general idea of how very easy it is to get properly exposed pictures with this camera and are keyed to corresponding sections of this manual far ready reference. This brief guide may also be useful as a quick refresher for good results after you have not 9 used your camera for some time.It is not,however,a substitute for the detailed instructions in the rest of this manual,Which should be thoroughly studied for best results. .4 6.Look through eyepiece and compose sub- ject in viewfinder (p.181.Depress shut- ter release slightly;if red lamp in finder lights at .:,:sun symbol,turn control to L:b cloud symbol.If it lights at cloud symbol,turn to m flash symbol and take picture with in flash range when lamp begins to pulsa.te (Po 241.Always squeeze shutter release smoothly . •~.'-,.?~ 4.Operate film advance lever repe<ttedly until first exposure locks in place and the lever will not move (p.161. 5.Check and/or clean lens cover glass and set focus for your subject (p.191. ,~,~v~~~Jl"J,;;;~"-'-:r?~:":.~~---,-' ... -...": 3.After installing and checking battery (P.13);insert film cartridge 'p.15).and press back cover securely in to place and lock it (P.121. ......"VL',~"'#' I j .it . •k-~.~iI!,..•-. ..!., 1 •~.../' • I ' •f,~ I .//.- .-....i~-, 1.Make sure camera is completely clean and dry. 2.Lift back-eover release tabs,twist back- cover release knobs and open back cover (P.101. 18 0) \,;~ .--C i111~I : i >:fftt'; ,it d=.·----=..==========================_r--')j j Ji f )I I)ills)I PREPARATION AND BASICS 1Q Opening and closing the back cover IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER USE OF THIS CAMERA The back cover of your Weathermatic-A is equipped with an O-ring that forms a watenight seal when the cover is properly fitted to the camera body.This enables the camera to be used under conditions (such as rain,snow,and in or underwater!where use of conventional cameras is either not recom- mended or impossible. IT IS OF ·UTMOST IMPORTANCE TO ALWAYS BE SURE YOUR WEATHER- MATIC-A IS COMPLETELY CLEAN AND DRY BEFORE OPENING THE BACK COVER.ALSO THAT THE BACK COVER'S O-RING IS CLEAN AND IN GOOD CONDITION BEFORE THE BACK COVER IS CLOSED.BY DOING THIS YOU WILL OBTAIN THE FULL SERVICE LIFE INTENDED FOR THIS SEAL. Opening the back cover: 1.Hold the camera with the back cover facing you and lift the bac k-eover re- lease tabs on both bac k-cover release rf~.....;~.-:."... knobs.Then tvrn the back-cover relaase knobs counterclockwise in the direction of the \lrrolllls until the back cover opens. 2.Lift the back cover allllay from the camera body.You can let the back cover hang from the back-cover connector strap or remove it·completely for clean- ing by disengaging the strap from the pin on the back cover. NOTE Be sure never to crease or tllllist the con- nector strap. ONCE THE BACK COVER IS OPEN THE CAMERA IS NO LONGER WATERTIGHT AND MAYBE DAM· AGED IF WATER OR SAND ENTERS THE CAMERA.: _...--~~fiiIF .1.- ~:;;;;.:;;..;.. 11 C).") ..3 IG)~.\ I ,I J .I !]Ii b Ji'S._~.....)..1-.J-.--J-'r-J I ]1 12 Closing the back cover 1.Make sure that the inside lip of the camera body and back cover's O·ring are clean and wiped by a soft clean cloth and that the back.cover release knobs are at "OPEN".Then align the back cover with the camera body. 2.Press both ends of the back cover with your thumbs as shown.Then,with the palm of your hand,press down on the center of the cover to assure a proper seal. 13 NOTE The battery can be installed or replaced at any time without damage to loaded film. 2.Insert a battery as specified with the plus end out as indicated inside the chamber, then close and latch the cover. •l'i ~Ir~f"''''''jf.",) I nstalling the battery Your camera's built-in flash and expo- sure warning system are powered by one 1.5v AA.(penlig~tl s~ze alkaline·manganese (Eveready E91 or equivalent),sealed carbon· zinc or nickel·ca9mlum battery_ To install this: 1.With the back cover open,lift the battery·chamber cover as shown, , 3.Turn the back-cover release knobs in the direction of the arrows all the way to "CLOSE"and push the back-cover reo lease tab's locking pins into the holes in the knobs. NOTE Be iUie the back cover is attached to the connector strap before closing. \/< l~".);.;..;'~-A.~;.,,;,•• '.-'~:._, .'".'f'~-)'i \~. t!lo",., --:. "'J~ ") /'1 ~ -'j-J-'il-.-;•1-I-)-j--',..j-...'J~J »-I.-j-1-j-1--",--j--) 15 2.Insert the film cartridge into the camera 3.Close the film·chamber cover and push in on it until it cI icks shut. ~.,'J;"'.~....@:::s:a Loading and advancing film 1.With the back cover open.lift the tab near the find~r eyepiece as shown to open the film'crhamber cover. _~'.a/.'_•. ;:D sure Ii fresh battery is properly inserted or replace an exhausted battery as soon as it is convenient.To save battery power.be sure to turn the exposure/function control knob to either the sun or cloud symbol after checking the battery. •For taking pictures without battery.see the note on page 23. i 4 Checking the battery The battery should be checked immedi· ately after install ing and from time to time thereafter.especially before starting on trips or taking especially important pictures.To do this.turn on the built-in flash by moving the exposure/function control knob to the (flash)symbol.If the finder/monitor lamp lights and begins 'to pulsate in approximately 10 seconds,the battery is serviceable.If these signals do not light within 30 seconds make :) --<-) J It •6st*·rl t t#,_ 1 "J "~J "1 ~""'--l~'~-'-"--1 -1 ''L.,r J j J 1 J 1 1 5.Use your right thumb to operate the film advance lever repeatedly until it locks (about three full strokes).A series of l's should be visible in the film data window to indicate the first exposure. 17 •When used in cold weather or if the camera is not used for a long period of time,the winding lever may not return all the way when the film is advanced.If this happens,push the lever back to its rest position with your thumb. •If the film advance lever should stop before winding is complete and there is still unexposed film in the cartridge, push the lever with your thumb until it moves all the way to its advance stop. This wiil free the mechanism and return to operation. •If a series of diagonal lines or the film's black paper backing appears in the film- data window while advancing the film, do not wind any farther as the film cartridge will be difficult to remove. •The shutter release cannot be depressed unless the film advance has been opera- ted until it locks. •Film speed settings are automatically adjusted when a film cartridge is loaded. However use of high speed films under extremely bright conditions such as beach or snow scenes is not re- commended. •Load and unload film in subdued light, never in direct sunlight. ~....I ~ ,"-'-....-~..;.,_:....;_""""o·,<_""~;_·;_·_,;,,,....~.·~::;:.•."t.';~~'.;~i ...';'~,\;,:il":...;_.,,,~ 4.Close and latch the camera's water·tight back cover as described on page 12. ~.~-.-.....-';~.."..'"...:":......-.-.~,....--..-\"'\~'... --.---='!.'"}ti:!ii."'"j;;it·l~?'..,-.•....~._----_._"'----\. • ~,J,.~,(.~ 0') ~ - r'n A 1 cG ].•1 1-)--1 --)-]-J-;--j !l -11 l __~__)_1 __~~1_ TESiT-, .UTO a II) .uroD ON. OFF. Fig./Abb.6 nST..., AUToe II) AUTOD ON. OFf. Fig./Abb.7 Fig./Abb.S TEST..., AUTO 0 II) .UTOD ON. OfF. ,.-'''::,, Fig./Abb.3Fig./Abb.2 :.. Fig./Abb.4 Fig./Abb.l ;) :) ~ -,--.. ) ~ J'!J I~~;<·' De"M"ftI'l//~__~.__J _"~).j 1 ....j .)~c-- 1 »1 ~?t~~~~r.;i:t¥?~?i~%-;~~~i-~?t~$~$?i~.z.:~~~~~~~?1~~:~~~~*~~~;j;t}~l?~~:Si%~~~~i~~z::?.zf.~~t~·€£i~~~:~$~;~~!?,~~J.?.{.~~~;~?*~~~~:&t~Z«;~~~~~~$~~::~~~%~??$~:~Z:~~~;~;~~:$,~~~~:~;"i~%~~~~~~:j~$~~~t~~~~~::~~%%;:~:;~::~:i~:~::J~· ... ".... ,.... ..... ...... ...... ....'. ...... ........ ..... lWeisung 7 bis 24. ,". ;for Use: ,to 8 In~lusive. S •.•.•.•.••.•. pIal es 9 jusqu'a 16 Inc/us. /'1,150: "ut:re Ua pag.33 a pag.40. de USa: ,las 25 hasta 32 Incl. }1.~~~~~i~~:?:;!~~;:;:J~I.~~$~~;7.~~~:~~~%@~~:[~~~:~~:}Z~7$~~~$~~~~$~~~~~~Z~?~~~z:i~~~:~$~~~:~:~~~~:~:~~~:~:g%~?,~~~i~.• . • •.• • ••+ ••• •• ~';'~'~~ Before taking pictures 1.Pre,autions for use (1)Apply a thin layer of grease to the a·rings of the synchro connector and ba~tery ,ompartment cover be· fore use.- (2)Do not deta,h the flash unit's wn,hro connector from the camera underwater.This unit is constructed so that it is made completely waterproof only when mounted on the camera.If detached,you may not be able to use both the camera and the flash unit's synchro connector again. (3)This unit has an watertight structure designed to withstand water pressures at depths of 60 meters.Do not use it at any greater depths.. (4)After use,wash the flash unit still attao;;hed to the camera in fresh water and then allow to dry.After dry· ing,separate the flash unit from the camera. (5)Apply a thin layer of grease for storage to the a·rings of the locations where mounting/demounting opera- tions are relatively frequent (battery compartment cover,synchroconnector).This is also to safeguard against damage. 2.When opening the battery compartment after use (1)Handle this unit with perfectly dry hands.Take care that no water leaking from the arms of your under· water suit falls onto the unit.(21 Wipe away all the water around the battery compartment cover.. (3 The inside electrical circuit parts do not take kindly to drops of water and so if any are allowed inside the battery compartment,remove them immediately with a dry cloth. (4)Check that the O·ring has not been marked and no foreign matter has adhered to it.Otherwise complete waterproofness cannot be guaranteed. (5)Apply just the right amount of grease to the O-ring. ~~{~7Qi~;~~~~~~7~~;i$;i.1~;Z:~~~~~i~;z$~g~~:~~~~¥'t~~~{~~~.t~~~f.}Z~f~~1 , ) !.-- ) ) J;. .....,, ...... 1 i-.·E-j---i-··J ..j .i....-J-.....:v /.....~.1··1 ..j11...._._-"".-t ~»] lash the unit in fresh water,keeping it attached to the camera for this operation.(I)aries (Ig.2) .1I0w the unit to dry.(Do not bring the unit into direct contact with flames or heat for drying.)Tht~l~atbtery compartment cover (1)can be removed by rotating the knob to th I f ( :emove all the connection parts.un I It ~comes loose.e e t counterclock ,pply grease to the D-rings and then store.{~l ~emdofve th(e ~overand then take out the inside battery clampoaourSize"AA"batteries into h • . . .eplacement period and method for D-rings (Fig.1)4 Dnce the batteries ha~e been coveredt be ~~tterY compartment as indicated inside. be of grea~e for the O-rin.gs,an O-ring for the synchro connector and O-rIng for the battery compartment \.knob to 'hll right (clockwise)until it wit gOe nCoa::;~t'hreeplace the battery compartment cover and rot at r are supplied as accessories..r. e are for replacement since the O-rings are liable to become marked or develop cracks with frequent Caution nting and demounting.Align the polarities of the batteries . eplace,firit remove the marked or cracked O-ring from the battery compartment cover apply a thin .properly.Improper alignment can result in a malfunction . .of grease to the accessor·y O-ring and then mount it onto the battery compartment cover.'*Hints on using the batteries lther handling precautions flJ Between taking pictures and after use remember t e .~e sure to replace the D-ring if it has become marked.2 Repla~e the batteries with fresh unit~if the ne f 5 t the SWItCh,to OFF. he capacitor discharges completely when the flash unit is not used for a long period of time.This is why the SWitch was set to ON.on amp does not light even after 30 seconds from the :takes time for charging when you first use the unit.Use the $ame type of battery for all four unit d Ihen you do not intend to use the unit for a long period of time,remember to recharge the battery about (3)Remove~the batteries from the unit when it tan t :;~ke sure t.hat they are all new . .nce a month and emit flashers.This will keep the capacitor in peak working order.which may cause a malfunction.5 no elOg used In order to safeguard against battery lea :) -, l ~ j '1-'l-1-'-")-..--.-,--.:-=--~1-..._ ..'/~LL_J 1 I y j E ~:.~:~::~:{/:~1.~~;:.}~£~~~~~t%1:t.;~f~~~~:~~:~~~;~~~:;;~~~~~~~:~~~{::~~f.W.f~$~:;~it~t.W:'~~~;:i~i~~~¥~~z~?:~~~~;'':f.~~i~~~{£fI.~~~~~~%~~~;~~~?f.~i~t%~~"i~~~~~:j~:$,f~~;~~rJ.~§.~~;~~~~i?~:Z$~~~f,~f(:~i£~ift.~~?¥i~~~~(i~:t1'f:~~%~i{?~~$lZ~~~~~~:%~~:~~~~Wjj,f;!iit#JmT··t-§}k:?i~$;;t~t~~17i~7.Wiii~~"!~t;tt)i§';iIff~%t}~*.~;;f.~W~\;t:~f;}'%;t'Z:;ft$%'i;;;~$W~~fii~'?M~i~ii:;~%;$'&~Wg~;g;:~A>~;,;;;,g;';g;{;;?f ;%"•••:i;'"",'..,. a Ing pictures ring to take pictures ,1.Auto mode operation (fig.5) unting flash unit onto camera (Fig.3)I'th bracket anchoring ring (3)and the ring's When using this flash unit in the auto mode,the f-number can be set to one of two values in line withmounttheflashunitandbracket(2).together,a Ign e objective in mind (camera to sUbject distance,depth of field). ave (4)and then tighten with the anchOring knob (5(~.)the bracket (1)Set the switch (11)to AUTO a or AUTO a in line with the objective in mind. l camera is then secured using the camera set screw on •If you are using an ASA 100 film,the f.number is: unt the synchro connector (7)onto the camerha.. . g groove and secure by tightening up the knob !fll at AUTO nJetheautosensor(8)into the bracket's anc onng rIO.f4 at AUTO a camera;the only other thing that has to be done is focus ~n using the Nikonos IV-A,set the shutter dial to 10M"(mechanica/l/90th sec.).If the camera allows Ichro contact selection,set the contact to "X"and then set the shutter speed to the value designated the flash unit.(For details,check the camera's operating instructions.) ,n n mind that the flash unit properly mounted on the camera yields both synchronization and a water- ;onstruction.and that improper mounting may result in a malfunction which may render the camera lit unusable. Jto sensor must be pointed in the direction of the subject. Ijusting the flash direction (Fig.4) lash unit allows the flash direction to be varied just as preferred. e unit's flash section moves to the front or back when the flash rotary knob (10)is rotated counter· Ickwise.Once the flash direction has been set,rotate the knob clockwise to secure it. e flash position can be varied just as preferred using the bracket anchoring knob. ~htjng is easily provided when taking pictures in a vertical position jf the bracket is removed with the (;horing ring and the flash section is mounted at the bottom of the bracket. lUnt the auto sensor onto the anchoring groove on the top of the bracket with the flash section already Junted at the bottom of the;bracket. 100 11 --:.~-•••__..U.J <1I1U .:.;)m (1.6 and 8 ft)onla;d-f~r'AlJTOD. between 1 and 7 m (3.3 and 23 ft)on land for AUTOQ. 200 16 5.6 400 22 8 Q};;';;';';;§}~\;/{.X{;i1;~ii:;::~~Ml~~;;ti;l.i#Mi';jt~r#~~,~;::t,wr;;'%~';~f${t?4 &'f.Kf;};%fi%WJ~b};0.iW$i§;~%~t.,W'Ml%$*Jr~.;*i:~;iit~%J1.*%%f{~f~t~Mj$.·W~~1$~:;WfJ..~f~?%'hi¥I~}Wlft%Wiit~t3~f,~t~t$~$M~i(1i??$:§!?;%Wi.?;3$\t~~rtytt;;~.%i 5("'",J ') ,j rJ I J 1 I J .Il1o.--......h-_•..I. cCl)<J ! /-"--","="=="""="-'-0 J 1 J J Auto: On land:28 (ASA 100 ml.46 (ASA 25 ft) AUTO [j:Approx.0.5 to 2.5 m (1.6 to 8 ft)on land AUTO 0:Approx.l to 7 m (3.3 to 23 h)on land 4 (size"AA "I alkaline dry batteries 4 (size"AA"N ;-Cd dry batteries (Unicad TN·3U batteries) Auto:Apprqx.0.5 to 7 sec.with alkaline dry batteries 'Approx.0,5 to 4 sec.with Unicad batteries Manual:Approx.7 sec.with alkaline dry batteries Approx.4 sec.with Unicad batteries Approx.130 to 900 with alkaline dry batteries Approx.40 to 300 with Unicad batteries Manual:Approx.130 with alkaline dry batterie'S Approx.40 with unicad batteries 35 mm lens coverage with 35 mm camera Same as sunlight Flash section:93 x 140 mm Auto sensor:50 x 34 mm Approx.1,200 g (main unit only) O-ring for battery compartment cover,O-ring for synchro connector,grease f(O.rings Power requirements: Recycling time Number of flashes Light distribution Light quality Dimensions Weight AccessorIes Optimum f·number =Guide number+Camera distance the switch to the ON (manual)mark Guide number ting the exposure Coverage range lending on the transparency of the water and the conditions affecting the subject,the exposeure will y even though the light source emits a constant amount of light. :following formula can be used to calculate the f-number from the quide number on condition that transparency is good: (2/3 ·1/2)Guide number/Camera distance =f·number netimes the optimum exposure cannot be calculated from this formUla,in which case the exposure 'ditions should be changed and the desired pictures taken. ,guide number for taking pictures on land is 28 (ASA 100 m)and so use this to determine the opti- m exposure. t method (Fig.7) e ready to test the flash as soon as you set the switch to TEST after the neon lamp (12),that indicates :teries are sufficiently charged,lights.This test is conducted at the AUTO 0 position.If the switch is the TEST position after the test flash,AUTO 0 operation results. :)ther test flash,return the switch to AUTO 0 and then set it again to TEST. )is no flash with the unit mounted on the camera,short the synchro connector using a piece of metal. ;h results,there is nothing wrong with the flash unit. ~is a flash at "open flash,"but none at the synchro connector,either the synchro cord has a discon- ,1 or the camera is malfunctioning.To remedy this,either replace the synchro cord or have the camera d, ",\) ~ .....(: -" wi....... J ~.)--.)~ ~_·_··_·"""l ==--i J I f!: .-1o---, ~ ~~;{.~~~~~~:J.~i:~::?~%~~~4~~;?i;~~~~tz:zJ;i*?'~~~~?1~Z?~$~~~~~?~~~{~1*¥i,~%~?{~~{~~%t:~$$:;%t;~1t$W:~~~4~%?ti~$.@~~;*}jJ}tm~tJ~g~ft.)~2~~i:&'t~1~~f.~ft?'~~*:.~~tlit:g~b~t4~.~~~~~~~i~~~f~.;g?J$~N1~~tl Recycling time,number of flashes The recycling time is defined as the time required for the neon lamp to light next after continuous flash- ing for 30 seconds using new batteries.The number of flashes is defined as the number of flashes emitted until the recycling time reaches 30 seconds. ..In the auto mode,the recycling time and number of flashers vary depending on the carner\!distance • ..The coverage range varies in water depending on the water's transparency,its quality and the effect of ob- jects floating in the water. ::f~?:;;::_:~;~~i.:~;;~:;·@tr.:·t%::::~::i;~£:~~~M%~~~%~::?Z~~~f~~~~~?~1:~~*~;~~:}.~ifN:'%?,j{~~~;%~~~:~:%~~1~~~~~li.~::~*~?~~t~~~~8 ~~~~?i.~?$.~~~;:~j;~1:~~tr.41}~~~~~~t'i~~~~m:i.f,U~;'~~$ft~3.?j?~:q&~~W,Hil~~ "~I - 1"" I .... I· 1 I J J J j I I I j I )J J t REPARATION VORBEREITUNG reparation Preparaqibn 6.,Insert the film leader. 6.Fillll;lrd:ln~cinf;id"ln. 6.Introduire I'amorce du fill 6.Insert""I ~uia d"Ia l'di':l .1'.. 5.Load the film cartridge. 5.Filmpatronc cinsctzcn. 5.Charger Ie film. 5.Inscnc la pclkula. 4.Open the camera back. 4.Kamcrariickwand fiffncn. 4.Ouvrir Ie dos de I'appareil, 4.Abra la tapa posterior. 3.Check the batteries. 3.Battericn kon trolliercn. 3.ContrOler les piles. 3.Compruebe la carga dc las pilas. 1.5V LR44 ~alkaline.manganese: A761 or SR44 !silver o,ide:EPX· 16 or equivalen II )(2 2.Insert batteries. 2.Batterien einsetzen. 2.Introduire les piles. 2.Inser'te las pilas. Jncap the battery chamber. latceriefachdeckel Mfnen. luvrir Ie compartiment a piles. \bra el cornpanimento dc pilas. i;>T , " J 1 j 1 1 'I 1 I J ::ngage film on sprocket teeth. Nalzenziihne in Filmperforation ,ingreifen. ::ngager les perforations du film. Engrane las per foradones de la ,lei icula en los dienles. I,) ~r~ Tighten the film. Film straff ziehen. Tendre Ie film. Tense bien la pelicula. Close the camera back. KamerarOckwand schlieBen. Refermer Ie dos de I'appareil. Cierre la tapa posterior. 10. 10. 10. 10. .. Open the Dust Barrier fully. StaubschulZ voll Mfncn. Duvrir a fond Ie protecteur. Abra por complclO la barrera. 0'ip;.;::=Z:---- 11.Press the shutter button and ad· vance the film until "1"appears. 1 J.Blindau fnahl1lcn machcn.bis "I" illl Bildziihlwerk crschcinl. 11.Armer et declencher jusqu'a ce que Ie "1"apparaisse. I J.Halla lomas cn blanco hasta quc cI '11"sc Yea. ~"""'~"---'."-.'....'.'-.··T····._.·~S'lll ~.-.Iii'£). ~~;_...·:c .::--' ~}:::'->:-:~:;~'".-=- 12.Sel lhe ASA film speed. 12.ASA.FilmclIll'fill(lIichkc stcllclI. 12.Afficher la sensibilile AS 12.Ajustc la scnsibilid'ld AS n~~~o...,:7 11 \OJ '-' IiI1.~1]t]1IJ]I ......u __..lo.-t t st,.'t _111"_ 4.Close the Dun Barrier. 4.Staubschutz schlief3en. 4.Fermer Ie protecteur. 4.Cicrrc 13 bancra contra cl 'w 2.Hold the camera steady and light. ly press the shutter release. 2.Kamera ruhig halten und Aus- loser weich bctiitigen.3.Wind the film. 2.Tenir fermement I'appareil et J.Film weiterschalten. appuyez sur Ie declencheur.3.Bobiner Ie film. 2.Sostcnga la camara y oprima Ie-~3~.%1~~iioib~inl'>~I~a~~~~~~vCll1cnte el baton disparador.[; NAPSHOTS SCHNAPPSCHUSSE stantanes Las instantiineas )pen the Dust Barrier fully. ;taubschutz vall Mfncn. )uvrir iI fond Ie protecteur. \bra pOI'completo la barrera. 1i:';;;;S5W)s~@~;.'':'·{iF.t::w g C'./--51 -J 1 1 1 J j --~l ]1 1 »)1 J 2.Rewind the film. ress the rewind release button.2.Film zuriickspulen. driicken.2.Rebobiner Ie film. 2.Rebobine la pelicula. liiJJiM .i.Lm~i,dtuilC~k\AaLM:tM"I •""7 o J.Remove the film. 3.Film herausnehmen. 3.Retirer la cartouche. 3.Extraiga la pelicula. e. HOLDING THE CAMERA HAL TEN DER KAMERA Tenue de I'appareil Como sostener la camara ;",..)( ,..'JlttXJ'f1-~¥;~;~,'f ~., 'i'Zi _fa!~"....'.'."."_i(]~~'\'!'S ·······PZ.....,(,;,::2."".,;;;;~ /',..\;.,~' 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 ---1 j 1 1 ])1 J j OTOGRAPHING IN SPECIAL SITUATIONS AUFNAHMEN UNTER BESONDEREN VERHALTNISSEN otographje de suJets particuliers La fotografia de temas especiales pen the Dust Barrier fully. t:l\lhs~-llll[l voll iiffllL'11. uwir a fond Ie prolecteur. br..l I'M ("olllpktu 1;1 b,lrrl'rilo. n,):v C'/ --J 2.A.N.aIIiHlfn;!hllll.·im Zillllllt.'r U.F(!rJ1sidu A.Photographie rapprachde en interieur.B.Grandissement·de I'image A.Prillll.'r pbno L'n 1111<1 lIabit;h:i()n n~rr;lda n.AUIIIC'llto <II..'tlll,l Wlllil ~";~-~]~V;;~\~;i;'S:~;~;~j~~f<~~~:;'~;~;l~,H R 3.Close the Dust Barrier.The zone focusing'lever resets itself to ++. 3.Staubschutz schlicl!Cll.Der En{- fernungs-Einstellhebel stellt sich automatisch zuruck auf ++' 3.Fermer Ie protecteur.Le levier de zone de mi,se au point revient de lui·m~me sur ++. 3.Cicrrc la barrcra.La palallca dc en roquc vuclvc a SLI posici<>n ++aU{OllIaticalllclllc, ))il j ]J J I J J i J J I ]1 ~ _ 'H'.'$at:ttl'·mm ,.;t!" )It;!i n *i , LF·TIMER SELBSTAUSLOSER lencheur aretardement Autodisparador PREVENTING THE CAMERA SHAKE VERWACKELTE AUFNAHMEN VERME,DEN Indicateur de vibration Como evitar la vibracion de la camara B.F lash photogra~ Bi Bliuall fnahlllc B.Photographie a~ H,En fot()~ra fb c< ;,'" #..... t,f'.- ,."I.:::~~,....,, <,;,>~y:,::,:~<".',,-' • """,-..;)'-~.,!:,-.'-.-'.;'}. Long exposure Langzeit-Bclichtll ng Exposition longue En cxposicioncs prolongadas 2.Release the shutter. 2.Ausloser betiitigen. 2.DecJencher I'obturateur. 2,Dispare eI obturador. ,t the lever to SELF TIMER. ,bel herausschwenken, ~tionner Ie levier. ,uste la palanca. ~ J j .;> 1 I )-,j j J 1 I 1 )! .._..._.~__.:...~~~~'--"_.....M 5.Lorsque la lampe s'allL clencher I'obturaceur. Ie lampe apres la exposil 5.Una vez quc la lamp", cicnda,dispare el o~ Oprima la lam para hal despucs dc la ex posic \=\'......~'e."JEt?.~..'0;NO.j•••• o i.O ' ,(AS!\IQllI 5.Aher the lamp glows,release the shutter.Depress the lamp after flash exposure to turn off All. 5.Nach All {1elldw:n dcr I\ereir· schafcslan'l'e Verschluss aus· 16scn.Lampe niedcrdruckcn, \Venn Blitzallfnahmcn beendet.-..,.--. ",0,0 ~_.." 4.Set the fla$h lever to 'Flash: 4.Schalter au f Bliczsymbol sccllcn. 4.Regier Ie Jevier sur Ie repere flash. 4.Ajuste la perilla en la posicii>n dc flash. Attach the All. Blitzgerat All bcfestigcn. Fixer Ie Fla$h All. Man te el A II. ,·11 ') )) ").~:t:. Jr 1 I ~j I }1 J j i )1 )1 j J i t ;t''t)'c·!"f -ENTION> 'lot apply unnecessary pres- unnotige Kraftanwcndung ·ermciden. ~ •N'appliquez pas une pression exa- geree . •No haga mas presion que la necc- saria. 1 J 1 )i j J 1 i J )1 )j J ~_~~~~~_",...•_......._.__~.I ~......~ ) ) ) J f\ ',~t't;~)7:f~:;~i'.~..'.('•.'."'.•".t:2"li2.~r..•I.'·r ~ll'..'.''!':~:.R',;' ];:tV~JOI,.~,VES",__'~~ -IO'C"':""'~;111 "......"j The long-exposure warning signal goes out after 90 seconds.It turns on again when the Dust Barrier is closed and opened. Do not use "FU LL"setting as the XA2 doesn't permit free selection of lens aperture.{when A11 is in use), Dic Lallgzcit·Wal'lluIIg crlisdll nach 1)0 Sckundcn ulld IcuchtL·t Cl'lICU!auf,WL'nn dcl'St:lubschulZ geschlosscII lind wiedcl'gcoffnct win!. IIci IknutzuIIg dL's "A 11"an dcl' XA2 niL'.nals auf "FULL"stclkn. wcil die IIclichtungsautolllatik dcr XA2 die Vorwahl beliebiger Blenden- werte nicht erlau bt. Le signal de exposition longue te apres 90 sec.I'ouvrir il no lorsque protecteur est fern ouvert. Ne pas utiliser "FU LL",car v( pouvez pas choisir exactl I'ouverture que vous desirez. La seiial dc cxposicion prolo sc apaga Iucgo dc 1)0 scgulldos. do Ja bal'l'cl'a contra cl polvo' a abl'irsc 0 CCrraI'SC,Ia sL'llal cicndc otra vcz, No utilicc d aJustc en "Fl porquc Ia XA2 no pCl'lllitc L' la abL'nul'''librcnlL'ntc. J 1 1 ])]j j 1 j )J )1 1 -_._-~~~_...•_"'_._----~..._._...~-_..._........~......"---- DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS Charge L •;=:- Fh~,hlube ~._- AUIO Flasn Sensol -- ASA Film Speed Window- .:J-~~'.":'::.. Diffuser Wi~~aSh- "-"Flo,h-· _--Self-T,merl '-'--....'"Clomp'"9 S...w ',,",Rewl~~ne,v ChE!r;k lev;r-.."'----------..--f .Im Pressure Plate '-----'r"pod Socket R.I••,.BUlIon Camera Back -~-~Film A~wind Shah .//-'''---FilmChOmbe'..'--Sprocke. ///'''''FilmTak''UPSPOOI/'.. /'// /' o..-- ,:;=;:~--l~:;;C::;~'~~, ,~;·1ff1sJJ.t'..111'\:Jj~l'------",1,1: ";'.'1 flash AeUlining Socket flits" Guide Pin Hole Viewfinder CdS Light Sensor ,01.1;1:Banier Sel'·Timer/Battery Check Beeper' Non-Slip Finger Grip Aewind Crank I Rewind Knobl ---- Cllr'nera Back Release Lens net' Check lamp ~ure Counter itrap Evelet Film Winder ~ ) J 1 i ]i )1 J J J J 1 J J 1 1 i J I MAIN SPECIFICATIONS Camera type:35mm electronic lens-shutter camera. Film format:35mm standard cassette (24 x 36mm). Lens:D.Zuiko 35mm F3.5,4 elements in 4 groups. Shutter:Programmed between·Jens shutter. Viewfinder:Bright frame tinder,0.5x.Long exposure warning and flash mark visible in finder. Focusing:Three lone indicators. Exposure control:Programmed shutter.Automatic exposure range 2 sec.(F3.5)-1/750 sec.(F 14). Film spaed range:ASA 25 -800. Film advance:Rear winding thumbwheef (360°). Exposure counter:Progressive tYpe with automatic reset.. Film rewind:Crank tYpe with rewind release button. Shutter release:Electromagnetic shutter release. Self.timer:Electronic selt-timer with 12 second delay. Blinking LED and electronic beeper (Piezoelectric 28 Ceramic Vibrator)during self·timer operation. _.~_,~.,_--..........,.,.k t f Battery check:Via self-timer/battery check lever. Continuous LED and PCV. Flash mounting:Exclusive automatic Electronic Flash A 11 attaches to (or detaches from)the camera in seconds. Setting camera's flash lever to flash symbol switch. es the'A 11 on,and sets the XA2 for autot/ash. Lens/finder barrier:Sliding cover.When tlie cover is opened,power is switched on and shutter release unlocks_When the cover is closed,power is switch. ed off and shutter release locks. Power source:Two 1.5V alkaline-manganese batteries LR44 fA 76)or silver oxide batteries SR44 lEver- eady EPX·76 or equivalent/. Dimensions:102 (W)x 65 (H)x 40 (D)mm. (4"x 2.6"x 1.6"). Weight:200 grams or 7.1 oz.Oess batteries), :; ") ') -J .J \., J I .I J J .._..............._.._,."...,-~... J I !I..1 1]"11 .1 )1 't r:r P 12··['n ttl )MENCLATURE ;essory shoe Itter speed index liter speed dial s seating slol tter release bullon tter release button lock 5 seating pin lomical grip ance scale Ih-of-field indicators ;aperture knob rture scale ,focusing knob kstrap eyelets J () I~Flash socket cover @ Tripod socket iliV Battery chamber lid Film rewind knob with crank (1 Frame counter 11 Film advance lever j Viewfinder ) Film takeup spool r Hinged pressure plaie:~ Film advance sprockets? ASA/ISO film speed dial index (?: ASNISO film speed dial:2j Camera back latch '.?< O·C key ~ itt 5 1 t::t , t :21 '$(it".4 am J1"'S"mAim .'r )$t t • TIPS ON UNDERWATER PHOTOGRAPHY 32-36 TIPS ON CAMERA CARE 37 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ,38-39 OPTIMUM BATTERY PERFORMANCE 40 ACCESSORIES ,41-49 SPECiFiCATIONS 50-51 Even though this camera Is very easy to use,YOI should slill familiarize yourself with its prepa rollon and basic operation as presented In thl first two sections of this manual.For more de tailed informaflon.please refer to "CONTROLS If DETAIL"and "TIPS ON UNDERWATER SHOOTING. A few minutes Wisely Invested now will pay 0: later In years of rewarding photographh experiences. ONTENTS----------- MENCLATURE,....,,.,""..,.,.2-3 ~EWORD.., , ,. ,.., , ,. , , 5 'PARATION .--;,,,.,. ,.., ,,..6 ilC OPERATION.i •••••••••••••••••••••7-17 NTROLS IN DETAIL "18-31 O-rings 18-19 Shutter speed dial 20-21 Shutter release putton (with lock)22 Viewfinder 23 ASAIISO film speed dial.24 Lens focusing knob ~25 Lens aperture knob 26-27 Film advance lever..,28 Frame counter ,28 Camera back latch (with O·C key)..,29 Pressure plate 29 Anatomical grip 30 Accessory shoe ,30 Flash socket .., ,31 Tripod socket.,31 ) " ) ) FOREWORD---------- The Nlkonos IV-A Is the world's only 35mm under· water camera capable of going down to depths of 50 meters (160 feet)and Withstanding pressure of 6kg/cml (85 Ib/inl )without a special underwater housing.Because of this rugged- ness,you can use the Nikonos In situations where regular cameras would dare not go. Carry It to the beach,use It on your boat,even take It mountain climbing without worrying about camera care, And now with automalic exposure control, picture-taking has been made easier than ever. Just set a shoollng aperture,and the camera adjusts the shutter speed to give you the correct exposure AUTOMATICALLY. The Nlkonos IV·A has a large,hlgh-eyepoint vIewfinder allowing you to see the enllre field of view from up to 40mm away while wearing a diver's mask or goggles.In addition,Its swlng- open camera back and large shutter release ,button and film advance lever allow the Nlkonos I to be operated In the same manner as regular 35mm cameras. I.I.I {I L [(I <'( 3 Replace the batter'1 •chamber lid. Slip the battery clip back into thE camera body and screw the lie tightly into place ",..~., '.. ~- ",:4 t." 2 Install the batteries. •Insert the two 1.5V silver- oxide batteries supplied with the camera,making sure that the"+.. signs are up. ~1 Remove the battery •chamber lid 28. Use a coin to twist the lid counter- clockwise to unscrew it. BASIC OPERATION-----------I f •.~ tf 00 a·rings lEPARATION---------~ .to using the Nlkonos IV·A,check to see that )·rings are not scratched and that there is no sand ther foreign matter attached to the rings.Then, -nust lubricate the four a-rings shown in red using tube of lubricant provided.Lubrication makes ~amera back easy to open and the lens or other ;easy to attach:it also protects the a-rings from ssive wear,Apply tl;]e lubricant sparingly,yet ~sure there are no gaps between areas of appli· In.It is recommended that lubricant be applied 1 necessary to ensure the longest possible service 1e Nikonos IV·A.An extra set of a-rings,plus a of lubricant,is supplied with the camera,. -ill'K"Otl'u"';'--./l..It w~n~0 "0'",.O·rlng lubricant~~ i ') ~ ~........, 7 L [t «I I f l ((l (t [I ,"7 rrttSP1i;,,'$t.' I J '~~ 9 Unlock the camera •back, Turn the O-C key 15 to the "0" position. 8 Mount the lens on •the camera, With the while lens focusing knob W positioned vertically in Iront 01 the viewfinder.push the lens firmly into the camera'd bayonet mount Twist the lens 90·clockwise until the seating pins 7.:click and lock into position in the slots .~.Now lhe camera and lens assembly are completely watertight ~ d ~ 6 7 Check battery •power. Look through the viewfinder ,j~"A red LED at the bottom of the Irame should be displayed to show that the batteries have been properly installed and their power is ade- quate,"not,recheck the orien- tation of the "+""-"sym- bols,and if necessary,replace both batteries with a fresh set 6 Depress the shutter •release button (5 halfway, This activates the exposure meter. The meter stays on for approlc20 seconds after you take your finger all the button and turns itself off automatically to conserve battery power. ~, 5 Unlock the shutter •release button. Move the shutter release button lock ([.'off the "L"position. ,"'" ~SIC OPERATION-continued------------------------- Set the camera for automatic Hatlon, te the shutter speed dial (3) the "A"is opposite the white 2 . ) Note:Mounting the lens upSide down may make it easier 10 read the aperture and distance scales from above the camera. 9 ~ .J t [I .a L i I !I ~t __I (K I ( ": ~SIC OPERATION-continued--------------------------1 I Open the camera back. •Press your thumb against the camera back as you lift up the ·ra back latch @.Release thumb pressure,and Ihe camera back Jen. 11 Install the film •cartridge. Slip the cartridge into the film car· tridge chamber,so that the top of the cartridge engages the film reo wind fork.Then push the bottom of the cartridge until it is fUlly seated in the chamber. 12.lift up the pressure plate 20.13 Insert the film leader in the •takeup spool 19. While holding the pressure plate in the "up"posilior pull the leader across the camera and insert it into onl of the slots in the film takeup spool.Then push thl pressure plate back down until it locks into place o~.j '--" ~ ~)J g [[[•[I 1 [( 18 Make blank exp •sures until the frame counter shows "1." Continue to depress Ihe shut release button and Wind the I advance lever unlll the Iral counler 16 shows "1."While m; ing btank exposures.watch the wind knob to see that II rotal This indicales that the film r been loaded correctly and is be ad'/anced ( ,,::.:....I 17 .Take up the film •slack. Fold out the film rewind crank 15. ROlate the film rewind knob in the direction of the arrow as you lilt it up Then with the knob in the raised position,rolale il in Ihe same direction until you feel slight tension. , -~~ Lock the camera back. Return the O·C key to the "C" position to prevent the camera back Irom being accidentally opened during picture-taking. ~ II II 16.15 Close the camera back. •Make sure the bottom of the cartridge is still fully seated in the chamber and the O-ring fits snugly in the groove around the camera back before swinging the camera back shut.Then.while pressing the camera back against the camera body.rotate the camera back latch to the rear.Push the back 01 the latch in so that the claw hooks onto the pin on'the camera back.Finally,push the latch forward to clamp the camera back into place. ~SIC OPERATION-confinued------~------------------ ,Wind the film advance lever \7 •to advance film onto the ceup spool. ress the shutter release button and wind the film 3nce lever until the film sprockets 21 engage the orations on both edges of the film. a \)o--cf-! r--.. l Ii I l [t_(I t (i l l { 24 Take the pictur •Look through the vi linder,and depress the shu release button hallway,"the doesn't blink,depress the bu all the way to take the picture.- shutter speed automatically lected is between approx.1 sec,and 1/1000 sec.If the L does blink,readjust the apert until it Slops blinking. •ReIer to the example pictures on page 27., 23 Set the lens •aperture. Turn the black aperture knob Ii until the desired IInumber is op- posite the index mark on the front of the lens. The pincer-type depth-of-field indio cators @I,coupled with the focus- ing knob,open or close to show the range of distances which will be in focus in the final photograph,' •Refer to page 36 for more details, 22 Set the distance •on the lens. Estimate or measure'the camera- to-subject distance.Turn the white lens focusing knob until the.esti- mated camera-to-subject distance in meters or leet is lined up with the index on the front of the lens, Inside the viewfinder 1.Frame lines showing Ihe field 01 view lor Ihe normal 35mm lens 2.The parallax correction marks 21 Frame the SUbject •In the viewfinder. The frame lines built into the view· finder show the field of view lor the normal 35 mm lens.For proper lraming,place your subject within the outlined area.When shooting subjects at distances as close as 0.8m (2.751t),use the parallax correction marks for framing. 20 Set the ASAIISO •film speed. Lilt up the film speed dial ~I'and rotate it in either direction until the ASA/ISO film speed is oppo- site the white index 'Ll·.This pro- grams the camera's exposure meter so that it may provide a proper exposure for the speed of film in use. ~ ASIC OPERATION-continued I utlon:Belore you actually dIve into water,make sure Ihe rewind knob ~the "down"position Otherwise. 'er might get inside the camera. .)~ 9 Push the rewind •knob back down. d the crank back in.Then rotate ,knob slightly in the opposite ~ction of the arrow while push- :down.The knob will return to normal position. ') ') "'I / :0« ./\ [(L l [L _[!~I I L I I I (L ,.;1'ram In)_~__..~_~._.._ -BASIC OPERATION-continued----------------------- ,~ 29 Lock the shutter •release button. Aeturn the shuller speed dial to the "A"position to make the camera ready for loading the next roll of film.Finally,set the shutter release button lock to the "L" position.This prevents the shutter release button from being depress- ed and causing inadvertent battery drain. 28 Remove the film •cartridge. Open the camera back and take out the film cartridge, .~r -~27 Rewind the film. •Fold out the film rewind crank.Aotate the film rewind knob in the direction of the arrow as you lilt it up,Then with the knob in the raised position,rotate it in the same direction to rewind the film. When you feel the tension lessen, continue winding one or two more turns so that the film leader is rewound completety back into the cartridge, 26 Set the shutter •speed dial to "R!' After the las 1 exposure has been made,the film advance lever will stop working.You must then re- wind the exposed film back into its cartridge,To do this,first turn the shuller speed dial to "A"to dis- engage the film sprocket drive. 25 Advance the film; •Stroke the film advance lever to transport the film to the next frame and get Ihe camera ready for the next shot. ~116 '1 ---." :>\ <) l l l (I I (~[L L L t l i I __-...._..•..............;...,._•...;••••~_~__~~~_..._~~t.t tit.e •'rtf o :._~~_ )NTROLS IN DETAIL----------------------- ngs urpose of using O-rings on the Nikonos IV-A is to the O·ring.Then grasp the slack portion with your 111 joints making the camera completely water-other hand and pull the ring off (Fig.1).The O-ring As explained in the "PREPARATION"section,around the camera back can be removed by inserting hould apply lubricant to the O-rings whenever a pointed object under the ring and pulling up to lift it ;sary to insure smooth operation and long life.out (Fig.2).However,make sure not to scratch the C!make sure to clean all sand and foreign matter O·ring in doing so. ese parts.If you find a ring difficult to clean,To install a new O-ring,insert one side of the ring into Ie it completely making certain not to scratch it.the groove and hold it in position while rolling the other 'sure watertightness.replace ·all O-rings when side of the ring into place (Fig.3).When inserting the 'ecome scratched or worn.O-ring into the groove in the camera back.first place move the O-rings.except the one around the it over the groove;then press it down in the groove ra back,grasp the ring between your thumb and •making certain that the ten points having small 1ger.Pinch you fingers together as you slide winged-shaped projections (as circled in red above) in the direction of the arrow to create slack in are fully seated into the ten pairs of slots (Fig.4). ~ Fig.4 Fig.1 Flg.3 h--,r-:=-joo: 4 G;..'2 3 I) i-'') o c/). -..J l (l l [[I L (a l i l • ,d :r"&21 t'$ , ~NTROLS IN DETAIL--continued--------------------~--~~ IHer speed dial @ shutter speed dial on the Nikonos IV·A has four '1gs:A,M,Band R. ,e A (AUTO)setting ,n the dial is set to "A,"the shutter speed is auto- cally set to match the ASNISO film speed setting, lens aperture setting,and the scene brighlness, the meter on,and an LED inside the viewfinder IS when the shutter speed is within the "safe" Ie of approx.1/30-1/1000 sec.However,if the ·ter speed is outside this range,the LED blinks as Hning.In this case.turn the lens aperture knob to 'her setting.If you are unable to stop the LED from ,ing after all possible settings,Ihen the SUbject is ij C)o Cv'·~ C:X) 100 bright or too dim for automatic exposure control. I!the subject is too bright,use a neutral density filter or change the film to one with a lower ASAIISO;if the subject is too dim,use a speedlight or faster film.With the Nikonos 8peedlight S8·101,Ihe shutter speed is automatically switched to 1/90 sec.for proper elec· tronic flash synchronization.To speed up film loading, the shutter fires at approx.1/1500 sec.for blank shots until the frame counler reaches "1." Nole:The UW-Nikkor t5mm f/2.8 cannot be used for auto- matic exposure.When using it,set the dial to "M"and esti· mare the exposure or use an underwater exposure meter instead, At the M (MECHANICAL)setting This setting provides a backup mechanical speed of 1/90sec.in case the batteries become weak or ex· hausted or there are none loaded in the camera.This setting should also be used when speedlights other than the Nikonos Speedlighl 8B·l0l are used. At the B (BULB)settIng At "B,"the shutter remains open for as long as you keep the shutler button depressed,allowing you to make time exposures or create "stroboscopic" effects by firing the flash repeatedly with the shutter open."B"is also a mechanical setting, At the R (REWIND)setting To disengage the film sprocket drive for rewinding. the dial to "R."At this setting.the shutter rele button cannot be operated. [[l l (~f g ~~!f [1 ([L 1 'M .·f :t').$: •5P t ;;...:--- ONTROLS IN DETAIL-confinued---------------------~~- ) utter release button ®(with lock ®) ated at the top of the anatomical grip,the large tter release bullon on the Nikonos IV·A provides venient operation either above or below the water. 1 the shuller speed dial sel at "A,"the shuller on serves as a meter·ON switch when depressed way;the meter then stays on for approx:20sec. ·r you take your finger off the bullon,turning itself automatically 10 conserve battery power.When d in conjunction with the LED in the viewfinder, shuller release button can be used as a ballery ·ck.When you release the shutter at "A"in a very ~place or with the front lens cap on,the shutter lain may remain open.If this happens,turn the lIer speed dial to either "8"or "M"to close the J ,~\ \..) ::> ~)'Z -.0 shuller.A shuller release button lock is provided to prevent wasting a frame or causing inadvertent batlery drain in case the shutler release bUllon is accidentally depressed while the camera is not in use. Viewfinder lB The high·eyepoinl viewfinder in the Nikonos IV·A allows you to place your eye up to 40mm away from the eyepiece,so that the entire field of view can be seen while wearing a diver's mask,goggles,or safety glasses.The buill·in frame lines indicate the area of coverage for the normal 35mm lens:the parallax correction marks should be used to frame the subject when shooting at the closest focusing distance of 0.8 m (2.75 fI). At the bottom of the viewfinder.there is an LED wh glows when the shutter speed is between approx 1 and 111000 sec.and blinks when Ihe speed IS ouls this range.In addition.a flash ·ready·lighl in Ille Ie of a red lightning boll appears when the Nlkon Spe light 88·101 is charged up and ready to lire {!l If (~((l l I [((I ( I II 5 71 mr #"I I •~.~" ONTROLS IN DETAIL-continued ---1 Note:When you actually measure the distance underw" you must modify this distance befOre selling it on the lens. more information.refer to "Tips on Underwater Photograp on page 36 Lens focusing knob 13 The Nikonos IV-A does not offer through-the-Iens focusing,nor is it equipped with a rangefinder.There- fore,you must focus by either estimating or actually measuring the camera-to-subject distance and then setting it on the lens.To focus the lens,turn the white focusing knob until the desired distance in meters or feet is opposite the white focusing index.In addition, a pair of pincer-type depth of field indicators shows the exact distance rrom near to far that will be in sharp focus in the final photograph. 500 I 10001 640 1250 125~-250J t60 320 64 803240 25 50 100 200 400 800 1600•••••••••••••••••• Note:Make sure 10 return the ASA/ISO dial 10 Ihe correcl seIling alter you have finished making exposure com· pensatlon. one f/stop underexposed.The right amount of ex- posure compensation can be determined through trial and error, ASA/ISO film speed scale \J150 film speed dial 2:1 ding ASAIISO settings from 25 to WOO,the film d dial is set by lilting up the knurled ring and ng until the desired speed is opposite the white .When the ring is released,it locks into place. jial can be rotated even underwater without fear Iter getting inside the camera. ~t the correct exposure when shooting backlit ,cIs or for creating special effects,you can reset lial for exposure compensation.If you're using ISO 100 film,turn the dial from 100 to 50 and the :Jicture will be one f/stop overexposed;reset the 'om 100 to 200,and the final photograph will be or, ..Jn~~./---0 Q) (l t I t [3.t g ([i ( ''i t •t '$5 1!1m 7 W'.r'm elf;'t -.J :ONTROLS IN DETAIL-continued I l 1/22-Deep depth offield1/2.5-Shallow depth offield Nole:To cQver any error you might have made in focusing, use the smallest aperture possible.Alternately move farther aWay from the sub;ect or use a lens with shorter focal length. front of,and behind,the plane of sharpest focus and is indicated clearly by the depth-of-field indicators. Within this zone,image blur is negligible and every- thing can be considered as being in sharp focus. Three factors control depth of field:the focal length of the lens in use,the camera-to-subject distance, and the shooting aperture. At wide apertures,depth of field is very shallow.But, as the lens is stopped down,depth of field increases r proportionally.Please refer to the following examples for details.I !ns aperture knob 11 turning the black lens aperture knob,you change l $ize of the lens aperture letting more or less light 3S through the lens.At the same time the pincer- le depth-of-field indicators expand or contract, i1e the aperture scale moves in relation to the arrow lex.By adjusting the aperture,the automatically ected shutter speed can be controlled,Choose a je aperture (smaller IInumber),and you let in more 11 thus increasing the shutter speed.On the other ld,by selecting a small aperture (larger IInumber), ,light is reduced resulting in a slower shutter speed, lddition to controlling the shutter speed,the size of .aperture also determines depth of field,Depth of d is to the zone of acceptable foucs extending in C)oo ......... ~ ""'" 't' I (t [(l (I I [«(I I t _"_'e,t t 2 r t"***11 ..~_,. )NTROLS IN DETAIL-continued----------------------- I advance lever 17 11m advance lever on Ihe Nikonos IV-A operates 3 same manner as a regular 35mm camera. e the lever in the direction of the arrow to cock hulter and advance the film 10 the next frame. ,wer is ratcheted.so it may be operated in one lUOUS stroke or a Series of shorter ones.In on,the lever is hinged for compact storage in the Josition.The angle of throw is 144". \) C) C) ~ ~o Frame counter To accommodate all commercially available film cartridges,the Nikonos IV·A frame counter goes up to 36.The "S"appears automatically as soon as the camera back is opened and signifies the "START" position.Then there are two dots between "S"and "1."Alter "1,"even numbers are listed with odd numbers indicated by dots in between.All indications are in white against a black field for maximum legi- bility.On "AUTO:'until the frame counter reaches "1,"the shutter speed is approx.111500 sec.for blank shots to facilitate film loading. Camera back latch Z4 (with O-C key Z5) New to the Nikonos IV-A is its swing-open type camera back.This design allows quick and easy film loading in the normal 35mm camera way. To allow the camera back to be opened or closed in a minimum amount or time,a quick-release camera back latch is employed.It can be opened after turning the O-C key to the "0"(OPEN)position.After loading film,to prevent the camera back from being acci- dentally opened and to insure complete watertight- ness,you must turn the O-C key to the "C"(CLOSED) position."goeS'without saying that you should never attempt to load or unload the camera underwater or in situations where water might get inside the camera Pressure plate zo Instead of being attached to the camera back.I Nikonos IV-As pressure plate is attached to the ins of the camera and IS hinged. This style pressure plale uses a safety catch to kE the film flal.and to protect Ihe shutter curtains In accidental splashes or foreign matter when open the camera back. t [[(I I I L ~I [(I L t I I ~~'N ..>W ...,.,l'~~......<'\t b uP ·rpy,•¥tl:.........M l ;t ..... ~NTR~LSIN~E~IL~confinued~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Tripod socket 2i A standard tripod socket is located in the camera baseplate for attachment of the bracket for n Nikonos Underwater Speedlight SB-101.A regul, tripod can also be used for shooling on land at slo shutter speeds or when making time exposures: Flash socket 26 The flash socket is located in the camera's baseplate just below the anatomical grip.Use a coin to unscrew the flash socket cover.like the battery chamber cover,it has an O·ring 10 insure absOlute watertight- ness.Once the cover is removed.electrical connec· tion between the camera and the Nikonos Speed light SB-101 can be made via the coiled sync cord.Since the Nikonos IV·A's flash socket provides X-sync only, a flash unit utilizing flashbulbs cannot be used.A special Flash Unit Adapter is also available allowing other electronic flash units to be used for non- underwater photography with Nikonos IVA Accessory shoe (1 Buill into the top of the viewfinder,the Nikonos IV-A's accessory shoe accepts the following accessories: 1.Two plastic frame finders.one for the UW-Nikkor 28mm f/3.5 and the other for the W-Nikkor 35mm 1/2.5 or the Nikkor 80mm f/4. 2.Three optical viewfinders.One for (he UW-Nikkor 15mm 1/2.8,another for the 28mm lens.and the third for the 80mm for use on land. 3.The Sensor Unit SU-101 for the Nikonos Speed- light SB-101 as well as regular direct-mounting' speedlights for non-underwater use. Itomlcal grip Ii acing your right forefinger on the shutter release n with the thumb behind the film advance lever, other fingers just naturally wrap around the lmical grip.With this comfortable and secure you can change rapidly from horizontal to vertical· it shooting with a minimum of fumbling.One of liggest causes of unsharp pictures is camera :1.When you release the shutter,support the ~ra with bolh hands and gently squeeze the er release button instead of jabbing it.Under· r,weightlessness makes steady camera holding more dillicult.Concentrate on steadiness even 1 using fast shutter speeds. ) ") ~ -.\) It) l I [(l (I ((I [[( 9 ()-~z: ~t;lPT1T l":t 7"tr l'I·$1 t " " TIPS ON CAMERA CARE, 1,Afler using the camera in salt water,and when- ever dirly,rinse it thoroughly in fresh running water to remove any residue,Then dry with a soil cloth before opening.Never dry the camera by healing, 2,Do not submerge the camera in water with the flash socket cover removed,And whenever using the Nikonos Speedlight,make sure that the sync cord and sensor cord plugs are se- curely allached before entering the water. 3,Should the lens or body be accidentally dropped in salt water during loading (or at any other time when the interior is exposed),rinse immediately in fresh water and take the unit to a Nikon Ser- vice Center or your dealer as soon as possible, 4,Do not attempt to adjust the focusing knob or aperture knob past the end limits of travel; forcing these knobs will result in damaging the lens mechanism. 5,Never aHempt to change lenses,open the camera,or load/unload film underwater. 37 L I l ([L l I I i.t [t l I 800 1600 ASAIISO EV is an abbreviation of Exposure Value.The expos value is a number representing 'all the combinali of shutter speeds and "stops which will give exa the same amount of exposure For instance.E represents 1130 sec.at 115.6.but it can also m 1/60 sec.at 114 or 1/125 sec.at 1/2.8 , , , ,"""".."'I """'"',''~_':TTEV 4 5 EV Chart At ASAIISO 100.the exposure range of the Nikonos IV·A is from EV8 (1/30 sec.at f/2.8)to EV19 (1/1000 sec.at 1122).The ranges at various ASAIISO's are shown in the chart.For example.the range at ASAIISO 100 is in pink;the range at ASAIISO 25 is indicated by blue lines,while ASAIISO 400 is in black. :CHNICAL INFORMATION---------------------~ Automatic Exposure Control System The Nikonos IV·A features a highly advanced auto- matic exposure control system.A fast-reacting silicon photo diode (SPO)used for metering is located just below the viewfinder and faces downward and toward ~the rear.light from the subject passes through the ~lens,strikes a special metering reflector in front of the shutter and then is reflected back to the SPO.The intensity of the light,in addition to the selling on the ASAIISO film speed dial,is translated into exposure n III \SPO information by an Ie printed Circuit board at the top of the camera.Processed in record time,the correct Shutt r shutter speed is selected lor proper exposure.At the t ~instant of exposure,the electromagnetically controlled cur am shutter stays open for precisely the required amount of time.Speeds are infinitely variable between approx. Metering 1130 and 111000 sec. reflector Light path o \) o ....()U', l l I g I L L (I i I [ $me usstncm \$'neUB 1 tii r'f ,j t'tmt!''t err mprrnrr:[. "OPTIMUM BATTERY PERFORMANCE---- 4.Storage:When not in use.the batteries should be removed to prevent damage from leakage, To minimize drain during the period of disuse, store the batteries in a cool.dry place, 5,Battery brands:Do not use mixed brands of batteries.nor batteries with different model numbers.Also.avoid mixing new and old bat- teries since proper performance will not be ob- tained and battery leakage into your Nikonos IV·A may occur. 6.Disposal:Do not dispose of batteries by lhrow· ing them in a fire.For safety's sake.never dis- assemble batteries. 7.Polarity:When installing batteries.observe the voltage polarities carefully,Reversal of the posi· tive (+)and negative H terminals will result in leakage.If leakage should occur.clean carefully or take your Nikonos IV·A to your dealer. 1,New batteries:Between manufacturing and first use.all batteries exhibit some drain.Therefore. care should be taken to purchase the newest (and freshest)ones possible.To help you do this. some manufacturers stamp the date of manu· facture on the bottom of each battery.Ask your camera dealer for assistance in interpreting the cades. 2.Temperature:Battery life ratings are based on operation at around 2DoC (68°F).At other temperatures.battery life is shortened.At DOC, for instance,battery life is shortened by as much as 2/3.Spare batteries should therefore be kept available if operation in low temperatures is anticipated. 3.Continuous use:Batteries are drained much more quickly by continuous use than by inter· mittent use,I I I I~J \) o o -i) ~ [L !L I (I,I (~\I tee '1 it!r:'1 """;;;l'n'IT r ('tiP 1 t S .:5 ttr turrs.lIIt"I " '«t!.lo6.-_~_ )ECIFICATIONS----'---------· e of camera 1st ruction :ure format s mount ses tier tier speeds DQ J-..!) --J 35 mm amphibious camera Body made of die,cast aluminum alloy and reinforced plastic;all joints sealed by means of O-ring gaskets to insure absolute water- tightness;camera able to with· stand pressures up to the 6kg/cm1 (85 Iblin1)at depths down to 50m (160 It) 24 mm x 36 mm (standard 35 mm film format) Nikonos bayonet type W·Nikkor 35mm 1/2.5 as standard;three addilionallenses from super-wideangle to tele- photo available VerticaHravel metal focal-plane type A (AUTO):Electronically con- trolled stepless speeds from 1/30 to 111000 sec.; M (MANUAL):Mechanical speed of 1190 sec.; 8 (BULB):Mechanical selling for long exposures: R (REWIND):Selling used when rewinding film Shutter release Exposure control Film speed range Metering range Accessory shoe Flash synchronization Viewfinder Via bullon at top of anatomical grip;initial pressure on bullon switches on meter.meter then stays on for approx.20 sec.alter finger is taken off bullon;shuller release lock incorporated Aperture-priority automatic exposure with mechanical speeds at M and 8;through-the· lens stopped·down metering via silicon photo diode (SPD)with center·weighted metering pallem ASAIISO 25 to 1600 EV 8 to EV 19 at ASAIISO 100 with 112.8 lens Provided;buill into top of viewfinder X·sync only via flash socket in camera's base;with Nikonos Speedlight S8-101,shuller speed is automatically switched to 1/90 sec.with shuller speed dial at "A";with other electronic nash units,shuller speed dial is manually set to "M" Inverted Galilean type Albada finder buill into camera for use with standard 35mm lens:bright Viewfinder display Film advance lever Frame counter Film rewind frame lines show approx.85 % field of view;0.55X magnifi- cation;diopter 0.9;high eyepoint allows viewing with eye 40 mm away from finder;parallax correction marks provided: accessory optical viewfinders or frame linders available for various lenses Large red LED in lower part of viewfinder glows when shuller speed is between approx.1/30 to 1/1000 sec.;blinks il shuller speed is outside this range:red LED lightning bolt lights up when Nikonos Speedlight S8·101 is recycled and ready to lire;en automatic control.the lightning boll glows only when the meter- ing circuit is on Wound in single stroke or series of strokes;144 0 winding angle; hinged for compact storage: shuller speed automatically set to approx.1/1500 sec.until Irame "1"for fast film loading Additive type;self.reselling Manual via film rewind crank Camera back Pressure plate Batteries Battery check Dimensions (without lens) Weight (without lens) Hinged wilh camera back lalch and O-C key ; Hinged·type allached to camera body;locking catch provided Two 1.5V silver·oxide cells (Eveready EPX76,D76,or equivalent) LED inside viewfinder lights up il balleries are loaded properly an< their vollage is approx.2.6V or above 149mm(W)x 99mm(H)x 58mm(D) ,Approx.740 g 5 I L [I (L [[l f I ;( - (._-[i. to allow fore-end assembly to pass and re- assemble freely into receiver.Reassemble burrel and tighten firmly with magazine cap .. BELOW FREEZING WEATHER -Special attention should be taken that oil is removed from action parts.If a lubricant is desired -use dry graphite or similar non-congealing lubricant. Take care to prevent rusting from condensation and wetness (cold weather to warm room tem, perature)on action parts and barrel bore,bar- re'chamber. HANDLING -Outside of gun should be wiped with oil to prevent rust.Invisible "'prints"'of moisture can cause rusting unless removed.Ex· posure to unfavorable weather or moisture from condensation also require additional cme. MAINTENANCE -Gun should be checked per· iodically by a competent gunsmith to ensure proper inspection and any necessary replace- ment of worn or damaged parts. IMPORTANT -Remington firearms are de· signed,manufactured and proof tested to stand- ards based on filctory loaded ammunition.Im- properly loaded handloads can be dangerous. Remington Arms Company,Inc.,cannot assume responsibility for damages or injury caused by handloads or reloaded ammunition. This gun has been manufactured to Reming- ton specifications and shipped from the factory suitable for use.Remington does not recom- mend and is not responsible for any illteration Or modification to the gun not made by Rem- ington factory personnel,nor the replacement of 'worn or damaged parts with those not of Remington manufacture. SHOOTI NG G LASSES.Smart shooters,who don't normally wear corrective lenses,always hunt and shoot wearing good,impact-·resistant shooting glasses in order to protect their eyes' against unanticipated ricochet,possible powder blowback,or branch and twig whiplash.In addition to eye safety,green or gray glasses keep the eyes fresh and untired on bright,glary days,while yellow lenses aid in spotting game in dim or fading light.So for safety,comfort and be tier shooting -both in the field and on the target range -shooting glasses are a real "'must". EAR PROTECTION -Proper ear protection .in t he form of ear plugs or hearing guards should be worn whenever practical. l ~'-T~ CARRIER ACTION BAR LOCK Fig.2 DISASSEMBL Y of Model 870 for c1eiming or service of action parts should be done as follows: TRIGGER PLATE ASSEMBL Y (Fig.21 -Push safety ON SAFE Open action and make certain no shells remain in chamber or magazine. Cock action.Tap out front and rear trigger plate pins.Lift rear of trigger plate from reo ceiver,then slide rearward to remove from gun. If necessary to clean,brush with solvent,Clean as a unit.Wipe dry and re-oil very sparingly.To replace trigger plate assembly,close action and carefully inser~assembly (carrier first)into re- ceiver.Adjust until trigger plate is aligned in opening.Push downward on rear of trigger plate until assembly enters receiver freely,Ad- just to align holes and tap in front and rear trigger plate pins.Open action ard push up car- rier until action bar lock is visible.Top of action bar lock should ride along and not over-ride bottom edge 0/action bar. NOTE:Do not allow hammer to snap forward with trigger plate assembly removed from gun. In reassembling trigger plate mechanism,always be sure that end of action bar lock is below end of connector,left.Otherwise,gun will not fun- ction properly (Fig.2). I"ORE-END ASSEMBLY UNIT -Push safety QN SAFE.Open action and make certain no shells remain in chamber or magaZine.Close action and remove magazine cap and barrel. Reach into bottom of receiver and press left shell latch inward.Slide fore-end off magazine tube_NOTE:Top right edge of slide may bind on bottom front of ejection port in receiver. To free slide,push front end of bolt downward. After fore-end assembly is removed from gun, breech bolt parts and slide may be lifted from ends of action bars.Not necessary todisassem- ble bolt parts.Brush with solvent to clean. NOTE:Gun must be cocked when reassembling fore-end parts.During reassembly of fore-end assembly unit,place slide in correct position on ends of double action bar.Place breech bolt assembly (includes attached locking block as- sembly)over slide on bars.I nsert end of action bars into matching receiver grooves.Move fore, end gently rearward into receiver until con- tact is made with front end of right shell latch (See exploded view).Press front of right shell latch into side of receiver.Move fore-end past right shell latch until contact is made with left •...ell ',(."°ress t-_·,f lefr'-"latchl d( 12-20 28-410 &20 GA.LW BREECH BOLT EJECTION POR";.~ TRIGGER PLATE PIN~~ TO ASSEMBLE GUN -Gun is shipped taken down.Before assembling,clean lubrication from metal parts and bore of barrel.Remove magazine cap and cardboard packing ring. If gu n is cocked press action bar lock and slide fore·end half way back. CAUTION:Do not pump action or pull trigger repeatedly with barrel removed.Place barrel into receiver with barrel guide ring over magazine tube.Seat barrel firmly into receiver.Do not jam barrel against ejector.Replace and tighten magazine cap. SAFETY (Fig.11 -Before loading or unloading gun,push safety to ON SAFE position. Red band on safety will not show. FI RE POSI liON -Push safety to FI RE position.Red band marking will show.Trigger can be pulled to fire gun. TO SINGLE LOAD -Push safety ON SAFE.Pull fore-end fully to rear.If gun is cocked and action locked closed,press in action bar lock (Fig.11.Place shell into open ejection port upon carrier.Slide fore·end forward ,, to load shell and lock action. TO MAGAZINE LOAD -Push safety ON SAFE.Slide fore·end completely forward to close action.Turn gun bottom upward and press shell against carrier then forward FULL Y into magazine.Make sure that rim of shell snaps past shell latch to avoid shell sliding back over carrier.Should this occur, forcefully open action or,if necessary,re- move trigger plate assembly to remove shell. TO LOAD CHAMBER from MAGAZINE - Shells can be fed from loaded magazine by I '.,.'.....Fig.1 I pumping fore-end.Press in action bar lock L.--'. (Fig.11 if gun is cocked.Pump fore-end back and forth to open and close action. CAUTION:Before firing make sure barrel bore is clean and free of any grease,heavy oil or obstruction. TO UNLOAD GUN -Push safety ON SAFE.Press in action bar lock;pull fore'end slow- ly rearward until front end of shell from barrel is even with ejection port in receiver.Lift front of shell outward and remove from ejection port.Continue pulling fore-end back fully until next shell releases from magaZine.Roll gun sideways to allow released shell to drop from ejection port.Close action.Continue until magazine and gun are empty. STANDARD MODEL (12 -20 GAUGE I -Barrel chClmbered for 2%"shells in light or heavy modern factory loads or 2%"MAGNUM. (28 -410 GAUGEI -Barrel is chambered for 2%"shell in 28 gao and 3"and 2%"shell in 41Q gao 3 INCH MAGNUM MODEL -Barrel is chambered for 3 inch Ma!lnum shell. NOTE:3"MAGNUM shells cannot be tired in standard guns desigl]ed for 2%" shells. CAPACITY -Gun capacity is five (51 shells -one in chamber and four (41 in magazine.When using 3"shells,capacity of 410 gao gun is reduced to four (4)shells.The Federal Migratory Bird Treaty Act,and some state laws,re- 'Q4ire that the maximum magazine capacity does not exceed two (21 shells so that overall gun capacity is not more than three (3)shells.Check magazine capacity of your state and for game you plan to hunt.12,16 &20 gauge field grade guns and 12 &20 gauge Magnum grade guns are shipped from factory with a suitable plug Installed in magazine.To remove plug unscrew magazine cap.Remove magazine spring retainer from front of magazine tube by placing screw driver under inside rim of retainer and prying free.Remove carefully. I'letainer is under compression of spring.Remove plug.Reassemble spring and retainer into tube.IMPORTANT -Place retainer into magazine tube,cup in- ward,and tap firmly until flat on retainer is flush with end of tube. BARREL CLEANING -Push safety ON SAFE.Open action and make cer- tain no shells remain in chamber or magazine.Unscrew magazine cap and reo move barrel.Replace magazine cap to end of magazine tube.Clean barrel with cleaning rod and lightly oited cloth.If necessary,scrub bore with powder solvent.Wipe clean and re-oil very tightly. ACTION CLEANING - A petroleum solvent can be used.Take necessary prect "5.~(L me~tt's ren(·_.lean [long(.!r sh{ If 1l;Jl'nca'non IS use'o ~panngly. ~J II'IlU1M£2JZ..WlJ7Jj ® • VlODEL 870 lUMP ACTION SHOTGUN 1 ~-~U uA...IUUL.L.UI U PUMP ACTION SHOTGUN r """I ~L.I~. i:Wefj ""'" """ ~ """ -' -' ..... ~ ""'" -- """ -' NAME OF PART Safety Spring Retaining Pin ..•......•..•. Sear •.....••.......••••.•0 •••••• Sear Pin ••...••••.•••....•.••.••• Sear Spring....•.••0 •••••••••• Shell Latch.Left.12 Ga..•.••••.0 • Shell Latch.Left.20 Ga . Shell Latch,Right.12 Ga••••.....•..... Shell Latch,Right•.20 Ga•••...0 ••••••0 • Slide Assembly •.•..•.••'.• . •••••.••.• Stock Assembly.'0 .:•••••"••••••••• Stock Bearing Plate • ••.•.. •..•...0 •••• Stock Bolt ....~!••••••••••,•••••••• Stock Bolt LockWasher~'• ••••••.••• Stock Bolt Washer •••••••••0 • • • • • • • • Trigger .•0 •••••,0 ••••••••••(Restricted) Trigger Assembly •..••••••.•••(Restricted) Trigger 'Pin ••••••0 ••;••'•••••••••••• Trigger Plate.R.H.Safety ••.•,•••••••0 •• Trigger Plate.L.H.Safetv ••••.•.•.•••••0 Trigger Plate-'Assemblv,R.H •.(R.H.Safe)•.•... Trigger Plate Assembly~(L.H.Safel .••••.••• Trigger Plate Pin,Front ••.•••.•.•...••• Trigger Plate Pin,Rear •..•.••••••••...• Trigger·Plate Pin Bushing.•••••••••••.0 •• Trigger Plate Pin.,Oetent Spring.Front ••.0 •••• Trigger Plate Pin Detent Spring,Rear.•0 •••••• View Port No.No. 51 17515 52 18750 53 17463 54 17518 55 20040 20042 56 20045 20047 57 14543 58 14577 59 19993 60 18571 61 18572 62 18573 63 25370 20610 64 17533 65 25035 25036 22985 22986 66 20601 67 20606 68 17541 69 17539 70 17540 List Price NOTE:SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING PARTS. I ~ Li" PriceNAMEOFPART Barrel Assembly.12 Ga.,PLAIN •••..•..••• Barrel Assembly,20 Ga ••PLAIN .'••..•.•••. Barrel Assembly,12 Ga••VENT RIB ••••.•.•• Barrel Assembly.20 Ga••NENT RIB..• •••• " Breech Bolt.12Ga;;~fi.;."":"••••••••. Breech Bolt,.20 Ga ••••':.~•••;.'•••••.•... Breech Bolt Assembly,12 Ga •••••••••••..• Breech Bolt Assembly,20 Ga•••.•.••.••••• Carrier ••••••..•.'..•.•••..•••.••. Carrier Assembly •'"•••.•...••••..•• Carrier Dog • • •••.• •••. • . . • • • • • • . . . Carrier Dog Follower •• ••• • • • • • •.,. • . • • Carrier Dog Follower Spring ..••••.•.••••• Carrier Dog Pin •••~•••.•••••.••••.•. Carrier Dog Washer.. . • • • • ••.. • • . • • . . . Carrier Pivot TUbe ••••••.••••.•.....• Connector,Left.• • • • • . • : • • • •.1 Restricted I Connector,Right ••..••.••••••IRestricted) Connector Pin ••••.•.•.••.•.•.•••••. Ejector,12 Ga...•.••••••••••••••..• Ejector.20 Ga.• • • • • • • • • • . • • • • •••. • • Ejector Rivet.Front .•••••.••••.•....• Ejector Rivet.Rear ..••, • • . • •..•.•.•. Ejector Spring ....•.•........•.•..•• Action Bar Loc k . . • . ••••••. • Action Bar Lock Spring .••••..• All Barrels lsame gauge)interchangeable without adjustment.Prices furnished upon application. Also give choke and barrel length needed. Field Grade 12.20 Geuge listed below.See added page for·other grades. Extractor...•...•.•..•••.......... Extractor Plunger.. . • • . . • . .•••....• Extractor Spring ...•....•.•......•.. Firing Pin .•....•~•••..•.•...•.... Firing Pin Retaining Pin •••.••••........ Firing Pin Retractor Spring •..•...•..... Fore-end (Wood only)12 Ga... ..... Fore-end (WoOd only)20 Ga ...•.,.•• Fore-end Assembly.12 Ga.• • • •••.•. Fore-end Assembly.20 Ga.. • • . • • . Fore-end Tube Assembly.. . . • . • . . . . . • Fore-end Tube Nut •....•.•.••.•.. Front Sight (Plain Barrell ••.•..•.•., . Front Sight {Vent Ribl Steel Bead •........ Front Sight Retaining Pin (for use on Vent Rib Steel Sight)• • . . • . . . • • . . . • • • . • Grip CaP .•...•....••....•".. Grip Cap Spacer ..•.••.....•••..".• Grip Cap Screw.. . . . • . . . . .•.•.•. Hammer.. . • •......••.....0 ••• Hammer Pin .......•.........•.... Hammer Pin Washer 0 ••• Hammer Plunger ...........•..... Hammer Spring ......•.•.•"..•... Locking Block Assembly ....•;. Locking Block Assembly (oversizel . Magazine Cap ..'... . . . . •... . Magazine Cap Detent 0 • • • • • • • 0 • • • ••••• Magazine Cap Detent Spring .. Magazine Follower,12·20 Ga..•...•... Magazine Plug,3·Shot,Wood . Magazine Spring ..•0 • • • •"••••• Magazine Spring Retainer . . . . .•.... Receiver Assembly,12 Ga... . . ..(Restricted) Receiver Assembly.20 Ga.....O'.lRestricted) Receiver Stud . . . . . . . . . . . .. Recoil Pad.. . . . . . . . . • •.•..0 •• Recoil Pad Screw .•0 ••• • •••• Recoil Pad Spacer..0 ••••••• SafetY . . . • . . .o.• • • Safety Detent Ball .. Safety Spring . . . . . . ..•.... View Part No.No. NOTE 1 18849 2 19622 NOTE 3 4 18545 20016 22860 22862 7 18584 20060 8 15480 9 17416 10 17415 11 18781 12 18760 13 17417 14 17419 15 17551 16 17420 17 25431 24447 18 18646 19 18647 20 18648 21 16176 22 17432 23 17433 24 17436 25 18623 26 17437 20088 20089 27 27552 27553 28 20065 29 18634 30 18673 18796 15660 31 18015 31a 14943 32 25380 33 18749 34 16600 15809 35 •17465 36 19014 37 22325 24075 39 25375 40 17451 41 16791 42 32350 43 18097 44 19479 45 16949 46 20030 20032 47 18551 47a 14620 47b 25410 47c 14944 48 25115 49 23223 50 17514 DELIVERIES ARE F.O.B.ILION,N.Y.PRICES AND PARTS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOl:JT NOTICE ~...i;'f CXYJ 71:JO The Match -Weight Skeet Cap is adjustable to suit individual shooters.Weight of cap will vary from eleven ounces when empty to one pound two ounces when filled with the maximum amount of shot. To adjust.unscrew and rem ave from gun and remove magazine cap.Loosen lock nut and turn rod counter clockwise to increase depth of shot chamber.Fill with number 8 or 9 shot and tighten locknut.Replace magazine cap and reassemble Match·Weight Skeet Cap to gun. ,~'" - ..... - ..." 18849 19622 14706 30020 30025 14439 14440 30040 30041 20615 25410 15387 29795 14741 30130 30131 14280 14452 14721 14678 14441 91222 14742 14806 14297 15702 30050 30051 29810 29811 29815 14276 18796 15660 14295 29920 14279 14961 14960 90497 14878 17496 14901 17501 30081 30080 20041 30931 . 31661 30930 31660 30085 19621 31280 31281 29930 29931 29936 29935 20602 20607 Action Bar Lock .•....•••••..•.•. Action Bar Lock Spring,28 Ga . Action Bar Lock Spring,,41 0 Ga..••..••., . Please list choke needed Barrel Assemblv,28 Ga ••25"Vent Rib •...•• Barrel Assemblv.410 Ga ••25".Vent Rib •••,.-. Breech Bolt.28 Ga..• . .•..•...•.••••.. Breech Bolt.410 Ga..•...'"•.••••••..•• Breech Bolt AssemblV .28Ga . Breech Bolt Assembly.4110 Ga....•..•••••• Butt Plate ..•.•••.•...,•.••.••.,.•••.. Butt Plate Screw (2)•.•••••.• Butt Plate Spacer .....,..... .Carrier,28'Ga·.,.};::;;~....c"" Carrier,410Gci••.,,'::;;C •••;;,. Carrier Assembly.28Ga•.••.•. Carrier AssemblyJ 410 Ga ...." •;..;, Ejector,28 Ga•...•;..•.......•... Ejector,410 Ga ,.•..•.... EjectorRivet ....•, • . ..••••.. Ejector Rivet,Front.41C1 Ga .•.•.•....•••. Extractor 28.Ga., ......... . . . • .•.."•. Extractor 41 0 Ga... . . . • • . . . • . • • • • Extractor Plunger 410 Gil . Extractor Spring 410 Ga .••...•,•••.•••. Firing Pin Retaining Pin .••.•.,...••.•... .Firing Pin Retractor Spring .••.•••..... Fore-end(wood onlyl,28Ga ,..•. Fore-end (woodonlyl.A 10 Ga .•,•.•....... Fore-end Assembly ,28 Cia.•.•.•....•.•.. Fore-endAssembly .41 0 Ga . Fore-end Tube Assembly•....•..••,.•'". Fore-end Tube Nut.. . . . . . . . • . . . .•.•.• J "' Front Sight (for Vent Rib)Steel Bead .•...... Front Sight Retaining Pin (for Vent Rib Steel Sight!..•....•••..•..•,.. Hammer •..,......•.•.•.•.•.••.... Locking Block Assembly .....••..••..•.. Magazine Cap ...."...........•.•...• Magazine Follower.28 Ga . Magazine Follower,A10 Ga,......•,•., Magazine Plug (3'Shot Woodl 28 Ga ...•.....• Magazine Plug (3·Shot Wood I 41 0 Ga..•.•..•. Magazine Spring.28 Ga.....••...•...••. Magazine Spring.410 Ga.......•.•....•. Magazine Spring Retainer . Receiver Assembly.28 Ga (Restricted) Receiver Assembly,41 0 Ga•.......(Restricted) Shell Latch,28 Ga .•Left ...•.....•...... Shell Latch.28 Ga.,Right ........•.••.•• Shell Latch,410 Ga .•Left .......•.. Shell Latch,410 Ga .•Right ... Slide Assembly ....•... Stock Assembly.. . . . ..• Stock Bearing Plate.. . • . . . . • . .•..... Trigger Plate,R.H.Safety.. . . . . . . Trigger Plate,L.H.Safety . Trigger Plate Assembly.28 Ga ••R.H.Safety . Trigger Plate Assembly,410 Ga.R.H.Safety . Trigger Plate Assembly.28 Ga .•L.H.Safety .. Trigger Plate Assembly,410 Ga.,L.H.Safety . Trigger Plate Pin.Front ..•..•..... Trigger Plate Pin,Rear . 31285 NOTE~ 31285 30615 30616 31675 31676 31590 ACCESSORY (Added Cost) MatCh-Weight Skeet Cap._•••••.••.•••. SKEET GRADE For Parts Not Listed,see Field Grade,28 &410 Gauge. Match-Weight Skeet Cap Assembly.28 and 410 Ga ....•••....•......••...-.•.. Barrel Assembly,Skeet Grade,28 Ga ••25",Vent Rib ".........•" . Barrel Assembly,Skeet Grade.410 Ga.,25". Vent Rib ..........•....•...... Fore-end Assembly,28 Ga.SA Grade • . . . . . . Fore-end Assembly.410 Ga.SA Grade•..•.•. Stock Assembly,28 &410 Ga.SA Grade •. '"'··-w-? DELIVERIES ARE F.O.B.ILION.N.Y.PARTS AND PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE For instructions on how to dress.ship and deliciously cook wild game.send for the Remington "Wild Game" Cookbook $3.95 -Remington Sportsmen's Library.P.O.Box 432,Bridgeport,Conn.06601. /,..AUUIIIUNAL GRADES MODEL 870 PUMP ACTION SHOTGUN NOTE:SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING PARTS. Parts Not listed Below Same As Field Grade. PARTS LIST Part No.NAME OF PART List Price Part No.NAME OF'PART List Price 19465 """ 18851 ~18852 18855 25450- 27457 21818 ,-.21819 15665 22570 22571 """ 27557 21823 21824 "'"21151 91482 91481 18918 """18771 25385 19626 ;8052-32523 32520 91483 32500-28505 90905 90906 90904 ~22975 22976 21413 20033-21385 22990 Action Bar Lock.TC ••.•••••••.•••..•.• Barrel Assembly.PLAIN.12Ga.3"MAGNUM ... Barrel Assembly.PLAIN.20 Ga.3"MAGNUM •;• Barrel Assemblv.VENTRIS.12 Ga.3"MAGNUM Barrel Assembly.VENT RIB.20 Ga.3"MAGNUM Barrel AssemblY,BRUSHMASTER,12 Ga •••••• Barrel AssemblY,BRUSHMASTER,20 Ga•.•••• Barrel Assembly,RIFLE SIGHT(20 inch).12 Ga. only•..•.••.•••:,:.,~.•;.:••• Barrel Assembly,POLlCE Grade.12 Ga.only. Barrel AssemblYPQHce Grade (18")12 Ga.only; Barrel:Assembly,SKEET Grade.VENT RIB, 12 Ga.".•:••:.,....,•••,.••.• Barrel Assembly.SKEET Grade.VENT RIB. 20 Ga....•....".,•..•.,.•.,... Barrel Assembly.SKEIET Grade.VENT RIB COMP ••12 Ga..'.,',."..•,.•.•....• Barrel Assembly.SKEET Grade.VENT RIB COMP ,.20 Ga;••.•.••..•.,.•.•., . Barrel Assembly.TB -TC Grade,VENT .RIB Ejector.MAGNUM GradE!(12 Ga.)."_,, . ,•. Ejector.MAGNUM GradE!(20 Ga.l.•••...." Ejector Spring.MAGNUM Grade •.......... Fore-ilnd.{Wood only!.POLICE Grade ..•.... Fore-end,(Wood only),TB Grade,12 Ga ••••... Fore-ilnd.(Wood onlyl,SC Grade.12Ga..•,•.• Fore-ilnd.(Wood onlyl.SCGrade.20 Ga ..•.... Fore-ilnd.(Wood onlyl.TC Grade 12 Ga.,.•.•., Fore-ilnd Assembly.POLICE Grade • ,...•..• Fore-ilnd Assembly.Standard .DeerGun and AP Grade .•., . , • , • , . ,...,.•••.•.~.•. Fore-ilnd Assembly.TB Grade.12 Ga .•••••••. Fore-ilnd Assembly.SC Grade.12 Ga .•.•..... Fore-ilnd Assembly.SC Grade.20 Ga .•••._•.. Fore-ilnd Assembly.TC Grade.,.•••••.•.•. Front Sight {Rifle Sight!12 Ga ••.•.•••.•... Front Sight (Rifle Sight)20 Ga . Front Sight IIvory Bead!VENT RIB .•.•.•... Grip Cap.TB-TC-SC Grade .•••.•.•._..• Grip Cap Screw.TB-TC-SC Grade ..••.•... Magazine Spring.POLICE Grade ..........• Middle Sight ..••.....•••.......•..• Rear Sight Assembly Brushmaster,12 Ga .•.•... Rear Sight Assembly Brushmaster.20 Ga •••... Rear Sight Aperture ......•.....•..... Rear Sight Base... . . • • . . . • . • . • • • . . . . . Rear Sight Base Screw . . . . . • • • . . . . .•.•• Rear Sight Slide •.•.......•...•.••••. Elevation Screw .•....•.•.....••.••.. Windage Screw _...••........•..•.•. Receiver Assembly.MAGNUM Grade.12 Ga ..... Receiver Assembly.MAGNUM Grade,20 Ga .•.•• Receiver Assembly.TB Grade,t 2 Ga ..••.••.• Receiver Assembly.TC Grade.12 Ga.•.•.•••• Recoil Pad,TB-TC Grade {Red!..••...•.•. Stock Assembly.POLICE,DEER GUN.AP Grade 27441 15669 21812 21136 15672 30855 20435 18593 20150 25565 21350 Stock Assembly,TB Grade ••••,•.••.•.•• Stock Assembly.TB Grade,Monte Carlo ••...• Stock Assembly.SC Grade ••••.,•.••••,.• Stock Assembly.TC Grade •••••••I ••, ,•• StOCk Assembly,TC Grade,Monte Carlo ;.,,•• SPECIAL ACCESSORIES Sling Strap Assembly onlyi 7/8"PI~iri ••:•.'••• To Complete for Mounii'ngadd:.. Sling Strap Hooks (2).•.••.•.•.,,•.IEachl Stock Swivel Screw.. • • • . • . • . . . . • . . ..• Swivel Front Assembly.12 and 20 Ga .•..••..• Sling Strap Assembly and Mountings Complete Magazine Plug Assembly (12 Ga.onlyl Vari- Weight,3-Shot.Steel .••••••.••.•••.. ------------_....._---.. PARTS AND PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE DELIVERIES ARE F.O.B.ILlON.N.Y. 20 GA.LW MODEL 870 PUMP ACTION SHOTGUN NOTE:SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR ORDERING PARTS PARTS LIST """ Part No. Note: 14595 -Note: 14778 32305 29796 30132 32050 32051 18647 30052 29812 29816 NAME OF PART Parts not listed below same as 12 Ga. Action Bar Lock . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . . . ... 20 GaugeLW barrels are not interchangeable with regular 20 Gauge Barrels.Prices furnished upon application.Please give choke and barrel length needed. Barrel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,PLAIN,26"...•.. Barrel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,PLAIN,28".•...• BarTel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,PLAIN,28"MAG- NUM Grade....•....••....•.... Barrel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,VENT RIB,26" Barrel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,VENT RIB,28" Barrel Assembly,20 Ga.LW,VENT RIB,28" MAGNUM Grade...•_... Breech Bolt •.. ...... Breech Bolt Assembly .•. Carrier ...........• Carrier Assembly .....••..•. Ejector ...•.•,•..... Ejector,MAGNUM Grade •....•.. Ejector Rivet (21,Rear ..••....•...•..••.. Fore-end IWood only!...••. • ._.•••••. . . Fore-end Assembly . . .•. ..•'.• Fore-end Tube Assembly..• ...••.•.•••.•. List Price Part No. 15999 27730 14295 29921 32296 15995 14448 14962 90497 17496 14281 30082 30083 30140 30932 20049 30086 19621 29932 29937 31280 31281 20602 20607 NAME OF PART Fore-end Tube Nut .•....•.•.••• Front Sight (Plain Barrel).... Hammer •.•.••...... Locking Block Assembly. Magazine Cap Assembly •..•• Magazine Cap •.•• . . . ...•~.•• Magazine Cap Plug •.•..•... Magazine Follower .••...•...•• Magazine Plug,3 -Shot,wood.. . Magazine Spring ..........•... Magazine Spring Retainer •.•.•.•.......• Receiver Assembly.••...•.'.'..•(Restricted) Receiver Assembly/MAG.Grade .•..(Restricted) Slide Assembly . ••.. . • . . • ..•.••.• Shell Latch,Left •....•.••.• Shell Latch,Right..•... . . . . . Stock Assembly ..~'.•.•.•..•..•. Stock Bearing Plate •..••......• Trigger Plate Assembly,R.H.Safety .. Trigger Plate Assembly,.L.H.Safety .• Trigger Plate,R.H.Safety .•• Trigger Plate,L H.Safety .•.,••••......• Trigger Plate Pin,>Front •••..•.•..._•... Trigger Plate Pin,Rear .;;.~.•';•••..•..••• List Price OElIVERllES ARE·f.O.B.llION;N.Y..",~-:.-~~PARTS AND.PRICES SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE ~ra. g, ~ ,~'"~ III ~~ Z 0'_Q!::. a-~a~.?!z:;....fu.).iE=·~<~0-e n°VI-::::II 0"a.;'28.:'w~.~5. ~~;.;:!......=Z 0:<0 i ~.n~.. .-g a.... ~ ;; ~ ."c: 3: ." » (") -f-oz en ::t:o -t C) c:z 3:o C I'T'Ir- eo......c - OLYMPUS STEREO MICROSCOPES INSTRUCTION MANUAL MODELS VMF,VMT&VMZ - ....,..-...".", OLYMPUS - This instruction manual has been written for the use of the Olympus Stereo Microscopes Models VMF,VMT and VMZ.It is recommended that you read the manual carefully in order to familiarize yourself fully with the use of the microscope so that you can obtain optimum performance. IMPORTANT •Operation 1.Always handle the microscope with the care it deserves and avoid abrupt motions. 2.Avoid exposure of the microscope to direct suniight,high temperature,high relative hurnidity~dust and vibration . •Maintenance 1.Lenses must always be kept clean.Fine dust on lens surfaces should be blown or wiped off by means of an air blower or gauze.Carefully wipe off oil or fingerprints deposited on the lens surfaces,with gauze moistened with a small amount of xylene,alcohol or ether. 2.Do not use organic solutions to wipe the surfaces of various components.Plastic parts, especially,should be cleaned with a neutral detergent. 3.Never disassemble the microscope for repair. 4.The microscope should be stored in its container immediately after use.If this is not possible,it should be covered with the vinyl dust cover provided.It is best to keep lenses in a desiccator,containing silica gel. CONTENTS - I.MAIN CHARACTERISTK:S . II.STANDARD EQUIPMENT . III.lOENTIFICATION AND FUNCTION OF VARIOUS COMPONENTS IV.ASSEMBLY V.OPERATION VI.OPTICAL DATA VII.USE::OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES A.Auxiliary Lenses VM-AL O.5X,VM-AL O.75X,VM-AL 1.5X and VM-AL 2X B.Simple Polarizing Filter Set VM-POL C.Incident Illuminator VM-LSG D.Mounting Bracket VM-STI Page 1 1 2 3 4 6 7 7 7 8 8 ..- J10dels jer..J;o tim n I.MAIN CHARACTERISTICS The VM Series Stereo Microscopes include three types of stereo microscope bodies -VM F. VMT and VMZ.The Model VMF is provided with one objective pair built into the binocular stereomicroscope body,and the Model VMT with two parfocal objective pairs in a turret built in the microscope body.while the Model VMZ features a continuously variable zoom system objective control in the body. 1.Model VMF Microscope body Objective VMF-1 lX VMF-2 2X VMF-4 4X 2.Model VMT Microscope body Objective VMT-2 lX -2X VMT-4 lX -4X 3.Model VMZ Objective Microscope body in zoom system VMZ-4 lX -4X -wi!Jd 10SI _..:d ;ther. pC!s. is not I k~p - PQ,Qe A 7- II.STANDARD EQUIPMENT VMF-VMT-VMZ- Component l-S l-SA 2-S 2-SA 4-S 4-SA 2-S 2-SA 4-S 4-SA 4-S 4·SA with built-in objective 1 X 0 0 VMF-l with built-in objective 2X 0 0 VMF-2 with built-in objective 4X 0 0 Binocular VMF-4 sterEKlmicro- scope body with objectives I1X-2X in turret 0 0 VMT-2 "with objectives 1X-4X in turret 0 0 VMT-4 with zoom system objective 1 X-4X I 0 0 VMZ-4 Standard stand VM·STA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 0I Widefield eyepieces GWl OX ,paired 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 !0 Clear glass plate 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o i 0 0 0 Stage plates Black and frosted I !II !o I0 0 i 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0whiteplasticplateIIIi! ! , Stage clips,paired 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 i 0 Eyeshields.paired 0 0 0 0 0 ,0 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 Ref!,acted and transmitted I \ 0 I 0 0 0 I 0 0 illumination base VM-ILA i , Vinyl dust cover 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 - III.IDENTIFICATION AND FUNCTION OF VARIOUS COMPONENTS The photo below shows the Model VMT·2·S. - ..... - - - """ - Eyepieces . Diopter adjustment ring Rotate to obtain accurate diopter aeJjustment. Magnification turret (with VMT) Or zoom control ring (with VMZ) Microscope body clamping screw Thread for incident il· luminator Objective shroud Threaded for mounting auxiliary lens or polarizing filter. Stage plate clamping screw Additional holes for stage clips 2 Binocular observation tube Rotate the tube for inter· pupillary distance adjust· ment. Microscope body Thread for reflected il· luminator mounting bracket Focusing knob Rotate until correct focus is obtained.From the posi· tion as photographed the microscope body can be raised by 58mm or lowered by 48mm. Bushings for mirror unit Incident light exit Stage clip ~=o,---,--- Reflected and Transmitted Illumination Base VM-I LA On-off switch- reflected ii- '-ounting Oct ing knob l correct focus FrCl<lill the posi- )tog phed the bo can be mm or I,owered Fuse holder Mirror unit Mirror IV.ASSEMBLY Mounting pin Light path selector switch T:Transmitted light. R:Reflected light. R,Reflected and transmitted T'light. Clamping screws Clamp base to stand. Lamp socket Lamp housing clamping knob The lamp housing cover can be opened by pulling down the knob;or closed by pushing it up until it snaps in place. Before pushing.ascertain that the knob is positioned as shown in the picture below right,marked with circle. The picture below illustrates the sequential procedure of assembly.The numbers indicate' the assembly order of various components. Microscope body Jr n"""'ror unit ght exit.- ,.- - Eyeshield J) ,<SJ '()Eyepiece ~ Clamping screw ·SeeNOTE. Stage clip ---u:® ~---------,Q)r------~=a:::r-......_-'---ri Stage plates:Clear c:::::::::I B&W 3 ____________,-...~__.c.L_ Jncident illu- minator mount- ing thread Standard stand "'NOTE: As this screw can also be used at the incident illu- minator mounting thread, you can choose a better position for mounting the incident illuminator so that it does not block your smooth operation. - - v.OPERATION The stage plates fit into the circular opening in the base.The clear plate can be used for both reflected and transmitted illumination.Cotored background can be achieved by ,placing suitable material beneath the plate,for contrast,etc.The frosted.plate is used with reflected illumination.The plate is frosted white on one side,and b~ck on the other.If the specimen is white or brightly colored,use the black side of the plate to increase image contrast by darkening the background.For dark or black specimens.reverse the plate with the white frosted side facing the objective. Fig.1 - - 1.Tension Adjustment of Focusing Knobs This focusing mechanism makes its motion freely adjustable for either heavy or light movement depending on the observer's preference.To adjust the tension hold the two focusing knobs with both hands and slightly rotate them in the opposite directions,at the same time.(Fig.1) 2.Specimen on the Stage Plate Place a specimen in the center of the stage plate and clamp it with the stage clips,if necessary.(Fig.2) 3.Interpupillary Distance Adjustment Hold the right and left eyepiece tubes with both hands and push or pull the tubes in the arrow directions until perfect binocular vision is obtained. (Fig.3) 4.Diopter Adjustmel1t Fig.2 I ] - a)Looking through the right eyepiece with your right eye,focus on the specimen with the focusing knobs. NOTE;In case of the Model VMT or Model VMZ.ascertain thanhe'high 'magnification objectives are used for this adjustment. ·b)Look at the image through the left eyepiece with your left eye,and rotate the diopter adjustment ring Q)to focus on the specimen.without using the focusing knobs.(Fig.4) NOTE:If accurate interpupillary distance and diopter adjustments are not accom- plished,prolonged observation would put considerable strain on the observer's eyes. , J Fig.3 Fig.4 4 -:...._-- 5.Objective Changes Jsec for Ned by is e""ted Or!:he Jlate'to ,reverse- r: ,J :\... I 1 The Model VMT is provided with two objective pairs.Rotate the turret until the objective pair of your choice is engaged. In case of the Model VMZ,rotate the zoom control ring until you obtain the desired magnification within the magnification range. 6.Use of Eyeshields Eyeshields are recommended to prevent glare and loss of contrast caused by ambient light hitting the eye. 7.Use of the Reflected and Transmitted Illumination Base VM-I LA al Water sealed light exits on the base prevent damage from water spills. 1}Activate the on-off switch CD . R:Reflected light via mirror unit.Adjust the mirror @ so that the I ight hits the center of the stage plate. Standard stand OC ,:rungsten bulb Insert into lamp socket. push and rotate clockwise. L-==~i.J.._-...J'-f--~To AC outlet. Clamping screw Mirror unit '1]. 2)Set the light path selector switch ®. T:Transmitted light.Use clear stage plate. b}It provides even illumination with all objective powers except the auxiliary lens VMcAL O.5X. c}If light intensity is too high,it can be reduced by placing a 45mm-diameter NO filter on the light exit on the base. d}Setup. e)Use., I diopter {Fr""4} - ..- en ith lifiGa4:ion aCt.IJm- lserver's- rr D ~:Combination reflected and transmitted light.Fig.5 5 - -- - - - VI.OPTICAL DATA •Models VMF and VMT Eyepieces GW10X ·GWH10X(23)G15X(13)G20X(12.2) Objectives (Field number 22)Optional ·Total ·Field Total Field Total Field Total Field magnif.of view magnif.of view magnif.of view magnif.of view lX lOX 22mm lOX 23mm 15X 13mm 20X 12.2mmr---·W.O.2X 20X llmm 20X ll.5mm 30X 6.5mm 40X'6.1mmr---90mm 4X 40X 5.5mm 40X 5.75mm 60X 3.25mm BOX 3.05mm •Model VMZ (Data below are obtained at zoom magnification setting positions) Eyepieces Objective GW10X ·GWH10X(23)G15X(13)G20X(12.2) (Zoom (Field number 22)magnif.Optional lX to4X)·Total ·Field Total Field Total Field Total Field magnif.of view magnif.of view magnif.of view magnif.of view lX lOX 22mm lOX 23mm 15X 13mm 20X 12.2mm- 2X ·W.O.20X llmm 20X 11.5mm 30X 6.5mm 40X 6.10mm- 3X 90mm 30X 7.33mm 30X 7.67mm 45X 4.33mm 60X 4.07mm- 4X 40X 5.5mm 40X 5.75mm 60X 3.25mm BOX 3.05mm ·REMARKS GWH10X:Widefield high eyepoint eyepiece. W.O.:Working distance betwee.1 specimen and objective front lens. Total magnification =Objective power x Eyepiece power 'F'ld f'd'_-Field number of eyepieceIeaViewlameter-Ob"Jectlve power 6 ..-::._.;:...__•J t -~-- VII.USE OF OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES A.'Auxiliary Lenses VM·AL O.SX,VM·AL O.75X,VM-AL 1.5X andVM-AL 2X II _Field nit,of view --,----.-,,- VM·AL O.5X VM·AL O.75X VM-AL 1.5X VM·AL 2X ~mm X ~6,l~m X 3.05mm When threaded into the objective shroud,each of these auxiliary lenses permits change of total magnification without changing objective or eyepiece. Auxiliary lens "VM-AL O.5X VM-AL O.75X VM-AL 1.5X VM-AL 2X W.O.156mm(6.14")101mm(4")43mm(1.7")29mm(1.14") Total magnification =Objective power x Eyepiece power x Auxiliary lens power F 'Id f'd'.--:-:---:-----:-F_i_e-'Id_nu_m----,ob_e-:-r-,o_f-,e-,-y-,e,--p_ie_c..:..,e _Ie 0 view lameter In mm ::_ , , Objective power x Auxiliary lens power ;2c"":(12.2) UFieid nit of view ~2mm X '·6.10mm X 4.07mm X 3.05mm "NOTE:The VM-AL O.5X requires an exten- sion tube (VM-ET)in conjunction with the standard stand because of its considerably long working distance. After screwing the VM-AL O.5X into the objective shroud,attach the exten- sion tube in position between the objective shroud and the standard stand as illustrated right: ~~~Objective shroud (with VM-AL O.5X) Extension tube VM·ET Standard stand Polarizer -B.Simple Polarizing Filter Set VM-POL This unit enables observation of birefringent material in transmitted light. ~.AnaIY,e, ~Rotation knob Insert the polarizer into the base opening beneath the stage plate,aligning the white dot to the recess in the opening edge,and screw the analyzer into the threaded objective shroud. Rotate the analyzer rotation knob,looking through the eyepieces,until extinction is achieved, 7 C.Incident Illuminator VM·LSG The Model VM-LSG is connected to the transformer TL and can be inserted into the microscope stand or clamped to the transformer by means of a jointed bracket for incident illumination. a)Setup. Bulb (LS 15) c::sI ""--~--====Q:: Transformer Line cord (to AC outlet) Voltage adjust- ment knob Screw I Filter 25C ~ I Filter 25G533 Illuminator ~Clamping screw bracket Standard stand b)The light intensity of the incident illuminator is adjusted by means of the voltage adjustment knob on the transformer .. c)A daylight filter 25C and a green contrast filter 25G533 are provided. D.Mounting Bracket VM·STI Permits mounting of the microscope body to the universal table stands Models VS-4.VS-5 or on a custom mounting post on any machine or instrument you own or manufacture, through the 24.5mm diameter opening. Clamping screw / Body clamping screw /., Body mounting port i Focusing knob - Tension adjustment identical to standard stand. Focusing range:58.5mm. 8 12343_08 --, -~-~I LJ LA BOllA 'tOil\''tUIIB,O'AfE'tEII MOdel 2100A 1-IS-BO-12EO j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j j J \ \ \ .~ .. ~I ........:;.-..: 12684-00 2479-00 2480-00 2481-00 12652-00 ;".. !:Page 13,Step 8~h~gei~>read as follows:..'"'.....,.':,k~}:·:, ;:..<,S"':"With 'th~'ee'il~~i¥;~,9ut .of the instru~ent,insert'the 0.6t Chl~i~~~nz...~ene turbidity staodafi:.~,?~.~._.~.f.bi··{::J~·~':--~::r0t~i1f)e·,;::C<?ver,*lit.Ri't~e.lightshieid'and s~t therangecs~lection switchtlfLQ;Adjustthe 1.O-NTU ." ,;,rangei~immer:pot<~ntiometertoobtain a 0.61-NTU reading on the 1.0 meter scale.. P~ge 22,Parts.Lst-cl1~Jge the turbidity standards kit to read as follows:'. ,Kit,tur6i~itY ~tandardization ~"'"' '.-. O.61-NTU chlorobenzenestandard . 10-NTU latex standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . lOO-NTU latex standard . lOOO-NTU latex standard . .....................r-"0 il-iL":O"··_ TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Specifications 4 Principle of Operation.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 """Sample Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Cell Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Calibration '.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Preparation of Formazin Standards.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Standardizati.on 8 Special Analytical Determinations .,..............................................8 Stray Light '.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Start-Up 8 ~ Operational Notes 8 Range Selection :.....................................................10 Cleaning the Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...10 Lens and Focus 10 Lamp Replacement ~._: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 Photomultiplier Tube Replacement.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11 Range Adjustment 12 Troubleshooting 14 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...22 Repair Service '".. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...23 Factory Service Centers 23 Warranty.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...23 -, - Figure I Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 ILLUSTRA TlONS Light Path Diagram ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Features and Accessories.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Optical Assembly Diagram ~. 7 Back Panel Pictorial.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Instrument Focusing II ,Range Trimmer Potentiometer Adjustment.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...12 Transistor Assem blies 19 Schematic 21 _-"--'r £--"'-_ - SPECIFICATIONS ACCURACY Within ±2%of full scale REPRODUCIBILITY Within ±2%of full scale SENSITIVITY Better than ±0.5%of full scale STANDARDIZATION Turbid solutions with known turbidity values CALIBRATION Formazin STRAY LIGHT Less than 0.04 NTU equivalent on low ranges Less than 0.5 NTU equivalent on 0 -100and 0 -1000 ranges DARK CURRENT Less than 1.0%of full scale VOLTAGE STABILITY No change in specification from 95 -135 Vor 190 -270 V RANGES 0-0.2NTU 0-1.0NTU 0-10NTU 0-100NTU 0-1000NTU RESPONSE TIME Less than one second SAMPLE REQUIRED 25 ml 0,'all ranges WEIGHT Net:171bs Shipping:231bs POWER REQUIREMENTS Manually adjustable for 95 -135 Vae,50 -60 Hz,35 W,or 190 -270 Vac,50 -60 Hz,35 W CASE CONSTRUC'"ION Heavy gauge steel with corrosion-resistant painted finish Black case with blue front DIMENSIONS 9"hig·h (without light shield)x12"wide x BW deep Model 21 DDA,complete with all accessories 4 sample cells,25 mm 1 cell riser and retriever tool 4 turbidity standards,in case 1 focusing template 1 dust cover 1 light shield 1 instruction manual HACH LABORATORY TURBIDIMETER Model2100A The Model 2100A Turbidimeter is a true nephe- lometer used for the measurement of turbidity in-liquids. ..... ..... - PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The 2100A operates on the principle that light, passing through a substance,is scattered by partic- ulate matter suspended in the substance.In the 2100A,a strong light beam is sent upward through a ceH containing a sample.As the beam passes through the turbidity particles,an amount of light (proportional to turbidity present)is scattered at a 900 angle to the beam and is received by a photomultiplier tube.See Figure 1.This light energy is,in turn,converted to an electrical signal which is measured by the instrument's panel meter. SAMPLE CELLS The turbidimeter is furnished with four sample cells (see Figure 2)which should be maintained in a clean cpndition.The instrument is sensitive to fingerprints Or dirt,particularly in the 0 -I or 0 - 0.2 NTU ranges.Before each use,clean all sample cells,inside and out,with a good soap or other cleaning solution and rinse in demineralized water. Wipe the outside of the cell with a lens tissue or towel that will not leave an oil film. CELL RISER Whe:n measuring turbidities on the 0 -100 and 0 - 1000 NTU ranges,a cell riser is inserted into the cell holder assembly to raise the sample cell.See Figure 3.The riser decreases the light path length which results in increased linearity in the measure- ment of high turbidities.A foam and plastic retriever tool is included with the accessories to remove the cell riser from the instrument. The cell riser must not be used when measuring turbidities on the 0 -0.2.0 - I and 0 -10 ranges. Use of the cell riser on these lower turbidity ranges will result in a significant measuring error. LIGHT SHIELD SAMPLE CELL LENSES LAMP FIGURE 1 PHOTOMUL TIPLIER TUBE LIGHT PATH DIAGRAM ,... .... .... FIGURE 2 CALIBRATION Calibration of this instrument is based on Forma- zin,a material that can be made by synthesis and reeroduced repeatedly within one percent.When properly mixed,it is uniform in the number size, and shape of its particles,thus making it an ideal turbidity standard.The unit of measure used in this instrument is the Nephelometric Turbidity Unit (NTU). The following formula for preparing a Formazin stock suspension rated at 4000 NTU is provided for those investigators who may wish to work with other turbidity units or who may want to check thei r turbid i ty stand ard s. PREPARATION OF FORMAZIN STANDARD (See Parts List for ordering chemicals) 1.Dissolve 5.000 grams of reagent grade hydra- ·6- FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES zine sulfate (N 2H4 'H2S04 )in about 400 ml of distilled water. 2.Dissolve 50.000 grams of pure hexamethyl- enetetramine in about 400 ml of distilled water. 3.Pour the two solutions into a one-liter volu- metric flask and dilute to volume with dis- tilled water. 4.Allow the solution to stand for 48 hours at 200 -220 C (68 0 -720 F).During this time the suspension will develop. The following table gives the relationship between dilutions of the stock suspension prepared per preceding instructions and NTU's.When diluting the suspension,use "turbidity-free"distilled or demineralized water.Be sure to adequately mix the stock suspension prior to removing a portion for dilution. ... ...., - .... TURBIDITY STANDARD FOCUSING _-IIlJ~-'; TEMPLATE SAMPLECOMPARTMENT---~~ DOOR BLACK PLASTIC ------------:;"..,::.;""'-<1P"'--'"7'T RING OPTICAL ASSEMBLY RETAINING SCREWS (41 SET SCREW -r---lr----.J.....t-. LENS ASSEMBL Y DETAIL i!iENS1 LENS RET,AINING ,'. SPRING LENS SPACER SPRING LENS 2 FfGURE 3 I I ! +'--+---LIGHT SHIELD l"1;,J,1...!"':"~--SAMPLE CELL : 1 PHOTOMULTIPLIER.:., ;,TUBE RETAINING (.~. :SCR EWS (21 ~"~':~ ~t:i:~~¥i:i~!~~;"'1r:;:;~~ -t--+--...;....PHOTOMULTIPLIER ~,~ TUBE SOCKET ~ ASSEMBL~.,~) '".....-.--",- ~!::+J-"7"'.::.._---"i'f-LENS ASSEMBLY "'"{_detail at Iefd OPTICAL ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM -7- NTIJ's ml of Stock Suspension Diluted to 1.000 liter with "'Turbidity-free"Water 1000 ·.............250 500 ·...............125 100 ·.............25 50 ............12.5 10 ·............2.5 5 ·............1.25 1 .............0.25 minimizing stray light in the optical system is important.In the 2100A Turbidimeter,the amount of stray light has been determined to be 0.035 to 0.040 NTU on the·0-0.2,0-1 and 0-10 ranges.This is significant only on the 0-0.2 range and it is recommended that 0.04 be subtracted from the reading when using this range . OPERATIONAL NOTES The sample size for all turbidity measurel ments should be 25 (±I mI).Variations in sample volume can affect the accuracy of the I ( determinations.''1'i r\f\t-/J 1. ,8- STANDARDIZAnON STRAY LIGHT In the design of optical instruments,the matter of The Formazin stock suspension is stable for 6 to 12 months,whereupon it should be discarded.The diluted samples are stable for no more than two days. lhese four standards are secondary standards and are not stable indefinitely.When flocculation ..~egins~they should be rep~c:~~.A '?;n_~kC,;-d/4J7~-.d/~~-~~ub'/J: j//7/}.'A"/:J /~4'b..--n~,4M-~.~/?~../,r/----i/.t:~-_~C% START-UP 1.The instrument is normally wired for 115 V, 50/60 Hz operation.If desired,it can be ordered for 220 V,50/60 Hz.The operating voltage can be changed manually in the field by changing the jumper arrangement on TB-l.See Figure 4 Refer to the note on the Instrument standardization is achieved with the aid instrument schematic for the appropriate of four liquid turbidity standards,one for each jumpering.After it has been determined that range except the lowest.The turbidities of all four the instrumen t is connected for the proper standards are based on Formazin dilutions.The voltage,it should be plugged into a grounded standards (furnished with the instrument)are rated outlet. at~10,100 and 1000 NTU and areJ::Onta»t~·!1J..._,2..Before turning the instrument on,note 0,("../f'pf~6 ~lXAV')A1€ ,sealed glass tubes.The first (~is a IHgh IB -whether the meter needle is at the zero point. ~~~1ar-we.ig~issotvedin wa~r If it is not,zero the instrument by turning the 1f1r?Sf three standards are liquid latex solutions.When small screw located on the meter.See Figure placed in the instrument,the standards scatter an 2. amount of fight proportional to the NTUi"atings 3.Turn the power switch __on.The amplifier and specified on the tubes.Standardization is power supplies in the instrument are stable accomplished by selecting the desired i'ange,plac-with line voltage and temperature changes. ing the appropriate standard in the instrument and,However,due to the inherent characteristics with the light shield in place,adjusting the of photomultiplier tubes,maximum accuracy STANDARDIZE control -to obtain a meter will be achieved if the instrument is allowed to reading equal to the NTU value of the standard.operate for approximately 12 hours before it When standardizing the 100 and 1000-NTU is standardized and read ings are taken. ranges,the cell riser must be.used.See Figure 3.4.Check the instrlfment for proper focusing. Vibrations during shipment may cause lamp movement.Refer to Lens and Focus para- graph on page 10. ~1 J 1 1 -j 1 I J 1 j 1 j J -.]) CONNECTOR NO.2 .1 X v ~RANGE TRIMMER~I I POTENTIOMETERS BACK PANEL PICTORIAL -e:::r 00 -e::::J-o "b .g;:O ~-- ~ HIGH VOL TAGE CIRCUIT BOARD B-2 CAUTION 00 NOT APPLY LINE POWER TO THIS PANEL UNLESS PHOTOMUL· TlPLIER TUBE IS CONNECTEO.OR DAMAGE TO POWER SUPPLY MAY RESULT. -~--1If---CIR~t~:~:J.'rJB-1 TERMINAL BARRIER TB-I 6 5 •3 ~..:;;'~I t.::'L;'A-":SSlo·Blol 0 /<'SECURING NUT i >::;:::i G ;~ ~.-th qu 0 FIGURE 4 \ ; ) j j \ ~ co ,~ - "... """ - 2.When measuring the lower ranges (0-10,0-1 and especially 0-0.2 NTU),air bubbles in the sample will cause false high readings.Before covering the cell with the light shield,observe the sample in its cell.If finely divided air bubbles are present,five minutes may be required before--the bubbles can rise past the photomultiplier tube so that a valid reading can be taken.Bubbles may be eliminated rapidly and completely by dipping the end of the filled sample cell into an ultrasonic cleaning bath.When measuring the turbidity of viscous or thick solutions,it may be necessary to use a centrifuge to remove entrapped air from the sample.If a centrifuge is used,place rubber cushions in the centri- fuge cups and fill the cups with water prior to inserting the turbi.dimeter sample cells.This will reduce the possibility of damage to the sample cells. 3.If a water sample being tested is super- sa turated with oxygen,air bubbles may appear on the sides of the sample cell in sufficient numbers to prevent turbidity meas- urement.This problem can be corrected by placing a drop of membrane-filtered Triton X-lOO®Solution in the cell before filling with the water sample., 4.When measuring high amounts of turbidity,it may be necessary to dilute the sample in order to bring it within the range of the instrument.If the sample)s extremely turbid or highly colored,the meter may read less than the actual amount of turbidity present. When a sample appears to contain more turbidity than the meter reads,the sample should be diluted with another portion of sample that has been filtered.Diluting with distilled or deionized water may dissolve some of the turbidity.The remeasured turbidity of the diluted sample should then be multiplied ®Trademark of Rohm &Haas Co. -10 - by the dilution factor to obtain the turbidity of the original sample.If the accuracy of the reading is still questionable,further dilutions should be conducted. 5.When through with the measurements,best performance will be gained from the photo- multiplier tube by I)removing the sample cell from the cell holder,2)closing the sample compartment door,and 3)leaving the range switch in the 1000 or 100 position.The instrument is designed to run continually and leaving it on will improve the performance of the lamp and multiplier tube. 6.The liquid standards supplied with the instru- ment should be stored in their case and kept at room temperature.Excess light and/or heat will affect their stability.Use care when handling the standards to avoid scratching or otherwise marring the glass surfaces.When in use,they must be clean and free of finger- prints. RANGE SELECTION The sensing range of the turbidimeter is changed by turning the range selection switch on the front panel.Each range has been factory calibrated and readjustment should not be necessary except in some cases when either the photomultiplier tube or the high voltage circuit board is replaced. CLEANING THE LENSES Unplug the power cord and open the back panel of the turbidimeter.The lens assembly is held in place by a brass retaining screw on the side of the cell holder assembly.See Figure 3.Before removing the lens assembly,be sure to mark its original position in the cell holder so that the factpry focusing of the instrument is not changed when the unit is reassembled.Wipe each lens with a tissue or towel that will not leave an oil film. LENS AND FOCUS Each cell holder assembly is focused at the factory with the aid of the focusing template furnished with the instrument.Inside the template is a LIGHT IMAGE TOO SMALL LIGHT IMAGE TOO LARGE CORRECT LIGHT IMAGE FIGURE 5 INSTRUMENT FOCUSING ~ 1. 2. ~ 3.Position the lamp bracket to center the lamp image,then retighten the lamp adjusting screw. Caution:This adjustment must be made with power applied to the instrument.Do not apply \power unless photomultiplier tube is connected,or damage to power supply may result. Locate and remove the pair of lamp assembly lead wires attached to terminals I and 2 on TB-l.See Figure 4. Remove the lamp by twisting approximately 1/8 of a turn counterclockwise (looking down on bulb).See Figure 3. Remove the transparent plastic cover over terminal barrier TB-I. Disconnect the power cord and open the back panel of the instrument. Lift the lamp up and pull the lead wires through the center of the lamp socket. Open the sample compartment door on top of the instrument and carefully remove the black plastic ring inside.See Figure 3. While holding the cell holder assembly,turn out the four screws concealed beneath the black plastic ring. PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE REPLACEMENT 3. 1. 2. 5. 6.After lamp replacement,the parts should be reassembled in reverse order and the lens focus checked,using the focusing template included. Caution:Do not apply line power to the instru- ment unless photomultiplier tube is connected,or damage to power supply may result. 4. 2. 3. Open the back panel of the instrument. If the lamp image still does not completely fill the circle,or if it is larger than the circle,the lens assembly needs to be adjusted.Loosen the brass lens assembly retaining screw and adjust the"assembly up or down until the image just nlls the circle on the focusing "template.Be careful not to get fingerprints on the lens. View from above,through the sample cell holder opening.The lamp image must be centered in the circle of the focusing tem- plate.If it is not,loosen the lamp adjusting screw directly above and behind the lamp.See Figure 3. translucent plastic disc engraved with a circle. When the template is placed in the cell holder assembly,the instrument is properly focused if the image of the lamp completely fills the circle but does not extend beyond it.See Figure 5.If the image is off-center,or too small or large,"readjust- ment should be made as follows: .4. ""'" .... - LAMP REPLACEMENT I.Unplug the power cord,unscrew the back p<lnel fastener and open door. 4.Carefully re.nlOve the cell holder assembly, with photomultiplier tube mounting block <lttached,from the case. - - ..... 5.Remove the cable clamp retaining screw that secures the cable to the photomultiplier tube moun ting block. 6.The photomultiplier tube is retained in the plastic block by the two screws which also secure the socket assembly circuit board.Re- move the two screws and slide the photo- multiplier tube out. 7.Remove the photomultiplier tube from its socket assembly and insert a new tube. 8.Slide the photomultiplier tube in the black plastic mounting block.Be sure that the fine wire grid of the tube faces the cell holder and the photomultiplier tube shield is placed so that it does not block light to the tube. 9.Replace the two retaining screws and cable clamp and reinstall the cell holder assembly in reverse order of disassembly. Caution:Do not apply power to instrument unless photomultiplier tube is connected,or damage to power supply may result. 10.Because of the inherent characteristics of new photomultiplier tubes,a conditioning period is required before recalibration and routine RANGE TRIMMER FIGURE 6 POTENTIOMETER ADJUSTMENT .-12 . usage.To condition the newly installed photomultiplier tube,turn the instrument on, set the range selector knob to the 0.2 range, insert the focusing template into the cell holder (to block the light)and place the light shield in place.Allow the instrument to condi- tion the photomultiplier tube for 72 hours. I I.After 72 hours of conditioning,check the standardization and tracking from range to range using the liquid standards.If the instru- ment will not standardize and lor track from range to range,perform range adjustments as described in the following procedure. 12.Select the 1,000 range and place the cell riser in the cell holder. 13.Place the 1000-NTU turbidity standard in the cell holder,cover with the light shield and verify an exact reading of 1000.Adjust the STANDARDIZE control if necessary. 14.With the instrument still in the 1000 range, substitute the 100-NTU standard in the cell holder and verify a reading of 100.If the reading is high or low,the adjustable cell holder base knot set properly.Open the rear panel and loosen the allen head set screw securing the base adjustment.Insert the tool provided into the top of the cell holder and slightly rotate the base clockwise if the reading is too low or counterclockwise if too high.Repeat Steps 13 and 14 until the proper setting is attained and tight.en the set screw. RANGE ADJUSTMENT The calibration of each sensing range is set by five trimmer potentiometers located on circuit board assem bly B-2 (at the top of the back panel assembly),See Figures 4 and tl,These are factory adjusted for accurate readings on all ranges and should not normally require readjustment.In case the photomultiplier tube or high voltage circuit board is replaced,range a~justl11ent may be re- quired.From time to time.it is advisable to check .... the range adjustment settings by using the four turbidity standard tubes as follows: Caution:This adjustment must be made with power applied to the instrument. 1.Place the cell riser in the cell holder and insert the I OOO-NTU standard.Standardize the tur- bidimeter to give a 1000 reading on"the 1000 range. 2.Place the I OO-NTU standard in the cell holder and select the 100 range.A 100 (±2)reading should be obtained.If the reading is in error, range adjustment is .required. 3.Remove the cell riser and repeat the proce- a·b.1 dure with the 10 and +:6-NTU standards. Determine if range adjustment is necessary. If range adjustment is required,the following procedure should be used: 1.Ir the instrument has been on for several days proceed La Step 3.If not proceed as follows: turn the instrument on and adjust to range 0.2.Fill a sample cell with tap water,place it in the sample cell holder and cover with the light shield.Allow the instrument to stand for at least 12 hours . 2.Remove the sample cell. 3.Turn the range select knob to 1000,place the cell riser in the cell holder,insert the 1000 NTU standard and cover with the light shield. "" 6. 7. 8. 9. range must always be adjusted first.) With the cell riser still in place,insert the 100-NTU latex standard tube,cover with the light shield and set the range selector switch to 100.Adjust the 100-NTU range trimmer potentiometer to obtain an exact full-scale reading. Remove the cell riser and insert the 10-NTU latex standard tube,cover with the light shield and switch the range selector to 10. Adjust the 10-NTU range trimmer potentiom- eter to obtain an exact full-scale meter read- ing. With t e cl rise~outofthe instrument,insert •/c' ..... 4.Turn the STANDARDIZE control on the front panel fully counterclockwise and note the meter reading.Then turn control clockwise until twice this reading is obtained ..... Leave -the STANDARDIZE control in this position for calibrations of all ranges except the 0-0.2 range. 5.Adjust the 1000 range trimmer potentiometer to obtain an exact full-scale meter reading.To do this,open the back panel with one hand and adjust the 1000 potentiometer with the other hand.See Figure 6.(The 1000-NTU .13 - 10.Restandardize the instrument using the ap- propriate turbidity standard. TROUBLESHOOTING -Symptom I -Instrument functions but will not .standardize with STANDARDIZE control turned P""fully clockwise. Caution:AIl checks made with power on must be .....made with photomultiplier tube connected or damage to power supply may result. - ,.... - Introduction This section contains troubleshooting procedures to facilitate the isolation and repair of the instru- ment circuits.Standard procedures and practices for repair of electronic equipment must be exer- cised when testing and replacing parts. When a malfunction is detected,all connectors and cables should be checked first to insure proper connection.Each printed circuit board should also be checked to insure proper mating with its associated connector.Other basic checks for such items as defective indicating lamps and fuses should also be performed prior to checking the internal circuits. Test Equipment The Simpson Model 260 Volt-Ghmmeter (VOM) (or equivalent)is recommended for maintenance and troubleshooting.This is a 20,000 ohms/V dc, 5,000 ohms/V ac meter. Disassembly Access to all electrical components in the instru- ment is possible by simply opening the door on back of the case. will be audible when the potentiometer reaches the adjustment end stop. D.Restandardize the instrument by using the STANDARDIZE control.If the instrument still will not standardize and the STAND- ARDIZE control is fully clockwise,continue to Step E. E.Check the lamp voltage and adjust if neces- sary for 4.5 V de as described in Step C of Symptom III.If lamp voltage is correct,check the photomultiplier tube assembly to make sure that the shield is not blocking part of the light to the tube.Refer to Photomultiplier Tube Replacement.If the shield is not at fault,replace the photomultiplier tube. Symptom II -Instrument measures turbidity,but pilot lamp does not illuminate. A.Check for loose wires. B.Pilot lamp DS-2 is defective and should be replaced. Symptom III -Instrument will not measure tur- bidity,but pilot lamp is on. A.Open back panel to see if lamp DS-I is on.If it is not,replace. B.If the new lamp does not illuminate,proceed to Step D. C.If the new lamp lights,but appears to be very bright: I.Turn instrument off and unplug power cord. A.- B.- c.. F' Select the 100 range and rotate the STAND- ARDIZE control fully countercldckwise. Insert the cell riser and I OO-NTU standard in the cell holder.Install the light shield. Open the back panel and rotate the 1000 range potentiometer (see Figure 6)fully clockwise or until a 70-NTU reading is ob- tabled,whichever is first.A clicking sound- -14 - Remove the clear plexiglass cover over the fuse and terminal barrier TB--I . 3.·Set YOM to measure dc volts.Connect the positive lead to pin 2 on terminal barrier TB-1 and the negative lead to pin I. 4.Plug power cord in <Jnd turn instrument on.Reading should be 4.5 +0.2 V de. - - 5.If the correct voltage is not read,adjust potentiometer R-15 on circuit board B-1 until voltage is correct.See Figure 4. 6.If adjusting potentiometer R-15 has no effect on the voltage reading,check transistor Q-I and circuit board B-1 as follows: a.Turn off instrument and unplug power cord. b.Disconnect circuit board B-1 from its connector (remove nut and pull board from its socket). c.Plug power cord in .and turn instru- ment on. 1)If lamp lights,transistor Q-I is defective and should be re- placed: 2).If lamp does not light,the circuit board B-1 is defective and should be replaced. d.Reconnect circuit board B-1. D.If new lamp does not illuminate,check transistor Q-I as follows: 1.Turn instrument off. 2.Disconnect circuit board B-1 from its connector (remove securing nut and pull from socket). Turn the YOM to the Rx I 00 range. Connect the negative lead to point ®on transistor Q-I and the positive lead to point CD on diode bridge CR-I.Resist- ance should be between 400 and 900 ohms.Now connect positive lead to pin 2 of TB-I.Resistance should again be 400 to 900 -ohms. 5.Reverse the connections.Connect the positive letld of YOM to poin t ®on transistor Q-I.Connect the negative lead to point ®on diode bridge CR-I -15 - and then to pin 2 on TB-I.The YOM should read infinite for both check- points.Disconnect OS-I lamp lead from pin 2 on TB-I.·Next,connect positive lead to pin 2 on TB-I and negative lead to point ®on diode bridge CR-I.The reading should be infinite. 6.If checks in Steps 4 and 5 are satisfac- tory,proceed to Step 7.If.not satisfac- tory,transistor Q-I is defective and should be replaced. 7.Check diode bridge CR-l. a.Set YOM to measure de volts. b.Connect the .positive lead to point CD and negative lead to point @ on diode bridge CR-l. c.Turn instrument on.Reading should be 12 +1 V de. d.If the voltage is correct,circuit board B-1 is defective and should be replaced. e.If the voltage is not correct: 1)Turn instrument off. 2)··SetVOM·1;o,measureac·yolts. Connect leads to points@and @on diode bridge CR-I. 3)Turn instrument on.Reading should be 8.5 +l.0 Vac. 4)If voltage is correct,diode bridge CR-l is defective and needs replacement. 5)If voltage is not correct,trans- former T -1,or the wiring to or from transformer T -I,is defective. 8.Reconnect circuit board B-1 to its connector. Symptom IV -Instrument will not measure tur- bidity,but pilot lamp OS-2 is on and lamp assembly OS-l is on. C.Check the high voltage as follows: I.Tum the instrument off. ~"1'~~A. B. "..., , - - - - - Open back panel to make certain that the lamp DS-I is on.If it is not,see Symptom II. Tum power off,unplug power cord and check for a loose wire,plug or meter terminal connection. 2.Connect the positive lead of YOM to point ®and the negative lead to point CD of connector No.2. 3.Be very careful not"to short your leads to other pins while making these meas- urements or components on the circuit board may be damaged. 4.Tum instrument to the 1000-NTU range. Voltage should be from 200 to 350 V dc. 5.If the voltage is correct,proceed to Symptom IV,Step 0,amplifier check.If voltage is not correct: a.Turn instrument off,unplug power cord and disconnect circuit board B-2 from its connector. b.Set the YOM to the Rx 100 range. Be sure to zero YOM. c.Connect negative lead to point @ and the positive lead to point @ of transistor Q-2.Then,connect the positive lead to point @.Both readings should be 400 to 900 ohms. <1.Connect the positive lead to point @ and the negative lead to point @ and then to point @.These two readings should be infinite. e.Connect positive lead to point ® and negative lead to point @. This reading should also be infinite. I)If readings in c,d and e are cor- rect,circuit board B-2 is defec- -16 . tive and should be replaced. 2)If readings in c,d and e are not correct,transistor Q-2 is de- fective and should be replaced. 6.Reconnect circuit board B-2. D.Check amplifier. 1.Make sure instrument is off and circuit board B-2 is in its connector,. 2.Set the YOM to the 1000-V dc range. 3.Connect the positive lead to point ® and the negative lead'to point (j)on connector No.2. 4.Tum STANDARDIZE knob completely cou nterclockwise. 5.Tum instrument on. 6.The instrument meter M-I should read from 50 to 90 percent of full scale. 7.Tum the STANDARDIZE control slightly clockwise.Instrument meter should go to full scale. 8.If Steps 6 and 7 check satisfactory,the photomultiplier tube is defective,or the wiring to and from the tube has a bad connection. 9.If Steps 6 and 7 do not check satisfac- tory,measure ac voltage at pins 6 and 8 on transformer T-I.Voltage should be 21 ±3 Vac. 10.If voltage is not correct,transformerT-1 is defective and should be replaced. II.If voltage is correct,check meter M-I as follows: a.Turn instrument off and disconnect power cord. b.Set the YOM to the next range above Rx I or the meter movement may be damaged. c.Connect the positive lead to poiflt ®on connector No.2 and the .- negative lead to point ®.The instrument meter should deflect up- scale and the YOM should read 43 ±9 ohms. d.If the reading is not correct,the meter,or the wires connected to it, are defective. e.If the reading is correct,check standardization potentiometer (Step 12). 12.Connect YOM leads to points @ and ®on connector No.2. a.Tum the STANDARDIZE control on the front panel.The reading on the YOM should vary from 0 to 500 k ohms. b.If the reading is not correct,the standardization potentiometer,or the wires connected to it,are defec- tive. c.If the reading is correct,circuit board B-2 is defective and should be replaced. Symptom V -Instrument meter stays pegged past full scale or reads abnormally high. A.Set range switch to 1000 NTU and tum STANDARDIZE control completely counter- dockwise.If meter is still pegged,or reads very high,tum instrument off.If meter still reads high,tap it to see if needle comes down. If not,replace meter. B.If the meter needle returns to zero with instruJ ment off,check the high voltage following the instructions in Step C,Symptom IV.If correct voltage is read in Step C4,do not proceed to Step CS;instead,continue with Step C,below. C.If high voltage is correct,remove photomulti- plier tube from its socket.(Refer to Photo- multiplier Tube Replacement.) I.With photomultiplier tube out of its socket,tum instrument on and observe reading on instrument meter. -17 - 2.If meter still reads the same,circuit board B-2 is defective and should be replaced. 3.If meter does not read the same but goes to zero,the photomultiplier tube is defec- tive and should be replaced. Symptom VI -Instrument reading varies or is unsteady. A.Tum instrument off and open back panel. B.Set the YOM to measure dc volts. C.Connect the positive lead to point ®and tne negative lead to point @. D.Tum instrument on and record voltage. E.Tum instrument off and unplug power cord. F.Unscrew the terminal (to which red wires are attached)on capacitor C-l.(In order for the lamp to tum on,the two lugs on the.screw must be attached to each other.Be careful that they don't short to anything else.) G.Plug instrument power cord in,tum instru- ment on and record voltage reading. H.If the Step.D reading (capacitor connected) does not exceed the Step G reading (capacitor disconnected)by 2 volts or more,capacitor C-1 is defective and should be replaced. (Reconnect red wires to capacitor C-I). I.If the Step D reading (capacitor connected) does exceed the Step G reading (capacitor disconnected)by 2 volts or more,check the high voltage as follows: I.Tum instrument off. 2.Set the YOM to a high dc voltage range. 3.Connect the positive lead to point ® and the negative lead to point (j)on connector No.2.Be very careful not to short meter connections because of high voltage. 4.Tum instrument on and observe reading. a.If reading varies,circuit board B-2 is defective and should be replaced. b.If the reading does not vary,the photomultiplier tube is defective I)If the YOM does not deflect upward in Steps d and e,the capacitor C-I is defective and should be replaced. a.Using a screwdriver (or some other metal object),short across the posi- ,tive and negative terminals of C-I. b.Unscrew the terminal to which the red wires are attached. E.If fuse is blown,make the following checks before replacing it: 1.Look for broken wire connections or foreign material that may be causing a short. 2.Check capacitor C-l as follows: c.Set YOM to the Rx I range. d.Connect the positive lead to the ter- minal unscrewed in Step b above, and the negative lead to the other terminal on C-I.The YOM should deflect upward toward zero ohms, then return to infinity. e.Reverse the connections.The VOM should again deflect upward toward zero ohms,reaching a low reading 5 to 10 ohms before returning to ,infinity. If voltage is not correct,there is either a blown circuit breaker or fuse in the electrical service,or the instrument power cord is defective. b.and should be replaced.See Photo- multiplier Tube Replacement. Symptom VII -Instrument does not work properly and a sound similar to arcing is heard. A.Turn instrument off and unplug power cord. B.Check for loose wiring connections,especially at plug P-l. C.Disconnect circuit board B-2 (remove nut and pull from socket). D.Set VOM to measure resistance.Connect leads to point CD and point@.Resistance should be approximately 560 k ohms. E.If the reading is correct,circtlit board B-2 is defective and should be replaced. F.If the resistance reading is not correct: 1.Check wire connections on photomulti- plier tube socket. 2.If the connections are all right,one (or more)of the resistors on the photomulti- plier tube socket assembly is defective. Replace photomultiplier tube socket as- sembly. Symptom VIII .Instrument is turned on but is completely inoperative. A.Make certain the instrument is plugged in. B.If instrument is plugged in but still does not work,unplug it. C.Open back panel and check for blown fuse. 1.If fuse is not blown,proceed to Step D. 2.If fuse is blown,proceed to Step E. D.If fuse is not blown: - - -- I.Set YOM to measure ac volts. 2.Connect leads across terminals 6 and 7 on terminal barrier TB-l. 3.Plug instrument in.Normal line voltage of lIS or 220 V ac should be present. a.If voltage is correct,the range switch on the front panel,or the wires leading to il,are defective. 2)If the YOM does deflect up- ward in Steps d and e,proceed to Step F to check diode bridge CR-l. F.Before checking the diode bridge,make sure the red wires which were disconnected from capacitor C-I are separated from each other and are not touching anything else. -18 . MICA WASHER ~~~It---__SPRING WASHER TIGHTEN NUT UNTIL SNUG (SIN LBS.MAX) TRANSISTOR METAL SIDE __J --- ~- ....STUD~ FIGURE 7 TRANSISTOR ASSEMBLIES 1.Remove circuit boards B-1 and B-2 from their connectors. 1.Remove lamp lead from pin 2 on termi- nal barrier TB-1. 2.Set YOM to the Rx 100 range.(Be sure YOM has been zeroed properly.) 3.Connect the positive lead to point®and the negative lead to point ®on diode bridge CR-l.YOM should rea-d infinite resistance. 2.Turn the YOM to the Rx 100 range.Con- nect the positive lead to point ®and the negative lead to pin 2 on TB-l. Reading should be infinite resistance. 3.If the reading is correct,proceed to Step 5. .... 4.Reverse the YOM connections.It should now read 350 to 750 ohms. 5.Continue with the remaining diodes in the bridge by checking the adjacent ter- minals and reading 350 to 750 ohms in one direction and infinite resistance in the opposite direction. a.If the reading for any of the diodes isnot correct,diode bridge CR-I is defective and should be replaced. b.If the readings are all correct,pro- ceed to Step G. G.Check transistor Q-1 as follows:(circuit boards B-1 and B-2 still disconnected) 4.If tne reading is less than infinite: a.Unscrew the nut that holds Q -Ion the back panel.Lift transistor. b.Check the mica washer to be sure that it has not been broken or pene- trated by some object,thus causing the transistor to short to the back panel.See Figure 7. c.Remove obstruction and/or replace washer.Be certain to put washer on first,then transistor. d.Tighten nut until snug,but do not overtighten. 5.Reconnect the lamp lead to its proper -19 - - '""'" - terminal at pin 2 on terminal·barrier TB-1. 6.Reconnect the red wires to capacitor C-I. 7.Plug circuit boards B-1 and B-2 into their proper connectors. 8.Make sure plug P-I is connected. .20· 9.Replace fuse F-I,plug instrument power cord in and turn instrument on. a.If fuse blows again,transformer T-l is defective and should be replaced. b.If fuse does not blow,the first fuse was faulty. 1 ]j 1 J B 1 ]j 'J l 1 ] I T-I L....L.; AMell1~>:~I "> J> >,> >->' 1>'>1 >C> 1>0> ~TIlS:t== r- I J "'I ~Y1L ~r02N~!1 SOC I ~o 1'../., .-/10M......-- ••68K .3 681< ~12.~.,SO-SO HI OPERATION. 0tlI t8-1 ADlOVE JuMPERS ""OM 'TERMINAL ]-4,!!I-e AND ADD A ,JUMPtR 'to ~-5 Cf'U,NOE f--I FROM 314 TO 3/8 AMP \.'"••ft "- 6ll. t \I. .3, 68. I ---'-,I ~I;SA f I fu==~-+-~.J------!l'I le"l - I• ..I I___~R~~~9.!!!.._.!..:.f .--J ~~r----~~--------------------I "'l --,--,0'.'I .----r-_J ••7 L2.I TP3....+1·,'00"'"....·u 1O'\2N31l:lO --r:l,.,•.."l,".-20IOK I~~R-I <.<T2 f!"Do ,~~R-a,-,~'~'.-27~19_ TPS-U-TPII C<C~h C••,~CR5 ~II 2N"2~7"':;:R:j#'.~2N3~'v~~"Ip~I L.---.---X .~'-UK L_-'1J=~-I I 11'1 •"".\I TP4 <0<,"),~2 ~2~C 0=~:~·.lll..3$.,I'llli~c-.c..._0 7 '1<6 ~CIO-III~~I<E •,ro"ltN•f ",100.'+I -411111!II>-,n '-I<F +-~R::?O~~I-4J1I~~,..i2'"~.J }it<'fO'C-II-III~T <H I ~~lOO.,+!I , •J I I I,I~•.-0.200A l:¢J I!~,II .-2'I.7 a L>II'L-E u .'30 51.•IC',I TPt,MoE •+'I--I ---.....,.,,M I TPIO,N-E~2~T II.....N c""IC-2.~I p.e.,20 I T Ip".00f'"II,.,oh +.C-'2 570'IU,I·.",-..'03"I I •I .TP'........'oEh *~~~..(j).31 U...r-:o::a I I T 7 I ....."'3'1.,IOOONn IITPt2.....u Y.-90 Ii'7'0-"I'-........---:-i~u CR7 '".....6.2.I-I 0"'OOON'U V V .-,7 U.rRTol ~~00N7U I ..........,OONfU w w .....2...Iii::ozt a,'ONfU I "NOE I NfU ••.-59 2.0.iHfl ,.INtU I .....0 15.~'KO.2Nn I 2 __~~~M~~~~_ , '\ J' ) ) o J N.... FIGURE '8 SCHEMATIC ....:.. .~""",,-..,., Coffelt Electronics LEADERS IN ELECTROFISHING EQUIPMENT FACTS AND SAFETY TIPS ON ELECTROFISHING '''i;L..:,:l".<}:}.. f, ..;A- ,.",- Electricity needs positive and negative electrodes to complete a circuit.In boat electrofisbing the negative electrode [cathode)usually hangs oyer the boat's side.The positive electrode [anode)can dangle from a boom or be hand maneuvered.You put them into the water,aim at the fish,turn on the juice [after following all safety and proper operating procedures]and the result is a bunch of surprised fish.~Negative Electrode (Cathode) Put them all together and they spell ZAPI 2 "". .'ositive Electrode.... j (Anode) -I - ".. - - Oscill ota xis. Again we say the heart of electrofishing is the electroshocking unit. The more control over the voltages and currents the more successful your efforts are going to be. PULSED CURRENT: When you use interrupted current,depending on the type of pulse and the number per second,you have a greater control over fish reaction.Fish recovery is quicker with a pulsed current,and with a low pulse rate and a narrow width the required electrical energy is reduced. 3 ,. As we've suggested,the more control over the type of current and pulse rate,etc.the better the chances for successful electrofishing.It's not our intention to get too technical,but to give you some idea of the ..basic principles of electrofishing.In summation,you can introduce continuous Alternating or Direct currents into the water,or you can break the current by pulsing a certain number of times per second.This is extreme simplification and for more detailed consideration there is an abundance of technical data available.DC Pulse .. .;":,.~.:'.-,... .'LARGE,FISHiREAtT'tci"'CURRENT,c'; ..";::;('?(J RE:cIH.t~·.§IIi1ALL,J:1~~t ~;:\:~:I)~::,:.· '..0/:.'-: :iquare wave form . -- AC-60 hz.Sine wave form. ~ J-Tariable shocking waves &currents help'match the right.shocking to thewa~erconditions.i\'PIIll1 .... 4 '1 :.0;; i"~ .- V CATHODE ;; Most rivers and lakes require the use of a boat for electrofishing. Aminimum of two men are required with the operator up front operating a safety foot switch.The boat most suited for this purpose is a "commercial grade"flat bottom boat which offers a great deal of stability in the water~A typia!boat unit consists of a power source, electronic controls,and booms &electrodes adjustable to a variety of conditions. Asuitable holding tank should be available to contain fish. Several sizes of boat are available with the component equipment outfitted to individual needs . 5 Zj BOOMS FOR ELECTRICAL PROBES ,';. ;.KEEP"OTHER PEOPLE CLEAR OF AREA:.' PUT UNPROTECTED PEOPLE ON SHORE OR IN BOAT. .. Before starting an eleetrofishing operation make sure that everybody, including pets,is in a safe plaee. Everyone on shore should be kept at a safe distance and only authorized people should participate in the operation.Remember you are using a very powerful foru wbieh ean be lethal to unprotected persons or animals. ,.," :i::~:~~:,1 ,:::','.~':'_".:.<.X-.;;.''_£,,',".~""c';,',::,c'.>,;<:.>,,-. '_"._'.~,;.•-.:..".:'".''...d";':~-.._'~';~::i>",. 3.KEE;~f BOOTS'A'ND.Gt6vES DRY:.L ..;,,~c')".••';>.;,·:;:{t,~·~;AYi~·'·Y;;;'Y';!)S:};,;.-'..'...•..' ,,'If JOU baVe leau:in you'iboots Oi':g1011es JOuruli the sime risk as the .'. ,::.:rfish.MaJnlain;all pjotedive cJothhig iilawaterpfoot,shockproof'. .:._ilion.Make sure you are thoroughly dry during an eJectroflShing opefation.",~.""_.' . ~"i;:!~~~"'i'J',;;~i.~i~2'i~~:',;~;\~~;,b o~.'t1J e s iiij~k~Fa '.~.S0 ni~';~ -1~~Ht~.~_'0~ SII~lIo~wate'.·JOU'I1f8may at$Ome,tim~;~ependonahfe laclleti;:·>;1.t'i,:~;,:·.····i,::"::'.'.~l~l~~~~~~;~~:!~~i~~j~t~~~~:t;:~tb.'·····:;.!~~ci~I;:{:·,.·.'...-~::" .ituiCi(iSi:tumtcl9n];:3fiRUBB~_~~LOVES;~:;Tbe:8isilJ slipp~'",~,-.t',,'.-,,'.".,.,,,. ij.,ar ......"Btcb.whaf"u:lo··bY,benworkinwitlt.t 6 .-···<6~.FOL(O~~~~~S'~~ibPERATION .INSTRUCTIONS: ....,,,,,... \,!..,-'.' Reliable professionally designed equipment comes with complete operating, safety and hookup instructions.Even if JOU think equipment operation is perfectly obvious,read and understand every step;then read it again.It is very important to you; 7.KNOW PROPER FIRST AID PROCEDURES: Iftrouble should occur,JOur lif~or someone elses may depend on adequate knowledge of first aid.Keep on hand a well equipped kit and check it often.Be especially familiar with the proper techniques for mouth-ta-mouth resuscitation. When.all safetyand proper operating procedures are followed, eledrofishing is a safe operation.-Don't allow JOurself to be narcotized with the fish by foolishly ignoring basic safety rules and procedures. 7 .....';.=::~....-.. ~'......-._,......:....~-- - ,..,. ....... - I~ ....~...-' ;..~ r '~'.' .~. ...:-.~:~..;,-..~, OWNER'S MANUAL S·WATT 3·CHANNEL TRANSCEIVER MODEL 75·7648 .:'.-..' - - -Midland 75-7648 Your 75-7648 is a versatile,professional qUality transceiver and we suggest that you read this Owner's Guide carefully _before operation so that you may receive full benefit from its many features. For your protection,the spaces below are provided for you to record the FCC Data and Serial Number of this product.Both are located on the identification plate attached to the rear cabinet panel.After recording these numbers,keep this record for future reference.When contacting Midland for service or parts information,the FCC Data Number and Serial Number must be referred to in order to expedite your request. FCC Data:-,-_ ....Serial Number _ FCC requirements for C8 users. Your new Midland Hand·Held CB is a combination receiverl transmitter (transceiver)designed and built for licensed Class D operation on any of the 40 frequencies designated for citizens band use by the Federal Communications Commission. You are required to have or have ordered a current copy of Part 95,Subpart D,of the FCC rules and regulations (a current copy as of the date of manufacture is included with your new CB)prior to operation of this unit. You are also required to complete FCC Form 505 (also in· cluded with your CB)and submit it to the FCC,Gettysburg, PA 17326 in order to obtain your license to operate this unit. (Disregard tlie above paragraph if you have a current CB license less than 5 years old.) FCC regulations will be violated if you transmit with this unit without complying with procedures explained on FCC temporary license,Form 555·B,which is included as well. You may use Form 555·8 as a temporary permit while your regular Form 505 application is being processed by the FCC. The technical information diagrams and charts provided in this manual are supplied for the use of a qualified holder of a first or second class radio-telephone license.It is the user's responsibility to see that this unit is operating at all times in accordance with FCC Citizens ~and Radio Service regulations. If you install your own transceiver,do not attempt to make any transmitter or receiver tuning adjustments.These adjust- ments are prohibited by the FCC unless you hold a first or second class radio-telephone license.A Citizens Band or Amateur license is not sufficient. When service is performed by an authorized and licensed per· son,care must be taken that only authorized replacement parts are used in order not to void the type acceptance or certifica- tion of this model. Midland International Corporation hereby certifies that this unit has been designed,manufactured,FCC type accepted and certified in accordance with Part 95 and Part 15,Subpart C,of the current FCC rules and regulations as of the date of manufacture. /\/'r\'7 r IC- 3 I I General C8 information.; In 1958,The Federal Communications Commission approved -the use of 23 channels by duly licensed Citizens Band radio operators.The authorization was expanded to 40 channels in 1977. A simple,basic means of communication,CB requires no more skill or knowledge than the operation of a standard AM or FM receiver. Still,there are certain facts,procedures and "rules of the road"you'll need to know in order to make the most of your CB experience. Make it "short and sweel"When using your CB,get on and off the air as quickly as possible.Never use profanity -which is against the law and subject to heavy penalties.Follow the FCC rules outlined in Part 95. Use Channel 9 In emergencies only.Emergency channel 9 is designated for this purpose and this purpose alone. The FCC has given public safety agencies various "call signs"including "0911"numbers,coinciding with the "911" phone numbers these agencies use in telephone communi· cations. The call signs for state-level agencies use 3 letters and 4 numbers,with the second and third letters being the official Post Office state abbreviation,e.g.,"KS"for "Kansas." MIDLAND 75-7648 operating controls. 7.Telescopic Antenna 8.Speaker/Mic Jack 9.12 Volts DC Jack 10.Battery Charge Jack 11.Squelch Control 12.On/Off Volume Control 2. 1. 5. 4. 3. 1.Speaker/Microphone 2.Push-To·Talk Bar 6. 6.Power Output Switch 3.LE.D.Battery Indicator 4.Battery Check Button 5.Channel Selector Frequency Channel 27.215 MHz 21 27.225 MHz .....•...22 27.255 MHz 23 27.235 MHz 24 27.245 MHz 25 27.265 MHz 26 27.275 MHz 27 27.285 MHz 28 27.295 MHz 29 27.305 MHz 3O 27.315 MHz 31 27.325 MHz 32 27.335 MHz 33 27.345 MHz 34 27.355 MHz 35 27.365 MHz 36 27.375 MHz 37 27.385 MHz 38 27.395 MHz 39 27.405 MHz .40 Frequency·channel number chart. Frequency Channel 26.965 MHz.. . . . • ...1 26.975 MHz.• . . . . .•.2 26.985 MHz.. • . . • ...3 27.005 MHz . .... • ...4 27.015 MHz •....•." 5 27.025 MHz.• . . . . ...6 27.035 MHz.. . . . . ...7 27.055 MHz.. . . . . ...8 27.065 MHz.. . . . . ...9 27.075 MHz ....•....10 27.085 MHz 11 27.105 MHz 12 27.115 MHz ..•......13 27.125 MHz 14 27.135 MHz 15 27.155 MHz 16 27.165 MHz 17 27.175 MHz 18 27.185 MHz 19 27.205 MHz ........•20 <I 5 ...." Battery Check.Your new Model 75·7648 uses an L.E.D.(Light Emitting Diode)to monitor battery condition. To check battery condition press the battery check button.A bright l.E.D. indicates high battery current.A dim or unlit L.E.D.indicates batteries should be replaced,or recharged if nickel cadmium batteries are being used. Charge (Bal1ery Charger Jack) (Coaxial).This jack allows charging of rechargeable batteries without re- moving the batteries from the unit. CAUTION:Do not try to charge th~ conventional non- rechargeable batteries. Use only nickel-cadmium batteries for recharging. Carbon-zinc.mercury,and alkaline batteries may be used to operate the trans- ceiver,but do not attempt to recharge these types because leakage or battery damage may occur.A regulated battery charger and not an AC power sup- ply should be used for recharging purposes. 12 Volts DC Jack (Coaxial).This jack allows the use of an external 12 volt DC power source such as a 12 V DC adaptor or your car battery. External Speaker/Microphone Jack. This will be used for connection of an optional Speaker/Microphone.which allows you to transmit without holding and moving the transceiver to your mouth at every transmission. Connecting the external Speaker/ Microphone will automatically cut off the built-in speaker/microphone. Telescopic Antenna.'The telescopic antenna must be fully extended.Sim- ply pull it out to its maximum length. Channel Selector.Controls both transmilter and receiver frequencies simultaneously.This transceiver is ca- pable of 3 channel operation.One set of Channel 11 crystals are Installed in the "F1"position.Additional crystals may be installed (see crystal installa- tion)in the open channels.To operate, tum the switch to the desired channel. Volume·On/Off.Turns the set on and controls the sound output from the speaker when receiving.The volume control does not affect transmilting output.To turn the unit on and in- crease volume,rotate this control clockwise. Squelch.Quiets the receiver when signals are not being received.It func- tions only in the -receive position and does not affect the receiver volume when signals are being received.To adjust:When nO signals are present, rotate the squelch control clockwise until the receiver is quieted.Incoming signals will automatically release the squelch,enabling you to receive nor· mally.careful adjustment is ner.essary as settings too far to the right will not allow weaker signals to release the squelch, Power Output Switch.To extend bat· tery life,use the unit with the "Power"switch to "Lo"position for short range communications.For long range use,place the switch in the "Hi"position. Push·To·Talk Bar;Speakerl Microphone.This controls both transmitter and receiver.To transmit, press and hold'the bar,to receive, release it. '-Operating controls, "connectors: ~heir functions and uses. ?4 7 1'- Crystal Installation. In order to insure proper operation,only crystalsdesigned for this unit should be used,Crystal specifications are included on page 10 in this manual for your convenience. This unit has been adjusted for maximum performance in the middle of the citizens band channels and will operate properly across the entire band without further adjustment.If you desire, this unit may be readjusted for maximum performance at either the high or low end of the band.This will,however,result in reduced performance at the opposite end.All adjustments of this type MUST be made by a qualified and LICENSED techni- cian.Refer to Crystal Specifications,page 10.. NOTE:FCC regulations specify transmitter crystals must be in- stalled by or under the supervision of a person holding a first or second class radio-telephone license. Battery Installation. This unit operates on 8 "AA"size 1.5 volt batteries or 10 "AA"1.2 volt rechargeable nicad batteries.Standard types may be used,but alkaline or rechargeable batteries are desirable. NOTE:Only nickel·cadmium batteries can be used for re- charging purposes.Nickel·Cadmium Batteries with 500mA capacity are recommended. To install:Remove the rear of the case and carefully remove the battery holder.It is not necessary to remove the wire connected to the battery holder and c!ire should. be taken not to break it.Insert the batteries obser- ving the polarities marked on·the holder.Make sure the batteries are properly seated and replace the holder and rear cover plate.Two dummy batteries are included.These should be removed when using re- chargeable nickel-cadmium batteries. ;,..~,. Opetating·:Range"...".", The op~r~tingra~~tiWt'if;a:ry from V2 to several miles depen- ding upon terrain,obstacles,climatic conditions and the other transceiver used. Battery condition also affects range and fresh batteries will provide far better range than weak ones. When the 75·764B is used with a base or mobile unit the range will generally be increased. SQUELCH '6OFF:':,I" VOLUME -.:'1-'\'_-=>-....J.. OFF"""' VOLUME :-0:I.".--.. OFF'"I" Step 3:Set the channel selector to the desired channel(F1 position if you have not installed other crystals). CHANNEL Fl~F2 F3 Step 5:To transmit,press and hold the push-to-talk bar and talk into the microphone.Use a normal tone of voice and hold the unit about 2 to 3 inches from your mouth.To receive,release the push·to-talk bar. For l:>est transmission and reception,model 75·7648 should be held in a vertical position and the telescoping antenna must be fully extended. NOTE:This unit is designed to operate properly with any standard 12V DC system.Voltages other than 12V may cause-damage to the unit or result in poor operation. Midland 75·7648 Operating Instructions. Step 1:Extend th~a:6tenna to its full length.."fyi'o;l:'" NOTE:Transmitting without ex- tending antenna may cause damage to the output tran· sistors and void your warranty. Step 2:Rotate the Volume/On-Off control clockwise to tum unit "on". Step.4:Adjust the volume and squelch controls. - - - - 9 - .~t,r~~~9',:;~ i; .- - .- Specifications. Semiconductor Complements 14 Transistors, 6 Diodes,2 Zener,1 Varistor,1 LEO and 1 transistor used in squelch circuit Transmit and Receive Frequency 3 Channel available, Channel 27.085 MHz plug-in crystals factory installed in number Fl position Receiving System Superheterodyne Intennediate Frequency _455 KHZ Transmitter _3 channel,crystal controlled system Modulation System AM maintained between 90 &100% RF Input Power -,..5 Watts Frequency Tolerance ......•.............................::!:0.005% Receiver Sensitivity l Vat 10 dB (S +N)/N Antenna .•................._Telescopic 13 section,603/."extended Power Source .......•.....•......1.2-Volts DC (8 penlight batteries self- contained or external 12 Volt DC source) Speaker/Microphone . _•...........Extra sensitive 2V."dynamic 16 Ohm Controls &Switches •••..•.•..•.....3-channet selector switch,ON-OFF volume controls,full variable squelch control,Hi-Lo Power Output switch.Push·To-Talk switch,Battery Check. Accessory Jacks __. _External SPKRIMIC,AC Adaptor Battery Charger • Dimensions 8·718"(H)x 3-114"(Wj x 2-3/16"(0) Crystal Specifications. Receiver Holder ..............••..••.............•..•............'..HC-25 Resonance ..:............................•........•.....Parallel Oscillation .....,.......•••.•,......................•3rd Overtone Load Capacitance _.............................•-•.20pf Drive Level ............•..................•...............-1mW Equivalent Resistance _32 ohms (Series) Frequency Tolerance _::!:20 ppM Temperature Range ........•.....................-to·C to +60·C Frequency Calculation Channel Frequency minus 455 KHZ=Crystal Frequency Transmitter Holder.:"HC-25 Resonance Parallel Oscillation .........•.............._Jrd Overtone Load Capacitance .............•..............................5pf Drive Level ....._...•.....•.•..._...............•..........1mW Equivalent Resistance 32 ohms (Series) Frequency Tolerance -...........•::!:20 ppM Temperature Range.... . . . .... . . ....-10·C to +60'C Frequency Calculation Channel Frequency =Crystal Frequency Schematic Diagram .. 11 - - - '~ 12 .... ·Circuit Board Assembly. ,j 1, Bottom View. 13 - - 14 .... Limited Warranty. Midland International Corporation will repair or replace,at its option,without charge,any Hand-Held Midland Citizens Band transceiver rated at an input power of 2 watts or greater,which fails due to a-defect in material or workmanship within 90 days following the initial consumer purchase. This warranty does not include any carrying cases,ear- phones,or telescoping antennas which may be a part of or included with the warranted product. Performance of any obligation under this warranty may be obtained by returning the warranted product,freight prepaid, along with proof oj the purchase date,to Midland International Corporation,Warranty Service Department,1690 North Topping, Kansas'City,Missouri 64120,to any "Midland Authorized Warranty Service Station,"or to the place of purchase (if a participating dealer.) Warranty information and the location of the nearest "Midland Authorized CB Warranty Service Station,"may be ob- tained by writing Midland International Corporation,Warranty Service Department. This warranty gives you specific legal rights,and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. NOTE:The above warranty applies only to merchandise pur· chased in the United States of America or any of its territories or possessions or from a U.S.military exchange.For warranty coverage on merchandise purchased elsewhere,consult the supplemental warranty information included with this product or ask your dealer. Please be sure to fill out and mail the Customer Registration Card included with this Owners Manual. Failure to return this card will not affect your rights under the above warranty. The Midland tradition of electronic excellence. Outstanding CB performance and dependability are only two ways Midland electronic excellence will brighten your life. The same expertise,skill and dedication that's engineered into your Midland CB also go into every product in the long,ver- satile line of Midland car stereo receivers,tape players and accessories. Including widely-acclaimed,exclusive Midland Micro- PrecisionTM AM/FM/MPX electronic tuning.The 100% electronic signal-search system that locates and locks on stations with microprocessor precision. And keep your eyes and ears on the popular line of Midland television sets. The color and black-and-white sets that give you the quality and features you want at some of the most attractive prices in the industry. 15 J -))§1 1 j 1 1 ]-;i 1 J )1 '-l'\.''I-,..... J DIGITAL THERMISTOR THERMOMETER Models 8522-10 and 8522·20 Cole-Parmer Instrument Co. 7425 North Oak Park Avenue Chicago.Illinois 60648 A-1299-94 Edition 1180 .. 1 »1 J "' i J J j 1 1 1 J . TABLE OF CONTENTS :>aragraph "Tille Page 1.Introduction 1A.General Description 3 1B.Theory of Operation 3 1C.Quality Control Tests 3 2.Initial Preparation 2A.Unpacking 3 2B.Battery Installation 4 2C.Operating Instructions 4 3.Instrument Features .3A.Display 4 3B.Power Switch 4 3C.Low Battery Indicator 4 3D.AC Line Adapter 5 3E.Probe Connection 5 3F.Battery Replacement 5 4.Instrument Specifications 5 C')5.Instrument Calibration 6i) ()6.Precautions ~6A.Batteries 6 U)6B.Handling 6 \J 6C.Storage 6 7.Probe Usage 7 A.Liquid Measurement 6 7B.Air/Gas Measurement 7 7C.Surface Measurement 7 70.Interior Mass Measurement 7 7E.Probe Time Constant 7 8.Temperature Conversions (0 F to 0 C)10 9.Maintenance 11 10.Warranty 11 11.Return of Items 11 12.Note 11 1 I j .~1 J B 1 1 r !J i o.J 1 J\ 1.INTRODUCTION r I '(1.) () o N \.}\ r ---- o ...__ mCllt 0:':::_01 > ClI .-C C C)0«() ... .~-Q. E----,....--'I.,« ...o iii .-.0E0...... <l>Q..c: f- ... 0 01-nl~ ~;:, 001>cr ->-"OClIClI'5 Ui Q.cr>-(fl.-~.- ...J()C) >-....$01_....C .-ClI'-;:,coEu~ClI .=o~() -J ... ....>-a....ClI '-,"0~o« CO ()« E ~g> (5 ~uo iii ;:,u... U 1A.General Description Th~8522 series of Thermistor Thermometers incorporate all solid state circuitry to provide reliability and minimum mlJintenance.An "LCD"readout provides easy viewing with a minimum of power consumption.Two versions exist:the 8522-20 and the 8522-10,which provide Fahr,enheit (0 F)and Celsius (0 C) temperature readouts,respectively.The 8522-20 unit has two ranges selected by a switch (the low range provides improved resolution).Either unit can be operated with their internal b(itteries or an AC line adapter. 1B.Theory of Operation ,The instrument consists Of several sub-systems.They are the power supply,amplifier,analog-to-digital converter and display. The electrical signal developed by the thermistor is amplified and presented to the analog-to-digital converter which contains all the necessary circuitry to convert the signal into a digital display. 1C.Quality Control Tests To insure trouble free operation,the instruments are extensively tested.After calibration,every unit is subjected to a "burn in" where the ambient is cycled from hot to cold while the unit is operating.This allows marginal components to be discovered and replaced.minimizing field failures.The units are then re- calibrated and inspected before shipping. 2.INITIAL PREPARATION 2A.Unpacking The carton will contain the thermometer,a package of batteries and the manual.Carefully inspect during unpacking.If any damage is present.report it to the carrier and enter a daim. "Ol 2B.Battery Installation The battery module consists of six AA size batteries.They were fresh at the time of packing:however,as a precaution.carefully inspect before installation.Oiscard :any that show signs of cracks or leakage.To install.hold the instrument in one hand with the rear battery compartment door facing you.Pull down at the roughened surface of the door and slide it out.Observe the polarity while inserting the batteries.CAUTION:Failure to observe the correct polarity could result In instrument malfunction or damage.Carefully align the door into position and slide back into place;the door tangs will snap in place and hold the door closed. 3E.Probe Connection The probe socket is a two conductor phone jack located above the display.Only "series 400"thermistor probes should be used (see pages 8 and 9). JJ]-.~1 )1 ,3D.AC Line Aaapter This optional piece of equipment permits the instrument to be oPt:lrated from an Ae power source.When inserted into the unit. the batteries are disconnected.The adapter only powers the unit: it qoes not recharge the batteries.Two adapters are available. ~Js~the 5985-10 for 115V,50-60Hz.and the 5985-15 for 230V.50- 608z line voltage. J1I,1 2C.Operating Instructions Select a thermistor probe which is appropriate for the medium to be measured:air.liquid.or solid (see Probe Usage Section). Insert the probe plug into the socket in the top of the instrument. Depress and release the push button switch once and the instrument will turn on and display the temperature.Depressing the switch again will turn the unit off. 3F.Battery Replacement To maintain the instrument accuracy.the batteries will have to be replaced periodically.The useful life of a set of alkaline batteries is approximately 40 hours.See paragraph 28 for installation instructions. 4.INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS Ij ') (} \~ \5\ '-\ 3.INSTRUMENT FEATURES 3A.Display A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)has been chosen due to its low current drain.and hence long battery life. 3B.Power Switch To operate the instrument with its internal batteries.depress once to turn the unit on and depress again to turn off.To operate with the AC adapter,plug it into the instrument and turn the unit on and off with the switCh. 3C.Low Battery Indicator A portion of the instrument's circuitry continuously monitors the battery voltage when the unit is on.If the "Lo Bat"notation is present (the left side of the display),the batteries should be replaced.to maintain the units accuracy. Accuracy: Readability: (low range) (full range) Display Update Rate: Temperature Range: (low range) (full range) Ambient Limits: Thermistor probes: Physical Dimensions: Storage limits: Digit Size: ±0.2%of full scale 8522-10:0.1 deg ree 8522-20:0.1 degree 8522-20:1.0 degree 2.5/second 8522-10:-50 0 e to +125°e 8522-20:-60°F to +199.9°F 8522-20:-60°F to +260°F -lOo e to +50 0 e Series 400 size:6"L x 3"W weight:11 ounces -4°Fto+149°F -20°e to +65°e 0.5"high 4 5 7C.Surface Measurement Several possible configurations exist.Probes having a flat surface can be taped or cemented onto the surface (use a thermally conductive cement). 70.Interior Mass Measurement Small thermistors can be inserted into a mixture while it is still in a liquid state and allowed to harden in place.Probes having a .pointed tip can be used for deep insertion into semi-solids such as fruit or soil. IjIJ 7B.Air/Gas Measurement Th~small mass of the air probe allows small temperature f1ugtuations to be monitored.Some general purpose probes. suqh as those designed for liquid measurement.contain too muph mass for them to follow small temperature changes. 7E.Probe Time Constant The term "time constant"is a standard method of expressing the response time to a temperature change."One time constant"is the time required for a given probe to indicate 63%of a sudden temperature change.All probes.except the air temperature probe.were subjected to the same test conditions.The probe was transferred from a water bath at +68°F to another bath at +108°F. The time to respond to 63%of the change (25.2°F)was recorded as its time constant.A probe will indicate approximately 99%of the total change after 5 time constants.The 8442-00 probe could be used as an example.It has a time constant of 1.1 seconds. Therefore,in 5.5 seconds (5 times 1.1).it will indicate 99%of the temperature it is SUbjected 10.This provides a suggested minimum length of time for the operator to wait before recording a temperature reading. i f l 6C.Storage For prolonged storage.it is suggested that the batteries should be removed to eliminate the possibility of instrument damage due to battery acid leakage. GA.Batteries When installing new batteries,proper polarity must be observed. The instrument is designed to tolerate improper battery con- nection but it will not function.However,even momentary improper insertion will reduce battery life. 1 6B.Handling Although the instrument is ruggedly designed,severe blows, shocks.or vibration should be avoided if possible.A fall from a table or bench could result in permanent damage. Accurate temperature measurement requires the proper selection and use of the appropriate probe.The probes displayed in this manual indicate the large variety that is available.The following notes should assist in selecting the proper probe. 7 A.Liquid Measurement To prevent inaccurate readings due to stratification,the liquid should be stirred continuously.Due to a loss of heat along the probe sheath,the depth of probe immersion is important.A' suggested rule to follow is to immerse the probe a minimum distance equal to 10 times the sheath diameter. 5.INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION As discussed in the Theory of Operation,the different sub- systems have to be carefully calibrated for the instrument to make an accurate measurement.Under normal usage,the instrument will not need re-calibration.If the unit has been accidentally damaged,the manufacturer will rec~librate it,for a nominal charge. 7.PROBE USAGE 6.PRECAUTIONS 8o l'.~ ,J\ <\' 6 7 -------~ Series 400 Thermistor Probes The following probes are completely interchangable without recalibrating the thermometer.The recommended temperature range of each probe is given.The minimum temperature limit is -110°F (-BO°C).Each probe is provided with ~permanently attached 10 foot vinyl covered lead terminating in a plug (unless otherwise noted).Extra long cables and extension cables are available. ~~~.~i -.I CUll.l'"-K•......, 430-00 General purpose esophageal-rectal ,ooe for body temperatures of humans and lrger lab animals,Can be used with long ·ads for deep water temperatures or buried Ir sub-soil readings,Our most rugged,least .<pensi\'e probe,Vinyl covered wire and tip, ime constant 7 seconds.Temp range -40 to 212'F 1-40 to -1000 n 8432-00 Small flexible vinyl for rectal tem- peratures in small animals and esophageal temperatures of infants.Vinyl sheath and tip.Time constant 3.2 seconds.Temp range -40 to +2I2"F (-40 to +IOO"CI. .~11 ~V"0 X"''':::;,..n .•.N,P:~,~.::.. I.~w LI!(,,,J 1 8444-00 Tubular with pipe liNing for tem- perature readings in closed pipes or \'essels, Probe and fitting are stainless stel'1.Time constant 3.4 seconds.Temp range -40 to +:100"F f -40 to ·1;')OOCI.fr"/Yo"Nn~.....~.! " I '-'I 1 -t--l!("'~ 8449·00 Tubular with pipe fiNing.slmil;lr to .'l444-00 but with detachabll'lead and autoclanlbl(·probe.Useful With biolol(ical apparatus.Stainll'ss steel prool'and fitting Not elt'Ctricully insuluted, 111 8446·00 liquid Immersion,Pyrex glass.Use this chemically inert prohe for thermometric titrations and general lah readings.Time constant 4.2 seconds.Temp range ··40 to •:lOO"F (··40 to +150°C)". 8448-00 Liquid Immersion,same as above hut 15"length for use in larger vessels, I.t;.::i.~~I...p==1 ,t.K,D 8443-00 Small surface,autoclavable.Simi· lar to 8442-00 but smaller with faster reo sponse.24"TeflQn covered flexible wire.Time constant 0.3 seconds , . 8443-20 Small·surface,non-autoclavable, Similar to 8443-00 above but with 8432·00 type connector. --=-~'2"4""~'_'.__.."1IIl~'9/l ~.'-=1I~lDII~.MA~. JI.11 w=:=-/_1-2~·to 3Mt :::::::. ~6~JI ..J "-]]1J f1..})J 0 6c=._._.4%f ~ 8481·00 Seml-Iolld Insertion with pointed tip for deep insertion into semi-solids such as fruit.soil.tobacco,etc.All stainless steel. Not electrically insulated.Time constant 3.7 seconds.Temp range -40 to +300"F(-40 to +150"CI. --.I K.D _r-i·-'·-·----~·~~::~::- -..~--76 MM ..---.10/JO 8480·00 Ground glass Joint for temperature monitoring or control in all-glass systems. Made entirely of glass with 10/30 ground joint.Time constant 4.2 seconds,Temp range -40to +300"F(-40to +150"CI. 8438-00 Air temperature (or test rooms,in- cubators.remote air temperature tests.gas stream .temperatures.All stainless steel. Time constant 3.2 seconds.Temp range -40 to +300"F (-40 to +ISO"C). 0~iF,:·~F'_f~l·O.-'4 lit::::::: L-~w I L.){t ~~ ('""l 434-00 Liquid Immersion applications. ery fast response.Also for oral and rectal ·ork,Made of stainless steel.ImmersibleNnlytocapunlesswaterproofed.Time con· II :ant 3,4 seconds,Temp range -40 to \ I 300°F (-40 to •ISO°C)....' ,.... '-J 436-00 Liquid immersion,same as above <cept probe diameter is II..•. 8482·00 Seml·solld Insertion with pointed tip for deep insertion into semi·solids or liquids.Has detachable lead wire and conve- nient handle.Time constant 4.3 seconds, Temp range -40 to +300"F (-40 to +l50·C). ~40·00 Surface "Banjo"type,(or skin,flat lrfaces.oral and axillary temperatures.soil lrfaces,Suitable anywhere a handle on a 'obe is needed.Stainless steel construction. lme constant 0,6 seconds.Temperature lOge -40 to +300"F (-40 to +ISO"C). ,,0::..-/ +C==' 8442-00 Surface for skin temperatures or any flat surface.Easy to tape in place.Used for heat loss on piping or compression effi- ciency studies.Epoxy-backed stainless steel disc.Vinyl covered parallel leads.Time con· stant 1.1 seconds.Temp range -40 to +2I2"F (-40 to +IOO"C). r 36..--......- d I .__J I 1 XO.D. ~ ~ L%.f .0.83 O.o -1j c:::::: rL2~~I ..J 8484·00 Small flexible nylon,for frozen food packages.hand-held small animals.and cu- vettes.Nylon and epoxy tip.Time constant :to seconds.Temp.ranl{e -110 til +ZIZoF HlO to +lowe I 8 10.WARRANTY 11.RETURN OF ITEMS 12.NOTE We reserve the right to make improvements in design. construction,and appearance of our products without notice. ej1 The warranty card must be properly filled out and returned.The manufacturer warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of six months.If repair or adjustment is necessary and has not been the result of abuse or misuse within the six month period,please return,freight prepaid.and correction of the defect will be made without charge.(see note on return of items).Out-of-warranty products will be repaired tor a nominal charge. The outside of the instrument case can be wiped clean with a soft. lint tree cloth dampened (not dripping wet)with a mild detergent. Do not attempt to use solvents on either the case or LCD lens. Periqdically examine the batteries.Replace any that show signs of cracking or leakage.Aside from the batteries,these instruments do not contain user repairable components. Authorization must be obtained from our Customer Service Department before returning items for any reason.When applying for authorization,please include data regarding the reason the items are to be returned.A 15%restocking charge will be made on all returns resulting from customer errors in ordering. For your protection,items being returned must be carefully packed to prevent damage in shipment and insured.against possible damage or loss.We will not be responsible for damage resulting trom careless or insufficient packing. )j I 9.MAINTENANCE jJ]J »J i 8.TEMPERATURE CONVERSION Fahrenheit to Celsius (0 F -32)x 5/9 =°C Celsius to Fahrenheit (0 C x 9/5)+32 =° F The above formulas will provide an accurate conversion between the two forms of temperature measurement.As a quick alternate method,consult the table below. of °C of °C -58 -50 977 525 -13 -25 1022 550 +32 0 1067 575 77 +25 1112 600 122 50 1157 625 167 75 1202 650 212 100 1247 675 257 125 1292 700 302 150 1337 725 347 175 1382 750 392 200 1427 775 "\437 225 1472 800 ) )482 250 1517 825--., J 527 275 1562 850J5723001607875 1\ -Q 617 325 1652 900 662 350 1697 925 707 375 1742 950 752 400 1787 975 797 425 1832 1000 842 450 1877 1025 887 475 1922 1050 932 500 2012 1100 -~I J 1 }]J 1 Supplied with 10'vinyl covered shielded leads wilh plug:may be .ubjected to 100'C (212'F). Standard extensions are available as follows.junctions are not water resistant: YSI 4010 -10'YSI 4025 -25'YSI 4050 -50' Time constant.the standard measure of probe response time.is the time required for a probe to read 63%of a newly impressed temperature change.YSI time constants are obtained by transfer~ ring the probe from a well stllred water bath at 6B"F to a like bath at 108"F.Approximately five "time constants"are required for a probe ~o read 99%of the total change.Time Constants are representative values and subject to variation due to small differences in location of the thermistor component within the probe. PrO~Time No,Oescriplion Con$[ant 415 TUBULAR-LONG GLASS.Same as YSI404 but with a 4.2 length of 15"Pyrex.Useable to 150'C (300'Fl.sec. Temp.Res.Temp.Res.Temp.Rei.Temp.Rei. C Ohms C Ohml 'C Ohms C Ohm, -40 75.79K 12 4075 32 1668 60 560.7 -35 54.66K 13 3887 33 1599 65 469.4 -30 39.86K 14 3708 34 1534 70 394.9 -25 2936K 15 3539 35 1471 75 333.5 -20 21.67K 16 3379 36 1412 60 2B3.I -15 1643K 17 3226 37 1355 65 2413 -10 12.46K 18 3062 38 1301 90 2065 -5 9534 19 2944 39 1249 95 177.5 0 7355 20 2814 40 1200 100 153.2 1 6990 21 2690 41 1153 105 1327 2 6645 22 2572 42 110B 110 I I 5.4 3 6319 23 2460 43 1065 115 100.6 4 6011 24 2354 44 1024 120 B81 5 5720 25 2253 45 984.2 125 77.4 6 5444 20 2156 46 946.6 130 66.2 7 5184 27 2065 47 910.6 135 60.2 8 4937 28 1977 48 676.2 140 53.4 9 4704 29 1894 49 843.2 145 47.4 10 4483 30 1815 50 811.7 150 42.3 "4273 31 1740 55 672.9 TEMPERATURE/RESISTANCE CHARACTERISHCS The follOWing table lists Ihe temperalUrel resIstance characten~ tics for YSI Senes 400 probes wllh slimdard 10'leads ProbE with leads hundreds of feet long can be provided,but whe length exceeds 100'It may be necessary 10 conSider errOrs Intrl duced by lead resistance.Generally.IhlS IS only Slgnlflcanr , hIgh temperatures.On request.YSI will prOVIde temperature co recllOn (liHd tor prolJe~Wlttl long le~{j~ Maximum Operating Temperature:100'C 1212"FI or 150"C (300°F)depending on probe design (see the indiVidual probe descriptions).The vinyl covered lead wIres and the phone Jacks may not be exposed to temperatures above 100°C. PRiCE INCLUDING HANDLING $1.0 _,rum 3:7?'~'Wn,m·'MDSi 7rrw 7 TWA!lld·.....,rmreee CONSTRUCTION Standard YSI Senes 400 orabes consist of a thermistor tempera lure senSing elemem housed III a probe and aHac/led ro a pllJstJ- clzed vinyl jacketed shielded lead wire terminated with a phone plug Except as indicated in the individual probe descflplJons. probes are constructed with the thermistor sensing element electflcally isolated from the outer probe surfaces to prevent an accidental ground path or shock from other instruments when the probes are used in contact with the body YSI Series 400 probes offer the feature of true IIlterchange- ability between probes.The thermistor temperature sensing ele- ments are manufactured by a unique patented method for pro- ducing thermistors With matching temperature/reslslance characteristics.All probes are warranted to remaH)WIthIn Ihe interchangeability lolerances shown by the followII1U L:IHVe lor a period of one year. INSTRUCTIONS FOR YSI SERIES 401 TEMPERATURE PROBE~ , z nr mn 1f'W'e'M:TW P'7 7 17m?"r 7 'WYS:P=_"'IWtiip'')'" >-1) ~~g~t~.;0.3 ~g 02 ........... l!~0.1 ---------!.!0 I I I I I -=(:.-40 0 +40 70 110 lS0 Measurement Rang~in ac '-s,"O. C(lnliguration ~'~I~T ~1·+1'.~ F""O r~l-----==3~10/30 I 1b1==4'~'-' '+-t~9 u%"F%"O I It:=:1==4'~'''-+~'~ 3.7 sec. TUBULAR-POINTED METAL Stainless steel For pierc- Ing semi-solids Useful In processIng of food products. Pointed tip useable to IS0'C (300'FI.High tempera- lure Teflon lead Wile useable to 260"C (500'FI. 417 GROUND GLASS JOINT.For temperature monitoring 4.2 and control tft all-glass systems.Pyrex.Useable to sec. 150"C (300'F) 418 TUBULAR-POINTED METAL To pierce semi-solids 3.7 SuCh as meat.frUit.SOIL tobacco.etc.Stainless steel sec Useable 10 150'C 1300'FI. 416 TUBULAR-AUTOCLAVABLE.Like YSI 410.but with 3.4 detachable lead.Useful In biological apparatus such as sec. heart-lung.heat exchanger,elc. Stainless steel.Fitting withstands SOO psi Useable to IS0'C 1300'F).Not electrically isolated. 404 TUBULAR-GLASS Chemically inert for liqUid Immer-4.2 510n use.Thermometric titration.Freezing point deter-sec. mrnation Pyrex.S"long Useable to 150'C 1300'Fl. Probe Lead. 419 TUBULAR-LONG POINTED METAL Similar 10 YSI 4.3 418.but longer for deep Insertion in semi-solids.Has sec. handle and detachable lead Stainless steel.Useable to ISO'C 1300'FI.No.electrJcally ISolated. 433 Tim.Constant ;~ C) \,\ ,~--.., WARRANTY All probes carry ol one-year warranty on workmanship and components.Damage through accident.misuse or tampering is not covered.Probe hfe Will vary from a few months to many years depending mainly on the amount of cable flexing Normal life exceeds one year Probe Modifications Scientific Division Yellow Springs Instrument CO.Jlnc. Yellow Springs,Ohio 45387 ·.phone 513-767-7241'Telex 20-5437II The following probe modiflcoltions will be quoted on request· YSI 402 -Length to 24";Teflon instead of vinyl YSI 403.410,416,418 -Length'to 36";bends to 90'with 3/8"to 1/2"radiUS YSI 404 -Leng.hs from 1"to 5" YSI 40S -Probe without case:longer probe stem to 12" YSI 406 -Same as YSI 403,except 1/8"to 3/8"bend radius YSI 40B -Bends to 90':probe length to 12" YSI 41S -Length from S"to 24" YSI 419 -Lengths from 6"to 60" YSI 409A.421.427 -Teflon covered lead to 60"(con.ult faclory for pOSSible temperature error):epoxy encapsulated thermistor without stainless steel disc YSI 423 -Length to S" Special probes manufactured to customer specifications.including waterproof probes utilizing marine cable for deep water apphcations_ Scientific Division Yellow Springs Instrument Co.,Inc. Yellow Springs,Ohio 45387·Phone 513-767-7241·Telex 20-5437 APPLICATION VSI Series 400 probes are recommended 'Dr use wilh YSI Te-Ie- Thermometers and temperature controllers for direct tempera· ture measurement. STEM EFFECT "Stem Effect"refers to the potential inaccuracy of measurement caused by heat transfer through the lead of a probe.The leads of some probes are relatively more massive for (he sake of rugged- ness;such leads introduce potentially greater stem effects These effects may be lessened by I11lnimizing the difference be· tween probe tip temperature and lead temperature by means of approprtate insulation.Isolation or immerSion as each applicatIOn dictates.Stem effect IS negligible on probes With very hghl leads --though at the exp.ense of ruggedness. II STORAGE When nOI In lise.probes and leadS should be formed IntO lac loops If !JIMes are streTched or wrapped tIghtly around Inst ment cases.sheathing may become permanently Indentl creating stresses sufficient to cause mechanical failure.SI( probes at temperalUres below 50°C.preferably at room te perature.I CAUTION Use only with Instruments deSigned for YSI Series 400 prob' In the presence of high intenSIty RF energy sources,local he ing,temperature errors and probe damage may occur In mediI use.unplug the probe or remove II from patIent conlact bele activating electro·surgIcal apparatus or orher direct-coupled f energy source. ITEM 005311 PIN A40738L Februarv 1981 1 '-0 1 I i 1 1 I 1 I )I 1 .1 i YSI Series 400 Probe Styles Available CLEANING CAUTIONS Several precautions must be observed when cleanlllg and 51eriltzlng probes:85 they are easily destroyed with Improper handling NEVER BOIL OR AUTOCLAVE THE VINYL JACKETED LEAD WIRE The vinyl may salely be exposed to temperatutes up to 1GO°C.but above 90°C the vinyl softens and can be deformed permanently by mechamcal stress.Handle gently whIle hot Avoid conlac(with strong.aromatic.chlorinated.ketone. elher or ester salvenls ,Prolonged immersion in alcohols or mild organic solvents,detergent solutions or highly alkaline solut.ons will cause the vinyl to lose flexibility.In medical applications,the user must determine that a probe is suitable and suffiCiently flex- ible for esophageal or rectal use. Dunng cleaning or sterilization.probes should be handled gently When wipIng clean.hold the probe In one hand at the senSing lip and wIpe the probe and lead wire toward the plug er,d If exceSSive pressure is used.the covering Will be stretched. which may break the Internal wireS and destroy the probe Contll1ued fleXing of lead wires in use and cleanIng will break tna II\lernal wIres and cause lallure.Failure from rhis cause is not covered by the warranty. (~' ''',.>,c.\ o ~):'j " ('\ DISINFECTION Probes may be diSInfected and sanitized by washing With 3% hydrogen perOXide or 70%isopropanol,70%ethanol is nearly as effective,but 100%alcohols are less germicidal,Dakln's solution (sodium hypochlorite in neutral buffer)15 also suitable Boef Im- mersion in detergent solutions is not harmful. Phenol disinfectants,such as hexachlorophene.should be avoided because the disinfectant may be absorbed by fhe vinYl. STERILIZATION The detachable probe portion of the YSI 416 and 421 probes may be autoclaved.but should never be boiled.NEVER BOIL OR AUTOCLAVE ANY YSI SERIES 400 TEMPERATURE PROBE EXCEPT FOR THE DETACHABLE PORTION OF YSI 416 OR YSI 421.On other probes,autoclaving may cause the insulation to fail and may also cause the probe to give inaccurate temperature readings, Ethylene oxide sterililation does not damage the probe.but the gas is highly irritallng and is absorbed by the plastic pans. Directions given by the manufacturer 01 the sterilizer must be followed:and before handling 0'use.probes must be safely and thoroughly ventilated according to the sterililing apparalUS manufacturer's instructions.Biological indicators should be em- ployed to assure that sterility has been achieved. Probe Time No.Dncrip1i(Jn Constan' 401 GENERAL PURPOSE:Esophageal or ,ectallemperature 70 in humans and animals_Used for waler temperatures sec. (short term),and ohen buried for sub·soal readings Used for air where fast response is not required.Most rugged probe Vinyl tip and lead Useable to 100'C (212°FI 402 SMALL FLEXIBLE VINYl.Reclallemperatures of small 3.2 animals.Esophageal temperatures of infants.Cuvetle sec temperatures Vinyl sheath and tip.Useable 10 100°C 1212°F) 423 SMALL SEMI-FLEXIBLE NYLON.Frozen food package 14 temperatutes Esophageal and (ecral readIngs Cuverte sec temperatures.Nylon with epoxy lip.Useable to 100"C 1212°FI. 406 ·'BANJO"SURFACE TIiMPERATVRE Skin.oral.",01 06 lary.waler bath.and flat surjace temperatures,Excel·sec lent for many air temperalure appltcatlons Handle aids in probe use.Stainless steel Useable to 150 D C 1300'F) 409A ATTACHABLE SURFACE TEMPERATURE.Slainiess 11 steel cup.epoxy backed with teflon-covered fleXible sec wire.Easy to tape on nat surfaces.Good fO(heal 1055 or Compression efficiency study of piping.Useable to 150°C 1300°F) 409B ATTACHABLE SURFACE TEMPERATURE Tape on skill 1.1 or flat surfaces.Good 101 heat 1055 and compresSion ef sec ficiency study of piping systems Similar ro 409A but less f1e)(jble and more rugged wllh 10'vmyl covered parallel lead With fight angle phone plug Wrmlnallon Stamless steel cup.epoxy backed Useable 10 100 u C 1212 OF) 421 SMALL SURFACE TEMPERATURE.Cuvette.wale'03 bath.leaf and other surfaces.24"Teflon'·covered flexl-sec ble wire.Stainless steel diSC With epoxy back,Can be autoclaved.Useable to 150'C 1300°FI Probe head electrically isolated.connec(Qr nol Isolated Detachable lead 427 SMALL SURFACE TEMPERATURE.Like VSI 421 ""'0 3 With YSI 402 type junc1ure.Non-detachable lead.non·sec eUloclavable.Useable ,0 150°C 1300°FI 405 AIR TEMPERATURE.Test rooms.Incubators.remote a"06 readings.gas streams.etc.Stainless steel cage around sec epoxy encapsulated thermistor.Useable 10 1 50 l C 1300'FI. 403 TUBULAR.For rugged duty in liquid i",mers;on Fasl reo 3.4 sponse oral or rectal.Stainless sleel 5/32"dla,Useable sec to 150°C 1300'FI 406 THIN TUBULAR.Same as YSI 403.eKcept d,ameter IS 2 5 118"and probe is lells rugged.bUI response 15 tasler sec Useable to 150'C 1300'FI. 410 TUBULAR WITH FITTING·For readlll~l~III pipes 01 34 closed vessels Stainless steel Flttrn~1 wlthSlands 500 sec pSI Useable 10 150°C 1300'fl Configuration ~·MAX F'~·O( I .=::::: T-=t ~".MAX r"O j F""0 ::;::::::....L-~_"tTl=IJ~. r'·O C>"O =~~2"--J' ·k.D0=.,<LILJ= ';.:17 GAUGE1e:F"..t <LILl=............----,...- ~J'------t=1-,-1 ~_r;;-R:'~';~--,,.ol:~i:"7!:-= ,-'''-Fl,.AT lEAD to·.or l."O~~1~~~~~ ~;:Axi_-FLAT LEAO 050·x,132'"x 10' ~'~OI2i--fLen ...L_>', T"..·MAX 24-1>..~C-/~ ...L__>'.1T'..··MAX. ["··0e~.>:F,,·or- ,,It== ~4/,-+'.~ c ~'r.P T it I'~ r----.t ------. , - DISCHARGE MEASUREMENTS AT GAGING STATIONS Sounding (determination of depth)is com- monly done mechanically,the equipment used depending on the type of measurement being made.Depth a.nd position in the vertical are measured by a rigid rod or by a sounding weight 32Al--233 ().........69-3 of the moving car is determined for each run by making an independent measurement of·the . distance it travels during the time that the revolutions of the rotor are electrically.counted. A scale graduated in feet and tenths of a foot is used for this purpose.Eight pairs of runs are usually made for each CUlTent meter.A pair of runs consists of two traverses of the basin,one in each direction,at approximately the same speed.Practical considerations usually limit the ratings to velocities ranging from 0.1 fps to about 15 fps,although the rating car can be operated at lower speeds.Unless a special request is made for a more extensive rating, the lowest velocity used in the rating is about 0.2 fps,and the highest is about 8.0 fps. For convenience in field use,the data from the current-meter ratings are reproduced in tables,a sample of which is shown in figure 11. The velocities corresponding to a range of 3 to 350 revolutions of the rotor within a period of 40 to 70 seconds are listed in the tables.This range in revolution and time has been found to cover general field requirements.To provide the necessary information for extending a table for the few instances where extensions are required, the equations of the rating table are shown in the spaces provided in the heading.The equation to the left of the figure in parentheses (2.28 in fig.11)is the equation for velocities less than 2.28 fps and the equation to the right is for velocities greater than 2.28 fps.The 2.28 fps is the velocity common to both equations. It should be noted that the equations giveq are those of the rating table,and not necessarily those of the actual rating.If a rating table already on file matches a rating within toler- ances,that table is selected in preference to preparing a new one.Those tolerances ~re listed below. 9 suspended from a cable.The cable is controlled either by a reel or by a handline.A sonic sounder is also available,but it is usually used in con- junction with a reel and a sounding weight. Sounding equipment 'used by the Geological Survey is described in the following categories: wading rods,sounding weights,sounding reels, handlines,and sonic sounder. Wadins rods The twoty.pes of wading rods commonly used are the top-setting rod and the round rod.The top-setting rod is preferred because of the con- venience in setting the meter at the proper depth and because the hydrographer can keep his hands dry.The round rod can be used in making ice measurements as well as wading measure- ments,and has the advantage that It can be taken down to I-foot lengths for storing and transporting. The top-setting wading rod has a 3f-inch hexagonal main rod for measuring depth and a. "'-inch diameter round rod for setting the posi- tion of the current meter.(See fig.12.) The rod is placed in the stream so the base plate rests on the streambed,and the depth of water is read on the graduated main rod.When the setting rod is adjusted to read the depth of water,the meter is positioned automatically for the O.6-depth method.(See fig.13 and p.32.) The 0.6-depth setting might also be described as the O.4-depth position up from the stream- bed.When the depth of water is divided by 2 and this new value is set,the meter would be at the 0.2-depth position up from the streambed. When the depth of water is multiplied by 2 and this value is set,the meter would be at the 0.8- depth position up from the streambed.These two positions represent the conventional 0.2- and 0.8-depth positions in reverse.(See p.32.) The round wading rod consists of a base plate,lower section,three or four intermediate sections,.sliding support,and a rod end (not essential).(See fig.H.)The parts are assembled as shown in figure 15.The meter is mounted on the sliding support and is set at the desired position on the rod by sliding the support. The round rod ,is also used in making ice measurements.Intermediate sections of the round rod are screwed together to make an ice rod of desired length.(See fig.16.)The most convenient length for a.n ice rod is about 3 feet Tolna,,", in 1!C"UN 1.0 .5 Sounding equipment lUoolw(ou ojrwrw 1!C","MIIl0.0 _ 1.0 and above _ • - ~ ~:,e ::' .,--,,:~ '",; -ceO >~Cr:( ·... ..'.... ..... ~'.'.""":".~.""~. ...: ':'".".~..:~..' -:.... .'>'~":';:~::~:r:~::"-"" ~.-;...:....,:...:~.".... '. ~. ,""".,:.~~',.•....: cco 2~L ,...-.-",.,,,,-,.. J 1 1 J ]J 1, :'" I:1 ~:~ I·';..it..:. ]]1 1 ,ATURES ''.;.\,I .~.<,.;<s::,8~i,~~·,~1·;~<'i~t;>·····j·{:;·L'·"I IDESCRIPTION OF PARTS The dial backs tor the Pentax ME and MX leras-Dial Data ME and Dial Data MX-are dy devices tor imprinting a varietY at useful ,rmation directly onto the corner of your ltographs,There are three integral dials on back of the data backs.one each to record day.month and year.And used in various lbinations.these dials can also be used to Jrd exposure data such as aperture setting. tter speed.focal length of lenses (for 35mm es and below)and magnification ratios. habet letters from A -0 are also included coding information. With a little imagination and by employing various codes.virtually unlimited uses can be found for home picture taking,tor schools.in industry.police work and science.Index specimens,product catalogues.aircraft;record progress on construction sights.These are just some of the many uses tor the Dial Datas. Both Dial Data MX &ME are exactly the same functionally.although the backs on which they are mounted differ in size because of the differences in the ME and MX cameras;the other difference is that sync cords connect in a different manner. i "---~--~'---'-'--_0_._-_'__"'H •••_ ,"--Sync Cord .--------year Dial I :'a LED Ind~cator ,I ---.g.,::llI Month Dial Day Dial ASA Film Speed Dial ASA Film Speeds I -Data Dial Indexes Battery Check Button I Battery Compartment Cover I Battery Compartment latch N \~ Nr:: \.rJ .:. :I .~: ". .. .:.'\'. :.~ ".... .,-::>.... .::' ;..;:..~\ ,.<;/~~' ,,",,". ',V ,:.,~• ,,~:~, ~..::.:", :~~ ~. " ,I ,t- .) ~" ~~... ..' j...~ ,\'. ,,::', " . ':~ .',,l::. .'·c\"I". ".... ':t ..-:",",,.-._--.-,~ 'r .:. 1 1,1 J 1 1 ",,l :::,'1 I 1 J 1:·:j 1 J j i 1 '.'.,:,~,'..';:~''.'.,'.,"•""11.', t ,i.-"f';7 ntttlt \IJ ')rt··it 1']t't"",fr '3 't 'F If fa'f At',trlej,rd¥"~,,,_.... ~~~ PECIFICATIONS "",'/:'";,,41;~,;~~r','f<S)§;~~:;"':/!,;;,,':I 400 100 -400 64 -160 days II -31) Numbers (0 -36)Nos.15. 17, 18,20.24,28,30.35 doubh focal lengths for lenses alank -0 Day Dial 3 groupS Color 25 -50 B&W 32 Three 1.5V silver oxide batteries LED indicator lights when battery check button is pressed, Approx.10,000 recordings (at Color ASA 64 -160 setting)or approx.1 y LED indicator lights when internal recording lamp is functioning, Records data in sequence on each frame at the respective operati ng speeds c Winder ME,Winder MX and Motor Drive MX. Power Source: BatterY'Checker: Number of Recordings: Recording Confirmation: Joint Use with Motor Drives: ASA Film Speed Settings: 77 -88 (Vears 1977 -1988) F-numbers (F1.2,FL4,Fl.7,F2,F2.4. F2.8.F3.4,F4,F4.8, F5.6.F6.7,F8,F9.5,Fll,F13.5.F16,F19, F22, F27, F32, F45,Fl.8,F2.5,F3.5,F4.5) Blank -D 12 months of the year (1 -12) Shutter speeds (AUTO,1000,500.250,125.100.60.30.15; months 8.4,2,&1 double as shutter speeds) Letters A -0 (B doubles as "B"shutter speed setting) Blank -0 Both backs interchange with standard ME &MX back covers.ME sync cord connects with ME's X-sync terminal;MX sync cord with MX's FP terminal. Internal recording lamp projects the data onto the reverse side of the film. Year Dial 3 groups Month Dial 4 groups ecording System: 'ata on Each Dial: lounting: \J Q ().'~ ~) (;' -C '\'' ..", , ,', 'r " "/;..':. ':, ~.:,: .".. c'1 " ~. ~<",.. < " .;". .,~.>: ',', ...:,' ',; :.,',.~,' '! ,J, »1 1 )~'~..),)1 1 1 :1 1 W i 1 1 ','~'.'..'':-::.;-,''"""'1 _.~.L':'_~~d....~l,'eM *"-<";",,%'1;&/.';'1 *....t )'<r i ._~..__.__~i'n __-Ii".'.lIiIItllii.i!i·'..lIIi+....""""""===========:::::===============--===-- [MOUNTING her Features: nensions and ight: Mounts without interfering with use of flash.tripod and other camera accessories (except 25O-frame bulk film back). Dial Data MX:139.5mm (length)x 54.5mm (height)x 28mm (depth)maX. dimensions;130g.(with batteries) MX Body +Dial Data MX:Depth increases to 59mm (length &height remain the sameI Dial Data ME:134.5mm (length)x 54.5mm (height!x 30.5mm (depth) max.dimensions;130g (with batteries) ME Body +Dial Data ME:Depth increases to 59mm (length &height remain the same) lJIust.3 Open the standard camera back (11. Depress the pin which protrudes from hinge (2) and pull ol,ltward at the top of the hinge until the back comes loose. 3 \ ~::.', lIJust.4 Procedure is the reverse of the abc mounting the data backs.First imert the bl of the hinge into the mount at the base of 1 camera,then,depress the protuding pin (2) align the top of the hinge with the top mou Release the protuding pin when properly al to spring the back into place. () \"Ia ~ lJ', :': ;:': .;~:. /;"1 ',! :.'..', (',, ,r .·i· .'',.:.',",- .,.:".-::-.. ,~'i:1~~)'~ 'f, " \::.,... .;,, '( ,) ~,\.. ,~, ~~ /" ", '~l' (.~. ",';.~. '.:~' "\" ~i .~i '~. + .-:-, ,~'. ~ " .:) "'",,:' .:". 1 ,1 -],I -1 J ,1 :.::,l 1 .1 ,::']),\J },]")I ] .:',','" t ',')."h tt;"n"$(te ,t"r"is,l'"#tit M ?g 1 7"$t "k ~---~,":,,,,---:-:-:,,,c:::::__:~~-;-:--- CHECKING BATTERIES /IIust.8 Press the battery check button (8)marked "BC."The LED indicator will light if the circuit is functioning properly.If the indicator fails to light.make Sure that batteries have been inserted properly,When the LED indicator no longer lights, HTERIES lAllATION st.5 Lift out on the battery compartment h IS)until the cover (4)comes off. st.6 Insert three 1.5V silver oxide bat~eries 1 the (+)signs facing outwards. 6 ~, .J a t 1 ,(' ('\ ~_I lItust.1 To replace the battery compartment cover (4).insert the two tabs (6)into notches at the right side of the battery compartment and close the latch (5). 1 .'., fl l. 8 , 1'.:..', ., "i" '--:'..~.; 9 it is time to replace the batteries.Repl, three batteries together as standard per cannot be assured when batteries am m BATTERY LIFE The 1.5V silver oxide batteries are ganl sufficient for 10.000 data recordings;il .used at all they will last for approx.2 y SYNC CORD HOOK-UP' /IIust.9 For Dial Data ME.connect the cord to the ME's X·sync terminal 111), Data MX connects to the FP terminal a After aligning the sync cord.turn the CI screw (12)clockwise to lock in place. '.~ .'; ;.;- ·i', I ·1t;: 1.-f:",. ·z'.' .".. ':', ~.:- ,',. 'c• " :}. '-.\ I ..." "'..•. 1 t ,....:.' .'... 1 1 1 )1 ~'l '.)1:::.t'J J ~~.'J I.}1 ~J 1 ''..:.'.:~" t 'i':,"'I ¢to""t r ...0 t *~t ''Nt 11 ! "J .e1'...~d)P ,*r t 'r ,t ',.l ii,'!;?'$~jJql,,;:ifji)\'.iT"','.•'IPERATION•...,j ie''"'/<:::%;:;,!:f~'l:r"h¥!;J,i•••i,,', USING THE ASA FILM SPEED DIAL lIIust.11 The following settings circle the J film speed dial (13). To set the dial,turn the knob (14/until aligns with the setting which covers the film Ea(;/l setting covers a wide range of film spel latitude is rather wide..For example,with A color film,which is to be push processed at 360,the Color 64 -160 setting will be sufti Although the 64 -160 setting is also used fe 64 color film,when the subject is brightly Ii figures can be made to stand out brighter by lowering the dial to 25 -50. NCTIQN TEST 1St.10 After the sync cord is hooked up, lase the shutter once before loading film in camera,If the LEO indicator (9)lights ,ultaneously with releasing the shutter,the .jection bUlb inside the unit is functioning perly.'. ,e LEO indicator fails to light,although batteries still fairly new,check whether the sync cord been connected properly,batteries have been ,rted properly,etc,If you still can not find the se of the trouble,it may be internal function and the unit should be taken to the rest Pentax service outlet. 10 11 \' I ('I PRECAUTIONS WITH BATTERIES When batteries are low and when temperatures are be'low freeling the LED indicator (9)will not light.This Indicates that the recording lamp inside the unit is also not lighting and data will not record.If low temperature is the cause,the batteries or battery compartment should be warmed.When batteries are warm,battery performance returns to normal. •The battery check button (8)will light even in low temperatures unless the batteries are extremely low.However,the unit will not function unless the LED indicator lights.. •When the LED indicator produces only a faint glow,exposure may not be sufficient enough to record data.In this instance,exposure compensation can be made by lowering the ASA film speed setting on the data back's ASA film speed dial (next paragraph).With ASA 100 color film,for example,set the dial to ASA 25 -50. , ...:. j, '.'", Color Film I 25 -50 64 -160 8&W I 32 400 100 -40C R...J 0../ N 6' -J .': ..: :"",'.. .<. ,.1, '! '\ ...,' "I " '. ;" i \," ~"~.::~~.. ~~:5' ; l..."" ',::. 1 1 1 1 ")1 L J .'J ),J;....I .•~J j ) ~~.~.''lot 1-''4 _•.Jjo;,•.~.,._.~_.~_•.~._•.........:....-,-......,........ lIIust.15 Both ME and MX Dial Data bal securely to the camera when it is used witl a tripod. lIIust.16 A special soft camera case whicl encloses both the camera and the data bae available as an accessory. 15 1614 SHOOTING POSTURE Dial Data ME &MX are designed so as to permit easy viewing while hand holding the camera.When holding the camera vertically and viewing with the right'eye,the camera should be held so lis the shutter button is above eye level as shown in lIIust 14. 13 riI TTING THE DATA DIALS ust.12 Rotate the appropriate dial ,til the desired figure lines up with e index mark (15)on the left side the dial.When you desire that ~ertain dial not record,the blank tting I ---l.-J I must be used.For Imes when you do not wish to :ord any data at all,either rotate all ree dials to the blank settings,or lconnect the sync cord. I shutter speed settings on both meras (except the"l"setting on a ME)may be used to record data. Ie various information on each dial listed laterally in the specifications ~ge 4 -61. I~o~•••.J 1.::~ f'J ~ ck ~l' ".... '.:..' '., .:.':' ":::, r"~t I ·i t, r·.~r·.,i, ! i t;, ~ f }; J l' t\'f /.! ':( '~.;< j .,'~ "~.~. \':' ... :\'.:- .) "l j~ fr··· "; t ... .::. .... ...... l -1 ,]I 1 )\.J ..)f f .~::.'.1 t j 1 i 1,':'-:.'..:.'.:..~:;' IUSE WITH OTHER PENTAX ACCESSORIES Winder ME,Winder MX,Motor Drive MX ~ o C> (:-'> ~ -Q When used with winder and motor drive units both data backs record data on each frame in unison with the motor drive unit's operation speed. MX +Dial Data +Motor Drlva MX and NI-Cd Battarv Pack M 14 ~: 1,,'",'. ( II, 1 ):. : :;.. ....• l :,' '.'1....,.'.,.,..... .'iI .•.. ..:.' -.~..,'. '...'.,'. .:...; -.._.'~ .......' " ..... '.'-, .'.'.':':.-. ':'.,.....~ ......~_...;..~.-..~:'..~~:-~..~.~.../~.,..;. " "..-.-:,...-~,~~-"'-·-'i·-·~.~~,.:,".---"~~::;~:'S;;::",~.-",..-.,.~..~"",.,,,,,,,.,-.-.--"". ~,~:;,~~~.~:- - .;-: !~• .~.'"~'.',ro.'.'~<.' coo 7-"7 0 .~:..;.. )'J j ,),II }P :'TSrn"'h ~trmrr;rLYnnmLtt .L)"duy I 'it 1-.)j jtiiNi:'-LING LENSES--.~:--'--'---J A standard lens,when removed from the camera body,should be kept in a standard lens case for protection.This case is available as an optional ac- cessory. Be careful never to touch the lens sur· face with your fingers.Lens stains such as fingerprints are difficult to wipe off. The SMC Pentax lens is furnished with a jens cap 141 and a rear lens cap 15l, both of which protect the lens'from dust,dirt and moisture;be sure to keep these caps on the lens,while not in ac- tual use.It is a good practice to place these caps,whenever removed from the lens,in the leather lens case so that they will not be lost.The lens case is large enough to hold a lens with a filter lexcept for a polarizing onel attached; in this case.the focusing ring has to be set at infinity to minimize the length of the lens.When the lens has been re- moved from the camera bOdy,place it front-element down as shown in Fig.1. Don't place the lens on its side because it may roll.Never place the lens rear- element down,for to do so may cause damage to the protruding automatic diaphragm lever or may cause the lens to topple over. (~ 1.' "_1'~ 1 4 5 p ',,--, o ,,) ,-) -...., , if.~,', ,;1 !., .'?' .': • L ~ ,~":':. :"','.:..'.... '.~'.-.; ,', .;. ".~'.~ ';'/. " " ,v:· ~'. 'f .~, ';,," :',' '.;:. )I T i I I t,',I,.J -'I ...,~~.],]J -'.J 1 ]j }.:','.... ,, I MACRO lENSES Tel,.,.',j;"','_l I '\' ", .:" ",," .',,', :,.... 3'":. ,;-~ .;" .~. 25 .~\:. (,.;:,}f' .\. ".'..~.. ,:) t· ""r ~..' 1...:. ,', '.-~ ,', .jj i" " ,', ',> ",' ,:" .;., ...., '\ ',::" :x:::,,' ,"~.:'>' <~t ..:\ .~~:;::','': ;',~.) When the magnification index @ in- dicates '4'.it means that the image on the film is 1/4 as large as the real object.For macrophotography.simply set the desired magnification on the index and then focus by moving the entire camera back and forth.When using an SMC Pentax-M Macro 'ens no particular exposure determination is required.For exposure.you can depend on the meter built into the Pentax cameras.You also need not worry about exposure increase factors for close-up work. Life-si:ze magnification is possible with the SMC Pentax·M Macro 50mm f/4 lens when it is combined with the No. 3 Auto Extension Tube K.or with the SMC Pentax Bellows 100mm f/4 lens when it is used with the Auto Ex- tension Tubes K50mm. ~ "I ~ I .~ ~'t:;~ :; ".i", I, j 4:3 ""'~"','~.~1 ~ 1~ 1" .",: ,~ ;.;: " 0"::~ (J ", -, ) ~ \1 1 II .]~l t r ~r \';:tWt:tswbrtbCpu1'j l:hd.b.,ii;L tttrmn i.i.a 1 c,r'D:'C i •-,!!t"i 1 flt'?g:YeM::::»''bzrtrti'&L-}1 [~q~M LENSE~c_~_'..__ 19 Close-up Lenses An optional attachment lens for close- ups is available for the SMC Pentax Zoom 45-125mm f/4 lens.The at- tachment lens screws to the front of the lens to permit photographing the subject closer than the lens'normal __~_'-'-l minimum focusing distance will per- mit.When the attachment lens and the zoom lens are used together,focus- ing is via the zoom lens'close focus- ing scale @ li.e.,the bottom roll of white figures in Fig.191.Close focus- ing range for the 45-125mm zoom lens is 1.5 to 0.9 meter.In the case of the SMC Pentax Zoom 135-600mm f/6.7 lens,a close-up attachment is furnished as an accessory.With the close-up lens attached,focusing range is from 7-3.35 meters.A close focus- ing scale is provided on the zoom lens. Focusing Once in focus,the SMC Pentax Zoom lenses maintain the focus setting even while zooming..It is a good practice to focus at the maximum focal length,i.e. with the largest possible image,and then zoom back to the desired focal length,This ensures maximum focusing accuracy. F iiters Refer to the chart on pages 16 and 17 to determine which filters to use with zoom lenses. Depth of Field Scales/I nfrared Photography Depth-of-field scales and compensation markings for infrared focusing are not provided with zoom lenses.For most of the lenses,however,indications as to how to determine these are given in the charts on pages 32-111. The focal shih required for infrared photography with the 28-50mm lens is indicated in the diagram at the rigl1t. If an aperture of f/8 is used,however, focal compensation is not required as the depth-of-field will adequately cover the amount of shift. Distortion By nature,zoom lenses give rise to slightly greater distortion lalterations in the shape or proportion of objects) then fixed focal length lenses.The amount of distortion varies according to the focal length of the lens.The zoom lens is,therefore,not recom- mended for situations where propor- tional accuracy is(crucial. 26 27 .~~. ", '\ j " ~ -J J jJ ,\.. .; , l ~:~ -j: \.,~ .', ":".•... .:.;-.... ",::: :.'1 'r.,.' ",":.~'l'. ,;:;·'~<f· ./'.;:<:.:~~ r.; t '.. 'l~.,. 'I ./ 1 " ", '\,;-",,;:::;';. ····~f::(,·: K:, .,". " ,, " ,~I 1,.. '~{, ~~... 1 \ If~~. I I,r"',',l··t,,<: -,{.i'·'~'::: I !.S'.":1 ,;.,:. t :"oj:, ,. ',' :.~~,'<., ... "-:::~':" "-;t I j 1 'i 'J 1 J,',,1.:,'J •",J ,',1 ,J:'])].~•...:".'$"'·iwWi:jr,%rwptYwk"'S,.At rmH;frtti;**'mrMtrt m ttI 7 ..··'51$.....i rH··W « •".~._X ..~~.~._..__~"ti"i,d")''t")!?Ii ..+ttt tn••1m.+itt 1 ,j 20 28-50mm f/3.5-f/4.5 21 35-7Omm f/2.8-F3.5 Variable Apertllre Zoom Lenses The SMC Pentax Zoom 28mm-50mm f/3.5-f/4.5 (Fig.20)and Zoom 35mm -70mm f/2,8-f/3.5 (Fig.211 both fea- ture variable maximum aperture which depends upon the focal length setting in use.Likewise both have two aper· ture index marks:a •®which Indi- cates 'the maximum aperture at the shortest focal length setting,and a green line @ (which indicateds the maximum aperture at the longest focal length).Thus,with the 28-50mm lens, the.index gives the f/3.5 maximum aperture with the lens at 28mm;while the green index indicates the f/4.5 maximum aperture of the'lens when it is set at 5Omm.Similarly.,the f/2.8 maximum aperture of the 35-70mm lens when used at 35mm focal length is indicated by the •index.while the green index indicates the f/3.5 maxi- mum aperture of the lens when it is used at 70mm setting. When using inbetween focal lengths, the exact aperture lies partway be· tween both indexes.However,the aperture scale features half stops,per- miting adjustment to the closest index, depending upon which focal length setting is in use.For example,with the 28-50mm lens,you should adjust the ring one click in the direction of the diamond index when at 35mm,and one-click in the direction of the green index at 40mm. The 40-80mm f/2.8-f/4 zoom pic- tured on page 30 has three indexes;use the •index for focal lengths in the vicinity of 40mm;use the white line when the focal length is closer to S9mm,and use the green line when closed to BOmm. Approx.Aperlures for Midway Focal' Lengths For flash photography and other special shooting applications its handy to know the approximate f-number at the midway focal length settings of the 28 29 ,\ .-,. .;:. ,{ ,;3 ..,. ; i ..,i. J .~.'/-~. '",'',I! ,,~~~. ,";·t· ~).(~ " , < " .' i,'" , l'j~.... :;' ~. ...... :\:J ",.. i '~' .:~. .':::,-, ':.. "j(::l ":,<:~,J:., ~.;. i " .;.. " " ':"4:,. ~.' ".::' ';t -') .-~I N~,-. "'-. ';" >,1,<,,"'::,-. .,~, :.J ~j 11 11 .J ·L,);'..r J ~'1 OJ _,I 'J 1 it",r ±t rr ...t tih rh#iH:'f'tr""ttr'•'1Snrn tHe :i i !t±., ,--~}1 above three lenses;these are as follows. Lens Setting Approxi f-number 28-50mm 35mm f/4 35-70mm 50mm f/3.1 40-80mm 60mm f/3.4 "--- Dual Control Zooms While most of the SMC Pentax Zoom lenses feature a combined zoom/focus collar,the following three feature sepa- 'rate zooming and focusing rings:24- 35mm,28-50mm and 4Q--SOmm. With all three lenses,focusing is per. formed with the front ring,and zoom· ing is accomplished with the back ring. MACRO Setting of the 40-80mm lens The 40-BOmm zoom lens pictured in Fig.22 features a clickstop at the 80mm setting.To engage'the macro override system turn the zooming ring beyond the click-stop to the MACRO setting as shown in Fig.23 and extend the focusing ring.When it's extended all the way.the magnifica- 22 40mm-BOmm fl2.S -f/4 23 tion ratios 1:10.1:6 and 1:4 will be visible;these represent magnifications approximateiy 1/10X,1/6X and 1/4X the actual object size.The figures to the left of the ratios (I.e.,0.S3.0.52 and 0.37)are the corresponding focusing distances for the given magni· fication.Thus,when the macro over· ride sYstem is engaged and the focusing ring is extended all the way,the apt proximate magnification will be 1/4X ·at a distance of 0.37 meter from the subject (although the focusing index will still read 1.2 meters!. When you wish to shoot at one of the premarked magnifications,align the fOcUsing ring just above the desired magnification ratio and focus by moving the camera closer or further from the subject,as required.If you focus by turning the focus ring,the magnification will be altered. Infrared compensation is not required with this lens at apertures of f/5.6 or smaller (depth of field adequate covers infrared focal shift at these apertures/' 30 31 8c N.--1 '1 1 -::.,i, ", .':;> ;:,~",:',.: '-::'~~ft\,....>\;::; .;:~;~:.•.: .':>' .,', ",;:. l '( ',4' .J .f•• <~.' ::},:~:'; ~.~~~~" .:~.:.'.~~. t '! .)~ ;~.,' ,,~, ;1- ~.. ~~" <"•• ~',\: ~': .",'"l y !r, t, t"" f.' ; J.,.-, "l i •• '"':.' ','; '.'t ..~:.' ..':';~:-:' ,.,. ~..:.-:0.,1 ~.. ":.0.• ~'. ,,:-.(\(l ~>I (c - - ..... TABLE OF CONTENTS Safety Precautions Sa1:ety Warning Decals . Operating Instructions -Adverse Conditions Preservation of Our Environment. Model Identification -Gemini Specifications and Condensed Service Data. Summer Storage . . . .'}. . . . . Two-Cycle Engine Theory and Operation Operation. Maintenance. Tmub\.eshooting Procedures. Service and Warranty Accessories.._ Tool Kit and Publications 1-4 5 6 7 8-9 10 11 12-13 .14-16 •17-28 29-30 31-34 35-37 .38 "0 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION:ATTENTION: 1 BEFORE STARTING ENGINE:CHECk THROTTLE AND BRAKE FOR PROPER OPERATION.CHECK TO SEE THAT HOOD IS SECURELY LATCHED.CHECk SURROUNDINGS TO VERIFY CLEAR OPERATION AREA.DETERMINE THAT STEERING IS FREE AND fUNCTIONAL. ALWAYS:BE SEATED AND IN POSmON TO CONTROL VEHICLE.STOP ENGINE BEFORE ATTEMPTING ADJUSTMENTS. kNOW THE LIMITATIONS OF THE VEHICLE AND YOUR SKILLS AS A DRIVER.UNDERSTAND YOUR OWNERS MANUAL. WEAR CLOTHING DESIGNED fOR SNOWMOBILING.REMOVE IGNITION kEYWHEN LEAVING MACHINE. AVANT LA MISE EN MARCHE:S'ASSURER OU BON FONCTIONNEMENT DE L'ACCELERATEUR ET au FREIN.S'ASSURER aUE LE CAPOT EST VERROUILLE.S'ASSURER aU'IL N'Y A PAS D'OBSTACLE AUX ALENTOURS.S'ASSURER QUE LE GUIDON NE SOIT PAS BLOQUE. EN TOUT TEMPS:ETRE ASSIS DANS UNE POSITION PERMETTANT LECONTROLE DU VEHICULE.ARRETER LE MOTEUR AVANT DE PROCEDER ADES REGLAGES.BIEN CONNAiTRE LES L1MITES DE TOLERANCES DU VEHICULE ET vas CAPACITES DE CONDUCTEUR.BIEN COMPRENDRE LE MANUEL DE L'UTILISATEUR.PORTER DES VETEMENTS caNCUS POUR LA MOTONEIGE.ENLEVERLA CLE DE CONTACT QUAND VOUS LAISSEZ VOTRE VEHICULE. - - The symbol A is a warning symbol and is meant to be just th·at.Instruction decals bearing this symbol have been placed on your snowmobile to remind you of particularly important items,and each of these decals is explained below. ACAUTJON -Although your Polaris has been designed to provide you with a safe,reliable snow- mobile,much of its safety depends on the operator. Improper use of this snowmobile or failure to maintain it in good operating condition can result in injury.To reduce this possibility,read the impor- tant safety items below. Before Starting Engine A."CHECK THRDn-LE AND BRAKE FOR PROPER OPERATION" Keep in mind that the throttle and brake are the primary controls of your snowmobile.If either should malfunction,a serious loss of cont'fol could result. When checking the throttle,make sure that the cont-rol lever will compress evenly and smoothly. When the lever is released,it should immediately return to the id4e position without binding or hesitation.If the throttle doesn't function smooth- ly,do not attempt to start the engine. The need for a properly functioning brake is obvious.Your Po~aris is equipped with the highest quality hydraulic -disc brake system available and operates directly on the drive system.Two opera- ting characteristics of the brake must always be checked before starting the engine to assure proper -performance: 1.Lever Travel -When the brake handle is depressed,it should move no closer than 1/2"from the handgrip.Excessive travel indicates low fluid level,air in hydratJHc~system,or improper adjust- ment.If the lever travel is excessive,refer to section on brake adjustment. 2.Lever Feel - A hydraulic system multiplies the force of your hand squeeze just as ,the hydraulic system on a car.It depends on an adequate and air-free supply of hydrau lic fluid in the system for proper operation.If the lever feels "spongy"when squeezed,both the fluid level and presence of air in the system must be checked,as shown in this manual. B."CHECK FOR PROPER OPERATION OF STEERING SYSTEM" Check for proper operation of the steering system by manually turning the skis completely to the right and to the left.If difficulty is encountered, check for k:e and snow buildup that may be obstructing the steering linkage.Ensure adjustable handlebars are locked securely. C."CHECK TO SEE THAT THE HOOD IS' .SECURELY LATCHED" The hood of your snowmobile .protects the operator from moving parts as well as aiding in sound emission controls and various other functions. Under no circumstances should your snowmobile be operated with the hood open or removed. D."CHECK SURROUNDINGS TO VERfFY CLEAR OPERATING AREA" It is most important to assure yourself that YOu Safety Precautions lave al clear area all around your snowmobile, Including an area clear of bystanders.Remember ~hat the possibility always exists of some sideways rehicle slippage,or a little more throttle than :.'ntended,or debris can be thrown up by the track. If you are assured of a clear area surrounding you -lefore you start,you can give your full attention o operating the snowmobile. After Starting Engine ~."L1GHTING CHECK" Check headlight,high and low beam,taillight,and -Jrake light for operation. B."AUXIUAflY SHUT-OFF SWITCH" ,:heck auxiliary shut-off switch for proper opera- tion. ~Iways ",f.."BE SEATED AND IN POSITION TO CON- TROL VEHICLE" Improper operator position on the snowmobile can -le thE!source of serious injury.R~member that Jperating a snowmobile does require skill and !:)alance for pr-oper control,and an improper _losition can seriously reduce your ability to con- rol your snowmobile.The style of positioning .wi II vary from person to person as they become _more skilled,but under most conditions the proper )Qsiti<m is to be seated,feet on the running boards, Jnd in a comfortable position for proper throttle, brake,and steering control.,.... ~CAUTION -Your snowmobile is propelled by a revolving track which must be partially exposed ...lor proper operation.Serious injuries may be :aused by operator carelessness,resulting in hands, 'feet,or clothing becoming entangled in the track. Be alert.Remember,being properly seated with feet on the running boards keeps you clear of the track. B."STOP ENGINE BEFORE ATTEMPTING ADJ USTM E NTS" Your snowmobile's engine compartment contains moving parts.Shields and guards have been provid- ed,but it is still possible to carelessly get your hands or fingers into a moving belt or a rotating shaft.For this reason,NEVE R attempt adjustments with the engine running.The proper method is to turn off the ignition,raise the hood,make the adjustment,secure the hood,then restart the engine to check its operation.The same is true of track alignment.If the track must be re-aligned,it is recommended that this,ser.vice"beperformed by your dealer. C."REMOVE IGNITION KEY" There are two important reasons for this warning. Naturally,we don't want you to have your machine stolen.But more important,DO NOT tempt a child to start your sn~wmobile by leaving the key in the ignition. D."KNOW THE LIMITATIONS OF THE MA- CHINEAND YOUR SKILlSAS A DRIVER" For the purpose of this Ow.ners Manual we would like to make several ilTlPor'tant,pointsfor,¥Qu,;to remember. Your snowmobile is not a toy.It is a well engineered and constructed recreational vehicle.The following suggestions are provided to aid you in its safe operation: 1.Observe state and local laws governing snow~ mobile operation.They have been set up for your protection. Safety Precautions 3 ....tt.,..• .p .....H 's....... ...-- 5.When traveling on lakes and streams that are strange to you,always check with local residents or authorities for general information on condi- tions.Thin ice,open water,and snowmobiles are not compatible.Use good common sense judgment at a II ti meso 6.As with an automobile,defensive driving when traveling in a group of snowmobiles is an important factor in avoiding accidents.Don't tail- gate.Allow ample stopping distances. utilhy poles also are difficult to distinguish.Reduce speed when traveling near poles,posts,or hidden obstacles.BE ESPECIALLY ALERT IF YOU ARE SNOWMOBILING AFTER DARK. 8.Remember,the sound of your machine will drown out the sound of approaching vehicles.Look ahead,behind,and to the sides before turning or crossing railroad crossings or highways.Steep 7.When teaching youngsters to operate your Polaris,set up a nearby pre-determined course. Make sure they know how to drive and control the snowmobile before you·aUow them to make longer distance runs.Teach them proper snowmobile courtesy.~nroll them in a driver's training and safety course sponsored by local or state organiza- tions. 2.Traveling at night requires extra caution. Check both headlight and taillights to ensure their proper operation.Do not "over-drive"your head- light beam.A good f"ule to follow is to be able to bring your machine to a stop in the distance illuminated by the headlight.High speed driving at night is unwise and dangerous. 3.When traveling with a passenger aboard,it is the driver's responsibility to operate his machine in a safe manner. A CAUTION -Aiways make certain the pas- senger remains seated,facing forward,with both feet placed firmly on running boards.Be partic- ularly careful toavoid "jumping"your snowmobile. NOTE:Some Polaris model snowmobiles are designed for a single oc-cupant only;a decal on the console of these models indicat~s single occupant operation.Machines designated as double occupant should never be operated with more than two people on board. 4.Wire fences are a serious hazard,and unless you are thoroughly familiar with an area,you should always be on the alert for fences.Single strands are especially dangerous,since there can be a great distance between posts.Guy wires on ...........,b ••,..•_L - - - - .... 4 Safety Precautions Jmbankments may also hide your view.Always leave yourself a "way out."MAKE SURE BEFORE """'(aU CROSS. ,~ "ALWAYS WEAR CLOTHING DESIGNED FOR SNOWMOB~LING"-'~Iothing designed for snowmobiling is warm, ,omfortable,and saf.e. -~CA UTION -Always wear an approved helmet md eye protection.Don't wear loose clothing or lang scarves because such items can easily become '!""?ntan!}'!ed in moving parts.Also,be aware of the iVeathl~r forecast and especially the wino chill.A .table is given below for your reference.Be pre- .,.,,(Jared;be warm and comfortable. F."READ AND UNDERSTAND YOUR OWN- ERS MANUAL" And that's hopefully what you're doing right now. Read it all now and then re-read it from time to time.We have attempted to give you as much information as possible to alert you to the safety requirements of snowmobiling. CfLSIUS/FAHRENHElT CONVERSION TABLE C F C F C f C F ~o ~o ·20 .4 0 32 20 6S ·]9 ·]1 ·19 ·2 .I 34 21 70 ·]1 ·]6 ·18 0 2 36 22 72 .]7 ·35 ·17 I 3 37 23 73 ·]6 ·33 ·16 3 4 39 24 75 ·35 ·31 ·15 5 5 41 25 77. ·34 ·29 ·14'7 6 C3 ~6 79 .J]·27 ·13 9 7 45 27 11 ·32 ·26 ·12 10 8 46 21 12 ·31 -24 ·11 12 9 CI 29 IC ·30 ·22 ·10 14 10 so 30 86 ·29 -20 ·9 16 II 52 31 18 ·21 ·18 ·8 18 12 54 32 90 ·27 ·17 ·7 19 IJ 55 3J 91 ·26 ·15 -6 21 14 57 34 93 ·25 ·13 ·5 23 .5 59 35 95 ·24 ·11 ~25 16 61 J6 97 ·23 ·9 ·3 27 17 63 37 99 -22 -I ·2 28 18 6C 38 100 ,·21 ·6 ·1 30 19'66 39 102 " WIND CHILL CHART ...., ESTIMATED WIND SPEED IN MPH calm 5 10 15 20 25 30 3S 40 (wino 'l.DC'eds. gre"tPf th.n 40 mD"....."'. hn6e "dd,· lion.1 f't1K1:) ACTUAL THeRMOMETER READING ("F.) so 40 30 20 10 0 ·10 -20 -30 -40 -so -60 EOUIVALENT TEMPERATURE (·F.) so 40 30 20 10 0 -10 ·20 -30 -40 -so -60 4.8 37 27 16 6 -5 -15 -26 -36 -47 -57 -68 40 28 16 4 -9 -21 ·33 -46 -58 .70 -83 ·95 36 22 9 ·5 -18 ·36 ·45 -58 -72 -85 -99 -112 32 18 4 -1 -25 .39 -53 -67 -82 -96 .110 ·124 30 16 0 ·15 ·29 ·44 -59 ·74 ·88 ·104 .118 ·133 28 13 -2 -18 -33 -48 -63 -79 -94 -1~.125 .140 27 11 -4 -20 -35 .49 -67 -82 ·98 ·113 ·129 -145 26 10 ·6 -21 ·37 -53 -69 -85 -100 -116 -132 -148 LITTLE INCREA.SING GREAT DANGER DANGER DANGER ('0'PfOoerly Clat"''Pd ~'son)Oange-,hom Ii'fle-tn'!Of e.oosed fle'Sh ACAUTION -When working in the engine compartment,we must again remind you that no adjustments are to be made with the engine running.Please note the decal on the clutch guard;it should remind you to always use care and caution when servicing your machine. SAFETY WARNING DECALS 5 00 NOT OPERA TE ENGINE WITH HOOD REMOVED.H·OPEREZ PAS LE MOTEUR LORSOUE LE CAPOT EST OUYERT. DO NOT ATTEMPT ADJUSTMENT WITH ENGINE RUNNING.H·EFFECTUEZ AUCUH AJUSTEMEHT LORSQUE LE MOTEUR EST EN MARCHE. DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE WITH THIS GUARD REMOVED.HE FAITES PAS FOHCTlOHHER LE MOTEUR LORSOUE LA COURROIE O'EHTRAiHElIENT NEVER RUN ENGINE WITH DRIVE BELT REMOVED.EST ENU"EE. NEVER SERVICE CLUTCHES YOURSELF --SEE YOUR DEALER.NE REPAREZ JAMArS L·EMBRAYAGE \lOUS-MEMES.VOIR VOTRE COHCESSIOHNAIAIE. WARNING AVERTISSEMENT The clutch guard is designed to protect the op- erator from metal parts in the event the clutch should fail.Although the chance of failure is extremely remote,don't defeat the purpose of the guard by removing it.It is there for your safety. '. DEMEUREZ A L'ECART DE LA CHENILLE. AVERTISSEMENT STAY CLEAR OF TRACK. WARNING "STAY CLEAR OF TRACK"D. "00 NOT OPERATE ENGINE WITH THIS GUARD REMOVED" A.-~ .... - - B~"NEVER RUN ENGINE WITH DRIVE BELT REMOVED"- Operation of the engine with the belt removed can result in a serious overspeed condition.Any ser- vicing which requires operation without a belt must be done by yOU!dealer. C."NEVER SERVICE CLUTCHES YOUR- SE LF -SEE YOUR D€ALER" This warning means exactly what it says.Your clutch is a complex mechanism which operates at high rotational speeds.Each clutch is dynamically balanced before installation on your Polaris.Any tampering by the owner,with the exception of periodic lubrication,may disrupt this precision balancing and create an unstable condition. When "warming up"the engine or "clearing"the track and related components,no person should be standing in front of,in back of,or to the side of the snowmobile. CAUTION ... ATTENTION ... DO NOT OPERATE WITH INTAKE SILENCER R€MOVEO. NE PAS OPERER LORSQUE LE SILENCIEUX DE LA PRISE O'AIR EST ENLEVE. E."00 NOT OPERATE WITH INTAKE SI LENCER REMOVED" When op.erating engine with intake silencer r~ moved,damage to the engine may occur. Each time you operate your Polaris,or whenever you allow someone else to use it,keep these pre- cautions in mind.You have purchased a well designed and engineered product wh ich will give you many seasons of enjoyment.Remember though that safe snowmobiling is your responsibil- ity. nec'2.-- OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS -ADVERSE CONDITIONS '..;;l!l'l.-'-_ Sub-:~ero Weather.... Whenever the machine has been parked for some length of time,especially overnight,always shake loose the skis and track before attempting to put the machine into motion.The throttle should always be opened with enough authority to put the machine into motion,staying within safety :'Ijmits with respect to passengers on the machine. Powder Snow Your Polaris is designed to operate best on·un- packl~d snow.Maneuverability is attained by the _steering skis and by shifting your body weight. Maximum control will be attained after practice on trial runs. CAUTION:DO NOT OPERATE FOR PRO- LONGED PERIODS ON BLACKTOP,GRAVEL, OR GLARE ICE.It is essential that your machine be operated under conditions with adeq uate snow !""'"cover,as snow provides the only lubrication for .the power slide suspension.Failure to do so will result in excessive wear and damage to the slide _rail. If the machine becomes stuck in snow,free the running board area,and step down the snow for- ward of the machine so that when the tm-ottle is..... open1ed the machine will be able to climb up and over.The operator can then mount the machine and continue. NOTE:Ability of the machine to travel in ad- verse conditions will improve as the operator gains experience. Packed Snow ~M~meuverability will be lessened under packed snow or icy conditions.Reduce your speed in these conditions and when turning.- Glare Ice ...,.It is dangerous to operate at full throttle on glare ice or under slippery conditions.(f ice is unavoid- able,use caution and operate at slow s~eeds.Never ....attempt an abrupt change of direction on a slippery surface,for the chance of "spin-out"increases under these conditions. Hilly Terrain On hilly terrain,cut throttle speed to enable the Torque-Balance Drive System to gear down and provide maximum power.Always "zig-zag"up or down steep slopes.Do-not go straight,up or down long,steep hills. Responsible Driving To summarize,if you operate your snowmobile improperly,you will cause situations which will exceed your driving skills..Each snowmobile is a little different,and even if you are a seasoned driver,it is strongly recommended that you spend some time getting the feel of this particular ma- chine before you attempt any ambitious maneuvers. If you are new to snowmobiling,take enough time to acquaint yourself with the machine and what it will and won't do under varying conditions. 1.As mentioned above,get the feel of your machine before you attempt ambitious maneuvers. Your snowmobile depends on your body position for proper balance in executing turns,traversing hills,and so forth.It's best to start on a smooth, level area to build your operating experience. 2.A CA UTION -Driving your snowmobile requires your full attention.DON'T drink or use drugs or medications while driving as they will reduce your alertness and slow your reaction time. In most states and provinces,to drive while intox- icated or under the influence of drugs is prohibited by law. 3.A CAUTION -Before you let someone else use your snowmobile,ensure that you know the extent of their operating skills.Be especially care- ful in letting children operate your machine.Check to see if they have taken a snowmobile safety course and have an operator's certificate.For your own children's protection,as well as yours,make sure they take a snowmobile safety course.Adults also can benefit from the course. 4.A CAUTION -Don't "jump"your snow- mobile."Jumping"can injure your back because of spinal compression.The seat and suspension of your snowmobile have been designed and con- structed to give you protection,but they too have their limits.Your snowmobile is not intended for this kind of use. PRESERVATION OF OUR ENVIRONMENT .- Polaris recommends that you drive your snow- mobile with consideration given to the protection and preservation of our environment.As the num- ber of snowmobilers have increased in the past few years,so have the critics,challenging snowmobilers on the seeming lack of concern for the very envi- ronment they claim is theirs to enjoy. Noise Level Probab1y the most publicized subject with regard to snowmobiles is noise.Sound,which is measured in decibel by electronic instrumentation,is gen- ..erally determined by what is known as the dB "A"scale.The Society of Automotive Engineers 4SAE),the standard-making organization for both snowmobiles and passenger cars,has recommended that snowmobiles conform to prescribed sound levels.Their recommended standard is achieved by recording the sound level of the snowmobiles at a distance of fifty feet.Your Polaris conforms to or better than the SAE standards. It is important to point out that all regu lations,to be meaningful,require the cooperation of the snowmobi"1e driver.Muffling systems,designed to reduce noise levels,must not be removed,and snowmobile owners must become increasing.ly aware that they have a publi.c responsibility to operate their snowmobiles not only for their own pleasure,but with concern for the inter-est of others as well.As a snowmobile operator,you may not r.ealize that the sound of your snowmobile does annoy some non-snowmobilers.We,as a manufac- turer,ar.e attempting to do our part through the manufacture of quieter machines.But we also ask that you help in the effort to further reduce the impact of noise. Air Pollution As part <)f Polaris'plan for the snowmobile's compata-bility within the environment,Polaris engineers are investigating various ways to further reduce emission levels of two-stroke engines.Re- search is underway ..with r.egard to the possibilities of low or non-leaded gasolines.We are also working with various fuel-to-oil ratios and hope that our efforts will soon lead to a reduction in the amount of oil required to be mixed with gasoline,thus leading to a significant reduction of potential air pollution. 7 In addition to technological research,we have also suggested that -governmental agencies,manufac- turers,distributors,dealers,ecologists,and'all interested parties join together in helping to devel- op comprehensive research data on environmental topics.Polaris has always expressed a willingness to participate in this type of study so that some day we may find the answers to these and other dif- ficult problems. Environmental Protection As part of the continuing environment education campaign,Polaris is encouraging state and provin- cial governments across the snowbelt to adopt strenuous safety training programs to give impetus for protection,'of--ouf,environment.We ask that you join with us in protecting wild life and vegeta- tion.We recommend that you encourage and participate in projects designed for the preservation of all aspects of our environment.Snowmobile clubs and other organizations are working for the protection of our environment.-It is important that we not only participate ourselves,but that we also encourage others. RESPECT YOUR SNOWMOBI LE RESPECT OUR ENVIRONMENT AND YOU WI LLEARN THE RESPECT OF EVERYONE I~ 8 - MODEL IDENTIFICATION GEMINI 6 Right Side View of Polaris Gemini -Model 811025 (244cc single) ,... .... """ 1.Hood 2.Headlight 3.Windshield 4.Throttle 5.Handlebar 6.Brake Lever 7.Gas Tank 8.Seat 9.Taillights 10.Bumper 11.Snow Flap 12.Track 13.Suspension 14.Nosepan 15.Ski 16.Ski Spring 17.Bumper 18.Vehicle Identification Number (Front right side of tunnel) """ - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS GEMINI 9 1.Brake Control 2:Headligh't'Dlmmer Switch -2 position (Hi/Lo) 3.Fuel Filler Cap (Gauge Optional) 4.Ignition Switch 5.Choke Control 6.Recoil Starter Handle 7.Throttle Control. 8.Auxiliary Shut-Off Switch -3 position (Off/On/Off) 9.Speedometer -Odometer (Optional) 10.Tachometer (Optional) 11.Safety Decals SPECIFICATIONS AN,D CONDENSED SERVICE DATA -------------------------------------- "... - - - En~line Gemini 244 EC2SPS Model Number 0811025 Weiight (Dry)355 lbs.,161 kg. Height w/Windshield 39.5",100.3cm Length w/Skis 101.75",2S8.4cm Track Bearing Area 1,058 sq.in.,6,826 sq.cm Ski Center Distance . 24",60.96cm Tralck Width 15",38.1cm Tralck Length on Ground 42",106.68cm - Rubber, Track Type Steel Cleats, Molded Ice Growsers Suspension Stamped Steel Ski Shock Accessory Stable Ski Insert Accessory.-----Fuel Capacity 7.3 U.S.gal.,27.601 Brake Hydraulic Disc Ga:s Gauge Accessory Cooling Fan Air Number of Cylinders 1 Cylinder Displacement . 244cc Bore 72mm . Stroke 62mm Carburetor Type &Model Mikuni VM30SS Main Jet 120H Pilot Jet 60 Ignition Type Mech.Pt. Spark Plug NGK BR8ES Spark Plug Gap .020",.5mm Fuel Regular Leaded or Premium Unleaded Recommended Oil Polaris Recommended Oil/Gas Mixture·40:1 •20:1 break-in mixture for first tank-full of fuel. - (j("cQ O:-;(J - ..- - - - SUMMER STORAGE Long term summer storage of your snowmobile will require you to take some preventative measures to assure against deterioration and to prolong the useful life of many components. CLEANING AND PRESERVATION OF HOOD, CHASSIS,AND TRIM Proper storage starts by cleaning,washing,and waxing the hood,chassis,upholstery,and plastic parts.Clean and touch up with paint any rusted or bare metal surfaces.Ensure that all corrosive salt and acids are removed from surfaces before begin- nJng preservation with waxes and rust inhibitors (grease,oil,or paint). If the machine is equipped with electric start,dis- connect the battery cables and clean the cables and battery post.Remove and store the battery in a cool dry place. The.machine should be stored in a dry garage or shed out of the.sunlight and covered with a fabric snowmobile cover. CONTROLS AND LINKAGE All bushings,spindle shafts,and tie rod ends shou Id be coated with a light coat of oil or grease. Throttle controls and cables should be lubricated with light oil or Polaris clutch lubricant.Force a small amount of lubricant down cable. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Separate electrical connector blocks and clean corrosive build-up from connectors.Lubricate or pack connector blocks with petroleum jelly and re-connect.Replace worn or frayed electrical wke~ and connectors. CLUTCH AND DR IVE SYSTEM Remove drive belt and store in cool dry location. Lubricate surface faces,shaft,and ramps of drive and driven clutches with light oil {oil must be cleaned off before installing belt for service).A generous amount of Polaris clutch lubricant should be sprayed through the three windows on the drive clutch cover and onto the rollers and weight pins.Replace chaincase lubricant with new oil.Spray lubricant on steel drive shafts, etc.,to reduce rusting. 11 TRACK AND SUSPENSION Under normal conditions moderate track tension should be maintained during summer storage. The rear of the machine should be supported off the ground to allow free hanging of track. ENGINE AND CARBURETOR There are two methods of properly preparing an engine for storage.The best method is to keep your machine in .an area where you can run the engine for about five minutes twice a month.This gives the crankshaft bearings and cylinder walls a fresh coat of"oH.'Run ,the engine at about 3,000 RPM and stop it by pulling the choke.This method will prevent rusting of the cylinder walls and pre- vent the formation of varnish from evaporated fuel in the carburetor. However,this approach to summer storage is not always f1:!asible,and if not suitable,the following method of engine storage can be used.The fuel tank,fuel lines,and carburetor should be com- pletely drained of gasoline.The engine should be run until it stops to eliminate any gas remaining in the carburetor.Remove the spark plug or plugs and apply a small amount of oil in each cylinder to prevent rusting.Run the pistons up and down several tir'nes "to--ensure"coverageof the ,cylinder walls. Added crankshaft protection can be obtained by injecting a small amount of Polaris engine oil into each of the carburetor intakes just as the engine is beginning to run out of fuel.Petroleum based oils only should be used in the preparation of the snowmobile engine for summer storage. FALL TUNE-UP To obtain maximum performance and use from your snowmobile,Polaris encourages you to arrange for a fall service tune-up with your Polaris dealer. He has an experienced and trained service techni- cian who is very interested in keeping your machine in peak operating condition. Ccc 2"66 TWO-CYCLE ENGINE THEORY AND OPERATION ..... - -INTAKE A basic component of the two-cycle engine is the piston.When the piston moves upward in the cyl- _inder (1 st stroke),it draws fuel into the crankcase while also compressing fuel in the combustion chamber.The spark plug then ignites the fuel, which expands and forces the piston downward..... - - - POWER,.... Immediately after the piston starts downward, peak combustion pressure from the burning gases is applied against the piston,driving it downward ':""'with maximum force.This vertical motion is trans- .mittedthrough the connecting rod to radial motion by the crankshaft.The force of combustion con- _tinues until the piston is further down in the cyl- inder when the exhaust port becomes exposed. EXHAUST Actually,several functions take place simulta- neously during the exhaust phase.When the piston moves downward far enough to expose the exhaust port,most of the burned exhaust gases are expelled from the cylinder·-complete exhaust takes place after the piston drops low enough to expose the transfer ports which completes one cycle. FUEL TRANSFER The down-stroke provides the power which turns the crankshaft.It also compresses the fuel in the crankcase,clears the transfer ports,and releases a new supply of fuel through the ports and into the combustion chamber.This forces the burned gases out through the exhaust ports. - - - ..... Your Polaris snowmobile is equipped with a depend- able,high-performance two-cycle engine.Treat it right ...give it reasonable care.The first step is to have'd basic comprehension of the mechanics in- volved in its operation.Understanding your two- cycle engine and how it functions will enable you to better maintain your engine,resulting in longer and better performance and life at less cost to you. When you realize that at 6,000 RPM the crankshaft is rotating 100 revolutions a second,you can appreciate the importance of proper lubrication, fuel mixture,and carburetor adjustments. Lubrication •Oil provides the only lubrication your engine gets. Keep in mind the manufacturer's recommenda- tions: 1.The use .of Polaris 40:1 oil is the only oil rec- ommended.This oil has been specially formu lated for use in Polaris snowmobiles.If a regular grade of snowmobile oil is used,follow the oil man- ufaGturers mixing recommendations.Engine war- ranty may be affected with the use of oils other than Polaris 40:1 oil. 2.Always mix them in proper proportions thoroughly -and in a clean container.For the first tank full of fuel,mix two (2)pints -of Polaris 40:1 oil to five gallons of gasoline. 3.Keep surplus fuel tightly capped to prevent evaporation,loss of volatility and power. Too IittH!oil means inadequate lubrication;too much oil means spa-rk plug fouling,rapid carbon- ization,and overheated pistons,all which may lead to engine damage and costly r.epa irs. Carburetion The carburetor feeds the gas-oil mixture to the engine,mixing fuel and air to obtain the correct volatiH!mixture,thus providing fuel for com- bustion,a lubricant,and a coolant for.internal surfaces. Proper carburetor adjustment is crucial,as too "lean"a mixture (too much air,too little fuel) wiH result in overheating of the plugs causing pre- igniti-on of the fuel.This results .in pis~on burning, bearing failure,or complete engine fall~re.A le~n mixture can also be the result of fuel line restric- tions,foreign matter in the carburetor,clogged fuel filters,etc.Too "rich"a mixture (too much fuel,too little air)is also hazardous,as it can foul ..Theory and Operation 13 plugs or retard heat dissipation of the pistons, causing overheating. Carburetor adjustments are a job for your dealer, as these fine adjustments require technical equip- ment,knowledge,and experience. Gasoline Antifreeze To elim inate the possibility of fuel system icing, we advise the use of gas line antifreeze or methyl alcohol at an approximate rate of three to four ounces per five gallons of fuel. Spark Plugs Your spark plugs provide the spark which ignites the fuel-air mixture.Again,manufacturer's rec- ommendations shou Id be observed to obtain top performance. Spark plug fouling is usually one of two types: Carbon deposits appear in the plug gap.Remove these deposits and re-install the plug.Excessive deposits necessitate replacement of the plug. Wet fouling is usually the result of a flooded engine or a very low octane grade of regular gasoline.Always carry spare plugs.Avoid pro- longed idle speeds as plug fouling will result. Idle speed should be approximately 1,000 RPM less than clutch.engagement speed. With a basic understanding of how your machine works,and with close attention to maintenance tips,you will be ready to go.Keep in mind these recommendations and those covered elsewhere in this manuaL ______________.Jc::......:,;;L...~"'_(._;7:..:'c.:..LCI_":...'1 -OPERATION ireak-Ilil Period ~o single action on your part is as important to .'>ng engine life as rigid adherence to proper break- ..l of the engine.follow these procedures closely: All ,carburetors have been pre-set at the Ictory for adequate fuel supply.Higher altitude operation may require different adjustments and ~ttings.Consult your dealer. L..During initial break-in,use two (2)pints -of .f,olaris 40:1 oil to five (5)gallons of gasoline.The ~sulting 20:1 mixture should be used for the first .Jnk fulll of fuel . .-Do not operate engine at prolonged full lrottle for the first three hours of operation; vary speed at 1/3 to 3/4 throttle during this period. "e-Starting A Before starting engine,always refer to all fl"T\'['..'Ions. 1 f"..1$1 Important safety items are: ~ Throttle system. ~Brake system. Steering system. ;these three systems must be checked each time, I )fore starting engine.Incorrect adjustments,dam- '~!:je,o.r excessive wear,if neglected,could result in Rersonal injury and damage to the snowmobile. .~ \"JTE:A manual starter is standard equipment. (laiI models.If for any reason your machine cannot be started electrically,follow the manual ~rting procedUf"e or check the troubleshooting i ,art. C,.OLD ENGINE Turn key to on position. ~Flip choke toggle to "full on"position,as !owri in photo. 3.Grasp starter handle and pull slowly until r-:oil engages,then pull to start. 4.Do not depress throttle until engine starts. 5.After engine starts it can be warmed up with choke toggle in the "half on"position. NOTE;Do not pull the starter rope to its full extended position or allow it to snap back into the housing as damage can result. ~:)=-~:r Half-On FuU-Qn WARM ENGINE 1.Turn key to on position. 2.Grasp starter handle and pull slowly until recoil engages,then pull to start. Emergency Starting When you purchased your snowmobile,you re- ceived an emergency tool kit consisting of a screw- driver,an 18mm plug Wl"e1'1'Ch;a-temm"wrench,.a 14mm wrench,a wrench handle,and a rope.If the primary starter recoil or rope should fail,the engine may be re-started as follows: Using the 10mm wrench end,remove the recoil Higure 1). Figure 1 .. - - NOTE:On some models the muffler must also txt removed. ANext,using rope end and wrench handle,wind rope onto starter cup as shown in figure 2.Rope end must not be tied to the starter cup. ...Figure 2 .A Pull sharply up on the starter rope ensuring that the rope fully unwinds and disengages from the starter cup. Emergency Stopping AUXILIARY ENGINE SHUT-OFF SWITCH ATo S10P engine in an emergency,move swhch fAJ up or down from center position. This will ground out the ignition and br.ing the engine to a quick stop.To re-start engln:.the switch must be returned to the center position. FUEL MIXTURE All Polaris snowmobiles are equipped with two- cycle engines.Therefore,oil.must b~p~emixed with gasoline for proper engine lubricatIon and Operation 15 internal engine cooling.It is recommended that a good grade of leaded regular,leaded premium or unleaded premium gas with an 88 octane minimum rating and 40:1 Polaris oil be used.Polaris oil is specially formulated to meet the lubrication re- quirements of the Polaris Star engine because it burns more completely and results in less carbon build-up. NOTE:The use of reg",lar Polaris petroleum base snowmobile oil is recommended.The 'use of oils other than Polaris 40:1 oil may affect your engine warranty. Mix fuel in a clean container.Pour about one-half of the gasoline into a container.Add all of the oil and mix well.Then add remainder of gasoline and mix thoroughly.Use a funnel with strainer to fill tank. NOTE:Never pour raw oil or gasoline into fuel tank unless mixed.Do not use low grade,multi- viscosity oils.Excess oil will cause carbonization of pistons,spark plugs,ports,and exhaust systems, which leads to loss of power.Too little oil may cause piston seizure,over-heating,and rod and bearing failure. A CAUTION -Never add fuel while snowmobile is running.Gasoline is dangerous,even when mixed with oil.Avoid fires due to smoking or careless maintenance practices. A methanol-base additive may be used to prevent gas line freeze-up.Use a maximum of four 9unces per five gallons of gasoline. A CA UTiON -The inline fuel filter shown should be checked periodically for sediment A visual inspection only is necessary as sediment and ice can be seen clearly. 16 Operation .-When adding fuel to the tank always use a funnel with a fine screen.This will aid in the removal of moisture and sediment from the fuel mixture.The ....funnel will also controt spillage during refueling. TOWING For your safety,the proper function of a tow hitch'must be understood before attempting its F'"use.90 NOT tow toboggans,sleds,saucers,or any type IOf vehicle with a rope.No braking power can be applied to an object being towed with a rope. Only a stiff metal pole connecting the towed "'":"object and tow hitch on the snowmobile should be used.If passengers are to be towed on a tobog- gan or sled,ensure that the stiff connecting pole p-is at least four feet long to prevent any possibility of contact between the vehicle track and a person riding in the towed object. ,.... IMPORTANT:Always remove drive belt from a disabled snowmobile before towing to prevent serious damage to the engine and drive system. ~ FUNCTION OF ENGINE AND DRIVE TRAIN ..-As the throttle leyer is compressed,the engine RPM incr-eases causing the weights and spring combination in the drive clutch to .engage.This ,....moves the sheaves of the drive clutch together, forcing the belt to move upward in the clutch and simu I,taneously forcing the sheaves apart on the driven clutch.The result is a continuous change..... in the ratio of the two clutches which causes acceleration and forward movement of the rna· chine.The engine RPM on most models must be ....between 2800 and 4500 before clutch engagement .wi II occur. '"'"Power is transferred to the wick through the chain- case and drive shaft.Utilizing the proper sprocket gear ratio between the upper and lower chaincase _sprockets and the drive chain,the snowmobile will attain its designed speed. 3 6 1---::::~ 2 1.Engine 2.Torque Converter (Drive Clutch) 3.Driven -Clutch 4.Drive Belt (Neutral Position) 5.Drive Belt (Full Upshift Position) 6.Upper Chajncase Sprocket 7.Chain 8.Lower Chain-case Sprocket 9.Chaincase Oil Level 10.Drive Shaft 11.Track OCOfr?3 MAINTENANCE 17 7.Torque converter offset (9/16"). Authorized Polaris Servicing Dealer _ Servicing Techn ician _ 150 MILE INITIAL MAINTEJ>JANCE INSPECTION Torque converter center distance. Inspect engine rubber mounts. Torque engine mounting plate to chassis bolts. Ski alignment. Torque tierod ends,steering arm bolts, ski saddle bolts and handlebar bolts. Torque suspension mounting bolts. Adjust and align track -inspect cleats. Remove chaincase cover,flush chaincase, inspect and adjust chain,install new cover gasket,refill with Polaris cha incase oil. Brakes - The following checks are suggested to keep the brake system in good operating condition.F-£equency will depend largely on the severity of the service encountered . •A.Keep the fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir to with in 1/8" from the top at all times. B.Check system for fluid leaks. C.Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel. D.Check the friction pads for wear, damage,and looseness_ E.Check security and surface condi- tion of the disc. Headlights,Hi-Lo beam. Taillights. Brake light. At'J~fJiary;sAut.off and ignition switch. _16. _13. 14. _15. 8. 9. _10. _17. _18. _19. _20. _11. _12. 150 MILE INITIAL MAINTENANCE INSPECTION The recommended maintenance schedule on your snowmobile calls for a service and maintenance inspection at 150 miles,500 miles,and 1200 miles. These inspections should be performed by a qual- ified service technician.All necessary replacement parts and labor incurred,with the exception of authorized warranty repairs,becomes the respon- sibility of the original registered owner. Your Polaris snowmobile has been engineered and manufactured to the highest degree of performance and reliability possible by skilled Polaris personnel. In order to maintain this high degree of perform- ance and reliability your Polaris must be given regular service and maintenance inspections. POLARIS OWNER RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROGRAM If during the course of the warranty period parts failures occur as a result of owner neglect'in -per- forming the recommended periodic maintenance, the cost of such repairs shall be borne by the original owner.Please consider the recommended ,maintenance program illustrated on the following pages as a preventive maintenance program designed to maintain the performance and reliability of your snowmobile in the years to follow. We are interested in ensuring your continued enjoyment in snowmobiling with Polaris.To assure you of trouble-free enjoyment,the Polaris Owner Maintenance Program has been developed.If the -recommended regular maintenance and service checks are followed,you will be doing your part in keeping your snowmobile in excellent operating condition at all times. .- i _ _4. _5. _6. 500 MILE EXTENDED MAINTENAN'CE INSPECTION X=Passed inspection 0=Required repair or adjustment (When completing checklist,refer to Master Repair Manual for specific data.) _1.Synchfonize carburetor throttle slide valves. _2.Adjust engine idle RPM. - X=Passed inspection 0=Required repair or adjustment (When completing checklist,refer to Master Repair Manual for specific data.) __1.Torque cylinder heads (cold). _'_2.Engine timing;Observed BTDC Corrected BTDC.-------__3.Synchronize carburetor throttle slide valves. Adjust choke plungers. Adjust engine idle RPM. Adjust carburetor pilot air screw. Date _Mileage _ CCC'2C(L! ~a Maintenance Authorized Polaris Servicing Dealer _ Servicing Technician_---:-_ 1200 MILE EXTENDED MAINTENANCE INSPECTION Mileage _ Torque converter center distance. Inspect engine rubber mounts. Torque engine mounting prate to chassis bolts. Inspect drive belt,replace if -narrower than 1-3/16"across top. Remove ski spindles,clean and lubricate, change bushings if worn or spindle fit is loose. Ski alignment,inspect skc~s,replace if worn to one half original die meter. Torque tierod ends,steering arm bolts, ski saddle bolts and handlet ar bolts. 13. 9. lO. 11. 14. 12. Date ;....-.-- _15. X=Passed inspection 0=Required repair or adjustment (When completing checklist,r~fer to Master Rep~ir Manual for specific data.) _1.Remove cylinder heads,decarbonize combustion cbamber"re,install·with new head gaskets·torque head bolts (cold). 2.Synchronize carburetor throttle slide valves. 3.Adjust engine idle RPM. 4.Adjust carburetor pilot air screw. 5.Change fuel filter. 6.Remove drive clutch from engine and inspect: A.Weights. 8.Rollers. C.Buttons·usi,ng compressed air,blow clutch clean and lubricate weight and roller pins 'with appropriate lubricants. D.Torque spiderane,oh:J>ten.-to,engine.· as specified.. 7.Remove driven clutch,disassemble an,d cl-ean parts with a suitable parts solvent, inspect ramp buttons and bushing for wear,replacing as necessary:. 8.Torque converter offset (9/16"). 500 MILE EXTENDED MAI~TENANCE INSPECTION Adjust carburetor pilot air screw. Change fuel filter. Remove drive clutch from engine and inspect: A.Weights. 8.Rollers. C.Buttons -using compressed air,blow clutch clean and lubricate weight and roller pins with appropriate lubricants. D.Torque spider and clutch to engine as specified. Remove driven clutch,disassemble and clean parts with a suitable parts solvent, inspect ramp buttons and bush ing for wear,replacing as necessary. T orq ue converter offset (9/16"). Torque converter center distance. Inspect engine rubber mounts. Torque engine mounting plate to chassis bolts. Inspect drive belt,replace if narrower than 1·3/16"across top. Ski alignment,inspect skags,replace if worn to one half original diameter. Torque tierod ends,steering arm bolts, ski saddle bolts and handlebar bolts. Torque suspension mounting bolts. .Adjust and align track -inspect cleats. R.emove chaincase cover,flush chaincase, inspect and adjust chain,install new cover gasket,refill with Polaris chaincase oil. Brakes - The following checks are suggested to keep the brake system in good operating condition.Frequency will depend largely on the severity of the service encou ntered. A.Keep the fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir to within 1/8" from the top at all times. B.Check system for fluid leaks. C.Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel. D.Check the friction pads for wear, damage,and looseness. E.Check security and surface condi· tion of the disc. Install new spark plugs. Headlights,Hi-Lo beam. Taillights. Brake light. Auxiliary shut-off and ignition switch. 7. a. 9. __10. 6. .... ~_18. _19, _..:-_20. __21. _22. ,_14. _15:___16. _11. ~-_12. _13. 3.""~4. 5. .... ~- f '. _16. _17. _18. _19. _20. _21. -22. _23. _24. _25. Remove suspension,lubricate front and rear torque arm shafts,inspect rear idler wheels and assembly frame.Inspect slide rail for wear,replace if less than 3/16" remaining. Torque suspension mounting bolts. Adjust and align track -inspect cleats. Remove chaincase cover,flush chaincase, inspect and adjust chain,install new cover' gasket,refill with Polaris cha incase oil. Brakes - The following checks are suggested to keep the brake system in good operating condition.Frequency will depend largely on the severity of the service encou ntered. A.Keep the fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir to within l/S" from the top at all times. B.Check system for fluid leaks. C.Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel. D.Check the.friction pads for wear, damage,and looseness. €.Check security and surface condi- tior'\of the disc. Install new spark plugs. Headlights,Hi-Lo beam. Taillights. Brake light. Auxiliary shut-off and igniti"On switch.. Maintenance 19 WEEKLY MAINTENANCE CHECK A Safety Emblem For best machine performance and safe operation, check these points week Iy or before any long dis- tance trip. 1.Track alignment and adjustments 2.Chaincase oil level 3.Drive chain tension 4.Drive belt condition 5.Brake operation and adjustment 6.Headlights,tail and stop light 7.Emergency shut off switch operation 8.Suspension mounting bolts (tighten) 9.Steering arm and tie rod ends for play.or looseness 10.Ski saddle and spindle bolts (tighten) 11.lubricate drive clutch (bi-weekly) ;. 1200 MI LE EXTENDED MAINTENANCE INSPECTION Authorized Polaris Servicing Dea~er _ Servicing Techn ician _ Date _Mileage _ FURTHER MAINTENANCE For continued maximum machine performance and component life,it is recommended the fore- going checks be rescheduled:u~ing the 500 and 1200 mile checklists at 600 mile mtervals. 'occ~290 o Maintenance MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS You,as a snowmobile owner,have the respon- F"':>i1ity IOf performing preventive maintenance.and ~riodic adjustments.Many of the items listed in this section can be performed by you;however, .~times your snowmobile may need service that quires special tools and technical skills.In these situations Polaris recommends that you contact )!.pur Polaris dealer. ACAUTION -Loose nuts and bolts can reduce your snowmobile reliability and cause needless repairs and down time.Before beginning any snow- mobile trip,a quick inspection of these areas will uncover potential problem areas. ,~ 1.Suspension Mounting Bolts 2..Rear Idler Bolt 3"Chaincase Bolts 4..Engine Mounting Bolts 5"St.eering Tie Rod End 6..Steering Arm 7..Ski to Spindle Bolt 8.Sk i Saddle Bolts 9.Ski Spring Pin and Retaining Cotter Key 10.Chaincase Oil Level and Check Plugs 11.Carburetor Mounting and Air Silencer 12.Ski Skag Nut 13.Steering Post Bolts 14.Pivot Arm Bolts "5.Handlebar Adjustment Bolts ~ - - SPARK PLUG SELECTION Original equipment parts or their equivalent should always be used.However,the heat range of the particular spark plug is of utmost importance, because a spark plug with a heat range which is too high will cause engine damage;one with a heat range which is too low will cause excessive fouling and malfunction.In selecting a spark plug heat range for production,a manufacturer is forced to assume that the engine is going to be operated under extreme heavy-duty conditions.This pro- tects the engine from internal damage in the event that the purchaser actually does operate the engine in this manner.This selection,however,could "cause the customer who normally operates the engine under medium or light duty to have spark plug failure. ACAUTION -A plug with a heat range which' is too high will ALWA YS cause engine damage if the engine is operated in conditions more severe tht!.n that far which the spark plug was intended. Also,a new engine will usually cause temporary spark plug foullng even though the heat range is proper due to the preservative that has been added during assembly of the engine to combat rust and corrosion.A VOID PROLONGED IDLE SPEEDS, AS PLUG FOULING AND CARBONIZA nON WILL RESUL T. NOTE:Incorrect fuel mixture can often cause a spark plug to appear to be too dark or too light in color.Before changing spark plug heat ranges,be sure the correct main jet is installed in the car- buretor(s). To check for plug spark,remove spark plug and reconnect spark plug wire to pillg.Lay the plug on the engine shroud.Do not hold the plug or plug wire in your hand.Pull the starter rope and check for spark.Replace plug if spark is weak.. GENERAL CARBURETOR AND SPARK PLUG IN-FORMATION Original Equipment Carburetor Jetting The number size stamped in the end of the main jet banjo bolt indicates the jet size that was in- stalled at the time of manufacture. The installed main jet is not necessarily correct for a given area of altitude. Maintenance 21 It is the dealer's responsibility to insure that the oorreet main jets are installed in each machine for your area of operation.To determine correct main jetting,operate machine at near full throttle for a few seconds,then,immediately,check spark plug for correct color. 1.Normal: The insulator tip is gray,tan,or light brown. There wi II be few combListion deposits and the electrodes are not burned or eroded. This indicates the proper type and heat range for the engine and the service. 2.Wet fouled: The insulator tip is black.A damp oily film covers the firing end.There also may be a carbon layer over the entire nose.Generally the electrodes are not worn. General causes are excessive oil or use of a non-recommended oil in the fuel,excessive idling,idle too low or too rich.Weak ignition output can also cause wet fouling. 22 Maintenance HEADLIGHT REPLACEMENT HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTS Figure 2 STEERING INSPECTION A The steering assembly of the machine should be checked periodically before operation for loose nuts and bolts (figure 1,A,8 and C). B Figure 1 NOTE:Skis should be parallel at points A and B (figure 2).With the handlebars at the straight- ahead position,measure from the straight edge of the ski.Skis must not toe-in.If they are misaligned, have your dealer correct it. Llmp Center Height 1 --~.:..====:.--12 In. rHeadlights on all models can be adjusted to raise :x low.er the light beam by adjusting the lamp according to the specifications below.Turn adjust· ~ng screw fA)clockwise to lower headlight beam; turn counterclockwise to raise headlight beam. Disconnect receptacle (B).Remove wire retainer (C)from stat in headlight ring.Remove sealed ~eam. ~-=25_F_t._ i I -~ -==~c-~ SKI SKAGS The skag is a replaceable bar attached to the under- side of the ski.The purpose of the skag is to assist· in turning the snowmobile,to prevent the wearing away of the ski caused by contact with roads and other bare terrain,and to maintain good steering control.If the snowmobile is operated mostly in snow,ski skag wear will be minimal.However,skag wear will be excessive if the snowmobile is operated on roads and other terrain where snow cover is light.Therefore,Polaris recommends that the skags be checked once a week to prevent excess wear and to maintain positive steering characteristics. Skags must be replaced when worn to half their original diameter. Maintenance 23- To remove the ski skag,first remove retaining nut ps shown.Then push bolt down through ski. Carburetor and Air Silencer Identification 1.Idle Adjustment Screw 2.Air Idle Screw 3.Throttle Adjustment Jam Nut 4.Throttle Adjustment Nut 5.Slide Valve Cap 6.Air Silencer 7.Air Silencer Inlet Hoses 8.Air Silencer Hold-down Clamp 9.'Main Jet Banjo Bolt The Mikuni carburetor is a float type,fixed jet carburetor.It has four systems:starter system, wh ich is called the choke;pilot system,which consists of a pilot jet for low speed or idle;main system,which consists of a main jet that meters fuel at one-half to full throttle;and the float system,which maintains the fuel level in the.float bowl.All systems work together in maintaining a constant even flow of fuel air mixture at various speeds of operation. ACAUTION -Impropercarburetion adjustments can result in engine component failure or carbure- tor system malfunction. Figure 1 Choke Adjustment To -check yoW choke adjustment,idle the engine and flip the choke toggle over center to full on position.The engine should become rich and stop running.If the engine does not stop,this indicates that your chokes are not properly adjusted.If the engine will not start easily,this may be a sign that the choke may not be functioning properly and needs adjustment.-The proper free play of the choke lever is shown in figure 1. NORMAL POSITION With the dash mounted choke control toggle flipped to full off position,the choke plunger must be seated on fuel passage-way in carburetor.If plunger is not seatedonpassa.ge-way,the engine will flood or run too rich,causing plug fouling and very poor engine performance. Ml KUNI CARBURETOR ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES Pull the rear of the skag from the ski,as shown, then the skag is free to be pulled from the ski. .- - 24 Maintenance If there is no free play,the starter plungers may not be seating in the carburetor causing flooding or plug fouling.This adjustment may be achieved by loosening jam nut Ie)(figure 2)and rotating adjusting nut (D)in the direction required to achieve proper free playas shown in figure 1. -Proper free play is approximately 1/S"- 1/4". Throttle Adjustment 1.Remove air silencer. NOTE:Improper silencer installation or carbure- tor obstruction may cause less air to enter carbure- tors resulting in flooding or plug fouling.If silencer is not attached properly to the carburetor (hoses and connections secured).a lean mixture could occur resulting in engine seizure. .-2.With the engine shut off,squeeze the throttle to wide open position and hold.Place your finger up into the slide chamber t6 check slide valve clearance.The slide valve must clear the carburetor ~venturi.Both slide valves must raise evenly when the throttle is depressed.Synchronizing may be achieved by balancing slide valve movement.This i"'"is done by loosening jam nut (A)(figure 2)and rotating throttle cable adjustment nut (B)in direc- tion desired.Re-tighten jam nut. Figure 2 3.Start engine and adjust idle speed to desired RPM (1,000 RPM below drive clutch engagement). Turn idle adjusting screws (E)alternately raising -RPM until it reaches the desired speed. 4.Adjust idle air mixture screw (F)one turn _counterclockwise from full seated position. NOTE:Do not run engine when adjusting car- buretor.To become thoroughly familiar with the ~ foregoing procedures,ask your dealer.DO NOT TAMPER WITH ADJUSTMENTS UNLESS YOU UNDERSTAND THEM EXACTLY. Main Jetting Jetting charts have been prepared for all altitudes and temperatures.For proper jetting application, always consult your dealer to prevent possible engine damage. CHANGING DRIVE BELT To remove drive belt from ramp style clutch,grasp one side of clutch in each hand and rotate in opposite directions (figure 1).Force unit open, allowing sufficient slack for belt to be slipped over driven clutch (figures 2 and 3).The air silencer hold-down bolts must -be ,r-emoved and the silencer moved over slightly (A)(figure 4). To replace belt,reverse procedures.Ask your dealer for more specific information. NOTE:Replacement of drive belt is recommend- ed if width is less than 1 3/16"at outside surface. Figure 1 Figure 2 "'" Figure 3 CLUTCH ALIGNMENT AND OFFSET The primary drive belt is a very important part of the drive train.Proper adjustment of the two clutches {torque converter assembly)is necessary to obtain proper belt life.The information on this page is most important in maintaining proper tel- erances.Should you desire more information,con- sult your dealer.• Maintenance 25 Clutch Alignment Gemini -9/16" Recommended center distance: Clutch Center Distance -Gemini model 11.1" The recommended offset between the drive and driven clutches with the belt removed is 9/16" on the Gemini. CLUTCH LUBRICATION - The lubricationofth.edrive clu.tchshift weights and rollers should be performed bi-weekly by the snowmobile operator.Lubrication of the drive clutch can be performed by spraying a small amount of Polaris clutch lubricant through the three (3)access holes in the movable face. NOTE:Drive clutch removal for lubrication is not required.Do not overspray on the drive belt or drive clutch sheave surfaces. 26 Maintenance ACAUTION -All clutch maintenance and re- pairs must be performed by an Authorized Polaris ....Servicing Dealer. ACAUTION -If you become aware of higher .-than normal engagement,an unusual vibration,or an unusual shift pattern,immediately contact your dealer.Do not operate the machine until correc- tions have been made. INSPECTING BRAKES ..,.At reasonably frequent intervals,the brakes should be inspected for brake lever reserve.This is done by measuring the clearance between the lever and _handlebar grip.Inspection should be made with the lever firmly depressed.Lever reserve should not be less than 1/2"(A)(figure 1). - Figure 1 Replace brake pads when allen adjusting screw (A) ifigure 2)makes contact with locknut'(B).Brake- pads should be replaced in -pairs.See your dea~er for replacements. Figure 2 TROUBLESHOOTING BRAKE PROBLEMS Excessive Lever Travel 1.Excessive Brake Pad Clearance -Loosen allen screw adjuster locknut.Turn adjuster screw clock- wise until pads are tight against disc,then back off screw 1/2 turn counterclockwise and re-tighten locknut (figure 2).There should be a minimum of .015"clearance between the brake pads and the brake disc. 2.Fluid Reservoir -If mastercylinder reservoir is empty or low,remove cover (B)(figure 1),add fluid as required to bring level 1/8"below lip of reservoir opening. NOTE:See your dealer for recommended brake fluid. Air in Hydraulic System Air in hydraulic system will cause a sprmgy or spongy action of brake lever.A bleeding operation is necessary to remove air from system. 1.Fi II master cylinder reservoir (C)(figure 1) and replace cover and gasket. 2.Slip a rubber tube over ball of bleeder valve iA)-(figure 3)and direct flow of fluid into a con- \.~ainer.(DO NOT RE-USE FLUID.)- .'-~.~ 3.Squeeze brake lever-a full stroke,unscrew bleeder valve (B)(figurEr-'S)'3/4"Of'a'1!urn to-release air.Close bleeder valve,then release brake lever. Repeat this procedure until fluid flows from bleeder valve in a solid stream that is free of air bubbles. -Refill reservoir after bleeding operation. Figure 3 Maintenance 27 - .-. 4.Frequently check master cylinder reservoir to make sure that it contains fluid. ACAUTION -Maintain thebrakehandfeposition as level as possible.The hydraulic fluid reservoir must be in this position to minimize the possibility of air entering the system through the reservoir vent. CHAINCASE Chaincase Oil Level The Gemini 244 single has a roller type chain tvhich is continuously immersed in oil.Proper oil level is determined by removing check plug (A)with machine placed on a level surface.If oil does not appear when this plug is removed, it will be necessary to add oil at top plug (Bl. Maintain oil level with Polaris chaincase oil. NOTE:It is the owner's responsibility to main- tain proper lubrication of the chaincase. Gemini TRACK ALIGNMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Track Tension .,,-- C BA Track Alignment Lift the rear of the machine and support it off the ground.Proper free play of track can be deter- mined by noting the distance between the outer su rface of track be It and slide ra il (C)(figu re 1). Dimensions for the Gemini is 1/2". If the track needs adjustment,loosen locknuts (A)and tighten or loosen the track adjusting screws (8)as necessary to provide equal adjust- ment on both sides of the track. A periodic check shou1d be made to determine that the track is centered and running evenly on the slide rails.Misalignment will cause excessive wear to the track and the slide rail.Check by supporting the rear of the machine with the track off the ground.Start the engine and accelerate slOWly to turn the track.If the track runs to the left,loosen left locknut (A)(figure 1)and tighten left adjusting screw (B).If to the right,adjust .-..~~;;;;;.;;=;;;;;;;=::::;;;=~~~~"!s.-.A Figure 1 Gemini Drive Chain Tension To obtain correct chain tension,tip machine on its side and remove the chaincase cover.With a slight reverse tension on the chain by turning driven clutch as indicated (A)there should be approx- imately 3/8"deflection on the chain at point (8). Chain adjustment is achieved by loosening the ad- .justing bolt locknut and turning adjusting bolt (C) until correct chain deflection is obtained.Lock the adjusting bolt locknut while holding a wrench on the adj usting bolt at the same time to prevent it from turning.Install the chaincase cover and add Polaris chaincase oiL- 28 Maintenance right-hand bolts accordingly.After adjustments are completed,be sure to tighten locknuts. NOTE:It is necessary to loosen the rear idler shaftTh}(figure 1)to make this adjustment. ""'" .-]I /--~{,(\0 /'"- A~"'-~\{~-l {;.... ---...- II·,(,()1\..°.)0 ~)().()0 0 I) "'./.7 .-'7 /r :.,, I-~ """"0 --".-" ~~),4 If'~'-~.:~1 I' --Jl ground.This procedure will prevent possible dam- age to the drive belt and clutch.Be certain the track has stopped by applying the brake prior to lowering the rear of the snowmobile. SUSPENSION MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTM ENTS As the hi-fax wears,the track tension must be maintained.When the hi-fax has worn down to 3/16"in thickness,it is recommended that it be replaced. Ride Adjustment Compensating adjustments for heavy or light pas- senger loads can be made by turning the cap screw (AI.-for a firmer ride and less weight transfer during acceleration,turn the cap screw counter- clockwise.For a softer ride resulting in more ski lift and weight transfer,adjust the screw clockwise. ~ ACAUTION -When performing above checks or adjustments,stay clear of all moving parts. Track Maintenance With the rear of your Polaris snowmobile supported --off the ground,rotate the track by hand to check for broken,bent,or missing cleats.Replace as soon as possible to avoid damage to track or suspension -system.Make ita periodic practice to check for loose bolts and nuts on the suspension system. NEVER make this maintenance check with the engine running. NOTE:The slide rail is designed to operate in conditions with adequate snow cover to provide sufficient lubrication.Excessive wear indicates in- sufficient lubrication.In the event you wish to install additional non-standard cleats or ice growsers, -first contact your dealer for advice. NOTE:During overnight storage,support the rear of your snowmobile off the ground.This will prevent the track from freezing to the ground and causing any belt damage during next day start up. 1-it..CA UTION -'Before operating your snow- mobile,it is recommended that the drive belt and track be "warmed"up.This may be accomplished -by carefully accelerating the snowmobile while the rear of the sled is securely positioned off the - A - TROUBLESH001~ING PROCEDURES 29 Unless you ha~e expenence and tramlng in two-cycle engine repair,it is advisable for your benefit that you see your dealer if technical problems arise. CAUTION: PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION ENGINE DOES NOT 1.Seized Engine In case of a seized engine,contact your dealer. TURN Seizure is a direct result of poor lubrication or inadequate fuel supply. 2.Hydrostatic Lock Drain plug(s)located on lower crankcase for emer- (Fuel has entered the gency draining,however dealer should be contacted.crankcase while ve·to correct cause of hydrostatic lock. hicle was standing or being transported) ENGINE TURNS 1.Faulty Ignition Remove spark plug(s)and replace with new plug(sl. OVER BUT If engine still fails to start,check for spark;and if FAILS no spark,CONTACT YOUR DEALER. TO START 2.No Fuel To a.Check tank level and fill up with correct fuel- Engine oil mixture. b.Ice in fuel line,filter,or fuel pump -On the standard Polaris carburetor,the choke will not.function with the throttle depressed.See Item No . 2 under "Probable Cause"of "Engine Continually .Sa ck fi res." 3.Flooded Engine Hold throttle open,crank engine several times (may (Normal situation be necessary to change plugs,however,the plugs caused by too much may operate satisfactorily when dried out). choking) 4.Poor Engine Running with too lean a mixture (too small main Compression jets will cause seizure resulting in loss of power). CONTACT YODR DEACER. ENGINE DOES NOT 1.Wire Connections CONTACT YOUR DEALER. START ENGINE LACKS 1.Fouled or Defee-Change and test operation. POWER tive Spark Plug 2.Carburetor and There is no adj ustment that will change power out- Fuel Pump put -CONTACT YOU R DEA LE R. 3.Fuel Filter (Loss Check fuel filter flow -Disconnect hose and drain of high RPM power)about 1/2 cup.Fuel flow should be steady and encompass the entire diameter of fuel line.If not, replace filter. ENGINE 1.faulty Plug{s)-Change plug(s). CONTINUALL Y BACKFIRES 2.Carburetor Dirt or ice in fuel system.(De-icer should be added to fuel mixture at all times for assurance against fuel line icing.) .. - .- - - .-ROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES PROBLEM PROBAB LE CAUSE SOLUTION HtNE FAI LS TO 1.Clutch Jammed Belt twisted,spring broken,weights stuck,lu- aVE bricate,CONTACT YOUR DEALER. 2.Track Jammed Foreign object caught,broken or bent cleat,hi-fax damaged,CONTACT YOUR DEALER. 3.Chaincase Chain is loose or broken,chain tightener is loose. Sprocket or Chain CONTACT YOUR DEALER. Jammed or Broken VE BELT TURNS 1.Wrong Belt for Replace. VER Application . 2.Clutch Align-Adjust alignment offset. ment Out of Spec 3.Engine Mount Inspect/adjust or replace.CONTACT YOUR Broken or Loose DEALER. ATIC ENGINE l.Drive Clutch a.Disassembly of drive clutch required to in- RATING RPM Binding spect shift weights for wear and free operation. ING ACCEL-CONTACT YOUR DEALER. TION OR LOAD lATIONS b.Clean and polish stationary shaft hub. 2.Driven Clutch a.Replace ramp buttons.CONTACT YOUR -Malfunction DEALER. . b.Inspect movable sheave for excessive bushing c1earance/rep lace.CONTACT YOUR -DEALER. SH DRiVe 1.Drive Belt Replace. TCH Worn or Too Narrow A'GEMENT 2.Excessive Belt/Perform belt/sheave clearance adjustment with Sheave Clearance shim washers beneath spider.CONTACT YOUR DEALER. E IN DRIVE 1.Broken Drive CONTACT YOUR DEALER. STEM Clutch Components 2.Bearing Failure/CONTACT YOUR DEALER. Chaincase,Jackshaft, or Front Drive Shaft 3.Drive Chain Inspect/adjust or replace. Loose or Worn, Sprocket Teeth Broken 4.Drive Belt Surface Inspect/replace. Flat Spots ~ o LMAC M L LERR 'DPE OURLERA VAR L L L .HAR l CLU '.ENG J 1 1NOIS SY 1 1 - .... ". SERVICE AND WARRANTY OBTAINING SERVICE AND WARRANTY ASSISTANCE Read carefully and understand the service data and the Polaris Warranty contained in this manual. Contact your Polaris dealer in matters pertaining to replacement parts,service,or warranty.He is constantly kept up to date on changes,modifica- tions,and tips on snowmobile maintenance which may supersede information contained in this man- ual.He is familiar with our policies and procedures and will be happy to assist you. When writing about parts,service,or warranty, always include the fol/owing information: 1.Serial Number 2.Model Number 3.Dealer Name 4.Date of Purchase 5.Details of trouble experienced 6.Length of time and conditions of opera- tion 7.IndiCate previous correspondence Use this space to record the model and serial numbers of your machine and engine. MACHI NE _ Model No.-_ Serial No.~--------- ENGINE _-,-_ Model No._ Serial No._ The companies listed on the following pages, regional Polaris distributors who should be cc tacted for local assistance in resolving questic and problems involving your dealer or service a warranty information on your Polaris snowmobi Before contacting Polaris directly,please atterr to resolve your problems by contacting the regio! distributor.(Check with your dealer first to det mine the responsible distributor because yc distributor's area may encompass more than 0 state or a partial state.) REGISTRATION At the time of sale,the Warranty Registratil Form (sample below)must be completed by yo dealer and submitted to Polaris within ten da~ Upon receipt of this registration Polaris w prepare and mail directly to you an Owner RE istration Card which must be presented to a deal whenever warranty service is requested.If yl have not signed the original registration al received the "customer copy,"or jf you have n received your Owner Registration Card,plea contact your dealer immediat~ly. I nitial dealer preparation and set-up of your sno' mobile is very important in ensuring trouble-fr operation.Purchasing a machine in the crate without proper dealer set-up will void your Wi ranty coverage. F7olarite»Jr~~· .......c-. 10052Q S121~3 QOq~23 '_18_10 ZlS.4 RI JOMM DO! 101 IZl IOSE.U RM SlTSI ITIJITD DIIID MODEll f~E !f;1.....L NO. WARRANTY REGISTRAnON FORM Rhku:Ls":):,i i,e)~I POlaris E·Z~GOo.\iI'ISIOnot Tex1tOn Inc lillIIIJJ MAOiINE SERIAl NUM.lEI - - THIS W.AIIlANTr IfGfSTW.&T1OfrorI CARD ""usr I.E CQMP\ET!O IT THE SEWNG DU,LU ANO $UIMIT1'ED TO .P'OI.Am 'Wn'li....Ttl'll:DAY5. .1t()M.DATf Of SAlE fa-WAnA"'"fHTITllMfH'f.YOI.JW COf'Y Of fHlS ItfGCSTI.A.Tl()H ~cs ,l'OUI:I"IIOOf'OF W .......,NI"Y fHrTTLfMENT UN11l YOU I'fCEI\I'£,0Vtr "LASOC OlIiNfrs c.A1tD. US£AOOIESSOGIAI"I _INTER IIUIL M....HU'...CTURU·S cOP"TO ~LAIf~S WARRANTY OEPT. '22"N()fIlTH COUNT'r 10"'0 '8 ""1",.N£A.POlIS.MN.S5477 , r---r"Q -:2 ,<"",,,c<. 2 Service and Warranty LIMITATION OF WARRANTY '..... Polaris E-Z-Go Division of Textron Inc.gives a LIMITED ONE YEAR WARRANTY on all components ~the Polaris Gemini model that fail because of a defect in material or workmanship.This warranty .ill begin on the date of purchase.A warranty registration must be completed by your dealer and sub- mitted to Polaris by him within ten days of purchase.Be sure that you receive your copy of the Warranty ,aegistration Form from your dealer as this is your entitlement to warranty repairs until you receive your Wner'!i Registration Card.UNLESS YOUR SNOWMOBILE IS REGISTERED WITH POLARIS NO .:ARRANTY COVERAGE WILL BE ALLOWED. __WHAT YOUR WARRANTY COVERS ·)Iaris warrants,to the first purchaser,that each snowmobile shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for the period specified above.This warranty coverage includes all parts and components -ith the exception of those components and conditions listed below: 1.Light Bulbs 2.Spark Plugs 3.Ignition Breaker Points and Condensers (if used) 4.Brake Pads 5.Suspension Slides and Ski Wear Bars 6.Drive Belts 7.Component Failure Due to Normal Wear or Abuse L .ny of the following conditions will void your warranty and no repairs or replacements will be provided by Polaris under the warranty policy: Failure to provide proper and periodic maintenance as stated in your Owners Manual. Performance of repairs by someone other than a factory authorized repair service. 3.Use of non-standard parts or components,and modifications in your snowmobile. "'"Use of your snowmobile during any period in which there is not adequate snow cover. Preparing for or using your snowmobile for racing in a competitive event,or use for commercial purposes. HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE .fter you have purchased your snowmobile and your dealer has sent Polaris your warranty registration, you will receive an Owners Registration Card.You must present this card when requesting warranty service. .-your snowmobile requtres warranty service,you must take it to an Authorized Polaris Servicing Deale"t. "HE COST OF TRANSPORTATION TO AND FROM THE DEALER IS YOUR RESPONSIBI L1TY.) Polaris suggests that you use your original selling dealer;however,you may use any Authorized Polaris ~rvicing Dealer to perform warranty service. Jlaris will repcrir or replace,at its option,any material or components which are defective in materials or workmanship. rtf you have questions or problems you cannot resolve with your dealer,please contact the Polaris distrib- ~or for your area listed in the back of this manual.If you have further questions still unresolved,you may ...0ntact Polaris directly.• LIMITATION OF WARRANTY his warranty will provide for repair or replacement,at Polaris'option,of those items listed which are proven defective in material or workmanship for the period specified. .JOI()LARIS SNOWMOBILES ARE INTENDED FOR RECREATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY AND ARE OT INTENDED FOR ANY OTHER USE.THEREFORE,POLARIS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR cONSEQUENTIAL DAMA.CJES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF ANY WRITTEN OR IMPLIED WARRANTY fOR ITS PRODUCTS.THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE HE SAME AS FOR EXPRESSED WARRANTIES.THE REMEDIES STATED ABOVE ARE THE ONLY "EMEDIES AVAILABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY.NO PERSON CAN CHANGE OR EXPAND THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY. -his warranty gives you specific legal rights,and you may also have other rights which vary from state to ate.Some states do not allow a limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts,so the above limitation may not apply to you.If any of the above terms are void because of state law,all other warranty terms -ill remain in effect. _4 Service and Warranty ...: ,... , I ~ .... 1.Western Power Sports,Inc. 2.Wilson Supply,Inc. 3.Midland Implement Company 4.Polaris E-Z-Go Denver 5.Polaris North Central 6.Harold H.Luiken &Sons,Inc. 7.larsen-Olson Company .?n.L.Ryerson Company,Inc. 9.Polaris £-Z-Go Chicagoland 10.Polaris E-Z-Go Michigan 11..Albert H.Buehrle Company 12.Stull Equipment Company 13.Eaton Equipment Company 14.Polaris E-Z·Go Northeast 15.Nelson &Smal',Inc. 16.Polar Equipment Company,Inc. 17.Polaris Canada West 18.Polaris Canada Manitoba 19.Polaris Canada East 20.Domac Enterprises,Ltd. 6c r -1(' ".., ACCESSORIES Saddle Bag Specially designed durable can- vas bag with heavy-duty side zippers. Covers Snug-fitting covers custom tai- lored for each specific model. Made of durable canvas in Polaris mklnight blue. Gas Gauge . Indicates gas level at a glance. Spark Plug Case Protects reserve spark plugs from damage while being stored in machine storage com· partment. Trailer Hitches Custom designed for each specific model.to help you pu /I extra loads. Speedometer Kit Gives a clear,accurate reading of machine speed and miles traveled. 35 Duffel Bag Specially designed durable can- vas duffel bag. Tachometer Kit Gives a precise reading of en- gine RPM's,indicating engine performance. Drive Belt Holder The perfect way to store that extra drive belt that you bring along. 36 Accessories L f?_.'U""'C."Y-""""""\ -I I ......;.1Pl/ ~ .lcIwi ~ -, -- ""'" >~ """ -' """" -" ~. '~ "'"' '''- --.;;-.~-1,J1;;._. ~ ...... \,..e:. -"',."-.....,/ ~. -..~ First Aid Kit Emergency kit consisting of telfa pads,alcohol,first aid cream,matches,and knife with bonle opener. Tether Switch Safety switch originally de- signed for racers,now available for anyone.Power is shut off instantly when snap-off cap is released.• for original Available in ounce spray Gas Can Five gallon capacity.Made of durable 26-gauge galvanized steel. Funnel Heavy-duty polyethylene fun- nel,with built-in brass filter screen. Touch-up Paint Perfect match Po laris colors. quarts and 12 cans. Snowmobile Oil Special ashless blend for air- cooled snowmobile engine.Pre- diluted to readily mix with gasoline at low temperatures. Prolongs engine and spark plug life,minimizes piston varnish, sticky rings and blow-by. ~~--d ~~r ~~ Quartz Halogen Headlight High-intensity light for max- imum nighttime visibility.(De- signed for single-headlight mod- els.) -:"'--;.......:"¥~ Shock Absorbers Provide a smoother,more com· fortable ride.Give driver more, control.Give springs and skis longer life. Temperatur.e Gauge Provides temperature reading on an illuminated dial.Dual indicators for twin cylinder models. :-..;) Accessories Carbide Trail Skags. Specially designed for the saf and control demands of trail ridi Carbide Racing Skags. Sharp carbide inserts which re, dig into snow and ice for safe,c trolled maneuvering on the r track. Snow Biter 1. Wide stance studs that give brl pressure and better clearing in • snow.I rnfJrove traction almost; where -on ice,hardpack,soft sn or slush. Snow Biter 2. Best stud for pure acceleration;c enhances cornering abifities. Snow Biter 3. The best stud to run in non-pack or powder snow conditions. Snow Biter 4. Carb~de tipped studs that prov exceptional penetration on ice c hardpack.Longer wear than regl steel snow biters. Also offered,but not part of Tr tion/Action Headquarters: Ski Spreader. Designed to give a snowmobile m imum stahility and steer-ability. ~ OIL Chaincase Oil Contains anti-rust and anti- oxidation inhibitors,plus spe- cial penetrating ingredients which reduce chain wear. Lock and Cable Set A 6 foot security cable and lock to give your snowmobile that added protection . Polaris Clutch Lubricant Lubricates,helps eliminate rust and sticky clutch weights and rollers. Polaris Suspension Lubricant Designed to lubricate and reduce wear on suspension" shafts. Polaris Traction/Action Headquarters The addition of all traction pro- ducts.~jll change the handling char- acteristics of a snowmobile. All the traction equipment you need to gi.ve a snowmob.ile deep-digging traction and superior steering re- sponse.Items available: ~""'I:ll;a*r!<tr~?=-.._ • ~'" &iik ' .~.l Silicone Brake Fluid Specially formulated to per- form dependably in both warm and cold conditions. High Windshield Effectively shields driver from wind while traveling at higher speeds.Resists breaking or crack ing,even at low tem- peratures. Electric Start Kit For the discriminating Galaxy owner,a turn of the key and you are ready to ride. r'?r:7YJfia.j •,....•--,'.. ..'£leCfric ,Start Kit - .- ..... - TOOL KIT AND PUBLICATIONS p~~----------------------------------------- Included with your machine is a supply of tools -for your convenience.These tools should be carried with your machine at all times.A descrip- tion of the tools is as follows: AVAILABLE SERVICE MATERIAL For customers who desire more detailed service information and procedures,the following printed material is available. 1.Tubular Socket -10MM and 12MM 2.Tubular Socket -14MM and 21MM 1. 3.Phillips Screw Driver 4.Rope 5.Tubular Socket Handle Master Repair Manual,part number 9910493 This manual contains service and repair in- formation for models from 1972-1979.The hard cover five-ring binder features sectional dividers with tabs for quick reference. Price:$24.50 Uses of Tubular Socket 10MM -Used to remove engine recoil starter. Should recoil fail,it can be removed to allow access to emergency rope starter cup. 12MM -Used on engine head bolts. 14MM·-Used on crankcase drain plugs. 2'1 MM -Spar~Plug Wrench 2.1980 Master Repair Manual Update Packet, part number 9910620 Includes all service information and spec- ifications pertinent to 1980 models.I ndivid- ual pages are five-hole punched and numbered by sections for placement into the Master Repair manual binder. Price:$5.00 In the event of loss,a replacement kit,PN 2870257 may be purchased through your local Authorized :'Polaris Dealer. REMEMBER -ALWAYS KEEP TOOLS WITH MACHINE. - - 3.1981.Master Repair Manual Update Packet, part number 9910692 I neludes all service information and spec- ifications pertinent to 1981 models.Individ- ual pages are five-hole punched and numbered by sections for placement into the Master Repair manual binder. Price:$9.00 This material can be ordered by sending a check or money order to: POLAR IS E-Z-GO Division of Textron Inc. 1225 North County Road 18 P.O.Box 1284 Minneapolis,MN 55440 Attn.:Parts Department -1981 pu/ads i i ~:,i .t-rn Polaris E-Z-Go DivISion of TeXlron Inc. GEMINI ASSEMBLY INSTR~CTIONS AND PRE-DELIVERY CHECKLIST The contents of the hardware package and part numbers are as follows: Model 0811025 and 0811225 Gemini 244 Single - 1.Ski pivot bushing (2) 2.No.8-32x3/4 screw (5) 3.No.8 speed nut (5) 4.3/8-24x2 3/4 bolt (1) 5.3/8-24 hex locknut (1) 6.Starter rope (1) 7.Ignition key (1) Hardware Package (Complete) PN 5010059 PN 7511839 PN 7670026 PN 7515417 PN 7542403 PN 2870388 PN 4110012 PN 2254044 .- Assembly Instructions/Pre-Del ivery Checklist A Observe all safety precautions when assembling snowmobiles.Avoid contact with moving parts. Check box as each item on the checklist is completed. Lubricate the ski pivot bushings with Polaris suspension lubricant an~install into spindles.Install the skis with ski saddle bolts.Torgue ski bolts to 36 ft./lbs. With the handlebars in a straight ahead position,check ski alignment.The skis should be parallel with no more than 3/8"(O.95cm)toe-out.Skis must not toe-in.Be certain that the steering system works freely to full left and right turns and no binding is present.Lubricate as required. r~ D 3. .- D 4. - Install the windshield and windshield band to the hood.Secure with the windshield screws and speed nuts. With the machine on its side,remove the chaincase cover and adjust chain tension to approximately 3/8"free play.Reinstall the cover and add Polaris chaincase oil(PN 2870464)through the upper filler plug until oil appears at lower check plug. D D 5.Remove the drive belt and check for 9/16"clutch alignment. 6.Check for correct center distance.Refer to the Master Repair Manual, Section V II. Remove air silencer;check the throttle slide and choke for correct adjustment. Check for correct jet (120H}.Refer to the Master Repair Manual,Section VI. Check brake adjustment.Insure the adjustment screw is properly adjusted for adequate clearance and that the brakes are not binding.Check master cylinder fluid level,it should be 1/8"below the top surface of the master cylinder.. ....._4 o D 9.Pour (j 20:1 mix of re~lLJlar leaded or premium unleaded ~Jas arlu Polaris oil in the tank.Stilft the engine,setting the idle at 1500-2000 RPM..- No-rf:-TI1e usc of other than Polaris oil will void engine warranty. 10.Check to insure auxiliary shut-off switch,ignition and headlight dimmer swi tch operate smooth I y and correctl y. 11..Check to insure all hand controls (brake lever and throttle lever)operate smoothly and correctly. 0 12 . D 13. 0.14 . 0-15 . D 16. With the rear of the machine safely suspended,align the track.Check track tension.Correct tension is 1/2".Refer to Master Repair Manual,Section IX. Adjust suspension and ride to individual rider preference. With machine completely assembled,hood securely latched and with machine sitting on a level surface,adjust the headlight.With a rider on machine and headlight on high beam,the center of the brightest spot should have a 2"drop from center of the headlight at 25 ft.Refer to the Master Repair Manual, Section III. Check ignition timing.Proper static timing is .014"BTDC.Refer to the Master Repair Manual,Section IV. Check all nuts and bolts throughout entire machine for proper torque. Test ride machine (if possible)to insure proper operation of steering assembly, throttle and brake controls and clutch engagement and operation. This snowmobile has been assembled and inspected by myself or a qualified employee on my behalf. The above mentioned dealer has instructed me on the operation,maintenance safety features and' warranty policy,all of which I understand.He has also thoroughly explained the owner's manual to me. - Dealer Signature Customer Signature Machine Serial Number Date Date Engine Serial Number _ .r- NOTE:Dealer is to retain this form and file it with his copy of the machine Registration . -PN 9910687 ..-~..~:.:.